Home
Medialon Control System User Manual
Contents
1. 445 MRC Global Cach 445 MRC Adlink NuDAM 446 MRC Adlink PCI 7432 eee rs 446 MRC Adrienne 447 MRC Advantech ADAM eer rh 447 MRC ArtNet 0 0 00 ee o 448 MRC Comtrol Device Master 0000 eee ee ee ee es 448 MRC ICP DAS PISO P32x32 ee as 448 MRC Opto22 SNAP Ethernetl0 o 449 MRC RedRat lee ho oho hrs 450 MRC Sea Level Sea LINK enn 450 MRC SOUNGLIGIU u 4 in E de oos e Ens de E oe ace ede de c 451 Medialon MxXMs 5 xn nt tnnc mmm nss 455 Service MXMS aoaaa homo o ooh o ooo a nn 455 Data Management ee 455 TICLES ee aon bag eG ee T 77170 T a A 456 e An 457 Device MxXMS eee RR o o ooo oo ho ooo a son an 459 Driver Palo sa remem oia a a ee ee ee ee 459 TABLE OF CONTENT 29 MIDE arenosos AAA AAA 459 Eo AI IES 460 TE OCs orense be ooo oe oe Ree ee ee ee 460 Relay O s LITT 460 Field BUS Sacra 461 Mifare AI 461 Audio Processor su era ee SA Oe Sw aS aw ew Ro 462 AUdIO SerVeli acm ue ew de on eee dco e Ee ee Ee 463 CaCa cs kwecdhebdeked bea road da 464 Mz PPP 464 RIGGING 26205 doe ee aww 3 9 9 408 3 RY RON EEG EES Ee E RAUS 465 Video PrOCeSSOL i046 e Roe See XC GE wo Rede we cO 465 Video Projector leere tnn nn 466 Video SEVO MR NR T
2. 282 Action on Double click LOD MANAGER V6 SPECI FI C FEATURES Overview of Medialon Manager 291 Medialon Manager V6 lee err n 291 Medialon Manager Modes eee eee eee eee eee eee 291 Stop MOG av is ete pact oo ake bus em ee ee dO 6 3 9 EOS 291 DeDUG MOE vau uoe rreren ROBO SX QUA A wD Ae oe we 3 Y 90S Ee 292 24 TABLE OF CONTENT Table of Content User Mode cosacos aso ramiro era OR dese drap d d 292 niBgus TP d44u25 4G a0 ee ee Re Eee Ae eee he ee 292 Medialon Manager V6 License Options 000002 eee 292 Medialon Manager V6 PFO oooooo ooo 292 Medialon Manager V6 Lite 0 0 o 292 Medialon Manager V6 Kiosk ee ee ee 293 Medialon Manager V6 Panel lens 294 RESOUICES 52 53 4 XA CONT AA ee ee aw 499 Resource Management MRC lll s 295 Add New Resource eee eer rrr 2 296 Saving Resource Configurations a 304 MRC GID ay ee ce L T T7 c 305 Medialon Watchdog 307 Watchdog Overview lere nns 307 Medialon Watchdog Window clle 307 PouUre ACHO 6 d scs 2 xor d a X Gon RUE E 33x S we POR in RUE 308 FLCEIVIEV us www v eehee tetas bese oe ee eres 945 29 308 ADDUCACIONS aereos ORE EUR ROS S 308 9 dat eae G 308 LOG EVE uw eir surge tae Cee rg 99 POR B Ek nnd WP OP ow WR d de OE
3. a 4 c 00 00 08 4 z You can create and use up to 99 tracks in a Timeline Right clicking the mouse on the left part of the track displays a contextual menu that allows you to customize the track s aspects Track Setup Color Devices All devices E E Showmaster E Hedaon Ohs512_1 Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 2 Track setup AS Delete track Track height Track color b Cancel You can change the color the height or the Setup of the track You can create new tracks or delete existing tracks SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 89 You may also decide to allow only one device s commands on the track AL nh pela od 2 Internal Timecode Tracki Dor ET abs Y n Jugaet 1 Dore Labs w1 Mucgget 1 Goto Pace m E Manager i send Cue 00 00 15 TUM Tm MEER DM i512 2 3 Medislon DMX512 2 Track Note Track notes are used to mark sections of the timeline graphically They are static and do not send information to the system but can be very useful during programming to rapidly identify sections of your show To add a note to your timeline right click on the section between the Time ruler and the first track and choose the Insert note option Once the note has been added simply double click on it to edit the note s text field You may choose to have colors of the note be automatically managed by the system TESCO bla 7 ee Click b 22 Insert note le Color w Auto Color Delete Once the
4. mm Medialon Manager or Showmaster Editor V2 may need to restart after preferences change in order for the new settings to take effect General These settings are about the general Medialon Control System behavior and are not specific to the current project Preferences Maximum instance s of Manager UL nlimited n Project E Task j Show last instance Fun Time gt Network Theme selector Usercreen s Watchdog A Log Traces mM Maximum Instance s of Manager Enables you to determine the number of times the Medialon Manager V6 application can be opened started simultaneously on the same machine Setting this option for 1 Maximum instance of Manager allows only one Medialon Manager application to be open at any one time this will be displayed on the foreground each time that an attempt to open another instance is made Show Last Instance Enables you to call up the last Medialon Manager application opened in the event that an attempt to open another Medialon Manager application has been made ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 223 Theme Selector Medialon Control System V6 offers several workspace themes to change the look of the Medialon Control System V6 environment RT Ce ster Editor LOD fue Est Object Windows Help A JS LEZLILASEX y 4 es ster Editor LOD Fie Est Showmastee Object Windows Help zd a A ON OB DB v xm BE auf Gite En OS Popa GJ Devices 1 S
5. Browser ES Lister k Project Mame Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 Locate 00 00 00 00 PF Devices 3 lr Tasks 2 E i see Rn p Manager Start Task f User Y anables U ie m A A RAA AA Medialon DM512 2 Send Cue OO 00 00 00 Sj Cue Library 4 aon end vue vu Uu UU PO User Groups BP Rezourcez Doremt Labs 1 Nugget 1 Play Cues are easily added to the library and retrieved by typing keyboard shortcuts or through drag and drop gestures The Cue Library is saved in the project file so its contents remain when the project is reloaded Adding Cues to the Cue Library From a Task Select a cue and type Shift A The cue is added to the cue library Alternatively the Cue Library Add Selected Cues menu item from the Cue contextual menu can be used Locate O0 00 00 00 Insert Cue Re insert Last Cue Add to Cue Library ShiFt 4 Insert a Message SHiFE M Insert a Countdown AlE C Insert a Comment 5ShifE AlE C Modify Cue Enter Delete Cue Del Cue Selection Selected Track Cue Selection All Tracks Cue Management Pause Point Device Task Execution Show Task Variables ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 199 Ay Note Structured Logical Cues If Else Endlf While EndWhile and OnExpression cannot be added to the Cue Library From The Device Command List You can add Device Commands directly to the Cue Library to prepare your library before task creation You can for instance
6. Stop Task Sunc T ask Lock T ask Goto Label o File Edit Showmaster Object Windows Help iC ED 22 j A E Worksp ES Showmaster US E Project HW ame U me User Groups F LLL Resources E Devices 1 Start Task Pause Task m Tasks 0 P User Variables 0 Cue Library 0 Stop Task Syne Task Lock Task Goto Label Goto Time User Groups Resources For example Get a filtered Lister with a list of Showmaster V2 commands PROGRAMMING ENVIRONMENT 69 70 Tabs can be detached by double clicking on the tab s title The tab becomes an independent window that can be moved and resized E LE Contro ens Device Map Sto Tm DOGBON Record Step Forward Step Reverse Tr 1 Fast Forward Fast Reverse Locate variable Speed Sot Edit Made Doremi Labs v1 Nugget 2 E dit ype Mame P M Value Set TC Generator ie Doremi_Llabs_V1_ Nugget 2 Timec 00 00 00 00 25 fps Set Start TimeCode 457 Doremi Labs w1 Mugget 2 currer Mo Disk 07 Create Clip p Doremi Labs v1 Mugaet _2 Currer Mo Error 01 Delete Clip M3 Doremi Labs v1 _Nuoget_2 StartTi 00 00 0000 25 fps Load Clip MB Doremi_Labs_1_Mugget_2 Femail Do ag aao 25 fps Link Clip pt Doremi_Labs w1 Nugget 2 Active 0 Get Clip Into AB Doremi Labs 1 Nuoget_ 2 InTime 00 00 D0400 25 fps Get Clip List Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 OutTim 00 00 00 00 25 fps Load Next Clip Doremi Labs 1 Mugaget z currer T zlep uleti Cl Doremi Labs v1 Mugdget 2
7. A Persistent Variable has its value memorized when Medialon Control System is switched off or even after an unforeseen power cut and the value is re established the next time Medialon Control System is powered up HJ With Showmaster iPro you need to plug the Showmaster Pro USB key See Showmaster iPro Variable Storage on page 406 Creating User Variables You can create a Variable either by right clicking on the User Variables Object in the Browser tab right clicking in the Lister or by using the keyboard shortcut Shift I ns Create Variable ETT H ew arable A String The type of Variable must be chosen and given a name that has not already been used and which does not include characters used for calculations etc For example it is not possible to name a Variable on off but on off works 148 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Variables When Variables are created Medialon Control System proposes by default the values of the Variable created previously In the same way when a Variable is duplicated the new Variable takes the name name of the Variable copied 2 Variable Properties Just like any other Object in Medialon Control System V6 Variables have properties If you wish to edit them you must take into account the category and the type as some elements are not modifiable Variable Names Variables are referenced in the system by their names System and Screen variables are automatically n
8. Be User Groups Lie 402460 q EN Resources E Opto22 192 168 144 19 Serial Ports a MIDI Ports OM Parts 43 TimeCode Ports Infrared Ports You may add I O ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource menu and choosing which port you wish to add ZH PY Resources Serial Ports css MIDI Ports OM Porte L TimeCode Forts 1 0 Ports Infrared Ports New ES le Adlink Nudam 0 m Adlink PC17432 VO Advantech ADAM V0 AMX NetLinx I O Global Cach VO ICP DAS PISO P32 32 1 0 Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO VO Right Click Collapse All Scan Scan All IVO Resources Scan Advantech ADAM Resources Scan AMX NetLinx Resources Scan Global Cach Resources Scan Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO Resources I O Ports are used by MxM Medialon IO 302 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources Ay Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for I O Resources description Infrared Ports Infrared resources allow Medialon Manager V6 to generate Infrared signals Click the Infrared Ports node to display the resources present in your project Lister A Project Mame E Devices H AME NetLinx Infrared BOUT 11 3 m Ta ss 11 x EE Globallach lh 3 Users pics ui HedHRatiMetBox EF User Varnables 0 E Cue Library 0 Pr User Groups PO Resources E Serial Parts css MIDI Ports JA DMS Ports a3 TimeCode Parts FA UO Ports Q infrared
9. Command 3 Parameters Condition Type Private A Comparison Expression to be evaluated as the Wait For condition Click on the Magic wand button to open an Expression Edit window more details in the Expressions chapter Timeout Type Time If the condition is not satisfied within this amount of time the task jumps to the given label On timeout goto label Type String Label to go to when the timeout occurs If no label is specified the task executes the next cue in the task OnExpression Case This command block evaluates each Case expression until it reaches an AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster expression that is true or it reaches the end of block EndOnExpression Once a true case is reached the commands inside the Case structure are executed and upon reaching EndCase execution jumps to the EndOnExpression cue To ensure that at least one expression will always be executed in the event all other Cases fail use Case 1 as the final Case in the OnExpression structure Parameters for each Case statement Condition Type Private A Comparison Expression to be evaluated in each Case Click on Magic wand button to open Expression Edit window more details in the Expressions chapter System Commands This set of Manager commands allow acting on the host machine Insert Cue M Manager k UserScreen k Re insert Last Cue Alt R Doremi_Labs W1_Nugget 1 Task Add to Cue Libr
10. LacalPanel AltK eus tatus LocalPanel Ctrl eyStatus AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 153 154 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Expressions Expressions Logical Expressions Logical Expressions provide the normal functions of computer programming using Boolean operators An expression is a mathematical or logical string called a Regular Expression it contains variables constants and operators f etc Expressions are evaluated using operators between variables and constants to provide a result The result could be used as a logical result true or false or could be stored into a variable for a future use Operators Several operators are available and can be divided in two main categories arithmetical operators and logical operators Operators have priority among them 2 4 3 equals to 14 not 18 because operator has a higher priority than operator The priority of operators is digressive in this list Neg gt lt gt lt amp 1 r Arithmetical Logical Fx Variables Functions Arithmetical operators Add a value to another one Subtract a value from another one or use as a negative operator when there is only one value Multiply a value by another one Divide a value by another one 9o Retrieve the remainder of the division from the first value by the second Power operator Assignment operator set the first value to the contents of the second
11. SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Overview of Showmaster lighting desks video projectors video servers sound processors and more Showmaster ST also provides digital I O Its free editing software Showmaster Editor V2 embeds most of the features of our award wining technology such as devices synchronization amp logical programming as well as real time testing It allows programming of one show at a time up to 5 WebPanels connection but does not support 3rd party interfaces Medialon Showmaster ST is a 1 U full 19 rack mountable machine the front panel consists of an LCD display function buttons and status LEDs Show Controller The rear panel hosts a 10 100 Base T Ethernet interface digital I O connections serial ports a DMX port and a USB port for the MIDI interface Medialon Showmaster ST operates on an embedded operating system OS Showmaster Pro Showmaster PRO is a all in one embedded Show Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls and synchronizes dimmers lighting desks videoprojectors video servers sound processors etc Showmaster Pro also provides digital I O and balanced Time Code input output with video ref Its free editing software Showmaster V2 embeds most of the features of our award wining technology such as devices synchronization amp logical programming as well as real time testing It supports multiple timeline 3rd party interfaces up to 10 WebPanel and signal r
12. pedeav4 8081 panel WebPanel 1 120 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens If no panel name is specified in the address Medialon WebPanel login page opens WebPanel 1 WebPanel_1 E WebPanel 2 WebPanel 2 Panel Panel WebPanel_1 Password i Password PE Enter WebPanel name or select it in the WebPanel list type WebPanel password if required HJ In Showmaster V2 programming mode WebPanels need to be connected to Showmaster Connect WebPanel to Showmaster Editor V2 only when no Showmaster is connected to Showmaster Editor V2 off line programming Web Browser Compatibility WebPanel can be opened with e Google Google Chrome 6 or greater chrome o Firefox Mozilla Firefox 3 6 or greater As Firefox 4 is known to have memory leaks issues and is not suitable for 24 24 operations i A Apple Safari 5 or greater Safari Gp a Explorer9 Windows Internet Explorer 9 o Internet Windows Internet Explorer 8 is only partially supported y Explorer 8 As Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or 6 are not supported AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 121 e Safari Ss Apple Safari for IOS4 gt e mt Android Browser e More generally any browser which support HTML5 Kiosk Mode Most of the times you will run the WebPanel in a special mode which prevents the End User from having access to unauthorized applications and resources of the machine running the browser This is usually done by runnin
13. Button 132 Behavior Normal 133 One Time 133 Still Down 133 Toggle 133 Effect 133 Status 132 Text Single Line 131 Word Wrap 131 Transparent 133 Variables 133 C Call Task 183 INDEX Index Case On Expression 186 Close Control Panels 268 Menu 268 UserScreen 128 179 268 Color Custom Color 141 Editor 141 Selector 141 Configuration Showmaster 264 327 Connect Showmaster 264 324 Connection WebPanel 120 Container 139 Device Control Panel 190 Display 190 Drag Device 271 Control Center 67 83 267 Control Panel Close All 268 Device 41 83 190 Object 265 Task 41 106 Convert Project 240 261 XML File 240 Cue Copy 96 173 Countdown 93 Delete 96 173 Device Auto Selection 237 Double Click 287 Drag and Drop 274 Execute 238 Expand 97 Expression 157 Variables Filtered Selection 158 Flash Control Disable 108 174 Execute 108 174 Library Add Cue 199 Delete Cue 202 Insert Cue 98 175 200 Test Cue 202 Logical Command 184 480 If Else Endif 185 OnExpression Case 186 Wait 184 Wait For 186 While EndWhile 185 Management 96 173 Compress 97 Disable 96 174 Distribute 98 Group 97 174 Size 97 Time 97 Message 92 Move 96 173 New 90 172 Properties 93 Recording 103 Replace Device 236 Selection 95 172 Time X 99 Tools Value Selector 94 Value Wizard 94 Variable Parameter 151 D Date amp Time Showmaster 329 Debug Mode 45 261 Manager 292 Delete Cue 96 173
14. Example get digital 8 response xxxx 8 on Ay The get digital command and Events report digital input activity in the Showmaster Recovery Tools console window LE DMX512 Resources LIN ST open dmx lt portnumber gt Opens DMX port lt portnumber gt Pro LIEN Example msmrt gt open dmx 1 msmrt DMX Port 1 is opened close dmx lt portnumber gt Close the DMX port Example msmrt gt close dmx 1 msmrt DMX Port 1 is closed write dmx lt portnumber gt lt channelnumber gt level Set DMX channel lt channelnumber gt to level Example msmrt gt write dmx 1 3 125 Ay In Recovery Mode all DMX resources are treated as outputs It is not possible to read a DMX channel s level with the get command or by using event reporting 430 SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE Recovery Tools MI DI Resources LE E LEER open midi 2L Opens the MIDI ports Pro Example LIES msmrt gt open midi msmrt MIDI Port is opened close midi Closes the MIDI ports Example msmrt close midi msmrt MIDI Port is closed event midi on off Turns on or off event reporting for the MIDI In port Example msmrt event midi on msmrt Event MIDI set to On Example of event received msmrt MIDI Evt Size 3 90 01 7F Ay Events report MIDI input activity in the Showmaster Recovery Tools console window write midi lt data gt Send lt data gt from MIDI Out port e lt data gt is
15. Replace By You may also select the Devices item in the Object Browser and choose New Device Browser F 1 Project Right Click La Devices B ES mm asks Kl a New Device P User Variable i Cue Library f Collapse All User Groups Resources 2 Select the type of device you want to create and give it a name Create Device MEE Doremi Labs V1 Mugget v Dataton wV atchaut IP Er D igigram Audio Server Digital Projection Projectors Doremi Labs V1 Nugget DVS Blade Ektacom 5treamcader Estron Matris 100 Switcher Estron Matris 320076400712800 Switcher Grass Yalley Encore Grass Valley KZ Grass Valley Turbo lidas Frame Cycler n SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 79 80 3 In the Device Setup dialog box the required parameters and configuration can be set The contents of the Device Setup dialog box are different for each type of device Please refer to MxM help files for correct device setup configurations Doremi Labs V1 Hugget Setup X E3 o IP Adres 127 00 ea m start Time Code Fields per Frame I Time Code Twee e we Ok Cancel 4 Click Select to open the Resource Selection Box Select Resource E3 Unspecified eed Windows COM 1 Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 5 Windows COM 3 Pa a Windows COM 5 Windows COM 7 o Windows COM 8 Windows COM 9 Se Windows COM 10 Windows COM 11 7 Windawe COM 12
16. Sealevel SeaL INK Serial Scan ArtNet DMX512 Comtrol DeviceMaster Serial Sealevel SeaLINK Serial Sean Resource scanning is only possible when Showmaster Editor V2 is connected to a Showmaster Pro or a Showmaster iPro Ay Showmaster XS LE and ST cannot use external resources so it is not possible to add new resources 336 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources Serial Ports Click on the Serial Ports node to display the resources that were present in your EM Hai project when Showmaster Editor V2 connected to the Showmaster 5 E LE Pro 2 Project Marne u CHS Com FE Devices 6 uo Ln few asks 3 T User Varnables 1 Cue Library 2 User Groups mut gu cu Lu gu Da ha I m rm rm rm Vat Ust Capt Resources lt MIDI Ports FF DMS Ports A n F ors Different types of Serial resources can be mounted in your project You may add Serial ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource menu and choosing which port you wish to add A Control E Mame LI JEN SEU Right Click New Resource x AMX NetLinx Serial if Comtrol DeviceMaster Serial Global Cach Serial Sealevel SeaLINK Serial Delete Resource Setup Resource y m w an Lj P Ld me i ae y Resource Help Scan 5can ll Serial Resources Scan AMX NetLinx Resources Scan Globa
17. UserScreens 1 MOM Userscreens my F MON arable User Variables 1 Cue Library 4 User Groupes EF Al Vanables B MON Task me MON UserScreens F MON Variable Resources Object Type User Group Mame MON Panel Description Group shared with Manager Panel User Mode Rights View NEI 4 e e le e i lii Shared Active ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 207 208 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Networking Networking When Medialon Control System is connected to a network it acts as a server and can share its objects with external clients OpenCap Medialon Control System integrates an architecture called OpenCap to share objects such as Tasks Variables UserScreens Device Commands etc with external clients Those clients use a Medialon On Network Connection to connect to another application Medialon Control System External User Groups Publish application Shared OpenCap Command pm Read Write Medialon On Network aka MON already had this capability but with OpenCap it has been enhanced Medialon Manager V6 shares Tasks UserScreens and Variables like a server Slave Another Medialon Control System seen as a client Master is able to detect those shared objects Medialon Control System User Groups Master Shared ea rite Variables ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 209 210 Shared Variables are handled by both Medialon Control System stations The Master can sen
18. t fas Medialon Manager 6 t M Medialon Manager 6 fap Medialon Manager Panel 6 amp Release Info Jh User Manual SOFTWARE INSTALLATI ON 57 Registration Medialon Manager will ask for your registration number upon startup Please take a few moments to register your product with us If you do not yet have your registration number please use one of the following methods to obtain it e Click on Request Registration Number button below if you have an Internet connection An e mail will be sent to you with your registration number e Fax your contact information your Serial and License numbers above to 33 0 1 46 55 54 83 for Europe and Asia or 1 305 445 4048 for North amp South America Your registration number will be sent back to you using your contact information e Call us at 33 0 1 46 55 60 70 for Europe and Asia or 1 305 445 4045 for North amp South America to request your registration number Register vaur Manager Licence Product Serial Number bx s FRA AE ERES ENG P Product Licence Number ERASE PE A CN eR ARTY our product is not registered IF you have nat pet pour registration number please proceed using one of the following methods to obtain it Click on Request Registration Number button below if you have an Internet connexion An email will be sent to pou with your registration number Fax pour contact informations your Serial and Licence numbers
19. 4o 05 EE dee be Sa H eb a 88 Track Management eee hh aono oa s san ons 89 jied4 u P r 90 creating CUCS uos ad usce ea bees eae eee darse an 90 Cue Properties 2 444 ako ok ox cho aaa OR EROR LU s 92 Inserting a Message Cue a o rome onn m onn 92 Inserting a Countdown Cue leen 93 Changing Cue Properties rns 93 Selecting CUES x4 ck donc UE OR EXE 0 P DEEN SOROR Ado OD RAKES 95 The Cue Selection menus eer n nnn 95 Managing CLeS s eestor ede ed o ox XR R EEG ds Xs 96 Cut Paste and Delete 0 0 o o o ooooooo rss 96 MOVING CUCS a iraran REOR camera A 96 The Cue Management MenU saaa aaa 96 Cue Disable Enable eer n n ktm 96 GIOUDIDJ CUES s ux ps ue P x hee aa ad 97 Sizing Cues amp Cue size options 97 Expanding and Compressing Cues a eee ees 97 Cue time keyboard shortcuts 2 00000 ee eee 97 Distributing CUES curso deu dee O3 Rod ew A 98 The Cue library ocio ok oo xm EG 9 hee ROS a eee wade Ren 98 ns casos ADA 99 Timeline Management llle nnns 100 IridiC gbOE SA uus uta x woe eru e heheh A 100 Gel sie ENTRE TS SU S7 Lt tl L1 77 7 17 7 100 Time Ruler contextual Menu saaa aa 100 ect encar Era a bee 101 Positrack Mechanism enhn 101 Stop Task Behavior llle 102 ln est PEPRTFRPCTCTILIICERIITIIDTITTITIITTTTTTITTTTITITT 103 Internal Timecode e
20. After creating a Device Medialon Control System V6 allows the user to quickly test the device settings and connections without any programming 82 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Devices Ay Showmaster Editor V2 needs to be connected to a Showmaster to test commands Testing Device Control Panels 1 Type F2 to switch Medialon Control System to Debug Mode 2 Select the device in the Browser tab or in the Device Map tab use the right click menu to open the Device Control Panel in the Control Center E E Project Manual 0001 Mame B Devices 5 M Manager Right Click B E Coemi Labs V1 Mugget 1 Ya Medialon_ DIMABTZ 2 A New Device EN Medialon_Low Level Communic gt Medialon_on_Metwork_3 Bi us fw Tasks 1 Delete Device E Panels 1 Device Control Panel P User Variables 0 Gto p Play Re place Ey Ef Cue Library 0 3 Check that the device is online 4 Control the real world device with the buttons Edit Insert Video Q Audio 1 Shuttle CATE i Audio 2 Testing Commands 1 Select a Device in the Object Browser the full list of available commands SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 83 appears in the Object Lister ES Project Dacumentation smpl5 Mame PE De ces 3 3 E Stop E EJ Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 72 Pla an gt an dre Sel Record 23 3nowrmraxter Wm Step Forward m Tasks 3 Mou m User Varnables 1 Ex Cue Library 2 fe User Groupes Shep Her
21. General l Project Default UserScreen Type Movable Window Task Default UserScreen Size creation time 450 Ps Network l i Default Userscreen Object Color Default UserScreen Object Text Color ol UserScreen Object Default Font O Default Font Font Size Bo E dit m List Display ext of object persistent by default fl Use legacy UserScreen Page number behavior Page becomes D when US is closed WEE Panels Cd Activate WEB Panels HTTP Server Part LENS Default port is 80 Default Size creation time SUD A e Px Default UserScreen Settings Default UserScreen Type Defines the default type of a UserScreen when it is created eSingle Window eBorder Window eMovable Window Default eFull Screen Default UserScreen Size Defines the default size of new UserScreens when they are created Default UserScreen Object Color Defines the default color for all dynamic graphical objects and UserScreens Default UserScreen Object Text Color Defines the default color for all text in dynamic graphical objects and UserScreens UserScreen Object Default Font Allows you to select a default font or specify a particular font to be used when creating an object in a UserScreen that requires text Text of object persistent by default Makes persistent by default the content of text Variables related to Edit List or Display objects 230 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Preferences
22. MEDIALEN MEDIALON SYSTEM Reference Manual Miedialon Control System V6 MEDI ALON CONTROL SYSTEM V6 Show amp Media Control System Reference Manual Medialon 101 rue Pierre S mard F92324 Chatillon Cedex France Tel 33 0 1 46 55 60 70 Fax 33 0 1 46 55 54 83 Medialon I nc 245 Catalonia Ave Coral Gables FL 33134 USA Tel 1 305 445 4045 Fax 1 305 445 4048 Support medialon com www medialon com ee ee Revision 4 1 0 Copyright 2012 Medialon All rights reserved FINAL USER S LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MEDI ALON SOFTWARE amp PLUG IN IMPORTANT READ ATTENTIVELY By loading and installing the software on your computer you indicate your acceptance of the following Final User s License for Medialon Software amp Plug In product the License Agreement which is either i printed on a licence card with the software ii on line in the software application If you do not agree to the terms of this License Agreement for a full refund promptly return this product to the place you obtained it The License Agreement is entered into between you the final user a legal entity or natural person and Medialon 101 rue Pierre S mard 92324 Chatillon Cedex France SA with a capital of 398 202 registered at Nanterre RCS B 383 966 009 00029 and concerns the aforementioned software product any attached add in software the documentation in electronic format and any example or educational software the
23. This MxM provides conversion and analysis of character strings Utilities MxM Medialon AppLauncher This MxM provides a way to control third party software from Medialon Control System The application to be controlled can reside on the local computer or on a remote computer If it resides on a remote computer it runs on this computer and is remotely controlled from a Showmaster V2 or a computer where Manager or Display Controller is running The command set provides a wide range of commands including windows size bring to top etc to fully control software behavior Key commands are also provided they simulate keyboard strokes in the application A command line can be added to the Start Program command Knowledge of the application that has to be controlled command line documentation shortcuts menus is recommended For example this MxM can be used to control presentation software such as Microsoft PowerPoint Macromedia Director or any other software needed in an application MxM Event log MxM EventLog is designed to produce messages and event reports It provides functions to store sort export and print event lists by date and time All traced events are stored in the current log file which is part of the log database of events The events storage file can be changed automatically every period which can be defined as every day week month or year MxM HTTP Remote This MxM provides an interface between a Med
24. e Press this key to power off soft power Medialon Showmaster SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 355 LED Status Messages Four LEDs give a quick overview of the main status of Medialon Showmaster PWR Power LED This LED lights green when Showmaster is powered on SSD SSD LED This LED blinks when Showmaster is using his internal disk OS Showmaster LED This LED indicates the current status of Medialon Showmaster SHW Project LED This LED indicates the current status of the Medialon Showmaster Project Oo w 0s s Showmaster Starting Up Shutting Down a Fe HM N Blink slow Y nen wE Blink rast ON Blink Fast Y Waiting Recovery Confirmation 2 Alternate Blink Fast GY 356 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster XS Description Showmaster Fault Still Drop C Blink Fast GY ashing Y Rear Panel The figure below shows the rear panel of Medialon Showmaster XS e e Serial 1 Serial 2 J Serial 3 Serial 4 EN gt e AC Input Power Connector 12VAC 50 60 Hz e LAN RJ45 Ethernet LAN connector 10 100Base T e Serial 1 Serial Port 1 Serial RS232 port e Serial 2 Serial Port 2 Serial RS232 port e Serial 3 Serial Port 3 Serial RS232 port e Serial 4 Serial Port 3 Serial RS232 port e USB 1 Not used e USB 2 Not used e Relay Digital Output Port 3 relays 24V AC DCO 5A e IR A Infrared Port 1 3 3 infrared outputs e IR B Infrared Port 1 3 3 infrared output
25. e Save save the content list of both firmware Editor and Showmaster in an XML file e Copy copy in the clipboard the list of component for both firmware This list can be paste in any text editor Reset Showmaster Firmware It is always possible to reset the Showmaster s firmware to the default factory installation Use the Factory command of the Showmaster V2 Recovery Tool as described in the following steps 1 Start your Medialon Showmaster in Recovery Mode Hold press Up key during startup process 2 Start Medialon Recovery Tools 3 Type scan to detect your Showmaster on the network 4 Type connect lt showmastername gt lt password gt to open the connection with your Showmaster 5 Type factory to initiate the Reset Factory Firmware 6 Type commit to validate and start the reset of Factory Firmware 7 Your Showmaster will reboot at the end of the process Ay See more about Recovery Tools on page 421 SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE 419 420 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Recovery Tools Recovery Tools Medialon Showmaster s Installation CD includes tools to maintain Showmaster Ay When Showmaster V2 is in Recovery Mode do not switch off or reset the power using the hard switch or the soft buttons on the front Doing so could corrupt the core engine To exit from Recovery Mode restart or shut down Showmaster V2 from the Recovery Tools application Contact Medialon Technical Support at Support medialon com
26. i W orkspac a m Sheri send a hal at dt Same Jla conce z D elete Pn ALIS 3 T Rigne Click Control Panel i f ser ariak Es Cue Library ar User Gro Up By Resources Panels Collapse All UserScreens Devices j Variables Tasks New Task Ctrl T i Mew Task Editor Shift Ctrl Optionally you can select the Tasks item in the Browser tab and right click to open the contextual menu and choose New Task 2 The Create Task dialog box is displayed Create Task Stepb WE Timeline gt Cancel UJ Type a name 4 You can create variables that will reflect various statuses of the task by checking the Create task variables box 5 Select the Timeline type 6 Medialon Control System automatically opens the new task in a Task Editor The Task Editor The Task editor shows the task s contents and is where you will be programing your TimeBased shows Time Ruler Task Toolbar Duration Line Device Map Tasks 2 ES Task_1 MERA A 00 00 02 53 BN 01 Ld a ME ad Internal Timecode EI 7 s RETE A 00 00 00 foo D0 03 8 00 D0 06 59 Tracks Track1 00 00 00 00 00 00 75 79 Track Current Position Time Scroller 88 SHOW PROGRAMMING Timebased Tasks Track Management Tracks are a way to organize your work you may want to put all of the cues for the different devices on the same track or you may want to use a different track for each device
27. visible in the in the browser browser or lister and lister Cue Cue Library is not Cue Library is Library visible in the visible in the browser or lister browser and lister User Group is not User Group is visible in the visible in the browser or lister browser and lister Option available in Tasks Preferences page 226 Task Editor in User Mode When you open a Task with Edit user rights in User Mode Cue edition is possible when the affected Devices and Commands have View user rights Locked Cue Task_1 Play Doremi Labs V1_Nugget_2 Doremi_ Si Medialon_DMX512_1_ Start Task Task_3 m Showmaster Start Show re Message Db anc anon e ANU Unlocked Cue 256 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG User Mode If a Device s rights are set to None all its cues are locked Orange writing and you are not allowed to change move or delete the cues aon Lg PIES d 2 Internal Timecode TimeLabel ce Action Comment 00 00 00400 We Sequence 4 nmomonno Blridas Goto Time O4 00 0400 od 00 00 010 Current Sequence Page Roller 1 00 00 00 02 az Play DO OD 0002 Play 00 00 00 02 MIDI Program Change 0 07 xall Memory Sce bank access 4 Set Memory 3 Load m moire GI Step 1 00 00 02 y E E VPoS9 Set Shutter Off Shutter Open If Device s rights are set to View cues can be modified just like in Debug Mode ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 257 258 ADVANCED PROGRAMM
28. 271 Dragging Variables onto Graphical ObjectS 272 Dragging Tasks onto Graphical Objects 273 Drag and Drop on Tasks ee nns 273 Dragging a Task onto another TasSk 273 Dragging a Variable onto a TaSk o o 274 Dragging a UserScreen into a Task 274 Dragging a Page into a TaskK ooo ooo 274 Dragging a Cue into a TaSk o oo 274 Task Creation Wizards 0000c lt 00o0 lt 00 lt lt lt lt 275 Graphical Object WiZardS 0 0 oo rrr 275 Create a task started by this ODject o 275 Add start condition to selected taSk o oo 275 Create a task to monitor a variable with this object 276 Create a task to perform a device command from this object 276 Variable WiZardS aaoo 277 Keyboard Shortcuts 2 9 Fe main MENU aos 53 3 433 x beara teow e Aue AAA 279 welluzinini i 2 a2 26 os 4 4 Gack ero 279 Showmaster menu 1 ee e 280 Object main menu 1 es 280 Windows main menu aoaaa RR rris 280 Help main MenU 2 saura eo wow wd bs wee Ee Sh oa Ree eae ae eee 281 Workspace navigation eee rrr 281 Browser Tab Navigation err 281 Lister Tab Navigation ee nnn 281 Properties Tab Navigation ooo n s 282 Task Editor Tab Navigation ooo o
29. 80 RH Non condensing Power Connector 3 pin 2 pole socket Voltage 100 240V AC Current 2 5A max at 120VAC Mains 100 240V AC adapter supplied overvoltage and short circuit protected MTBF 50 000 hours 25 C Approvals FCC EN60950 CE EN55022 Accessories Included 408 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE In this section you will learn how to maintain your Medialon Showmaster 410 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Showmaster Firmware Showmaster Firmware The Medialon Showmaster engine is based on Firmware This is a package of software components that is installed when Medialon Showmaster is built Medialon Showmaster V2 s firmware is based on the same firmware as the Showmaster Editor V2 Each time you want to update your installation you need to install a new firmware version HJ When you work on a project Medialon strongly recommends using the same firmware version on Showmaster and Showmaster Editor V2 Firmware Package Medialon Showmaster V2 s firmware mainly consists of e Medialon Showmaster V2 s main core called mShowmasterCore e Medialon Manager runtime module called ManagerRT e Medialon Showmaster MRCs e Medialon Showmaster MxMs Medialon Showmaster MRCs and MxMs are common to Showmaster V2 and Showmaster Editor V2 Ay Firmware packages are available for free download Go to the help menu and select Medialon Internet Resources Showmaster Firmware Upgrades ld Showmaster
30. AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 155 Logical boolean operators Equality comparison operator compares the contents of two values If they are equal the result is true 1 otherwise it is false 0 Difference comparison operator compares the contents of two values If they are equal the result is false 0 otherwise it is true 1 gt Greater than operator Less than operator gt Greater than or equal to operator lt Less than or equal to operator OR operator one or the other value must be true to evaluate as true amp AND operator both parts of the Expression must be true to evaluate as true Change operator used only with variables the content of a variable is compared to its previous value to define if it has changed Parenthesis symbols are used to force priorities between operators Evaluation expressions Evaluation expressions are either true or false Those expressions are used for conditions i e If Then Else While EndWhile WaitFor etc Button StartShow 1 Status If Button StartShow 1 Status is equal to 1 the expression is true and the command is executed Assignment expressions Assignment expressions are used to store a value into a variable ShowSelection 2 TimeToShow 01 00 05 00 ShowSelection variable is set to 2 whereas TimeToShow variable is set to the time 01 00 05 00 Both evaluation and assignment expressions can be combined to take advantage of regular expression
31. BF4 Reserved e U3 Windows XPE back up restore process e U4 Windows XPE status eFlashing Windows booting eGreen Windows running e SF Group error e DC5V 5V supply e RUN PLC in run mode e STOP PLC in stop mode SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 397 398 Contents of the Showmaster V2 iPro USB key 1 Insert the Showmaster V2 iPro USB key 2 The Windows Open file dialog should automatically open If not browse the system and select the USB key 4 am USE Key Disk H de Installer Je ProTools P de Showmaster Logs de Persistent de 5howmaster Licenses Medialon Showmaster Pro USB key contents e Showmaster V2 Pro Firmware Installer e Pro Tools e Showmaster V2 Logs Storage folder e Showmaster V2 Variable Storage folder Project persistent variables e Showmaster V2 Pro License First Start Switch on mEC to start Medialon Showmaster iPro Connect the power supply Turn on the Power Supply Set the Mode Selector switch to RUN It will take several minutes for the mEC to boot up The U4 LED blinks during the startup process 5 When the U4 LED stops blinking and turns on solid along with the 5V and Run LEDs the mEC is up and running J UNE I nstallation of Showmaster V2 iPro Firmware First installation of Showmaster iPro Firmware has to be done from the delivered USB Key You need to use a remote desktop session to execute locally the installation operations All further firmware updat
32. Cam when the Mode Selector switch is in STOP position during startup A computer connected to Showmaster iPro via a network connection can access Showmaster using the Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool console Recovery Tool Console To launch the Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool Console select Medialon 422 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Recovery Tools Showmaster Recovery Tool in the Windows Start Menu de Medialon L Medialon Showmaster Editor 2 Sa Medialon Recovery Tool 2 m Medialon Showmaster Editor 2 E Release Info o User Manual Je Medialon Manager Panel 6 Je Medialon Product Browser Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tools 2 1 H Initializing Ready gt mode tcp Connection mode set to tcp 7 scan Scanning Found Showmaster 2T1747 7192 144 2237 Showmaster Found Showmaster BA386A 7192 144 248 Showmaster Found Showmaster 91A118 7192 144 1657 Showmaster Found Showmaster H19696 7192 144 1817 Showmaster Showmaster Found Showmaster 912768 7192 144 1637 gt connect 5houmaster ZI1747 medialon Connecting Showmaster Shoumaster ZT17437 Showmaster 5houmaster ZTI1747 connected The Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool can only be used when Showmaster is started in Recovery Mode Get Connected Your computer can be connected to Showmaster using a serial communication null modem cable plugged into the Showmaster s Serial port
33. Catalyst Pandora s Box Maxedia etc Switchers amp Routers Serial TCP IP Folsom Autopatch Extron etc Video Projectors Serial TCP IP Barco Christie Sony Sanyo etc Digital 1 O and PLCs Serial TCP IP and dedicated PCI boards Onboard Digital IO Ports Modbus OPC etc Service MxMs Some MxMs implement services as extensions of Medialon Control System and provide sophisticated functionalities like scheduling error logging or database management They are referred to as Service MxMs These MxMs greatly enhance Medialon Control System and provide the necessary resources to manage and control information or perform special tasks Data Management Database This MxM provides an interface with SOL compatible databases It allows reading modification and creation of data and records and sending of SQL requests to the database Files Management This MxM provides a simple way to copy move or erase files on a hard disk or a Windows network It also provides commands for reading and writing files String Management This MxM provides conversion and analysis of character strings Utilities E mail This MxM handles the sending and the reception of E mails in a Medialon Control System project It has all the functionalities of regular E mail software including management of modem connections Event log MxM EventLog is designed to produce messages and event reports It provides functions to store sort expo
34. HMI Interface for technicians and operators ioControl To develop control strategy Ethernet hub ar switch SNAP PAC R series contraller Runs loControl strategy and provides enterprise connectivity Serial devices Analog Digital f Digital AL devices i E devices IL devices Authorized users access data using corporate applications ANDARE PL i n pl lj Pant aif dd duit om i a ta zu um j Analog J r es Annexes Opto22 SNAP Ethernet I O is an Input Output connection module Using Opto22 SNAP Ethernet I O systems you can connect a wide variety of electronic and mechanical devices such as lights temperature and pressure sensors motors serial devices and more to computers using Ethernet networks wireless LAN Data stored in database _ Internet Authorized users access data using the Internet b PF j Serial E devices t Analog devices Digital AL devices As Note This version of MRC Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO only supports Digital Input modules and Digital Output modules Opto22 SNAP digital I O modules handle devices that can be in only one of two states either on or off true or false O or 1 running or stopped etc Push buttons and LEDs are examples of digital devices SNAP digital input modules send data from the device to the computer translating signals from the device into a form computers can understand while maintaini
35. List Control Object Text Control Start T ask Pause Task Stop Task Sunc Task Lack Task Goto Label Goto Time Goto Line Show Task Call T ask Properties For example When the Manager device is selected in the Browser the lister displays the list of Manager commands Properties Tab When an object is selected in the Lister or in an Editor its properties are displayed in the Properties Tab Object Type Command Device Showmaster Command Goto Time User Mode Rights None AP Task Mame A13 Timecode T est command Some properties are constant and cannot be modified Only properties with orange corners can be changed To change a value 1 Select the field by clicking on it 2 Enter the new value and press Enter to store it 3 To test a command set the parameters in the Command Properties and click on the Test Command button to send the command HJ Use Ctrl Mouse Wheel to select constant property and copy it Ctrl C 66 PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT Workspace Control Tab The Control tab is used specifically to display the Control Panels of certain devices To display a Control Panel inside the Control tab hit Shift double click on the device within the Browser tab or inside the Device Map tab To display a Control Panel as a floating window the Control Center tab hit Alt double click on the device within the Browser tab or inside the Device Map tab Panels Tab NEW mM This tab is now available
36. MIDI I O DMX so it can communicate with the lights and plasma screen Manager Panel is on the same network so it can see Showmaster Editor V2 and connect to it SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 319 Example 2 In this example Showmaster Editor V2 has been moved to Showmaster Pro s LAN2 Plasma Screen Serial Audio Processor Video Projectors Lighting DMX Manager Panel Showmaster Editor In Debug Mode it can communicate with the Audio Processor and Video Projectors as well as the Plasma Screen and lights The Manager Panel is connected to LAN1 so it cannot see Showmaster Editor V2 and therefore will not be able to connect when the project is in Debug Mode Example 3 When Showmaster Editor V2 is disconnected from Showmaster Pro the hardware goes into Run Mode and uses both LAN connections Plasma Screen Serial Audio Processor Video Projectors Lighting DMX FFERI Manager Panel LAN1 320 SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Overview of Showmaster Editor Programming Scenario This scenario describes the programming process for a typical Showmaster CON Qo UN BR WN FE 9 Start the Showmaster Launch Showmaster Editor V2 Browse the network for the Showmaster V2 Connect to the Showmaster V2 Configure the Showmaster if needed Declare and setup devices based on the Showmaster s available resources Program the Timeline and StepBased tasks Run the Timel
37. Max value fields indicate by default the minimum and maximum values that the Variable can take The values of these fields can be used for programming calculations and displays A Real Variable is similar to an integer variable with the additional advantage of having Floating point representation of integer subsets The precision of the display can be set to the desired precision Medialon Control System rounds off to the closest subset value AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 147 String The String Variable is a chain of characters that can be displayed as such or integrated into a sentence Such a chain of characters will be displayed with the typographical choices font size color attributed to its display system ERU Enum is a Variable listing pre determined values periodical information or days of the week for example Time Various modes for dividing and displaying time are possible on the basis of the time code standard 24 25 or 30 frames per second and a decimal time splitting of seconds 1 100 and 1 1000 second Date A Variable that contains a date This may be used for date calculations comparisons or programming periodical exceptional or random events Medialon Control System V6 follows the PC s regional options to display dates Ay Note Date format has to be a complete format e g DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD or MM DD YYYY 8 4 07 will not be recognized by Medialon Control System Persistent Variable E
38. Method B Type Shift 1 to display the Cue Library window and then click on the cue you want to insert the cue is added to the currently edited task 00 00 O24 End of Scene CountDown BEJDoremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 Play Medialon_DM 512_2_5end_ Cue 00 00 00 00 BEJDoremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 Locate 00 DO 00 00 3 Countdown End nf Scenel Alternatively the Insert Cue Cue Library menu item from the Cue context menu can be used Insert Cue Re insert Last Cue Alt R Transport d Add Eo Cue Library hifE A Edit d Insert a Message ShiFt M1 TC Generator d Insert a Countdown Alt C Clip Management Insert a Comment ShiFi AltH c shiFt i E S3Doremi Labs v1 Mugaet 1 Play s Medialon DMX512 2 Send Cue DD n nO nn ga Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 Locate 00 00 00 00 pA Manager Start Task 5 Countdown End of Scenei Modify Cue Enter Delete Cue Del Cue Selection Selected Track F Cue Selection All Tracks d ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 201 Testing Cues from Library Medialon Control System allows the user to test cues from the Library ES ES UN Project Mame LI Wr Devices 3 Light Fade If E namenje E Locate Clint Medislon DMX512_1 fe Tasks 1 E UserScreens 0 Mp User Variables 0 User Groups Be Resources Object Type Cue Name Light Fade On Description Medialon DMX512 1 Send Cue 00 00 15 00 Devices Medialon DMX512 1 Com
39. Object 264 Task 111 177 Unused Variable 266 UserScreen 128 Workspace 266 Description Device 81 Task 110 176 Device 79 295 Activity 81 190 266 Auto Selection 237 Browser 267 Commands 83 Device Control 190 Control Panel 41 83 190 Description 81 Device Map 67 267 Device Replacement Cue Replace 236 Replace By 236 Disable 81 Double click 287 Drag and Drop INDEX Command 271 Help 84 Manager On Network 211 Commands 214 New 211 Properties 213 Setup 211 Shared Group 206 Variables 217 Menu 265 Name 81 213 New 79 265 Positrack 81 190 266 Properties 80 Replace by 265 Resources Default Configuration 304 Manager 295 DMX Ports 299 Infrared Ports 303 Input Output Ports 302 MIDI Ports 298 Serial Ports 297 TimeCodePorts 301 Showmaster 335 DMX Ports 339 Infrared Ports 343 Input Output Ports 341 MIDI Ports 338 Serial Ports 337 TimeCode Ports 341 Testing 82 User Mode Rights 81 Variables 266 Digital Inputs 364 374 386 Outputs 358 364 375 387 Test Mode 430 Digital Slider 134 Status 134 Variables 135 Disable Cue 96 174 Device 81 Disconnect Showmaster 264 326 DMX ArtNet Setup 448 Patch 301 340 Setup 300 Showmaster Setup 443 SoundLight Setup 451 DMX Ports ArtNet 448 Setup 299 339 Showmaster 443 Showmaster Pro Connector 388 Showmaster ST Connector 365 376 SoundLight 451 Test Mode 430 Double click 287 Command 287 Cue 287 Device 287 Device Map 287 Task 287 User
40. Output to this USB port USB 2 Not used DMX512 DMX Port DMX512 Output EXT Not used Relay Outputs Digital Output Port 16 Form C electro mechanical 1A relays Digital Inputs Digital Input Port 16 optically isolated digital inputs SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 373 3 4 Digital I nput Output Port Wiring Digital Input Connector Showmaster V2 has sixteen optically isolated inputs that can accept either AC or DC signals and are not polarity sensitive Input signals are rectified by photocoupler diodes and unused power gets dissipated through a 1 8k ohm resistor in series The inputs may be driven by either DC or AC sources of 3 to 31 volts RMS with frequencies of 40 Hz to 10 kHz Standard 12 24 volt AC control transformer outputs can be accepted as well External resistors connected in series may be used to extend the input voltage range however this will raise the input threshold range Isolated Inputs are connected to Showmaster V2 via a SubD 37 pin Male connector Signal PIN Isolated Input 1A Isolated Input 1B Isolated Input 2A Isolated Input 2B Isolated Input 3A Isolated Input 3B Isolated Input 4A Isolated Input 4B Isolated Input 5A Isolated Input 5B Isolated Input 6A 1A 2A 3A 14A 15A 16A Isolated Input 6B 1 2 3 14 15 16 17 18 19 Isolated Input 7A Isolated Input 7B Isolated Input 8A Isolated Input 8B 20 21 22 33 34 35 36 37 Isolated Input 9A 1B 2B 3B 14B 15B 16B Isolated Input 9B Isolated Input 10A Isolate
41. Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to go to time Time Type Time Time to go to in the TimeBased task Goto Line This enables you to access a cue index in a task and to launch the execution from this cue To program this command you have to set the name of the task and the line number of the cue in the task Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to go to line number Line Type Integer Line to go to in the StepBased task Call Task Causes the calling task to be suspended while the given task runs This command is only available in StepBased tasks Parameters Task Name Type String Name of the task to call It is important to understand the difference between Call Task and Start Task Call Task is a command in a given task A that launches the execution of another given task B but it interrupts the running of task A while task B is in execution This is useful if you need to set a variable s value and then call a task to process that variable before continuing with the original task File database and network operations can sometimes take a few seconds to complete so using Call Task ensures the original task A doesn t continue until the called task B has completed its work Call Task TaskA TaskB Call Task B End of Task B Pause Task A Task A Restarts Start Task TaskA TaskB Start Task B End of Task B AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 183 M Show Task Opens or
42. RULES AS DESCRIBED HERE ABOVE WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDI TI ONS FOR MEDI ALON HARDWARE Medialon SA warrants that the Medialon hardware and all components are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 1 Years from the date of delivery to the first owner This warranty is not transferable Warranty will be void if manufacturer s installation and use instructions are not followed Warranty will be void unless our factory approved parts are used and properly installed by an authorized representative Warranty does not extend to parts misused mishandling neglect accident damage flood fire or other causes beyond the control of the manufacturer The warranty does not extend to consequential damage To make a warranty claim visit Medialon com to obtain an RMA Return Material Authorization number No claim will be accepted without an RMA number The equipment in need of service should be shipped with RMA to the address on the RMA form freight pre paid Any returned items deemed faulty due to manufacturer defect will be repaired or replaced and shipped back to the customer at no charge to the customer About This Manual About This Manual This manual is written for show technicians Free lancers and end user technicians who are responsible for programming and running show control systems in live events or permanent installations It provides readers with the technical skills required to set up and program a
43. amp 00 00 00 0 10 Tracks Track1 Restore acquisition C Wsers Public Documents OMxX_Records DDF Task_1 Timecode 00 00 00 00 Original file External BB 5 Medialon DMX512 2 Controlling Tasks The Task Control Panel shows the main runtime information and commands of a TimeBased task It is displayed by clicking on the Control Panel button in the Task Editor window When the Control Panel window is resized inner controls are resized automatically in order to ease far away reading Task Name Task Controls Positrack Mode Edit Task button EE EN Current Timecode Timecode Status Positrac MEDI ALGN 00 00 00 00 Enabled F Countdown to the Countdown Far next Countdown Cue 00 00 00 00 Message AAA AA Task Control Panel Text of the last Message of the Message Cue next Countdown Cue With the Task Control Panel you can start your timeline Medialon Control System V6 needs to be in debug mode to start a task Switch Medialon Control System V6 to Debug Mode by pressing the F2 key Start error Y au must be in Hun or Debug mode to da this action do you want to switch to Debug mode now 7 106 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Timebased Tasks As A warning dialog box will ask you to switch in Debug mode if Medialon Control System is in Stop Mode and you try to start a task Use the Task Control buttons e Click on the task Play button to start the show e Click on the task Pause button to pause the sh
44. containers do not have any specific properties or any variables They are in fact windows that AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 139 are used to display the information or media in a specific and controlled location To set a container you must use the Showmaster Editor Device Control Command Static Graphical Objects Static graphical objects can help you to design nice user interface Square Li Select the Square tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your square Square can be filled with a color or an effect color Circle a Select the Circle tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your circle Circle can be filled with a color or an effect color Line Fa Select the Line tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your line Color and size can be adjusted Static Text Select the Static Text tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your text area where you want to insert text like title or label Image Select the Image tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your Image area e Motif Type Defines the way the bitmap is inserted e None e Stretch AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Panels amp UserScreens e Pattern e Size To Bitmap When enabled Image area is resized to inserted bitmap size Graphical Object Tools Graphical Object Tools are accessible with the properties wizard button Font Selector Allows you t
45. e USB 1 Not used e USB 2 Not used e LAN 1 RJ45 Ethernet LAN connector 10 100Base T e LAN 2 RJ45 Ethernet LAN connector 10 100Base T e DMX 1 DMX Port 1 Input Output DMX512 e DMX 2 DMX Port 2 Input Output DMX512 e MIDI In MIDI Port Input MIDI e MIDI Out MIDI Port Output MIDI e Timecode In Timecode Port Timecode Input e Timecode Out Timecode Port Timecode Output e Video Ref BNC Port Blackburst Video Reference Input e Serial 1 Serial Port 1 Serial RS232 port Serial Port 1 is also used for Recovery Mode e Serial 2 Serial Port 2 Serial RS232 port e Serial 3 Serial Port 3 Serial RS232 port e Serial 4 Serial Port 4 Serial RS232 port e Serial 5 Serial Port 5 Serial RS232 port e Serial 6 Serial Port 6 Serial RS232 port e Serial 7 Serial Port 7 Serial RS232 port e Serial 8 Serial Port 8 Serial RS232 port e Relay Outputs Digital Output Port 16 Form C electro mechanical 1A relays e Digital Inputs Digital Input Port 16 optically isolated inputs SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 385 386 Digital I nput Output Port Wiring Digital Input Connector Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro has sixteen optically isolated inputs that can accept either AC or DC signals and are not polarity sensitive Input signals are rectified by photocoupler diodes and unused power gets dissipated through a 1 8k ohm resistor in series The inputs may be driven by either DC or AC sources of 3 to 31 volts RMS wi
46. ede a o moe eso iet a ds Wo dc ches 365 Serial CONNECHON 4 5 a conr Lv daa e EC 365 Technical Specifications creen 366 Network Connection ee ee a 366 USB CORMNCCHONS us us dad mu pd oe de ee CRUS Ets so eue Us 366 Serial Interfaces sc ds bc accende dre UOS ee BE n 366 Digital Interfaces 33 qu ues i s tete Wea Ux a sigla 366 DMX Inter aCe xat te omes dede nde deo Repo he dee a b a 366 MIDI Interface xu d ace eed Det ui deckt ae BPS Bk Bot Ac tecta 366 Physical saw Sn dada oder ass 366 POWER asu id A dU E te a a Ao oae oed tac uet Ge a 367 ADDE OVSS s 4 2 mido d oe de dro doo Re A dnd kh Ge d p 367 ACCESSOS 6 d vcn rs Vo atc aU Rd so St conet ae Inca 367 Showmaster ST Description 369 Contents of the Package e mm RR s 369 Getting State llocs ue oou vero oc oe noche go doa rd cede Dc WU deua SE moe d 369 Front Panel CONOS isis A A PE dee He Rs 369 Keypad FUNCOMS appara ni a o aa sia 370 LCD Display Messages oooooooooooo core 3 0 LEID Status Messages xou dog a As 3 1 Rear Panel picota aaa de dc e does 372 Digital Input Output Port Wiring lt lt 374 MIDI GCOnNMECUON sramne a aa pO A a A p 376 DMX CONNECCION lt lt arca a a 376 Serial CONMECEON Biar as i dr b dee ee 3 6 Technical SpeciicatioN Sisi ara Seni P RSEN dee Nac o og 377 Network Connection o 377 JSD CONMCCLION Ss ua de oem dedos a a 377 Ser
47. on page 332 To add new files you can copy them into the Project UserData folder manually or use the Add Associated Files command in Showmaster Editor HJ All commands parameters and variables referring to external files must refer to this Project UserData folder See Creating a Showmaster V2 File Path on page 162 I mage Folder If a project uses User Bitmap Images in UserScreens the bitmap files are saved in the ProjectName l mageFolder located in the same directory as the project file SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 345 je Eb B Persistent Variables Files CA The values of all of the persistent variables defined in a project are saved in a file with the same name but with the mngVarStor6 Showmaster V2 Variable Storage extension This variable storage file is updated each time a persistent variable changes Another file with the extension swmTmpVarStor6 Showmaster Variable Temporary Storage is created as a copy of the mngVarStor6 file If power to the Showmaster is lost during a write operation to the mngVarStor6 file the data could become corrupted and values of all persistent variables would be lost The swmTmpVarsStor6 file prevents this from happening as it automatically backs up the mngVarStor6 file as soon as the file is finished being written If Medialon Showmaster detects a corruption of the smvs5 file it uses the data from the swmTmpVarsStor6 file As A project can be easily mov
48. 129 Gauge 139 Status 139 Variables 139 Hint 131 Image Bitmaps 131 Transparent 131 LED 137 Status 137 Variables 138 List 136 Status 136 Variables 136 Lock 263 Magnetic Grid 144 263 Move Objects 265 New 130 Order Pull To Front 144 263 Push To Back 144 263 Send To Back 144 263 Send To Front 144 263 Properties 131 Relief 131 Slider 134 Status 134 Variables 134 Static Object 130 Task Wizard 275 Text Control 180 Text Display 137 Variables 137 Text Edit 135 Status 135 Variables 135 Text Font 131 Tools Font Selector 141 Image Selector 142 Value Selector 145 Help Device 84 Manager 268 Medialon Internet Resources 269 Menu 268 MRC 269 305 344 MXM 85 268 INDEX Showmaster 268 Hint Graphical Object 131 Hint Delay TimeBased 101 I O see Input Output Ports ICP DAS PISO P32x32 Resources I O Port 448 If Else 185 Image Bitmaps 131 Image Folder 311 345 Selector 142 Transparent 131 Import Menu 261 Project 239 Task 239 Infrared Ports RedRat IRNetBox 450 Setup 303 343 Input Output Showmaster Setup 443 Input Output Ports Adlink NuDAM 446 Adlink PCI 7432 446 Advantech ADAM 447 ICP DAS PISO P32x32 448 Opto22 SNAP 449 Setup 302 341 Showmaster 443 Installation Firmware Showmaster 412 Showmaster iPro 398 IR Ports See Infrared Ports K Keyboard Shortcuts 279 Keypad 355 361 370 382 Kiosk Mode 122 L Label 182 Layout Local Panel 118 LED 137 Color
49. 309 E mail Notification s sx aos REX ee ea xw RR uniana 310 Project FUGS sonara asesoras eee DA Project Files amp Folders eem rn nein 311 Medialon Manager Project File llle 311 Image Folder 4o edad m S eee SORA E X EUR AA 311 Persistent Variables Files creen 311 Recovering the Previous Version of a Project eee 312 Opening Project from previous version of Medialon Manager 312 Upgrading Manager V6 MRCS amp MXMs l ee 312 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Overview of Showmaster Editor 317 Showmaster Editor V2 eee nnn nn 317 Medialon Showmaster Modes llle 318 Running or Normal Mode eer nn 318 Programming Mode errans s 318 Programming Scenario o 4 mee 321 Menu Showmaster 00000co c0 c000 o0o o n n lt 323 Showmaster Model Switching leen 323 Showmaster Connection sssaaa soea nnn n 324 Sul ncs 324 DISCONMOGE sa uio oec ie vw or de dieu arro e op iO EC dE ea haw O 326 Showmaster Configuration a 327 Configuration gt Network nnn 327 Configuration gt Log Traces a a a 328 Configuration gt Date amp Time aaa aa oo 329 Configuration gt Passwords nns 330 Project LOGGING zu ue aw aedes ds e ated de avg am ae c pe e de a RR OR RE Tcr 331 Retrieve PIOJe
50. 33 Programming Environment s Features l l ens 33 Medialon An Integrated System te ee 34 Overview of Medialon Control System 35 Medialon Control System s Programming Environment 35 Device Control 46 xxu e 6D ER Cx Rows x Om Ee URL XR Roms ERS 36 Timeline TaskS T2772 972277274 7 72 721 T7277 2 PTT TT TP 36 StepBased Tasks and Variables eee eee 37 Panel and User Interface eee nnn 37 Master Slave Capabilities eene 37 Add on Functionalities cnn 37 Internet Functionalities 00 ce 37 Sophisticated Programming ooo e eee oo 37 Architecture uox aeu ko dup dE ac Ede d oe we ae ae eS re dea t 38 MINS lt has kt ee SG Se ee we Se ee ee ee ee a ee 38 Device MXMS eee ee ee 38 Service MXMS saasaa oho o ooh o o oor ee 39 Low Level Communicator leen 40 Protocols and Hardware Resources cens 40 II dass 40 Graphical User Interfaces a a hn 41 Built in User Interfaces een 41 Custom User Interfaces o oo 42 Variables eee RR i rins 43 System Variables eee hannis 44 Screen Variables eee rns 44 User Defined Variables eee nn 44 Medialon Control System Objects and Interactions 45 Medialon Control System Modes eee eee eee eee 45 SON MOdG 4 465564 6
51. 6 e086 ck ok ec x dee ee o 431 Timecode Resource 0 000 eee ee ee 431 InfraRed Resource a rns 432 Showmaster Logs rss 433 Manage Logs Window a s 434 Notify Messages eee rhon oan on n 435 mShowmasterCore Messages celer 435 Alarm Messages eee ehh horno n 435 mShowmasterCore Messages eller 435 ELTOIMeSSdOBS a sum eade m Ege se eee Ee Wow eee eee RG SE d 435 mShowmasterCore Messages leen 435 ManagerRT Messages leeren 436 Fatal MESSAGES xus os oque qoe Xo X XP EX Y OREO ee Oe PC AC ORA 436 mShowmasterCore Messages cler 436 Marnagerkr Messages ase sd gom ow 9e dew varas A 436 Showmaster Troubleshootings 439 SHOWMaSte 4G eevee te mee ASRS OGRE EG ROG a 439 Showmaster Editor V2 000 0 eee ee 440 ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector 441 Embedded ResourceS a ss e845 he wt des Oo dE Ese m Je exe s XE e 443 MRC Showmaster DMX c ees 443 MRC Showmaster MIDI ccnrn n 443 MRC Showmaster I O eee n 443 MRC Showmaster Serial enn 443 MRC Showmaster TimeCode c ens 443 MRC Showmaster LE leen 443 MRC Showmaster XS eer rns 443 MRC Windows COM 444 MRC Windows MID lt lt m Rh 444 External RESOUICES 05 4 646 oe due XO a a GEN 445 MRC AMX NetLinx
52. 90 RH Non condensing Power Connector socket Voltage 12V DC Mains 100 240VAC 80W adapter supplied overvoltage and short circuit protected MTBF 50 000 hours O 25 C Approvals FCC EN60950 1 CE EN55022 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 359 Accessories Included PSU Domino Power cord 6x IR LED emitters Rack Mount Brackets 360 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster LE Description Showmaster LE Description Contents of the Package The Medialon Showmaster LE Package includes e Medialon Showmaster LE e Power adaptor Getting Started Medialon Showmaster LE is designed as a stand alone Show Controller Show Controller Showmaster LE doesn t need a keyboard mouse or screen to work The rear power switch must be set to On at all times Connect the power supply and press and hold the front key to start Showmaster Front Panel Controls Key Functions A key e Holding this key during Startup will start the Showmaster in Recovery Mode See Recovery Mode on page 421 B key e Hold this key for more than 5 seconds to close all Showmaster client connections to Editor or Manager Showmaster returns to Running mode As The B key does not close client connections when Showmaster is in Recovery mode Power key e Press this key to power on Showmaster e Press this key to power off soft power Medialon Showmaster SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 361 LED Status Messages Four LEDs give a quick overview of the ma
53. B Devic Cree A Setup Control Panel Panels UserScreens New UserScreen Devices Variables Goto Previous Page Goto Next Page Goto Page Number Goto First Page p User Vanables 0 E Cue Library 0 Move Objects F fe User Groups e New UserScreen Creates a new UserScreen 128 AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens Goto previous page Changes the current page to the previous one if any on the focused UserScreen Goto Next page Changes the current page to the next one on the focused UserScreen If there is no next page a new one is created Goto page Changes the current page to specific page on the focused UserScreen if it exists Goto First page Changes the current page to the first one on the focused UserScreen Goto Last page Changes the current page to the last one on the focused UserScreen Move Objects Enables you to move one or several objects selected from one page to another This command works not only in the current UserScreen but also between various UserScreens already created HJ If you wish to move an object that has been linked to start conditions or cue parameters you MUST use this command If you cut copy paste the objects from one UserScreen to another all links to the objects are lost Graphical Objects UserScreen Toolbar The UserScreen Toolbar contains 2 types of graphical objects Dynamic Static e Dynamic objects that can perform actions and have
54. B jDoremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 ight Send Cue 00 00 00 00 send Cue 00 00 05 00 ie Medialon DMX512 1 E Medialon_DMX512_1 start Task Task_2 ig Showmaster 5 The desired Command Cue is inserted in the timeline Testing To test the cues type F2 to switch to Debug Mode and click on the Play p button of the Task toolbar SHOW PROGRAMMING 91 92 Cue Properties Select a Cue in the task to display its properties in the Properties tab Object Type Mame Description Devices Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 Command Load Clip Comment Label Time Position 4r Clip Mame ID e Out Time 00 01 30 00 Auto Play OFF e Devices Name of the selected Device e Command Name of the selected Command e Comment You can add a comment about this Cue or Command e Label Each Cue is identified by its Time Position A Label may also be added to it The Label is associated with the Cue and thus is not changed if the Time Position shifts e Time Position Time Position of the Cue e Command Parameters depending on the selected command I nserting a Message Cue Message cues are cues that have no effect on external devices but are used to dynamically document the show and give back information while the timeline is running These cues display their messages in the Task Control Panel and are also available as a Message variable if you chose to create task variables when the task was created To insert a Message cue
55. Browser ES Lister Proje ct Mame EF Devices 1 LocalPanel Go Tasks 0 Right Click sli Panels r1 s NN LocalPanel A New WebPanel ESTEE MB UserScreens Collapse All ER UserScreer_ i P User Variables 0 Ef Cue Library 0 AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 119 Ay WebPanel Server must be active to allow using WebPanels WebPanel Server must be activated to allow using WebPanels do you want to activate IE now WebPanel Properties When a WebPanel is created you need to define the size of the web page displayed remotely ESI ral Project Mame n p TH i Devices 1 E Variables me Tasks 0 rs Panels 2 El LocalPanel son pup E AAT ES El Lserscreens 22 A BEB A LI SET M ana blez T Tr La Cue Library 0 E EEDA S F Ll zer E row ps E NEEDED A 2 Properties Object Type WebP 2 Joi Mame Description ANM o User Mode Rights Yone 1 To o 0 Width E kdl T Height 768 bal eee Password WebPanel access can be protected by a password Connecting a WebPanel Open a web browser Enter http address Port panel2WebPanelname amp password password Address IP address or Computername Port Optional WebPanel Server Port used by Manager V6 default port is 80 Panel Optional name of the WebPanel to open password Optional WebPanel password if required ES WebPanel E gt
56. Ctrl Fl Tip Of The Day Medialon Internet Resources Register Your Licence About Medialon Manager About your Computer M1 Manager e Medialon Home Page ed Medialon Customer Support de Manager amp MXMs Upgrades You will have access to all recent versions of Medialon Manager and to the latest version of Medialon MRCs and MxMs The downloaded files will be zipped exe files to be launched on the Show Control system to be updated Backup your project files and quit Manager V6 Unzip the downloaded file and double click on the exe file to perform the update MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 313 314 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES MEDIALEN SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECI FIC FEATURES In this section you will discover additional functions specific to Medialon Showmaster Editor software 316 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Overview of Showmaster Editor Overview of Showmaster Editor Showmaster Editor V2 Showmaster Editor V2 is a free software dedicated to creating editing and transferring Medialon Showmaster V2 projects to connected Showmasters E Medialon Showmaster Editor 1 5 0 Documentation smpf5 File Edit Showmaster Object Windows Help m y 2 G A ES F Workspace Design E El Project Documentation Name PE Devices 6 Stop Play Record Step Forward Step Reverse Video E Locate 00 00 00 00 Fast Forward Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2
57. Duration Media Player TimeCode When you select a variable from the list the variable appears in the Edit Expression as it is named in your project You will also need to select the operators that will perform the calculation you desire Select the operators by clicking once on their icon they are inserted automatically in the Expression All the command lines can also be entered on the keyboard as long as the programming syntax is scrupulously respected Ay All string values must be enclosed within quotes textvalue 00 01 25 15 08 07 2007 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 159 Operations Conversion Rules In an operation the type of the result is the type of the left most operand of the operation The other operand is converted before the operation Table 1 Conversion results _irege ger User mese ege Tuer me String String 1 String 1 String 2 String 2 String 2 String 1 Time A LJ E LL EL Seine ering 3 5 Date Date Date Date Date 4 6 mes je E l Operation restrictions 1 2 3 4 5 6 Addition Subtract Multiply Modulo Remainder Addition only Addition Subtract Multiply Divide Addition Subtract String must have a Time format 00 00 00 00 String must have a Date format for example 00 00 0000 See Date page 148 HJ To convert an Integer that ranges from O to 100 to a Real that ranges from 0 0 to 1 0 use this kind of
58. Dynamic Graphical Objects inside them to find matching Screens or Graphical Objects User Variables The names and values of User Variables are scanned by the search engine to find the matching String Cue Library The Cue Library is scanned for matching Strings User Groups The search engine scans for all matched objects in the User Groups Resources The resources will be scanned for matching Strings Options Use Regular Expression This option enables the Regular Expression Syntax Rules for the search query Examples at matches any three character string like hat cat or bat hc at matches hat and cat b at matches all the matched strings from the regular expression at except bat hc at matches hat and cat but only at the beginning of a line hc at matches hat and cat but only at the end of a line If you are not familiar with Regular Expression Syntax the internet is a good resource for more information Whole word only If you choose to perform the query with the Whole Word Only option activated the search engine will only return the exact matches and will not display partial results Case sensitive When the Case Sensitive option is enabled only exact matches of Upper and Lower case characters will be returned in the results window Combined with the Whole Word Only option only identical results will be returned Search in contents When the Search engine performs its scan it has the op
59. Enabled a Press the button to start 18 Use Shift Enter key combination to insert a carriage return when both options are inactive e Hint A message to be displayed when the mouse hovers over the Object Bitmaps e Use the magic wand to open the I mage Selector and define the bitmap e Motif Defines the display of the Bitmap e A Bitmap s position can be defined Transparency r3 If your Bitmaps have a background color make them transparent with the eI Transparent Bitmap option When active all pixels in the bitmap with AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 131 same color as the top left corner pixel are replaced by the object s color Text Follow Bitmap Active Enabled E n Text Color Off HE 220 220 220 Text Color On m 220 220 220 er T Sa Color Off 032 032 032 sie m Color On 032 032 032 Frame Width Frame Color 000 000 255 Embossed Width D Smooth Relief Active Enabled Bitmap Off E Bitmap On Transparent Bitmap Vy Active Enabled P Center Normal stilDown Active Enabled Goto Page n 222323033333 El e Transparent BackGround option makes the object transparent text or bitmap are displayed without frame or background color Text Font B Tahoma 3 Text VPos B ottom Text HPos Right Text Color Off BE 720 270 Text Color On m 220 220 220 Color Off 032 032 032 s Background Color On 032 032 032 Frame Width Frame Calor Embossed Width Bitmap Off Bitmap On Bitmap Position
60. FEATURES Menu Showmaster Project UserData folder Edit Showmaster Object 13 New Project Ctri M ES Open Project Ctrl 0 Open Recent Project d Convert Project Ld Save Project Ctri 5 Save Project As Import Export Add Associated Files When you create a device that uses associated files select its associated files from the Project UserData folder File name for memory saving x Save in O ProjectName UserData E ck Ed gt DMX Memory dmx My Recent Documents 2 Desktop File name for memories saving 2 E v Mv Declara Save in ProjectName UserD ata j CE Ed se Matrix Memory rms My Recent Documents 3 Desktop lt Hd i o ju 3 2 My Network File name DMx_Memory dmx aces P Save as type DMX files dmx m eM My Documents My Network File name Matrix Memory rms ied Places Save as type RMS files rms Cancel A Showmaster V2 converts the project location into a generic value CURRENTPRI_USERDATA Rouvroy Matrix Switcher Setup Channels First Channel n jJ Count of channels 52 Output Line DMs Select Channels 1 F1 2 Ea Use new RODWRO 2000 Protocol Memories Backup File Mame SCURRENTPAJ_ USERBDATA Matris Memon rma General Setup Serial Part Level Range OF 0 255 MISI Video Setup Output Input Diei Audio Setup Output Input Ofte Save memories path B SCLIRRENTP
61. Fast Reverse L pines ma Locate y User Variables 1 Variable Speed 3 Cue Library 2 Set Edit Mode Start Task Task_3 Mr User Groups Edit 1 Showmaster Br Resources Set TC Generator Set Start TimeCode Create Clip Delete Clip Load Cip Set levels out 1 512 0 00 00 00 00 Link Clip b Medialon_DMX512_1 Object Type Cue Name 00 00 00 00 Description Devices Medialon DMX512 1 L I Nugget 4 ActiveDisk Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 3 amp Nugget_4 ClipCount D 1 Busy lt 0D Nuagget 4 ClipList A Nugget 4 CurrentClip 0 Nugget_4 CurrentClipName Edit Insert BES Video 7 Audio 1 No Disk gt Shuttle 3 TC i Audio 2 00 00 0 0 mi DO 00 0 Edit Insert naClipCount 0 Video Audio 1 noClipList Shuttle TC Audio2 fousClip 0 Ern HET 00 00 0 Nugget 4 StartTimeCode 00 00 0 Comment Label Time Position 00 00 02 35 T Cue Name 3 Fade Duration 00 00 00 00 Cue Levels Levels Value 3636969063 53 69 53 53 Status Not Connected E ditor Firmware Version 1 5 0 Showmaster Editor V2 is a special version of Medialon Control System software with the following specifications e Can only be used with a Showmaster e No license dongle needed e Unlimited number of StepBased tasks e Medialon Showmaster uses a dedicated Showmaster MRC to access the Showmaster s control ports e Limited set of Medialon MxMs can be used in Medialon Showmaster projec
62. Genuine MXM Genuine mxmhMedialonICynxmMedialonIO mxm6 amp mxmPMedialonIF mxmMedialonIR mxm amp mxmhMedialonLowLevelCommunicator mxmMedialonLowLevelCommunicator mxm amp mxmhMedialonMIDIYnxmMedialonMIDI mxm6 Save Custom Firmware select the location where you want to save the new firmware 6 0 3 MXM mo mamMedialondudoserv erm d mxm MRTX Destination Folder C ProgramData Medialon Showmaster2 Click on OK button to save Create Custom Firmware The custom firmware version 2 0 7 4 Beta SUP_4547 4D8 7 has been successfully created in File L PragramD atas edialan S hawmasterz 5 hawmaster Firmware z U 1 4 Beta SLP 4541 7408 2 morte nc When firmware creation is completed Showmaster Editor V2 will ask if you want to install this new firmware Do you want to install the firmware version 2 0 1 4 Beta SUP_ 4541 4008 27 Q s ss 416 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Showmaster Firmware Update Showmaster V2 Firmware Medialon Showmaster s Showmaster Editor V2 interface Updating Firmware firmware updates are executed through the New firmware must be installed in Showmaster Editor V2 before you can proceed to update the firmware in Showmaster 1 Connect Showmaster Editor V2 to Showmaster V2 2 Select update Firmware from the Showmaster menu File Edit Object Windows 3 The Update Firmware window opens Disconnect 5hift Ctrl K Project Fr Devic i
63. MUST have a value that is interpretable by the recipient For example a Locate to Time Command is only valid if the variable is a Time a Time formatted String or an integer Integers are translated to Time based on the Frame Rate of the Time parameter if the frame rate is 1 100s and the integer 100 the corresponding time value will be 00 00 01 00 To use a variable as a parameter for the Command Cue select the Command Cue you want to configure and click on the arrow to the right of the desired Command Parameter Object Type Name Description Devices Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 Command Load Clip Comment Label Y o o ss la as he Le ee b b b Time Position 4r Clip Mame ID zl Cone Tn Sut Time 00 01 30 00 Auto Play e O le E Mk AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 151 This opens the Variable Selection Window where you can search for and select the variable to use Enum ir Sting RE Date Time Real By Name Group Selection Use Filter Litteral value na variable LocalPaneLalthevS tatus LocalPanel Ctrlkeys tatus LocalPanel CurrentUsers creen ame LocalPanel KeyPress LocalPanel KeyStatus LocalPanel MouseClickLett LocalPanel Mousellick Aight LocalPanel MousexPos LocalPanel Mouse Fas LacalP anal 5 hift estatus New Variable selection list can be filtered by User Groups ETE Group Selector Group m Use Filter Litteral value no variable Media Playe
64. MxM Analog Way XSeries Analog Way IXseries products provide Hi Resolution Mixers and Seamless Switcher and offer a new high quality scaling processor with MATRIX and MIXER modes The MxM is used to create device instances inside Medialon Control System A device represents a processing system as a whole and is able to talk to the underlying hardware Each device can control between 1 and 16 processors Each processor represents a single hardware mixer or matrix MxM Analog Way OctoPlus This MxM provides serial remote control of the Analog Way Octo Series devices The OCTO Series is a computer amp video up down scaler switcher with 8 universal A V inputs It performs fast and clean transitions between any scaled video computer sources It also allows true seamless switching between one computer input direct and any other scaled video or computer input MxM Barco Folsom Encore This MxM provides remote control of the Barco Folsom Encore system MxM GrassValley Encore The Encore system is an open scalable platform for full router and facility control that features tight integration with automation systems third party tally and UMD systems and other equipment This scalable system gives everything from simple crosspoint configuration to real time centralized and distributed machine control With the help of the MxM you will be able to take commute one source to one destination on a specific level layer You ll be able
65. Object Alt Shift Left Decrease width of the selected decrease width Arrow Object Resize Object Alt Shift Rig Increase width of the selected increase width ht Arrow Object Resize Object Alt Shift Up Decrease height of the selected decrease height Arrow Object MENUS WIZARDS 28 Ul 286 Resize Object Alt Shift Do Increase height of the selected increase height wn Arrow Object Color Picker Ctrl Alt Add pointed object color to Mouse Click custom color MENUS WIZARDS Keyboard Shortcuts Action on Double click The use of the double click is widely implemented in Showmaster Editor and can greatly accelerate your programing speed Cue double click Opens up the default parameter in the properties tab for editing Variable double click In the Lister opens the properties for editing if possible Device Map double click Double clicking the background will open the bitmap property Task double click e Name or Browser Icon Opens the task in an editor e Start Condition opens the Edit Expression window of the start condition e Comments Opens the comment property Ctrl Task double click In the Browser or on the name in the Lister opens the Task Setup window Device double click Opens the device commands in the Lister Ctrl Device double click Opens the device setup window Command double click Opens the default parameter in the properties tab Panel double c
66. Password 2 2222 Retype password Z33433334 o Showmaster Pro Set Ay Administrator User Name and or Password system can be changed the Showmaster V2 Pro Administrator Account utility will be used to update User name and password see Showmaster Pro Administrator Account Utility section 11 Click Finish to complete the installation 12 Restart mEC to start Showmaster V2 Pro engine Use the Restart EC button SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 403 on the Windows Desktop E After you install Medialon Showmaster iPro a restart EC is needed Would you like to restart Shue Down EC Reactivating the Enhanced Write Filter The Enhanced Write Filter EWF allows you to write protect individual partitions The EWF is deactivated during Medialon Showmaster V2 iPro installation Siemens recommend to activate write protection The EWFMGR EXE program is used to active the EWF This utility is called at the Command Prompt 1 Enter the command ewfmgr c enable in the command prompt to activate write protection c C WINDOWS system3z cmd exe Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2600 GC Copyright 1985 2HHi Microsoft Corp EA A ESO E UT c enable pee enabling overlay Protected Volume Configuration Type RAM REG State DISABLED Boot Command ENABLE l arami 1 Param2 5 Volume ID FB Fi 4E DF 686 VE Hi 66 66 66 66 BB BB BB BB B Device Hame Device HarddiskU olumei C Max Levels Clump Size 512 Curre
67. Ports You may add InfraRed ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource menu and choosing which port you wish to add H B Resources E Serial Ports css MIDI Ports F DM Ports a3 TimeCode Ports P 0 Ports New Resource AMA NetLinx Infrared Global Cache Infrared Red Rat IR Infrared Collapse All Scan All IR Resources Scan AMX NetLinx Resources Scan Global Cach Resources Scan Infrared Ports are used by MxM Medialon InfraRed Ay Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for a description of Infrared Resources MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 303 Saving Resource Configurations Once you have set up the resources they will be saved in your project not in the program itself The Virtual resources can be different for each project and automatically become Real if the necessary hardware is available on startup If you open a project and do not have the available resources they will become Virtual so the project can be worked on OffLine using a different system You may also choose in MxM Setup to use the Unspecified option for the resource assignment This allows you to program your project before configuring the final resources that will be available If you will need to use the same resource configuration for different projects you may find it useful to save a Default Resource Configuration with the desired resources being simula
68. Show Control installation based on Medialon Control System Prerequisites This manual assumes the following prerequisites Proficiency using Windows interface General knowledge of computer hardware General knowledge of control protocols DMX 512 MIDI Serial Timecode General knowledge in audiovisual Video Video processing Audio Lighting Machinery General knowledge in show structure Manual objective After reading this manual you will be able to Describe the features and requirements of Show Control installation based on Medialon Control System Set up software and hardware required for a Show Control installation using Medialon Control System Program shows Develop custom user interfaces and logical treatments for complex show control applications Run and maintain a Show Control installation based on Medialon Control System Manual Conventions This manual uses the following conventions lt link gt each time you find text written in orange it is corresponding to an active link to an internal reference or to a web site mM This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature that is only available in Medialon Manager V6 NEW mM This icon on the left margin means the text describes a new feature available in Medialon Manager V6 that is NOT available in Medialon Manager V6 Kiosk Edition ral This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature INTRODUCTION 13 SI This icon on
69. State 137 Flash Frequency 137 Status 137 Variables 138 Library 199 Add Cue 199 Delete Cue 202 Insert Cue 98 175 200 Test Cue 202 License 292 Kiosk 293 Lite 49 292 Panel 49 294 Pro 48 292 Registration 58 List 136 Control 180 Items 136 Status 136 Variables 136 Lister 66 Flash Control 109 176 Object 66 Task 109 176 View 267 Lock Graphical Object 263 Task 182 Log races 232 History 328 Manager Cue 233 MxM CommandsTraces 329 MxM Traces 233 329 Runtime Information 328 ShowMaster Cue 328 Trace into Console 232 Trace into File 232 Logs Showmaster 264 328 M Magnetic Grid 144 263 Manager About 269 Help 268 Resources 295 Manager On Network 211 Command Close UserScreen 215 Goto Label 216 INDEX Index Goto Line 216 Goto Page 215 Goto Time 216 Load Project 214 Open UserScreen 215 Pause Task 216 Show Task 217 Start Task 215 Stop Task 216 Device Properties 213 Setup 211 Group 212 IP Port 212 Loggin Password 213 Name IP Addr 212 Network Detection 213 Login 229 User Group Shared 206 Variables 217 Manager Panel 219 Menu 261 439 Edit 262 File 261 Find 263 Object 264 Device 265 Tasks 266 UserScreen 265 Variables 266 Preferences 262 Windows 266 Close 268 Help 268 Tools 267 View 267 Workspace 266 MIDI Showmaster Setup 443 MIDI Ports Setup 298 338 Showmaster 443 Test Mode 431 USB Adaptor 376 Windows MIDI 299 Mode Editor See also Project Mode Showma
70. TEMERE UD SEE ERE D Object Type Name Cue Selection Selected Track Cue Selection All Tracks Cue Management Description Devices Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 Command Locate r Pause Point Comment Label Time Position 00 00 00 24 43 TimeCode 00 00 00 00 f Replace Device TIPS Device Auto Selection ext Device Replacement It is also possible to completely replace one Device by another Device provided they are identical All Device Command Cues and Variables that have been used in the project are reassigned to the target device To completely replace one Device by another right click on the device in the Browser tab Lister tab or Device Map and select Replace By If there are no Devices to replace it the option is not available If there are other Devices in the Project only the compatible devices will be shown Select the target Device in the list to perform the replacement All Task Cues and Variables will be reassigned to the new Device Browser i Project Name zu Devices 6 Stop m4 Showmaster f Device Map Doremi_Labs V1 Nugget Play T din 3 Medialen DMxB12 1 New Device Doremi Labs V1 Nugg Mugget 4 7 Showmaster a Medialon_DMX512_1 Setup Device E Doremi Labs V1 MHugt Video 5 Delete Device Ie Tasks 3 Replace By xi Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 My User Variables 1 m E AM E3 Cue Library 2 Devi
71. User Mode Rights 151 Wizards 277 View Browser 267 Control Center 267 Device List 267 Device Map 267 Lister 267 Menu 267 Properties 267 Task List 268 TimeBased List 107 Timeline 107 Variable List 268 Virtual Resources 304 Virtual Screen 117 W Wait 184 Wait For 186 Watchdog 307 Activity time out 231 308 Email 310 Failure Action 308 Log Event 309 INDEX Preferences 231 Restart delay 231 WebPanel Connection 120 Kiosk Mode 122 New 119 While 185 Windows MIDI Resources 299 Serial Resources 297 Wizard Cue Parameter Value 94 Graphical Object 275 Task 271 275 Variable 277 Workspace 63 Area Resize 68 Split 68 Browser tab 65 Control Center 67 Control tab 67 Custom 68 Delete 266 Device Map tab 67 Lister tab 66 Menu 266 Panels tab 125 Properties tab 66 Rename 266 Save 70 266 Tab Copy 69 Detached 70 Move 69 Themes 71 224 Toolbar 64 NOTES NOTES 495 MEDIALUN MEDI ALON I nc 245 Catalonia Ave Coral Gables FL 33134 USA Tel 1 305 445 4045 Fax 1 305 445 4048 www medialon com MEDI ALON 101 rue Pierre S mard F92324 Ch tillon Cedex France Tel 33 0 1 46 55 60 70 Fax 33 0 1 46 55 54 83 www medialon com
72. User interface are opened with a web browser on any remote machine connected to Manager V6 Design of these panels are done directly in your Medialon Manager V6 project Custom user interface named UserScreens can be easily built thanks to the graphical toolset provided by Medialon Control System V6 Graphical objects on these UserScreens can trigger tasks and or display system amp device information thus allowing you to design complete custom user interfaces 42 INTRODUCTION Overview of Medialon Control System Effects Low Smoke G300 Hazers Neutron XS Hazers As Before you can type in a language different than the one installed you must configure the keyboard to match the language 5ee Regional and Language Options page 473 Variables The various elements of Medialon Control System such as tasks devices and UserScreens share information through variables Variables can be described as objects that contain values There are 6 types of variables used by Medialon Control System and the MxMs to store information Each type has its own specificities and parameters e Integer x e Real xx e String T e Enum e Time e Date E INTRODUCTION 43 System Variables a Variables that are automatically created by Medialon Control System V6 are called System variables For example there are variables for the current time Manager s current status or project location Other System Variables are automatically cre
73. Web Panels Activate WEB Panels Enables or disables the WEB Panel HTTP server HTTP Server Port Defines the HTTP port used by Medialon Manager V6 or Showmaster V2 to listen the Web panels request by default HTTP port is 80 Default WebPanel Size Defines the default size of new WebPanels when they are created Watchdog mM Watchdog is an external program that regularly checks and controls the proper running of Medialon Manager V6 and can reboot it if it freezes up See more about Medialon Watchdog on page 307 General Setup Project Y Actyvated c Not Activated Task Aun Time Activity time aul P j Seconds Network E Restart delay Second s Usericreen zt Watchdog Note Watchdog is only active in RUN mode Lag Traces Setup Activated Not Activated Defines whether Medialon Manager uses the services of Medialon Watchdog or not Activity time out Defines the frequency in seconds of Showmaster Editor s sending of the proper operation signal Restart delay Defines the time in seconds that Watchdog must wait before proceeding with a reboot The actual time before the project is operational will depend on its size Ay Note Watchdog is active only when Medialon Manager V6 is in RUN mode ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 231 Log Traces no longer necessary Preferences Target Trace into File Hun Time Network File Made Single file UserScreen Max File Size E 2 Mb Specific File Loc
74. WebPanel Connection 120 New 119 Pause Task 181 238 Pause Point 109 175 237 Positrack 101 Device 81 190 266 Preferences 223 General 223 Log Traces 232 Menu 262 Network 229 Project 225 Runtime 228 Task 226 UserScreen 230 Watchdog 231 Print 262 Printer Setup 262 Programming 353 Programming Mode Showmaster 318 Project Associated Files 261 332 345 Backup File 312 346 Browser 65 Convert 240 261 First Start 56 Image Folder 311 345 Import 239 Mode Debug 45 261 292 Run 46 262 292 Stop 45 261 291 User 46 261 292 New 261 Open 261 Persistent Variable File 189 311 346 Preferences 225 Recover 312 346 Resources Manager 295 Showmaster 335 Resources Configuration 304 Runtime 228 Save 261 Showmaster Retrieve 331 Send 332 UserData Folder 261 332 345 Properties Cue 93 Device 80 Graphical Object 131 Button 132 Digital Slider 134 Gauge 139 LED 137 List 136 Slider 134 Text Display 137 Text Edit 135 Page 127 INDEX Index Task 109 176 UserScreen 126 Variables 148 149 View 267 Q Quit 188 189 262 R Reboot Showmaster 264 Showmaster iPro 407 Recording Cues 103 Recovery 353 RedRat IRNetBox Resources Infrared Port 450 Registration 58 Rename Device 81 213 Task 110 176 Workspace 266 Requirement 49 294 Resources 65 Browser 65 Default Configuration 304 DMX Ports 299 339 ArtNet 448 Showmaster 443 SoundLight 451 Help 305 344 Infrared Po
75. a test string using XX notation for hexadecimal bytes Example msmrt gt write midi 90 01 7F Pro Timecode Resource CHIA open timecode Opens the Timecode Input resource Example msmrt gt open timecode msmrt Timecode Port is opened close timecode Closes the Timecode Input resource Example msmrt gt close timecode msmrt Timecode Port is closed event timecode on off Turns on or off event reporting for the Timecode Input Example msmrt gt event timecode on msmrt Event Timecode set to On Example of event received msmrt Timecode Evt Size 11 00 01 43 14 SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE 431 As Timecode Events report changing timecode values once per second so the Showmaster Recovery Tools console window doesn t scroll too quickly xS I nfraRed Resource LIN open ir lt portnumber gt Opens InfraRed port portnumber Example msmrt open ir 2 msmrt Ir Port 2 is opened close ir lt portnumber gt Closes InfraRed port portnumber Example msmrt close ir 2 msmrt Ir Port 2 is closed write ir portnumber data Send data to IR port portnumber data is a test string where IR driver name and command name are indicated Example msmrt gt write ir 2 drivername commandname 432 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Showmaster Logs Showmaster Logs Medialon Showmaster traces its main activity into logs As Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro USB Key need
76. an RS 232 Serial port MxM Rouvroy Matrix Switcher The range of Rouvroy swithching matrixes offers a number of interesting features which make them particularly powerful in automated installations They are available with composite video audio RGB Serial signal Audio with volume control etc All combinations are possible on request This MxM offers all switching and volume control commands It also offers management of inputs and output labels and a memory module that makes it possible to create and use switching memories that can be stored in a file This file can be reloaded or used by several Medialon Control Systems ANNEXES Annexes Rigging MxM Stagetech Rigging System The Stagetech Rigging System SRS is a software implemented in PLCs such as the Simotion from Siemens by the Stagetech company This MxM can control multiple SRS through Ethernet The MxM controls scenic elements on the SRS these elements are called axis The MxM also controls output pins on the SRS i e relay like outputs and monitors input pins Video Processor MxM Analog Way Graphic Switcher This MxM provides serial remote control to the Analog Way Graphic Switcher The seamless GRAPHIC SWITCHER II inserts PIP cuts fades wipes and instantaneously mixes with no glitches between 16 high resolution and TV Video sources which can range from 15 KHz to 130 KHz Auto Sync amp Auto Scan up to 1600x1280 with no synchronization dropouts
77. and recorders This MxM controls Doremi Labs V1 or Doremi Labs Nugget machines In addition to standard VTR commands this MXM provides Clip Management functions The connection between the MXM and the device uses either a RS422 connection Sony 9 Pin connector or a Network connection UDP IP MxM DVS Blade The Blade is a small solid state controlled playback system that delivers broadcast quality video and audio This MXM controls and monitors the Blade plays videos executes scripts controls volume etc MxM Ektacom Streamcoder Ektacom Streamcoders are network video streaming servers They are able to Encode video streams in either MPEG1 MPEG2 or WindowsMedia9 format Stream the encoded videos over the network in HTTP Unicast or RTP UDP Multicast Record the video into files Ektacom Streamcoders provide a set of profiles Each Profile specifies a great number of capture and encoding parameters that can be simply recalled from either this MxM or the Ektacom WEB administration tool MxM GrassValley K2 The Grass Valley K2 is video server which supports 4 playback record streams This MxM controls a Grass Valley K2 with the AMP protocol either via Ethernet or RS 422 MxM GrassValley Turbo The Grass Valley Turbo iDDR is video server that supports 2 playback streams and 1 record stream This MxM controls a Grass Valley Turbo with the AMP protocol either via Ethernet or RS 422 MxM Iridas FrameCycler I
78. and they can be daisy chained using RS 232 Although they add one or several hardware interfaces to a Medialon rig they can be very useful for the distant control of devices because only a single control cable needs to be pulled They represent a sub control system The MxM provides the Dataton basic commands including interactive commands for Dataton s touch sensitive screen Touchlink Infrared MxM Medialon Infrared This MXM allows controlling various types of Infrared outputs with an unified mM AS programming and user interface The infrared resources themselves are provided by MRCs Medialon Resource Connectors that implement Infrared Resource management like Showmaster XS or Global Cach MRC ANNEXES 461 462 Audio Processor MxM BSS Soundweb This MxM provides serial remote control to BSS Soundweb devices Soundweb is a set of audio processing units that can be linked by a digital communications network The units are completely flexible you program the signal paths and block diagram of the processing using a PC choosing the processing blocks from an extensive library See http www bss co uk for more details MxM BSS Soundweb London This MxM allows control and monitoring of the three types of Soundweb London devices BLU 16 BLU 32 and BLU 80 Each MxM instance can control one London device either via a serial connection or via Ethernet TCP IP The hardware configuration and internal patch
79. be added You may create up to 63 MIDI Input or Output Ports Create Windows MIDI ES Director Output Y Input MIDI Port If you wish to delete a virtual MIDI port you may do so but the Real ports cannot be removed from a project Mame a AMA MetLins MIDI 0 1 1 In li vide owes MIDI Input Right Click ww Windows MIDI O utp s ames me indowe MIBI Output 2 New Resource Delete Resource Setup Resource DMX Ports DMX Resources are managed by Medialon Manager V6 and no longer by the MxMs as it was in versions 3 and earlier of the software If resources are scanned on startup they appear as available Click on DMX Ports node to display DMX resources E A Project Mame uw Devices H P Anet DM In Line 1 wm asks E F AnNet DM Out Line 1 1S pu DE Sl F SoundLight DMX In Line 1 Ad ScundLight DMX Out Line 1 E Cue Library 0 User Groups H esources _ Serial Parts css MIDI Ports 72 DMY Ports D TimeCode Ports FA C Parts MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 299 300 Different types of DMX resources can be mounted in your project If you create a Virtual resource the setup window automatically opens for you to configure it nr serial Ports cs MIDI Ports Right Click DM Ports 43 TimeCode Port New Resource ArtMet DMX512 A D Ports T Light DMX512 E pom SoundLight DMX512 Scan Scan All DMX512 Resources Scan A
80. board or software decoder is necessary such as Sigma Design Netstream 2 or Moonlight Elecard MPEG2 Decoder Video can be both displayed in a Medialon Manager graphical object container and sent to a video projector using the Mpeg2 decoding circuit board s analog output Video can also be displayed outside an object container In this case settings of video window aspect should be done in the setup dialog box This MxM is based on the Microsoft DirectShow Layer and the supported formats depend on the DirectShow filters installed on your PC Most common are MPEG 1 amp 2 WM9 AVI Mp3 MIDI WAV Seg These filters can be input filters like the UDP reader filter or decoder filters like the MPEG2 Decoder filter In some cases a Hardware Mpeg 2 decoding circuit board for Mpeg2 files is required to perform fast Mpeg 2 decoding This MxM has the ability to synchronize Video playback to an external reference This reference is provided via TCP IP by another MxM called MxM Medialon SyncMaster MxM Adtec MPEG Player ADTEC MPEG Players are hard drive based digital video players and network appliances designed for integration into global multimedia networks ADTEC units can be linked via Ethernet and can play synchronously for Video Walls and Multiple Projector applications This MxM is compatible with the Edje up to the 4013 model Soloist and Mirage models Note that this MxM is not compatible with Edje HD 4111 but there is a Low Level Commu
81. color with a gradation between 2 colors Variable Lister Slider 5 Click w 5lider_5 Status e Name Slider name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by default e Name Slider name Status Type Integer Values Current Status between Min and Max Status Digital Sliders BE Digital Sliders have similar properties as Sliders Select the digital slider tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your slider e Ruler defines the graduation marks and their color e Background Color defines the color of the object use the magic wand to select the color a e Shape With this option you can choose between a bar graph and a pie chart 134 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens Variable Ty pe se E ame DigitalSlider6 Click DigitalSlider b Status 128 e Name Digitalslider name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by default e Name Digitalslider name Status Type Integer Values Current Status between Min and Max Status Editable through Object Properties Max Status Min Status Status Text Edits User may need to enter text or number with the keyboard Text Edit object offers fields to do that Select the Text Edit tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your text field e Text This property contains the result of keyboard typing e f you need to limit the length of typing set the
82. control any MIDI compatible devices such as audio mixing desks lighting consoles audio sequencers fireworks controllers etc Each device can be assigned to control one MIDI in port and one MIDI out port Two devices can share the same pair of ports one device for Input one for Output MxM Medialon MIDI AudioController This MxM provides MIDI controls for audio boards It assumes that the audio Sliders are controlled by the control change It also includes commands for Program Change Note On and Note Off MxM Medialon MIDI Machine Control This MxM provides the most common MIDI Machine Control commands These commands are setup to control a VTR device on MIDI port Both the MIDI output and input ports should be used to provide full duplex dialog between the MxM and the controlled device ANNEXES 459 460 MxM Medialon MIDI Show Control This MxM provides the most common MIDI Show Control commands These commands are set up to control dedicated intelligent control equipment in theatrical live performance multimedia audiovisual and similar environments Applications may range from a single interface through which a single lighting controller can be instructed to GO STOP or RESUME to complex communications with large timed and synchronized systems utilizing many controllers of all types of performance technology This MxM provides the capability to receive and react to MSC commands to perform progra
83. creation loading and saving are done by using the BSS London Architect PC application This MxM does not provide for building DSP graphs from scratch and is not intended to replace or supersede the London Architect software By using this MxM one can control and monitor the state of any built in or custom DSP object inside the London s internal DSP graph Built in objects correspond to the common controls found in each London unit like input gains and meters and are created automatically when completing the MxM device setup User objects can be added in the device setup as well MxM Merging Ovation This MxM provides control over the Merging Ovation audio video server It allows Ovation to be used in an integrated show control environment and provides simple cuelist and cue firing capabilities as well as a positrack model which simplifies programming of mutually exclusive cues allowing shows to be edited in small chunks The Ovation Posititrack model supports a single active cue per group with time based tracking of that cue This allows the programmer to navigate through a timeline sequence and restart the show with the Ovation replaying the correct cue at the correct point in time An unlimited number of groups can be created and they are not tied to specific tracks in the timeline MxM Panasonic WR DA7 This MxM provides an easy way to control one or several Panasonic WR DA7 audio mixers from the MIDI output MxM Peavey MediaMatr
84. e Project UserManual Status M ne Stark condition Comment Devices 4 MB Task 1 Task 2 Task 3 TE Panels 1 P User Varables 0 Lue Library 0 User Groups Resources Flash Controls Start Stop Select the Tasks node to see all tasks in the Lister The status of each task is displayed by a LED Dark Blue Stopped Yellow Paused Light Blue Running Flash controls are available in the Lister tab to start or stop tasks Task Properties Expand the Tasks node in the Browser tab to see all tasks EI Project PF Devices 3 fe Tasks 3 CIT Ta sk 2 Ta sk 3 User Variables 1 Cue Library 3 User Groups Resources When you select a task in the Browser or in the Lister its properties are displayed in the Object Properties tab SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 109 Properties Object Type Task Mame Task 1 y description 2E User Mode Rights Edit Comment Condition e Name You can rename the task Don t forget to validate your changes with the Enter key e Description Description of this task e User Mode Rights Defines if this task is visible or editable in User Mode e Comment You can add a comment about this task e Condition Condition to automatically start the task Task Variables Select a task and expand it in the Browser tab to display the list of variables or the tracks in the Lister tab E Project User anual Type Aarne FL evices 4 Ta
85. e Type Shift M or select the Insert a Message menu item or right click inside the track Tracki z Doremi Labs 1 _Mugget_1 Right Click Insert Cue d gt Re insert Last Cue Alt R Add to Cue Library hiFE Insert a Message ShiFt MM1 Insert a Countdown Alt c Insert a Comment ShiFE AlE C Modify Cue Enter SHOW PROGRAMMING Timebased Tasks e Enter the Message text and hit Enter Object Type Mame Description Devices Command Message Cue E 2 7 Comment Label Time Position I J 214 ar Inserting a Countdown Cue Countdown Cues are similar to Message Cues but with advanced functionality The Task Control Panel displays the remaining time before the next Countdown Cue with an associated message To insert a Countdown Cue e Type AIt C or select the Insert Countdown Cue menu item or right click inside the track e Type a message text and hit Enter Object Type Name Description Devices 223338 Command Countdown Cue Comment Label Time Position 00 00 04151 Auto Time Counts CaountDouwn e Auto Time Countdown means that the countdown will start from the previous countdown cue or from the beginning of the timeline if there are no previous countdown cues e When No is selected the countdown will count either from the Countdown Time X time from the countdown cue s position or from the end of the last countdown cue if it is within the Cou
86. each press of the Spacebar cues are placed in the order they were in on the Timeline before their selection As Note Due to the Positrack engine a Start time of 00 00 00 00 is not allowed Use 00 00 00 01 to begin at the beginning of the timeline SHOW PROGRAMMING 99 Timeline Management There are several indicators controls and menus that allow you to modify the current Timeline s time and what part of the timeline is displayed Below is a quick summary of their uses Current Timeline position Task End Time Task time Left window time Time Ruler Right window time 02 59 a di I 17 B iW ME Ipternal Timecode 00 00 02 91 7 ES Track2 Track3 Mouse Time Scroller Begin Range ime scroller Time zoom Scroller End Range I ndicators e Task Time displays the current time of the Timeline Clicking on this control allows changing this time Keyboard Shortcut G e Current time position this thin white bar or Orange in Ice Theme shows the current position in the timeline e Mouse time the thin line blue in Backstage Theme tan in Legacy Theme and Orange in Ice Theme and associated flagged time display shows the time at the mouse position e Task End Time this thin orange line shows the Task s end time e Left window time time of the leftmost displayed part of the timeline e Right window time time of the rightmost displayed part of the timeline Controls e Time Scroller scrolls the visible
87. each time you launch your project See Registration on page 58 Autorun mode Determines which mode to switch to if the Autorun option is checked The x mngProj6 shortcut can copied in the Windows startup folder to automatically launch it when Windows starts up Prohibit Stop Requires a password before switching from Debug User Run to Stop mode Always ask for password Enables or disables asking the user for a password even if Showmaster Editor was manually started Prohibits Quit Manager Enabling this option makes it impossible to quit Medialon Manager using standard commands Alt F4 for example Delayed Startup Defines in seconds the time delay at startup between the moment Medialon Manager is launched and the moment it becomes active This can be useful in certain configurations for example when Medialon Manager could potentially start before the License Key is detected by the system 228 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Preferences Quit Quit Manager Defines a time at which Medialon Manager will automatically quit This option takes priority over Prohibit Quit Manager Quit Windows Defines a time at which Medialon Manager and Windows will automatically quit and shut down This option takes priority over Prohibit Quit Manager Enable Multi Processor Support When this preference is enabled Medialon Manager distributes its workload between all processors present on your system instead of allowing Windows to
88. expressed in number of messages min 10 max 100000 History Size Defines how many days the Logs Traces will be kept New settings become active after the next day change Enable Manager Cue traces This option enables or disables the tracing of all cues played by Showmaster Enable Runtime Information Traces Every Showmaster s System information can be traced at regular intervals To do this simply activate this option and determine the interval in seconds between runtime information traces 328 SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Menu Showmaster Enable MxM Traces Enables the tracing of MxM activity This function can be useful for tracing connection problems to Network or serial connected external devices Select from the list which MxMs you want to trace Enable Command Traces Enables Showmaster to trace commands for selected MxMs As MxM Traces must be enabled to trace MxM commands Click Update to save all changes Configuration Date amp Time say Showmaster Editor provides Date and Time synchronization for Showmasters Showmaster Configuration Fro Network V E CHA Curent Data amp Time Log Traces TEN LE OF Auto Update Time Server time windows com Passwords Curent Editor Date amp Time Manual Settings XS Time Zone OF Curent Editor Time one Settings Y Manual Settings Tite Carra GMT 05 001 Canada North American Eastern Time one Update As
89. features of the award wining Medialon Manager software such as sync amp logical programming as well as real time testing It supports multiple timelines 3rd party extension interfaces unlimited panel connections and signal recording for Serial DMX MIDI and TCP IP Medialon Manager V6 Pro Medialon Manager V6 Pro is designed for any show amp media control application INTRODUCTI ON Overview of Medialon Control System from a simple stand alone to large networked systems Several Manager V6 stations can be connected together and share data over an Ethernet network It is perfect for demanding applications such as theme parks museums or complex live events Medialon Manager V6 Pro offers multiple TimeBased tasks or Timelines StepBased tasks and custom control panels UserScreens It also allows unlimited simultaneous touch panel connections and signal recording for Serial DMX MIDI and TCP IP Medialon Manager V6 Lite Medialon Manager V6 Lite is designed for small to medium size permanent installations Though limited in capacity it offers all Medialon Manager control and programming power at an affordable price It only supports one timeline but allows 3rd party extension interfaces two simultaneous panel connections and signal recording for Serial DMX MIDI and TCP IP Medialon Manager V6 Kiosk Medialon Manager V6 KIOSK is a lite application based on the same legendary Medialon programming environment for designing Kio
90. file that cannot be opened by itself only imported into a project To export a task select the desired task in the Browser or the Lister Then select Export in the File menu The Save Export dialog box appears Choose a name and destination for the export file e taskname mngExport6 for Medialon Manager V6 Export File e taskname smef5 for Medialon Showmaster V2 Export File os Importing a Task file Ex Tasks that have been exported from a project into a mngExport6 file can be imported using Import in the File menu The import file dialog box opens with the default file filter set to Medialon Export Files Select the desired export file to be imported and click Open If the name of the imported task is identical to a task already in the project the Import Task Conflict dialog box appears Import Task Conflict One or more imported task already exists in current project do you want to Create new taska with new name Uk Update existing task with imported onels name will be kept Ma Press cancel to exit O E Ok No Cancel ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 239 You may choose to import the task as a new task with a new name The new name is automatically composed of imported task s name NEWL Z7 Alternatively you may choose to update the existing task by the imported task and keep the same name This cannot be undone and should only be chosen after having saved the project as a new versi
91. fill the Screen This option is useful to hide and protect the computer s desktop AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens UserScreen Pages A UserScreen can be composed of several pages up to 999 When you create a new UserScreen the first page is automatically generated The UserScreen Toolbar gives you buttons to navigate inside the UserScreen Previous Next Page MARA lt Goto Page Use the Next Page button in the Toolbar to add new pages Once pages are created they cannot be deleted unless the entire UserScreen is deleted Page Properties Page properties can be displayed in the Properties tab by clicking in the UserScreen s page or from the Lister tab Notice a page can have another page as its background If a background page is set all objects on the background page are visible on the current page and functional in Debug or Run modes ES Project Name Uu w Tasks 0 Er Page TE Panels 2 EF Pase 3 8l LacalPanel nis E WebPanel 1 F Varables i UserScreens 2 UserScreen_1 Wanablez Er Fage 1 Er Page 2 EF Page_ gt FT User Variables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups Properties Type Page Page 1 Color BEEBUEBUE Bitmap Motif Type Mone BackGround Page Transparent Color whe tele lete rere Use Transparent Color Active Enabled e Color Defines the background color of the page use the magic wand on the right side to open the Color Sel
92. for complex script and right to left languages including Thai Install files for E ast Asian languages 4 On the Languages tab click to select the Install files for East Asian languages check box 5 Click Apply and then click OK Supplemental language support Most languages are installed by default To install additional languages select the appropriate check box below Install files for complex script and right to left languages including Thai Install Files for E ast Asian languages Install Supplemental Language Support A You chose to install the Chinese Japanese and Korean language Files This will require 230 MB or more of available disk space The Files will be installed after vou click OK or Apply on the Regional and Language Options dialog box 6 Restart your computer when prompted If you are not prompted click Start click Shut Down and then click Restart 476 ANNEXES INDEX 478 INDEX I ndex A About Medialon Manager 269 Medialon Showmaster 269 Your Computer 269 Adlink NuDAM Resources I O Port 446 PCI 7432 Resources I O Port 446 Adrienne RG1 PCI Resources TimeCode Port 447 USB TC Resources TimeCode Port 447 Advantech ADAM Resources I O Port 447 ArtNet See also DMX Associated Files 261 Bitmap 142 See also Image Blind Mode 108 175 Browser 65 Object 65 Resources 65 Showmaster 325 Task 109 User Group 65 View 267
93. from the project after prompting for confirmation e Show Task Control Panel Only available for TimeBased tasks this command opens the selected task s Control Panel inside the Control Tab e New Task Editor Opens a new Task tab With the new tab open selecting Edit Task opens the Task Editor of the selected task in the new tab e Show Task Variable s Displays variables of the selected Task in the Lister Task Setup Clicking on the Task Setup button or right clicking on the task in the browser and selecting Setup Task opens a Task Setup dialog for the currently selected task Iw Use task warablefs Bl Restart if start condition changes to true during execution Task Duration E Automaticaly set to time of last cue M Specified duration 100 fpa n0 00 06 08 General Setup Use Task Variables If this option is checked task variables are created Restart if start condition changes to true during execution If this option is checked the task restarts when it reaches the end if its Start Condition changes to true while the task is running This is useful to guarantee that a variable change which causes the condition to become true is correctly taken into account inside the task Task Duration Specifies the duration of the task SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 111 112 Timecode Setup An additional tab is displayed on the Task Setup dialog for TimeBased tasks This tab allows you to configure the positrack behavior of
94. i 181 Stat TASK daa OE eR HE AE o d d 181 Pause Task spud do a INR d ag ce ERUNT ER Ue o ode b Ren 181 SO AES A IRURE TR STEEL EI T 1 2177 22715 181 SVG Tas aa RS AA 182 LOCK Tas uva aid Snes ae en Sa Ne acerca dc See a ee 182 GOTO Label riders OSE Ree De ae 182 SOLO TINE ets tee SER Sic si oit Sec wig ee bot beide er i Sut dur As ae QUU ME ese diosa 183 GOO LINE co de oc bow RE ded em adve wx eA e e gc ws 183 GINE qe CPC Tv 183 SNOW TaSK iconu Gnd aaa a EE eU o dem B de ee ta 184 EXPRESION tarder pudet asado ia a a AS 184 logical 85 4 2 3 3 6 3 9 Qd d AAA AA 184 VM aes oec Sic ta a b Net ei dede er a HOS aede aros seu ai a a ins 184 Wnile ZEndWHhlle dec dee deed Ee REL Rem o boe ER 185 TEE ISS ENUF 3 i ecacspt en d xe his pt AE o o eg g ie Hebe SIRE C Sad 185 Walt FOI 2x 4 4 6 darc A eO ONES RD ek ORE RR qo EP d 186 ONEXPressIiON Case sos hc fase iE oe QU Dc dete d Ga CHE ea 186 System Commands 2 24 5 a gea deci Na a es 187 SO UME BSC rd aespobur cpi vic aids ats ra ui 187 QUIE Manager 2 5 dam ee SSA ee EBS OE BSS SH SS 188 QUIE SROWMaster uc qaa aura vo ee eae See a o See 188 MOUSE CONTO 4 udo oh ERE ou a QE ona gi ede Oe 188 Load New Data Fie oasis EROR DE Res 189 Object COMMANCS s ace ua ST EC a x eC eb ew A ace e oboe d 190 Devicen Control dispo m oce id Be oot dtc DUE OE DES 190 ELO CODE OL xs amp uode Se ede e Qo UE eee HOT E de e o ae dor eke d 191 TABLE OF CONTENT 21 Get Object List ook og ron rar SOROR A
95. in out links in parallel Up to four cards can be installed in one PC MRC SoundLight gives access to DMX Ports ANNEXES 451 452 ANNEXES ANNEXES Medialon MxMs Medialon Control System sends commands to external devices via software modules called Medialon XObject Modules MxMs 454 ANNEXES Annexes Medialon MxMs Medialon Control System sends commands to external devices via software modules called Medialon XObject Modules MxMs Service MxMs Some MxMs implement services as extensions of Medialon Control System and provide sophisticated functionality like scheduling error logging or database management They are referred to as Service MxMs These MxMs greatly enhance Medialon Control System and provide the necessary resources to manage and control information or perform special tasks Ay If a Showmaster is not connected only service MxM marked will be active Debug Run Alert S howmaster is nat connected only service MAM s device will be working mm Data Management MxM Database This MxM allows interfacing of SQL compatible databases It allows reading modification and creation of data and records and sending of SQL request in the database MxM Files Management This MxM provides a simple way to copy move or erase files on the hard disk It also provides commands for reading and writing files on the local disk or on any accessible disk over the network You can also monitor chan
96. in the TimeBased Editor 3 The recording needs to be configured for each selected device click on Record Setup button 00 00 04741 B ii y F mi EN a E ee Recorder Medialon DM gt 51 23 Timeline mme Y kd m ES 00 Medialon D9ASST12 2 00 00 02 25 Medialon DMX512 3 mE A 4 Record Setup window will appear you may choose to record the Data as one single cue or as multiple cues Im Record file original DOF file ALI serssPublicDacumentssD M Records DOF Cue Type 2 Single cue restore original ODF file Y Multiple cues ae Multiple cues from existing original ODF File Acquisition and analysis parameters Sampling frequency ertz Lian error tolerancia ls s reer NE AES In E ELT UU annie If you select Single Cue don t forget to define the record file path and name 5 Select the start position on the task timeline where recorded cues will be inserted 6 Press the Start Recording Button CTRL Click to start the recording of all selected devices SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 105 7 Start the timeline to activate the recording process 8 At the end of the recording press Stop Recording button Then Medialon Control System V6 updates the Timeline with the recorded cues Recorder Medialon_DMX512_3 hd C w BE El 4100 00 a E Bn A a Ta i i i n ia n a E Lg a u u L L d L fu L End of T Track 1 Update task with recorded cues a di a a MEN EN e Internal Timecode
97. new driver opens the Driver Save As dialog box and allows you to save your driver as a new mllc file ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 253 Share Your Drivers You have worked hard to create your device driver Why not share it with other programmers by posting your driver on our website http www medialon com download ktor drivers e http www medialon com download ktor drive MXM Low Level Communicator Drivers Download Center Low level Communicator drivers are custom drivers made by Medialon Manager users using the Low Level Communicator MxM to control devices for which it does not exist a regular MxM They can be Serial TCP IP or Midi drivers LLC drivers are divided into two sections Certified drivers and Uncertified drivers Certified drivers have been tested and approved by Medialon Uncertified drivers have been submited by members of Communicator drivers exchange community and have not been tested by Medialon You can use them freely but at your own risk But when some of those drivers are tested afterward by Medialon they are pushed in the Certified drivers list LLC drivers are available for download to all users If you whish to upload and share your own drivers you first need to become member of this exchange community by submitting your contact informations here You ll receive a login and password to access the upload area gt Become member of Medialon LLC exchange community gt Submit your own LL
98. one 1 year from first date of purchase date of invoice MEDIALON SA also warrants that the original copy of the Software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying Software documentation for one 1 year from the date of receipt MEDIALON SA does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your all requirements or that the operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted Your exclusive remedy for breach of MEDIALON SA warranty shall be i in case of defects in the media the replacement by MEDIALON SA of any magnetic media not meeting the warranty and ii in case of any defect in the Software MEDIALON SA shall use reasonable efforts to provide maintenance modifications or fixes in a timely manner or at its option replace the Software provided the Software is returned with a copy of your receipt This limited warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident abuse alteration or misapplication Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period two 2 months whichever is longer MEDIALON SA is not responsible for problems caused by changes in or modifications to the operating characteristics of any computer hardware or operating system for which the Software or any upgrade or update is procured nor is MEDIALON SA for problems which occurs as a result of the use of the Software in conjunction with software of third partie
99. organized low bytes first Example Integer value 325 converted as 145 will generate the bytes 45 and 01 e high low bytes the resulting bytes in the frame will be the binary value of the parameter with the high byte first The value of the parameter is first converted in an hexadecimal integer then the resulting bytes are organized ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Driver Edition high bytes first Example Integer value 325 converted as 145 will generate the bytes 01 and 45 e literal string the resulting bytes in the frame will be the string value of the parameter If the parameter is a string or an enum the string value is keep as it is otherwize it is converted to an integer and then expressed into a string Example Integer value 325 will generate the bytes 33 32 35 ASCII code 325 Test and Result fields can be used to check convertion mode selected Size E E Result 145107 The size represents the minimum count of bytes that is sent if the result of the conversion is smaller the number is padded with zeros to the left The enum type is different than the others because for each item of the enum you must specify the name and the value to be sent TENIS arn Enum names Enum values 0 Add status Size Po Ed sue Result Cancel ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 247 Positrack Groups Each command can belong to positrack groups If several commands belonging to the same positrack group are used in a timelin
100. part of the timeline but doesn t change the current timeline time e Time Zoom sets the zoom level of the view e Scroller Begin Range Sets Displays the Begin Range of the Scroller Bar e Scroller End Range Sets Displays the End Range of the Scroller Bar Time Ruler contextual Menu Right clicking on the Time Ruler displays the Time Ruler contextual menu which allows you to set the time display format zoom levels and other settings 100 SHOW PROGRAMMING Timebased Tasks Time Zoom Allows you to set the Zoom level of the Timeline from 0 1 to 1000 and to adapt the span of the timeline to your needs Smooth Scrolling When Smooth Scrolling is active you will visualize the current time position at a fixed point as the timeline scrolls by When it is off the current Timeline position will move and the Timeline will refresh when the curser moves off the display Smooth Scrolling requires more graphical resources and can be turned off to improve graphical responsiveness Timecode Display You can change the time display format between Time and Frame views Hint Delay Cues can be resized to the point that the description is no longer visible The hint delay allows you to set the time in seconds that the cue s information will wait to be displayed when the mouse hovers over the cue 00 Right Click rr X m a Internal Timecode Time zoom yy Smooth Scrolling Timecode display F Display Frames Hint delay w Di
101. prepare a lighting memory with a DMX Send Cue command and store it in the Cue Library 1 Select a Device in the Object Browser 2 Select a command in the Object Lister 3 Drag and Drop it into the Cue Library Browser 58 Lister Project Blame f ao T e Click and Drag a EJ Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 m s Showmaster uu Record a Medialo T OM 25 ue a Ll ie ks 2 P User Yarablez O int azt Foran j Cue Library 4 eee h Fast Reverse i E me User Groups Locate Resources Variable Speed Set Edit Mode P step fn ward cte Mevyerze I nserting Cues from the Cue Library Inserting cues into a task from the Cue Library is easy Method A 1 Select the Cue Library in the Browser tab to display the cues in the Lister tab 2 Select a cue in the Lister tab 3 Drag and Drop this cue where you want to insert the cue in the Task Browser Lister ES Emm 7 el Project Mame u T j i TEN PY Devices ET T Bl qa dA FE a EN J Intern Countdown End of Scenel Doremi Labs V1 MNugget 1 remi Uoi am TER 00 00 01 14 O ERE cick and Drag i Boos ES m Manager Manager 5 SE Task El Weraner an Mehunrk 3 SN D Medialon_DMX512_2 Send Cue DD DD DD DD M TEN Sa Medialon DMB512 2 m Tasks 2 ES ul ER 1 cE Task 1 i F varnables me Tracks ZEE Task 2 i UserScreens 1 F User Varnables 0 BEI Cue Library 4 E User Groups BP Resources 200 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING The Cue Library
102. san 2 ll Lo 1C Es anel Variables KB UserScreens 1 2 Us zer Screen hes ar Er Page 1 EF Fage_2 EF Page 3 Er Page 4 Pave 5 IN Er Page 5 Click and Drag Er Fage _ mm OOD a 7 AE p ce Actor Goto Page UserScreen_1 5 L di Variables m ur Pages m ow x anel_1 My Variables MB UserScreens 1 BR UserScreer_ Mp User Variables 0 Dragging a Cue into a Task You can use drag and drop to move a cue into a task This can be from a list of cues in the Lister tab or a cue from another task Click drag and hover over the tab of the target task and drop the cue into the appropriate place in the task If you hold Ctrl key when you drop the cue you copy it instead of moving it 274 MENUS amp WIZARDS Task Creation Wizards Task Creation Wizards Dynamic Objects are capable of being linked to tasks in order to send commands process information or display monitored variables available in your project Medialon Control System V6 uses powerful wizards that allow you to create tasks without any writing or programming There are several wizards at your disposal each one designed for a specific situation Graphical Object Wizards Right clicking on a Dynamic Graphical Object opens a contextual menu that allows you to create a task related to that object Right Click Create a task started by this object T d Stepbased Add Skart Condition to selected task T Timebased C
103. set conf gateway 192 168 1 254 e pridns primary DNS address Example set conf pridns 192 168 1 1 set conf pridns nsO dnsserv net e secdns secondary DNS address Example set conf secdns 192 168 1 2 set conf secdns ns1 dnsserv net e dhcp enable on or disable off automatic IP addressing of Showmaster Example set conf dhcp on Ay Medialon Showmaster Pro network cannot be change with Recovery Tool Console e log enable on or disable off Showmaster log traces Example set conf log on e logbufsize defines the buffer size expressed in messages for Showmaster s log traces 426 SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE Recovery Tools Example set conf logbufsize 10000 e logtracecues enable on or disable off log traces of the cues executed in tasks Example set conf logtracecues on e logmxmtrace enable on or disable off log traces of MxMs Example set conf logmxmtrace off e l ogmxmcmdtrace enable lt on gt or disable off log traces of commands executed by the MxMs Example set conf logmxmcmadtrace off As logmxmtrace must be set to on before MxM commands can be traced e logrt enable on or disable off log traces of Showmaster s run time information like memory usage handles etc Example set conf logrt off e logrtperiod defines the time period expressed in milliseconds between Showmaster s run time log traces Example set conf logrtperiod 3
104. synchronized together extending the number of synchronized channels MxM Visual Circuits Server offers full control of the POP amp DVP server over the TCP IP network To make the system work the Medialon Controller Service must be installed on each server you want to control ANNEXES 469 470 ANNEXES MEDIALEN ANNEXES Regional and Language Options 472 ANNEXES Regional and Language Options Regional and Language Options This chapter discusses the installation and configuration requirements and explains how to type in East Asian languages in Medialon Control System on computers that are running Microsoft Windows XP To configure the operating system to type in the appropriate language you must configure the keyboard to type in that language If the keyboard that you want is not listed by default you may have to install additional files Configure Windows to type in multiple languages Before you can type in a language other than English you must configure the keyboard to match the language For example to type Chinese based characters configure the keyboard to map the same way as a localized Chinese keyboard To do this follow these steps 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 In Control Panel click Language and Regional Options 3 Click Add other languages and then click the Languages tab Regional and Language Options Regional Options Languages Advanced Text services and inpu
105. the Flash Controls The Cue Library The Cue Library is a convenient way to store cues that are often used Cues can be easily added to and retrieved from the library by typing keyboard shortcuts See details in The Cue Library The Cue Library chapter page 199 Task 1 lask 3 a il gt ECN Task_3 N Label Device ctio n Comment 0000 Co IE ES Start Task Task_2 0 Right Click FE Medialon_DMX51 2 1 send Cue 00 00 10 00 Insert Cue jJ cm5Showmaster Y Re insert Last Cue Alt R Medialon_0Mx512 1 d Bz3Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 2 Add to Cue Library Shift Insert a Message Shift M Alt C Insert a Comment Shift Alt C Modify Cue Enter F7 Cues Library shift i d Black E Full2 ES Dorerni_Labs_V1_Nugget_ _Locate_00_00_00_00 Insert a Countdown Pause Points Pause Points allow you to debug complicated tasks This function is not available in Run Mode See details in Advanced Tools Pause Points chapter page 237 AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 175 176 Tasks in a Project All tasks created in a project are listed in the Browser Tab Status LED Sl dl Project UserM anual Status T ame e Start condition Comment PM Devices 4 o A Tasks 3 ET MY Task_1 OUT Task_2 Task 3 rs Panels 1 P User Warniables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources Flash Controls Start Stop Select the Tasks node to display all tasks in
106. the count of character of the selected String variable Input STRINGVAR string variable enum field variable Output Integer corresponding to length of STRINGVAR Example Length TesT stRINg 11 e CharAt STRINGVAR INDEX Description Get a character of the selected string variable at a specified position Input e STRINGVAR string variable enum field variable e INDEX number integer variable real variable rounded INDEX range is zero based the first position is 0 Output Single character string corresponding to character of STRINGVAR at INDEX position If INDEX is greater than the length of STRINGVAR CharAt returns an empty string Example e CharAt TesT stRINg 3 T e CharAt TesT stRINg 35 e GetFieldOfEnum ENUMVAR INDEX Description Get field string part of the selected enum variable at specified index Input e ENUMVAR enum variable e INDEX number integer variable real variable rounded INDEX range is zero based the first enum value is 0 Output String corresponding to field of ENUMVAR at INDEX If INDEX is outside of range GetFieldOfEnum returns an empty string AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Expressions Example MyEnum Medialon Showmaster Editor v1 e GetFieldOfEnum MyEnum 2 v1 e GetFieldOfEnum MyEnum 4 e GetIndexOfEnum ENUMVAR STRING Description Searches for STRING in fields of the selected enum variable If STRING is found in the variable
107. the task depending on its timecode reference General Setup Timecode loss condition Tolerance 1 10 s o sj Acton MITT RE Free Running Stop Task Timecode sync conditions Action Wi Time slave i Forvard Only Timecode jump conditions Tolerance 1 10 s s Timecode offset Constant value 100 fps 00 00 00 00 Use constant value for timecode offset Timecode format lv Comply with TC 100 fps Ok Cancel Timecode Loss Conditions Defines the behavior of the task when reference Timecode is lost Timecode stops The tolerance is the time in tenths of a second between the expected position of the Timecode and its true position A value of 10 means that the task will consider that the Timecode is lost if the gap between the reference Timecode and the expected Timecode is greater than 1 second The Action parameter defines what the task will do if the Timecode is lost e Pause the task pauses e Continue the task ignores the incoming time code and continues on its internal clock Free Running e Stop the task stops Timecode Sync Conditions e Time slave allows continuous enslavement follows the incoming Timecode e Forward Only enables you to enslave the Timecode only if it is greater than or equal to the current time position of the task For example if you don t want the positracked Devices to reposition themselves each time the reference Timecode goes back then choose thi
108. verification on input frames Checksum ventication on output frames Checksum Type E Checksum pos from end Drele mask hex A001 Start from byte from start NI Cre initial value hend mo High byte first Stop at byte from end igh by Two s complement Count af bytes ASCII coded These parameters define the checksum verification options They work together with the checksum character and checksum before replacement options of the Frames config tab Checksum verification can be enabled on input or output frames or on both The first occurrence of the checksum character is replaced when sending or receiving by the appropriate checksum computed using the following options Checksum Type e Sum The checksum is the sum byte of the bytes between the byte indicated for start and the byte before the checksum character ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 243 244 e Xor The checksum is the byte resulting of an XOR operation between the byte indicated for start and the byte before the checksum character e Or The checksum is the byte resulting of an OR operation between the byte indicated for start and the byte before the checksum character This is a very inefficient checksum but it is present in some protocols e Crc16 The checksum is the two bytes resulting of a polynomial calculation between the byte indicated for start and the byte before the checksum character Crc cyclic redundancy check e Level Control Syste
109. which port you wish to add E Resources WTO wa Win I EE Mien Right Click AMX NetLinx Serial Comtrol DeviceMaster Serial 4B TimeCode Port Collapse All MEN FA 1 0 Ports windows LUM 1b Global Cache Serial Infrared Forts Windows COM 17 Sealevel SeaLINK Serial Windows COM 18 Windows COM Serial Windows COM 20 3 f Windows COM 21 Scan cs MIDI Ports New Resource Dx Ports Mag ag ong Cat ts Scan All Serial Resources Scan AMA NetLinx Resources Scan Global Cach Resources Scan Sealevel SeaL INK Resources Serial Ports are used by non exhaustive list e MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator e MxM Doremi Labs V1 amp Nugget e MxM Sony RS422 e MxM Barco DLP VP e MxM Analog Way iX Series e Etc As Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for non Windows Resources Windows COM Resources All Windows COM Ports installed in your PC are scanned and included in your project s resources when Medialon Manager starts MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 297 You may add virtual COM ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource Windows COM Serial menu and choosing which port you wish to add up to 255 If you wish to delete a virtual COM port you may do so but the Real ports cannot be removed from a project W LEE gim mn s El AA Right Click AA POE ez Windows COM b Delete Resource Windows COM 7 T
110. with Showmaster Editor V2 TU The Panels tab is where the custom graphical interface is designed and created To create a new UserScreen right click inside the tab and select the desired options from the menu For further information please refer to the Panels amp UserScreens page 117 Device Map Tab The Device Map tab is where you create and visualize your devices The devices are displayed as icons from which you can access information and setup menus E E E Project Manual 0001 Mame L P Ma Devices 3 Nl Manage MEDIALGN m Tasks 1 Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 rs Panels 1 AT A TE E User Variables 0 Medialon DMEB51Z 2 M E Cue Library 0 Manager fe User Groups fi Resources a Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 Medialon DMX512 2 Type DeviceMap Text Font A Arial 3 Text Color 000 000 255 Color 224 224 224 Bitmap Max Length 10 Text Position Bottom m 3 TACA Pe rA L a a a To create a new device right click inside the tab and select New Device To edit an existing device or simply view the device s Help file right click on the device icon and select the desired option See more about Device Map on page 81 Task Tab The Task tab is where the Task Editor opens The Task Editor is used to insert and edit actions cues inside task To open a Task Editor right click on a task in the Lister and select the desired option For further information please refer to the The T
111. with selected objects User Mode is only accessible from Stop Mode by typing Ctrl F2 or by clicking on the User Mode Project button bi User Mode Rights The User Mode Rights property defines the behavior of objects when Medialon Control System V6 is in User Mode In User Mode an object with no rights is not listed in the Browser or Lister the user cannot select or monitor it However all programmed commands sent to this object will be executed normally like in Run Mode Objects with View rights are listed in the Browser and Lister the user can select or monitor them An object with View rights can be used and edited in tasks if the task has Edit rights User Mode Rights and Object interactions Device is not visible in the browser Cues in tasks can t be edited Task is not visible in the browser Panel is not visible in the browser or lister UserScreen is not visible in the browser or lister Device is visible in the browser and lister Cues in tasks can be edited Task is visible in the browser and lister Task can be opened in a Task Editor read only Task Control Panel can be opened Panel is visible in the browser and lister UserScreen is visible in the browser and lister ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Task is visible in the browser and lister Task can be opened and edited in a Task Editor like in Debug Mode Variable is not Variable is visible Variables
112. 0 28 Pr LInregister PID 172 Name MedialonM anager 5 Purge Log All events of Medialon Watchdog are record into a log file The Purge Log button allows you to close the current log file and clear the LogEvent list A new log file is automatically created Medialon Watchdog V5 0 07 a 3 Log file has been renamed UA CiWindowsisystem32XMedialonWatchdog 2008 06 02 15 35 50 log A new log file has been created Log files are saved by default in the C Windows system32 directory Edit MedialonWatchDog cfg file in the Medialon Watchdog folder with a text editor to change the file location MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 309 E mail Notification Medialon Watchdog can send an e mail in case of failure detection E mail settings can be specified inside the email xml file in the Medialon Watchdog folder Ej mee Bloc nates Fichier Edition Format Affichage xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 standalone no F gt lt email l gt name svraddr valuei mail provider fr gt name svrport valuel 25 gt name domain valuel mydomain gt name user valuel yid name pwd valuel gt name reply to valuel supportBexample com value2 Support gt name from valuel machine amp example com valuez2 Machine lt param name to to valuel support amp example com value2 2 support gt lt par am param name cc gt cc valuel person amp example2 fr value2 P
113. 000 e loghistsize defines the size expressed in days of log trace history Example msmrt set conf loghistsize 10 msmrt Log History Size set to 10 call commit to apply commit This command is used to send the changes to Showmaster You only need to send a single commit after multiple set conf operations Example msmrt commit msmrt Showmaster is being rebooted As The Showmaster may disconnect or reboot after a commit command list lt componenttype gt Lists components of the selected type Example msmrt gt list prj msmrt Prj Default swmProBckProj6 msmrt Prj Default swmProProj6 msmrt Prj Default swmVarStor6 clear lt componenttype gt Deletes the component of the selected type Example clear Cfg Component types e Prj Project files e Cfg Config files e Log Log traces e mg Bitmap files added in the project SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 427 e ResImg Resources Images built in factory Reset the firmware to factory default See more about Showmaster Firmware on page 411 To confirm the operation use the commit command msmrt factory msmrt To confirm factory reset type commit msmrt If this operation is committed msmrt Showmaster will be reset to its default factory settings msmrt If you don t wish a factory reset use cancel to clear this command As This operation also deletes the current project loaded in Showmaster Don t forget to s
114. 0a dra 45 Debug MOGC arras ar x qe doce de aded e SEE ae we ae d 45 User Mode 46 RUN MOE tae amp ua eta add ell dle a de E da ad o oe es Ge ee 46 Medialon Control System Product Comparison 46 Medialon Showmaster XS 48 Medialon Showmaster LE 0 00 ee eee ee ee ee ee 48 Medialon Showmaster ST 2 00 ee eee ee ee ee ee 48 Medialon Showmaster Pro leen 48 Medialon Showmaster iPro enn 48 TABLE OF CONTENT 17 Medialon Manager V6 Pro 2 cee ee hn 48 Medialon Manager V6 Lite leen 49 Medialon Manager V6 Kiosk 000 cee eee ee ee ee es 49 Medialon Manager V6 Panel eee ee ee ee oo 49 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Computer Requirements ee ee onam n 53 Minimum System Requirements 53 Suggested System Requirements cens 53 Medialon Manager Installation 55 Installation of Main Software 00 nnn 55 aite PER 56 RCGISIPOUON se 3E uw bonc A XoREGE aca mane ue x X Ae 58 Showmaster Editor Installation 59 Installation of Showmaster Editor V2 nns 59 PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT WOFKSDOCB a x33 34x x X amp X AU ee eee ees ees awe DO The Workspace uw gor a deco d oe we noir 63 Mall TOCIDA ses rincon eran EA 64 Browser TOD eeu de cere sah ee ee eye ARANA 65 LISter Fa retornos aportas eos ee ee eee 08 CR eae oe
115. 1 It is also possible to use a network connection to establish the communication Serial Connection sy 1 If your computer uses COM port 4 type mode serial 4 CEE 3 Showmaster s response Connection mode set to serial Pro 3 Type connect password The default password is medialon CHN 4 Showmaster s response Showmaster connected Network Connection 1 Type mode tcp Showmaster s response Connection mode set to tcp Type scan Showmaster returns the list of Showmasters Type connect Showmastername password The default password is medialon 6 Showmaster s response Showmaster Showmastername connected i BR W N Console Commands Symbol Conventions means an optional parameter for example value SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 423 means a required parameter for example value is the parameter s value separator for example on off is the parameter s value for example on indicates a comment msmrt gt indicates commands you enter msmrt indicates Showmaster V2 Recovery Tools response Ay The first letters of a command can be used instead of typing the full command if the shortcut identifies a unique command help or Displays information about available commands help lt commandname gt Displays help information about the given command vers Displays the current version of Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tools cls Clear the Recovery console
116. 2 Reboot 264 Resources 335 Digital Inputs 364 374 386 Outputs 358 364 375 387 Shutdown 264 Test Mode Digital 430 DMX Port 430 MIDI Port 431 Serial Port 428 Shutdown Showmaster 264 Showmaster iPro 407 Slider 134 Status 134 Variables 134 Software Installation 55 59 Sound Beep 187 SoundLight See also DMX Start Task 181 238 Start Condition 111 169 275 Task 110 176 StepBased 171 179 Blind Mode 175 Command Expression 184 Logical Cues 184 If Else 185 OnExpression Case 186 Wait 184 Wait For 186 While 185 System 187 Device Control 190 Load New Data File 189 Mouse Control 188 Quit Manager 188 189 Sound Beep 187 Task 181 Call 183 Goto Label 182 Goto Line 183 Goto Time 183 Lock 182 Pause 181 Show 184 Start 181 Stop 181 Sync 182 UserScreen 179 Close 179 Goto Page 179 List Control 180 Object Text Control 180 Open 179 Cue New 172 Editor 177 Flash Control 174 Disable 174 Execute 174 New 171 Pause Point 175 Setup 177 178 User Mode Rights 176 Stop Task 181 238 Stop Mode 45 261 Manager 291 Sync Task 182 System Command 187 Device Control 190 Load New Data File 189 Mouse Control 188 Quit Manager 188 189 Sound Beep 187 Task 40 Blind Mode 108 175 Browser 109 268 Command Expression 184 Index Logical Cues 184 If Else 185 OnExpression Case 186 Wait 184 Wait For 186 While 185 Objects 190 Enum Control 191 Get Object List 192 System 187 Devi
117. 2 Setup 5 Select an available resource and click OK If the resource is not yet defined you can keep the resource Unspecified or use the Setup button to create a new resource 6 Once you have finished configuring the device click OK The new device is created and appears in the Browser tab and Device Map tab Device Properties Select a Device in the Browser tab or in the Device Map tab its properties are displayed in the Properties tab Object Type Device Mame Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 Description My description User Mode Rights None MXM Name Doremi Labs V 1 Nugget MXM Version 1 0 3 Final Final MXM File Name mxmbDoremiLabsV 1 mxm6 amp MXM Manufacturer Medialon Activity Active Enabled Positrack Active Enabled SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Devices MxM information used by this Device is available here You can also rename the Device Don t forget to validate your changes with the Enter key The Description field allows extra optional information User Mode Rights defines if this device object is visible in User Mode Device Activity can be enabled or disabled If Device Activity is disabled NEW mM connection with the real device is not opened and no commands generated by Medialon Control System are sent to the real world device Device Positrack can be disabled See more about Positrack on page 101 Device Map The Device map is an alternative way to present the device list contained in you
118. 296 11 42 44 406 11 42 45 375 11 42 45 500 11 42 45 812 11 42 45 843 11 42 45 843 System Info Collected System Version 1 0 0 Beta 45 mShowMasterCore mShowMasterCore mShowMasterCore Normal Local IP Addr 192 168 144 230 Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway mShowMasterCore Normal TCP Server Started mShowMasterCore Normal Pipe Server Started mShowMasterCore Normal NDD Agent Started mShowMasterCore Normal Starting ManagerRT mShowMasterCore Normal Showmaster Core Ready mShowMasterCore Normal Pipe 1 Channel Connected mShowMasterCore Normal Session 00000001 type 0 Started mShowMasterCore Normal ManagerRT Connected ManagerRT Info ManagerRT Session Opened ManagerRT Normal Loading MRCs ShowMaster DMX Normal ShowMaster DMX MRC Started ShowMaster I O Normal ShowMaster I O MRC Started ShowMaster Serial Normal ShowMaster Serial MRC Started ShowMaster DMX Normal DMX1 Close ShowMaster DMX Normal ShowMaster DMX Start ManagerRT Normal Loading MXMs ManagerRT Normal Creating modules ManagerRT Normal Checking resources mShowMasterCore Normal DB task maintenance terminated successfully ManagerRT Normal Initializing modules ManagerRT Normal TCP Server Listening on port 5000 ManagerRT Normal NDD Server Started Successfully ManagerRT Normal Completing setup ManagerRT Normal Started SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE 433 434 Manage Logs Window With the Manage Logs window you can View or Export all or
119. 71 192 168 144 240 192 168 144 169 Manager Pro Showmaster ST Manager Pro Showmaster ST 192 168 144 181 192 168 144 162 192 168 144 176 192 168 144 165 Showmaster Pro Showmaster LE Showmaster ST Showmaster XS Showmaster LE 55 255 255 0 55 255 255 0 55 255 255 0 192 168 144 242 255 255 255 55 255 255 0 55 255 255 0 55 255 255 0 55 255 255 0 192 168 144 163 255 255 255 0 Select Group zB oups MON_Panel B MON Task Br MON Variable me MON_UserScreen i T l Cancel present Medialon Manager or Medialon Showmaster Medialon On Network Mame PCdeAV4 a Showmaster B0306A medialon 4647 1c howmaster B1CF5E how master B19596 how master 916 95 show master O0C3DF howmaster 914118 E m e e p e e T Model Manager Pro Showmaster ST Manager Pro Showmaster ST Showmaster Pro Showmaster LE Showmaster ST Showmaster XS Showmaster LE Address 192 166 144 171 192 166 144 240 192 166 144 169 192 160 144 242 192 166 144 161 192 166 144 162 192 166 144 176 192 166 144 165 192 165 144 163 IP Mask Optional Specifies an IP Mask to reach the Slave if the Slave is on a different sub network IP Port Defines the IP port number used by the Medialon Slave Station s to listen for connections from the Medialon On Network Device The default IP port number is 9255 Group Select a Group of objects Tasks Variables UserScreens shared by the Slave Target Use the
120. 91 Get Object List 192 Control Panel 106 Cue Countdown 93 INDEX Message 92 New 90 Duration 111 Editor 88 100 Flash Control 108 Disable 108 Execute 108 Hint Delay 101 New Positrack 101 Recording Cues 103 Setup 111 Smooth Scrolling 101 Time Zoom 101 TimeCode 103 Display 101 External 103 Internal 103 Jump conditions 113 Loss conditions 112 Setup 112 Sync conditions 112 TimeCode Offset 113 Time X 99 Track 89 New 89 Notes 90 Setup 89 User Mode Rights 110 View List 107 Timeline 107 TimeCode Calculator 267 Showmaster Setup 443 Task 103 Tools 267 TimeCode Ports Adrienne RG1 PCI 447 Adrienne USB TC 447 Setup 301 341 Showmaster 443 TimeLine 87 See also TimeBased Time X 99 Toolbar UserScreen 129 Workspace 64 Tools 267 Cue Value Selector 94 Value Wizard 94 Graphical Object Font Selector 141 Image Selector 142 Value Selector 145 Menu 267 Timecode Calculator 267 Variable Selection 152 Track 89 Notes 90 Setup 89 U Undo 262 Update Firmware 264 Showmaster 417 Upgrade 312 User Group 65 Add Object 205 Double click 287 New 203 Shared 206 User Mode Rights 204 Variables Filtered Selection 152 User Interface 41 Built In 41 Device Control Panel 41 Task Control Panel 41 Custom 42 UserScreen 42 User Mode 46 261 Device 81 Manager 292 Rights 255 Task 110 176 User Group 204 UserScreen 126 Variable Screen 150 System 150 User 151 UserData UserData Folder 332 345
121. ADOSCSB Show master Pro Running 192 160 144 165 Em Show master B 1CFSE showmaster ST Running 192 168 144 242 a4 Showmaster B 196965 show master Pro Running 192 158 144 181 A 385A show master ST Running 192 168 144 240 show master LE Running 192 168 144 162 Name Showmaster s user defined Name Model Showmaster model XS LE ST Pro or iPro Status Current status of the Showmaster eRunning the Showmaster is running no Showmaster Editor V2s are con nected This is the Showmaster s default status SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 325 326 eProgramming a Showmaster Editor V2 is connected to this Showmaster eRecovery Mode the Showmaster is in Recovery Mode no Showmaster Edi tor V2 connections can be opened See more about Recovery Tools on page 421 e nitializing The Showmaster is starting up Address IP address of the Showmaster Select a Showmaster in the list to get additional information about it Showmaster 040809 Serial Number 20030041 Firmware Version 2 1 0 Current Project New Project Serial Number Showmaster serial number Firmware Version Current firmware version of the Showmaster Current Project Current project loaded in the Showmaster Disconnect Select Disconnect from the Showmaster menu to close the connection to the Showmaster File Edit Object Windows 5 I Connect Ctr Alt K Disconnect Shift Ctrl k Configuration Send Project Retrieve Project Manage Log
122. AM 6000 modules operation and configuration on their web site www advantech com Advantech ADAM modules Real or Virtual Resources in your project will be accessed by the MXM Medialon IO gt Home The Help document contains e Overview of the real Resource e Resource Creation and Setup Release Notes of the MRC MANAGER V6 SPECIFI C FEATURES 305 306 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Medialon Watchdog Medialon Watchdog Medialon Watchdog is an external program which regularly monitors and controls the proper running of Medialon Manager and can reboot it if it freezes up Medialon Watchdog is able to send a failure report by e mail Watchdog Overview The operating principle of Watchdog is as follows e Medialon Manager announces its presence to Medialon Watchdog and how often it will report its activity to it e According to the frequency of these reports Showmaster Editor sends a signal to Medialon Watchdog indicating its proper operation e f a problem occurs in Showmaster Editor Medialon Watchdog which will have ceased to receive these signals proceeds with a reboot according to the chosen options As Medialon Watchdog is automatically installed during Medialon Manager installation Medialon Watchdog Window Medialon Watchdog is started during Windows startup To open the Medialon Watchdog window double click the Medialon Watchdog icon in the notification area 21 04 2008 3 07 27 Notif
123. Au clad Rated Load AC 0 5 A at 125 VAC 62 5 VA max Rated Load DC 1A at 24 VDC 30 W max Max Switching Voltage 125 VAC 60 VDC Max Switching Current 1 A Contact Resistance 100 m ohms max Contact Life 5 million operations min Operating Time 5 milliseconds max Release Time 5 milliseconds max Connector Sub D 37 type Female As When using Breakout boxes SWM BO the maximum electrical specifications are 150ma 12VDC per relay with a maximum of 2A for the whole 16 relays e Power Required 5VO 30mA typical all relays off add 30mA per relay SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 377 378 5VO 510mA typical all relays ON DMX I nterface Number 1 DMX512 Output Connector XLR 5 pin type Female MI DI Interface Cable like USB MIDI interface 1 MIDI Output 1 MIDI Input Connector MIDI DIN 5 pin type Male USB 2 0 full speed transmission MIDI to USB plug and play USB class compliant USB bus powered with indication LEDs Physical Power Size Rack Mount 18 75 x 10 25 x 1 75 476 x 260 x 44 5mm Stand alone 17 38 x 10 25 x 1 75 441 x 260 x 44 5mm Weight 11 Ibs 5 kg Temperature 32 F 122 F 0 C 50 C Humidity 10 80 RH Non condensing Connector 3 pin 2 pole socket Voltage 100 240V AC 50 60 Hz Current 2 5A max at 120VAC Mains 100 240V AC adapter supplied overvoltage and short circuit protected MTBF 50 000 hours 25 C Approvals FCC EN60950 CE EN55022 Accessories Inc
124. Based tasks Parameters List Name Type String Name of the list object in the UserScreen Action Type Enum Control to apply to the list Available values e Insert Adds a new item to the list e Delete Deletes an item from the list e Get Item Retrieves the text content of a list item e Set Item Replaces the text content of a list item e Get Count Retrieves the total number of items in the list e Clear Deletes all items in the list e Get Item List Retrieves the text content of all list items e Set Item List Replaces the text content of all list items I ndex Count Type Integer A bidirectional parameter according to the action It is either the index number for the item on which the action is to be executed or it is the result from the Get Count action Text Type String A bidirectional parameter according to the action It is either the text value you give to an item or the result from the Get Item action Note If you want to add a new item to the top of the list the index parameter must be O If you want to add a new item to the bottom of the list the index parameter must be set to 1 This works only if the Sorted property of the list object is not selected Object Text Control This command can dynamically set or retrieve the text of all dynamic graphic objects This command is only available in StepBased tasks Parameters Object Name Type String Name of the object in the UserSc
125. C drivers already member Certified drivers Medialon approved Driver name Brand Model Author Version Adtec Signedge e Adtec Signedge Alan Anderson 2 0 0 Alcorn DVM2 Alcorn Mc Bride DVM2 Arno VIANDIER 1 0 0 Alcorn Digital Binloop eh Alcorn Mc Bride Digital Binloop Arno VIANDIER 1 0 0 Alpeg MP615 eh Alpege Mp615 Arno VIANDIER 1 0 0 AnalogWay OctoVue AnalogWay OctoVue Series Arno VIANDIER 1 0 1 ME E E E Steph Villet Thier Audia Digital Platform by Biamp eb BiAmp Audio Device ni Y 31 0 Barco Duet II c5 Barco Duet II Arno VIAMDIER 1 0 1 Barco Galaxy e Barco Galaxy 12 Arno VIANDIER 1 0 4 Barco Folsom ImagePRO e Barco Folsom ImagePRO Arno VIANDIER 1 0 0 Barco Quad Switcher amp Barco ro Switcher armo VIANDIER 1 0 1 Christie LX series e Christie LX series Arno VIANDIER 1 0 0 Comm Tec Protune M2 5 Comm Tec Protune M2 Steph Villet 1 0 0 Delta Lite Server Y 7th Sense Delta Lite Arno VIANDIER 1 0 0 Denon CD DN C635 Denon DN C635 TW 1 0 2 Denon_DVD DN V300 v1 1 c5 Denon DN V300 Im FA i48 You can download drivers created by other Medialon Control System users The library on the website is always growing as programmers submit their own drivers for new devices 254 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG User Mode User Mode Medialon Control System s User Mode allows the programmer to decide elements are accessible to the user which tasks which devices which commands for devices etc User Mode works like the Debug Mode but only
126. CL ooo hbk x dE oe RS Xo dod a 331 se a PIOISCE s ae ee wo x e o eoe e we aw a e ad 332 Associated Files cer hr mm rrr 332 TABLE OF CONTENT 25 ReSOUrCeS ae eee eae aaa 330 Resource Management MRC leeren 335 Add New Resource o oo ooo rn rn 336 usta presas C4 See Gbanaeed re 344 Project FIGS autre ras doradas S45 Project Files amp Folders lt lt es 345 Showmaster Project File o oo 345 UserData Folder 0 0 0 o ee es 345 Image FOld t 4 zuo XR dem OO CX Mea kw bas og 345 Persistent Variables Files oo 346 Recovering the Previous Version of a Project 346 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Overview of Showmaster nn s 349 Embedded Show Controllers cee eee eee nn 349 Showmaster XS acude aor deus ue de A a od Sw SL ec e Qe o e OE E 349 Showmaster LE esee hoo ooh aon 350 Showmaster ST au wack mn xa dede Ae de x HS ew GE DUE det cde OR e deae 350 Showmaster Pro lesson oho ao s ann 351 Showmaster iPro we hoo 352 Medialon Showmaster Modes eR mss 353 Running or Normal Mode l lle 353 Programming Mode asasan aaa 353 Recovery Mode leeren hh hn nnn 353 Recovery TOOl z aad y x oe doe REA 354 Showmaster XS Description 355 Contents of the Package lt oo
127. Chinese FRE Chinese Singapore Chinese Taiwan Croatian Croatian Bosnia and Herzegovina Czech D anish Dutch Belgium Dutch Netherlands English Australia English Belize English Canada English Canbbean English Ireland English Jamaica English Nem Zealand English Philippines English South Africa Englizh Trinidad English United Kingdom English United States English Zimbabwe Estonian Faeroese Finnish French Belgium French Canada French France French Luxembourg 4 Select the language version of the non Unicode programs you want to use 5 Click OK ANNEXES 475 How to install additional languages If the language that you want to type in is not listed in the Configure Windows to type in multiple languages section you can add languages by modifying the Regional Options The Regional Options are in Control Panel To do this follow these steps 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 In Control Panel click Language and Regional Options 3 Click Add other languages Regional and Language Options Regional Options Languages Advanced Test services and input languages To view or change the languages and methods you can use to enter test click Details Supplemental language support Most languages are installed by default To install additional languages select the appropriate check box below Install files
128. Countdown AlE C Insert a Comment 5hiFE AlE C FT r F or FF Modify Cue Enter Delete Cue Del Cue Selection Selected Track 98 SHOW PROGRAMMING Timebased Tasks Time X Time X enables selected cues to be placed across a given time at defined points i e when listening to a musical rhythm or whilst watching a video This function works as follows 1 Select the required cues either by passing the mouse pointer over them with the left mouse button pressed down or by selecting them one by one with the mouse pointer and keeping the Ctrl key on the keyboard pressed down 2 Click on the setup menu button and select Time X Bais Tracki Enter message here Wo Message send Cue i 00 00 0000 1 Send Cue c 00 DO 15400 1 e SIMedislon DMX512 2 J Medialon DMX512 2 3 A dialog box will ask for the start time of the distribution When the field has been filled in press the Spacebar to start the Timeline running 10401 1 ii PES m 3 Internal Timecode i i 00 00 04 03 Play Doremi Labs M Mt Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 eSIMedislon DMX512 2 Time A Press space bar to start then space bar to insert cue at time X Device ction Comment PM Medigzion Send Cue O00 120g LA Xa aA tere E ECC Ir rM Lx IMedialon Send Cue 00 00 100 1 E L m pn m ihe a ia a H n mu la F Medialon Send Cu F eui A Era pim Media lo Hu n am us Le 4 With
129. Devices of the same type MxM Use the Shift and or Ctrl keys to add Devices to the selection E NE TES n Project Ham fu P ame EE Devices E E Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 2 m Tasks 3 5 SEA Labs V1 Mugget 3 P User Variables 1 a Medialon DMX512_1 Cue Library 2 Nugget 4 Uzer Groupe F Showmaster H e2ouICezs ES Video 5 3 Right click inside the task editor to insert a command Jame lu i 5 Task 1 Jesi BS Doremi_Labsz v1 Mugget gg Fig Ja ill DOME Internal Timecode BS Dorem_Labs v1 Mugget 3 a id a Medialon_ ZEE e O0 01 56 59 A A A eT EES a Showmaster ideo 5 Insert Cue Re insert Last Cue Add to Cue Library Alt R Transport Shift Edit Play Insert a Message Shift M TC Generator Alt C Clip Management Shift Alt C Enter Record Insert a Countdown Step Forward Step Reverse Fast Forward IEEE Bj Cues Library shift i gt Modify Cue LEE Ll IP 3i AA w E Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 3 Medialon DMx512 1 5 Internal Timecode 3 Showmaster Ez ideo 5 EzjDoremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 3 Nugget 4 Video 5 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 235 Device Replacement Medialon Control System V6 integrates a useful function that allows you to reassign a cue to a different device or replace one device with another Device Cue Reassignment If a device command Cue has been ins
130. Documents Medialon Proj ectiProjectName UserData on your Showmaster Editor V2 PC e SCURRENTPRJ_USERDATA is equal to DefaultFolder Project Project Name UserData on the Showmaster 162 AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING Expressions Function Operators Medialon Control System V6 integrates Function Operators allowing you to extract information from complex variables or create equations using variables e Hours TIMEVAR Description Extracts the Hours value from a time variable Input TIMEVAR time variable Output Integer corresponding to hours Example Hours 12 34 15 30 12 e Minutes TIMEVAR Description Extracts the Minutes value from a time variable Input TIMEVAR time variable Output Integer corresponding to minutes Example Minutes 12 34 15 30 34 e Seconds TIMEVAR Description Extracts the Seconds value from a time variable Input TIMEVAR time variable Output Integer corresponding to seconds Example Seconds 12 34 15 30 15 e Frames TIMEVAR Description Extracts the Frames value from a time variable Input TIMEVAR time variable Output Integer corresponding to frames Example Frames 12 34 15 30 30 e Day DATEVAR Description Extracts the Day value from a date variable Input DATEVAR date variable Output Integer corresponding to day of DATE Example Day 01 18 2006 18 e DayOfTheWeekAsName DATEVAR Description Extracts the Day Name value from a date v
131. E Xx Fu P POUSSE y aa 408 FOWO ens oras EUR E ae SC dS C CUR 408 ADDIOVSIS lt europa 99 we ee Goa eo ore ee eS 408 ACCOSSOMOS eta 3 RUP US WE EU hare Gee Pe GS eee oo Ge EORR 408 SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE Showmaster Firmware 000585 00 nunnnunaatas 411 Firmware Package ec eee eer ehh nns 411 Firmware Installation 0 0 0 es 412 Firmware management 413 Create Custom Firmware ee oho e 414 Add Update er eR eR rrr 415 Delle pa eee eae eh ee eee ee enna od eh ae ee ee 416 Save Custom Firmware o 416 Update Showmaster V2 Firmware eee eee ee ees 417 Updating Firmware asau aaa nnns 417 Firmware INO o coem eana Egri nesen EE R a d 419 Reset Showmaster Firmware a a a nnn 419 Recovery TOO S 4 e 3 943 409 XR AX x OR XX sc 421 28 Recovery Mode leen hono aono n 421 Medialon Showmaster ST or Pro eene 421 Medialon Showmaster LE or XS leen 422 Medialon Showmaster iPro eee 422 Recovery Tool Console eee nnns 422 Get Connected xu auos ek et e a E DeL dh E GER n Dm d 423 Console Commands ee ee ee ee te 423 Test Mode Commands eee ee ee ee et ee 428 Serial Resources 0 0 ee a es 428 Digital I O Resource saaa nn 430 TABLE OF CONTENT Table of Content DMX512 Resources eer rns 430 MIDI RESOUFCES 5 e048 6
132. Editor V2 and Medialon Manager connections cannot be started Unable to start Pipe Server The server that manages the dialog with ManagerRT cannot be started SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 435 Unable to start Serial Server The server that manages the Recovery Tool serial connection cannot be started Recovery Mode only Unable to start NDD Agent xxx The agent that manages network detection connection cannot be started xxx gives a description of the error Unable to restart NDD The agent that manages network detection connection cannot be restarted ManagerRT shutdown failed xxx ManagerRT cannot be stopped due to xxx error ManagerRT shutdown failed xxx ManagerRT cannot be shut down due to XXX error Session Start Error xxx A session cannot be started due to xxx error Session xxx Stop Error xxx The session xxx is stopped with xxx error Switch mode failed xxx Showmaster mode switching failed with error xxx ManagerRT Messages Project File Load Error Warning during loading of file gt The current project isn t running normally check it with Showmaster Editor V2 lt Failed to load the device Device Name supported by the MXM MxM_Name All references to this device will be lost gt The current project may have been edited with a different firmware than the one currently installed on the Showmaster Check the firmware version and current project with Showmaster E
133. EndWhile Cue StepBased task only MENUS amp WIZARDS Keyboard Shortcuts Create If Else EndIf Ctrl I Create If Else EndIf Cue Cue StepBased task only Create WaitFor Cue Ctri K Create a WaitFor Cue StepBased task only Create Ctrl J Create OnExpression Case OnExpression Case EndOnExpression Cue Cue StepBased task only Create Case Ctrl J Create new Case EndCase Cue EndCase Cue inside an OnExpression EndOnExpression Cue Re Insert last Cue Alt R Re Insert the last Cue created Create Message Cue Shift M Create a Message Cue Create Comment Alt Shift C Create a Comment Cue Cue Create CountDown Alt C Create CountDown Cue Cue TimeBased task only Add Cue to Library Shift A Add selected Cue to the Library Library Cue Edit Cue ENTER Edit the selected Cue default parameter Delete Cue Delete the selected Cue Expand Cues Shift X Expand in time selected Cues TimeBased task only Compress Cues Shift C Compress in time selected Cues TimeBased task only Distribute Cues Shift D Distribute regularly in time selected Cues TimeBased task only Offset Cue Time or Enter an offset to apply to the time position of selected Cue TimeBased task only Offset Modify Cue Add substitute an offset or Time modify the time position of selected Cue TimeBased task only Select next Cue Right Arrow Select next Cue in the Timeline view MENUS amp WIZARDS 283 Select previous cue Le
134. Excluded Replaced Header character am dd Edi Ending character DA dit Delete Not for header ending character Store frames Checksum before replacement Output Frame Characters used in the format of the output frames can modified e Checksum character a character that represents the checksum in an outgoing frame It is computed before sending each frame By default the character is used Insert this character at the checksum position in the output frame The checksum is calculated according to the settings from the Checksum tab and inserted in place of the character e Decimal character This is the ASCII character used for sending a decimal character By default amp is used write amp 255 for sending this upper ASCII byte sends the bit string 11111111 e Hexadecimal character This is the ASCII character used for sending a hexadecimal character By default is used The two characters following the Hexadecimal character are evaluated to produce the output byte The notation FF sends the bit string 11111111 Write OD OA for sending a carriage return OD and a line feed 10A Input Frame These parameters define the alignment of incoming frames e Header character When this character is received it is considered to be the first character of a frame You can use a hexadecimal byte here for example 102 e Ending character When this character is received it is considered to
135. Group 287 UserScreen 287 Variable 287 Drag and Drop Cues 274 Device Commands 271 Graphical Object 271 Tab 69 Tasks 273 Variables 272 274 Duplicate Object 264 Task 111 177 East Asian languages 473 Edit Copy 263 Cut 262 Group 263 Paste 263 Select All 263 Task 111 177 Undo 262 Editor Expressions 157 Object 264 StepBased 177 Task 88 266 Read Only 226 TimeBased 100 UserScreen 123 Toolbar 129 Enum Commands Enum Control 191 Export Menu 261 INDEX Index Task 239 Expression 184 Expressions 155 Assignment 156 Editor 157 Evaluation 156 Operations 160 Calculating Date 161 Comparing time 161 Conversion rule 160 Converting Date 161 Converting Time 161 On Strings 160 Toggle Value 161 Value Selector 162 Operators 155 Arithmetical 155 Boolean 156 Function 163 Logical 156 Start Condition 169 F Finder 73 Menu 263 Firmware 45 411 Factory 419 Installation 412 Reset 419 Showmaster iPro 398 Update 264 417 Flash Control 108 174 Disable 108 174 Execute 108 174 StepBased Task 174 Task Lister 109 176 TimeBased Task 108 Function 163 see also Expression G Gauge 139 Status 139 Variables 139 Graphical Object 129 Align 144 263 Button 132 Behavior 133 Status 132 Variables 133 Color 131 Color Picker 142 Custom Color 141 Editor 141 482 Selector 141 Container 139 Digital Slider 134 Status 134 Variables 135 Drag and Drop 271 Dynamic Object
136. Help Fl amp MXMs Help Shift Fl Panels _ Device Map amp MRCs Help Shift Ctri Fl Tip Of The Day Medialon Internet Resources Medialon Home Page Ml About Medialon Showmaster E eee Anata contenders d Showmaster Editor Upgrades Showmiaster Firmware Upgrades SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE 411 Firmware Installation New versions of Medialon Showmaster firmware must first be installed in Showmaster Editor V2 before a Showmaster V2 can be updated 1 Select Install a Firmware in the File Firmware management menu File Edit Showmaster Object 13 Mew Project Ctrl N ES Open Project Ctrl O Open Recent Project Convert Project Ld Save Project Ctri 5 Save Project As Import Export Add Associated Files Stop Debug Run F2 User Made Ctrl F2 Tr Printer Setup Print Ctrl P Preferences Firmware Management Install a Firmware Add Update a MXM MRC Quit Ctri Q 2 The Firmware file browser box opens Firmware packages File Version Creator Info dE A E E No Eum m m ad ux E Showmaster Firmware 2 0 0 CUS 22215458 1 mrtx2 2 0 02U5_22215458 1 Arno E Showmaster Firmware 2 0 0 mrtx2 E em ee 5howmaster Firmware 2 0 1 mrtx2 UJ Select a firmware in the list 4 Click on Ok to start the Firmware installation Firmware Install tior Filename Showmaster Firmware 2 0 0 mrtx2 alatus Installing Fir
137. I NG MENUS amp WIZARDS This section describes your Medialon Control System software s menus and other wizards 260 MENUS amp WIZARDS Menus Menus File Menu New Project Ctri N Creates a new project Open Project Ctrl O Opens a saved project Open Recent Project Shows the last recently used files Up to 10 files are listed Convert Project Converts the current project to a different file format Save Project Ctrl S Saves the current project under the current name in the current directory Save Project as Saves the current project under another name and or in another directory Import Merges a current project with all or part of another project You can thus include UserScreens Variables and Tasks already created in previous projects In the case of multiple imports or if you import a project including names already used in the current project Devices Variables Tasks Showmaster Editor will rename the elements concerned by adding a number to them See Importing a Project file on page 239 Export Opens the Export dialog box Add Associated Files Opens the file browser to select the files you want to associate to your project The files are automatically copied into the Project UserData folder See more about Associated Files on page 332 Stop Esc Stops the project Debug F2 Runs a project with the workspace windows still open This enables you to visualize
138. I adaptor Cable Shield Output Only 5V DC Source MIDI Data Sink DMX Connection Medialon Showmaster V2 ST is provided with a DMX 512 output DMX OUT Pin 2 Data Pin 4 Pin 5 Serial Connection Medialon Showmaster ST is provided with 4 serial ports 1 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD DCD 4 DTR gt 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS Ay Showmaster ST is configured with DTE serial ports Use a crossover null modem cable when you want to connect to a computer for instance to use Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tools 376 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster ST Description Technical Specifications Network Connection Number 1 Connector RJ45 female Interface 10 100Mbps 100Base T Protocol TCP IP Addressing Static IP or DHCP USB Connections Number 2 Connector USB slave socket Interface USB2 Serial Interfaces Number 4 Connector 9 pin D type Male Format RS 232 Digital Interfaces e Isolated Inputs Number 16 Type Non polarized optically isolated inputs CMOS compatible Voltage Range 3 to 31 DC or AC RMS 40 10 000 Hz Isolation 500V channel to ground or channel to channel Input Resistance 1 8 k ohms in series with opto coupler Filter Response Times Rise Time 4 7 mS Fall Time 4 7 mS Non Filter Response Times Rise Time 10 uS Fall Time 30 uS Connector Sub D 37 type Male e Relay Outputs Number 16 SPDT form C Relays Contact Type Single crossbar Ag with
139. IDI Ports Ef Cue Library 0 BF Devices 1 amp Dh Ports Be User Groups fm Tasks 0 Current Model Showmaster Pro FA 1 0 Ports m Resources E Panels D A Serial Ports P User Vanables 0 h Project css MIDI Ports E Cue Library 0 m Jl P OM Ports m User Groups me Tasks 0 ei 1 0 Ports m Hesources Pr User Variables 0 Serial Ports E Cue Library 0 au MIDI Ports Pr User Groups F OMe Ports F e TimeLode Ports A Seral Ports e 1 0 Ports F DMX Ports Current Model Showmaster ST Current Model Showmaster Pro Infrared Ports SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 323 Showmaster Connection Showmaster Editor V2 needs a network connection to communicate with a Showmaster Connect To open a connection with a Showmaster follow the steps below 1 Select Connect from the Showmaster menu gcn Object Windows s T E Connect Ctrl Alt K Disconnect Shift Ctrl K Configuration Send Project Retrieve Project Manage Logs Firmware Info amp Update Reboot Shutdown 2 Showmaster Editor V2 scans the network and displays all Showmasters detected Showmaster Browser Marne showmaster ST Running Devi show master Pro Running E SVWHM Pro MIPZT Showmaster Pro Running 192 166 144 230 GWM Pro MIPZT Serial Firmware Version 1 5 0 8 Current Project No Project Connect Cancel Ay In some circumstances like when using an Ethernet crossover
140. LOS oon dear Gaus 192 Manager Variables cce rr ns 193 tall asnos aras ES RW EG 194 Date and Time xc x Xung arar 9 30 3e a 194 Current PFOJeCE 4 oo ow 9 dE OR box OR XO eee 3 9 3 Po de E 194 Connected Panels zw su ou eek xm Bee x RUE OSS YES x 195 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG ine Cue LIiDPFalV sawk esc xeQcxexeaxexexaaxcac3c3xexecxrae A99 The Cue Library es 199 Adding Cues to the Cue Library ooo o 199 From a TdSK sand iad we da dara daa aaa 199 From The Device Command List 0 200 Inserting Cues from the Cue Library lt o o o 200 Testing Cues from Library o ooo e e 202 Deleting Cues from Library lees 202 USSIGIOUDS x4 X3 ro ranas eee ee eee ee 203 User Group Creation oc iti eee ee konaa oa aan 203 Sub Group Creation saa aoaaa rns 204 Adding Objects to User Groups aa ee 205 Adding Objects From the Lister 205 Adding New Objects eee 206 Sharing Objects i a ak eo 9E doin ra a ICA a 206 Networking lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 209 8 1 Lr 209 Medialon On Network Device lt lt oo 211 Creating a device a 211 Device PFODGINIGS ux xad s x54 6 3xx E34 ES OEE OEE ESR uds 213 Device Commands cree ho oon m non nn 214 Device Variables leer nnn 217 Network A
141. MATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster Connected Panels This variable reurns how many panels are connected e Name Manager ConnectedPanels Type Integer This variable is the sum of all connection with WebPanel Medialon Manager Panel and OpenCAP JP Manager CurrentPrajectF ile CU serssPublicDiacumentssM edialon M Manager CurrentProjectTitle My First Project Manager ConnectedPanels 7 Connected Panel s Connected w ebPanel s Connected penLAP s Granted Panels T penCAP s Numbers of connection is limited e 2 connections are allowed by default with Medialon Manager V6 LITE e10 connections are allowed by default with Medialon Manager V6 PRO Ay Granted connections can be increase by batch of 10 connections contact your Medialon dealer AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 195 196 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG This section will teach you how to get the most of your Medialon Control System software using programming wizards network interconnection importing and exporting of sub programs and more Your ultimate lesson to become an expert in show control programming and maximize your efficiency 198 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG The Cue Library The Cue Library The Cue Library During the programming process you will find that some cues are used several times within the same project Medialon Control System V6 offers a Cue Library where commonly used cues can be stored
142. Max Length parameter 0 means no limit e Text Edit can be used to enter a password define a Password Character to display this character instead of the real entry e By default a Text Edit is a string you can force another Edit Type e None any type of entry e Integer only numeric values can be entered eTime all entry will be formatted as a time value hh mm ss ff eDate valid value format as a date ex DD MM YYYY Ay a Vertical text position is top when Word Wrap is enabled and center when Single Line is active Variable Type x N ame x op Edit 8 Text Keyboard Entry e Name Edit_name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by default e Name Edit_name Text Type String Value result of keyboard typing AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 135 Lists Medialon Control System offers a powerful tool the list The user is able to choose an item from several items See more about List Control on page 180 Select the List tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your list e The position of the selected item in the list is given by the Status parameter 1 no selection 0 first item 1 second item etc e Text Items Click on the magic wand to open the Edit Items box and add items to the list e Text Position The position of the text in the edit field can be set e Sorted The list can be logically sorted When Sorted is activated two items in the list cannot h
143. Medialon Manager V6 started Im MRC Windows MIDI gives access to MIDI Ports 444 ANNEXES Annexes External Resources Medialon Resource Connector MRC manages and configures the necessary resources for your projects Medialon Control System can manage external resources like networked resources as ArtNet Advantech AMX NetLinx Global Cach etc MRC AMX NetLinx AMX is a worldwide leader in Remote Control systems offering a wide range of controllers keypads and touch panels Pro with smart processors and powerful memory reserves the AMX NetLinx Controllers can simultaneously carry out multiple commands to produce instant Im flawless results from the devices they control When connected to a Medialon Control System V6 system via Ethernet AMX NetLinx Controllers offer their hardware resources to Medialon Control System Software There is no need for programming in the AMX NetLinx itself Medialon Control System V6 remains the master and sends commands from its own MxMs and drivers The combination of the two systems Medialon Control System V6 powerful Show Control software and AMX highly reliable hardware creates the best solution for many applications where Timelines accurate synchronization logical operations database links digital media control wide network deployment etc are necessary MRC AMX NetLinx gives access to eSerial Ports eMIDI Ports el O Ports eInfrared Ports MRC Globa
144. Medialon Showmaster Pro Date and Time cannot be change with Showmaster Editor V2 Current Date Time Sets the current Date and Time of the Medialon Showmaster e Auto Update Showmaster s current time is synchronized with an Internet time server time windows com To work Showmaster needs to be connected to the Internet e Current Editor Date Time Showmaster s current date and time is synchronized with the date and time settings on the Showmaster Editor V2 host computer e Manual Settings Sets the current date and time using specific values Time Zone Sets the Time Zone of the Medialon Showmaster SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 329 e Current Editor TimeZone Settings Showmaster uses the same Time Zone as the Showmaster Editor V2 host e Manual Settings Select the Time Zone from the list below Click Update to save your changes Configuration gt Passwords Connection between Medialon Showmaster and Showmaster Editor can be protected by a password Metwork Log Tr aces Connection Password Date Time Passwords Current Password New Password Reenter New Password Firmware Update Password Current Password New Password Reenter Mew Password Update Close Password configuration is saved in Medialon Showmaster This configuration page is used to change the passwords Connection Password This password is optional If you define a connection password it will be required eac
145. Multi Networking Number of connections is shared between WebPanel Medialon Manager V6 Panel and OpenCAP API Manager CPU Windows Kemel Time 00 00 35 S aes ser Id 81 bers IET TE Mit 2 Connected Fanel s 1 Connected WebPanel s b Connected D penCAP s O Granted PanelsOpenCAP s 10 TEST ee e whol CIL uc Watchdog Activity Mot Activated Theme Mame Legacy Medialon Manager V6 granted connection can be increased by batch of 10 connections contact your Medialon dealer Medialon Manager V6 Panel is allowed to have two MON devices regardless of what targets they are connected to Panels cannot connect to each other or to Manager V6 Kiosk Medialon Manager Kiosk is allowed to have two MON devices regardless of what targets they are connected to Kiosks cannot connect to each other or to Manager V6 Panel ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 221 222 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Preferences Preferences Medialon Control System V6 s behavior and the current project s behavior can be customized to fit your needs via the Preferences window accessible through the File Preferences menu or with a right click on the Project node in the Browser Xa lila Right Click Ai Project PrajectH ame T sr TE E Devices 3 q Preferences fw Tasks 2 P User Variables 3 Collapse All Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources Some preference s will take effect after Showmaster restart O
146. N Click on the I O Ports node to display the resources present in your project when Showmaster Editor V2 connected to Showmaster EI E Project Name FK Devices 6 510 mm Tasks 3 F User Varnables 1 Cue Library 2 User Groups A Seral Ports lt MIDI Ports E DMs Ports 10 Ports SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 341 You may add I O ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource menu and choosing which port you wish to add Name n IEEE Right Click Advantech ADAM VO AMX NetLinx I O Global Cach 1 0 pto22 SMAP Ethernet IO 1 0 New Resource Delete Resource Setup Resource Resource Help Scan All I O Resources Scan Advantech ADAM Resources Scan AMA NetLinx Resources Scan Global Cach Resources Scan pto22 SNAP Ethernet IO Resources Scan I O Ports are used by MxM Medialon IO As Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for I O Resources 342 description SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources Infrared Ports Setup Infrared resources allow Medialon Showmaster Pro to generate Infrared signals Click on the Infrared Ports node to display the resources present in your project ze E Froject Mame E Devices 1 me Tasks 0 P User Varables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups GlobalClach lA1 Resources Serial Ports au MIDI Ports FO OM Ports 6
147. N O UI LED Status Messages Four LEDs give a quick overview of the main status of Medialon Showmaster 3 zhonsnmamter EB Made Runnin lleps 1 dd Froj isho PWR Power LED This LED lights green when power is present regardless of whether Showmaster is powered on OS Showmaster LED This LED indicates the current status of Medialon Showmaster SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 371 372 SHW Project LED This LED indicates the current status of the Medialon Showmaster Project EXT This indicator turns orange when Medialon Showmaster is in Recovery mode SOS Default State or ora oO Showmaster Starting Up Shutting Down OFF o OFF e Showmaster Ready OS OFF o OFF Showmaster Project Starting OFF O Showmaster in Running Mode OFF O Showmaster in Progarmming Mode Blink Y OFF e Showmaster switching Mode Blink e OFF O Log Trace Error ON e Rear Panel The figure below shows the rear panel of Medialon Showmaster St e Power On Off switch AC Input Power Connector 100 240VAC 50 60 Hz SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster ST Description LAN RJ45 Ethernet LAN connector 10 100Base T Serial 1 Serial Port 1 Serial RS232 port Serial Port 1 is also used for Recovery Mode Serial 2 Serial Port 2 Serial RS232 port Serial 3 Serial Port 3 Serial RS232 port Serial 4 Serial Port 4 Serial RS232 port MIDI USB 1 MIDI Port Connect the USB MIDI adaptor for MIDI Input and
148. NUS amp WIZARDS Select All Cues in the List view Select All Cues in the selected Track in Timeline view Select All Cues in the Timeline Select all Cues from the start of the Timeline to cursor position in the active track Select all Cues from cursor position to the end of the Timeline in the active track Keyboard Shortcuts Select Cues from Ctri Alt F Select all Cues from the start of Start the TimeBased Task to cursor position in all tracks Select Cues to End Ctril Alt T Select all Cues from cursor position to the end of the TimeBased Task in all track Select First Cue HOME Select the first Cue of the task TimeBased task only Select Last Cue END Select the last Cue of the task TimeBased task only Deselect all ESC Deselect all Cues TimeBased Tasks only Start Pause SPACEBAR Start or Pause the task Make Task Editor Ctrl In List View of TimeBased and Text Bigger NumPad Plus in StepBased Tasks Make Task Editor Ctrl In List View of TimeBased and Text Smaller NumPad in StepBased Tasks Minus Start Insert Cue SPACEBAR Start Time X distribution or Insert the next Cue End of Time X Terminate Time X distribution Move Object Left Alt Ctri Left Move left the selected Object Arrow Move Object Right Alt Ctrl Right Move right the selected Object Arrow Move Object Up Alt Ctrl Up Move up the selected Object Arrow Move Object Down Alt Ctri Dow Move Down the selected Object n Arrow Resize
149. Objects one level towards background Align Ctri L E Opens the Align dialog box for aligning selected Graphic Objects e r ertica H None None Lett Y Top Y Center Y Center Y Aight Y Bottom Y Regular Spacing Y Regular Spacing Cancel Magnetic grid Turns the UserScreen Magnetic Grid On Off In the UserScreens the Magnetic Grid enables you to position objects in relation to each other at distances defined by the virtual grid This grid is shown by points on the UserScreens When the Magnetic Grid is turned off objects can be moved freely without snapping to grid points AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens Value Selection Window When you need to type the same information in Property fields of different objects several times you may find it useful to use the value selection window Every time a numerical or alphabetical field is filled out the values are stored in this window By clicking on the Select a Value Icon you can access this list and insert the value without typing The values are stored in a separate window whether they are numerical or alphabetical value you cannot have access to the numerical values from an alphabetical property field Select a value Select a value AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 145 146 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Variables Variables Defining Variables Variables are objects that store a value They are expressed as alphanumeric na
150. Previo I Doremi_Labs 1 Mugaget 2 Mextcl t Doremi Labs v1 Mugaget 2 Currer Doremi Labs w1 Mugget 2 clipLis Doremi Labs v1 Mugaget 2 clipca zi Doremi Labs w1 Mugaget 2 Pendir 5 El E Doremi Labs v1 Mugaet 2 Pendir Any changes in the current workspace are marked by an asterisk before the name of the selected workspace Works pace ju Design You can save it by clicking on the Save Current Workspace zm button The new workspace is then available in the list of Workspaces PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT Workspace Workspace Theme You can change the look and feel of Medialon Control System V6 s Workspace by choosing a different theme See Theme Selector page 224 Gi Dekh A ONO SD OB v b mu Gite fir E Popa AA Suan Tak QENIT 2 O Pause Task ES Taa M Kj User Vanabler Y ac Syne Tark aj Cue Library 0 e x 5 0 Use Groupe xw bel Y Renee Polo m 0 Goo lime R owmester Editor LOD SESS earn File Edt Showmaster Object Windows Help CM Taik Gia E e A wokipace besg E O ICA nd Q wala MT hu LM Dee Map ul E1 Proet Ne 00303 wv vI I I I w Command hoseravtthr a gt Stop Tak 2 User Mode fughts None z gt Soeched Task 2 gt Staut Not Connected 0 as Jas Jas Lo Lo ona aarb PROGRAMMING ENVIRONMENT 71 72 PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT The Finder The Finder Medialon Control System V6 integrates a s
151. RAMMI NG 215 Pause Task A Task may be suspended momentarily and then continued again from where it was paused To restart a Task use the Start Task command Parameters Task Name Type String Name of the Task to pause use the wizard to select an available Task Stop Task This command serves not only to stop a Task but to take it back to the start so that the next Start Task command will make it restart from the beginning Parameter Mode Type Enum Available values e Specified Task Stops the Task specified in the Task Name property e All Tasks Inclusive Stops all Tasks including the active Task handling the Stop Task command e All Tasks Exclusive Stops all Tasks excluding the active Task handling the Stop Task command Task Name Type String Name of Task to stop Use the wizard to select an available Task Goto Label A cue is identified by a number in the case of StepBased Tasks or a time for TimeBased Tasks A Label may be added to any cue The advantage of a Label is that it is associated with the cue and thus cannot be changed as a cue index can in the event of an insertion or as the time can shift in the event of a time lag The purpose of the Goto Label command is to reach the cue associated with the Label and to launch the execution of the task from this Label The same Label may be used in several different tasks Parameters Task Name Type String Name of the t
152. RC e MxM Medialon Local Media Player This MxM provides a simple and fast way to reach and play various type of media from your PC hard disk or from a distant PC or server hard disk on the network The media can be video or audio in various formats This MxM contains all useful VTR functions as Play Pause Stop and Locate e MxM Medialon WebBrowser This MxM is an Internet Browser that can be included in a Manager V6 project MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 293 294 e MxM Medialon Video Capture This MxM provides the capability to display an analog video in Medialon Manager using any Video Capture board or Web Cam e MxM Medialon Picture Pictures MxM provides a way to dynamically display still pictures and editable text in Manager V6 UserScreens Pictures supported format are JPEG BMP ICO and WMF Images can be stretched and scrolled at a adjustable speeds text can be written and scroll in the same way The user can easily create a task in Showmaster Editor for displaying sequences of images e MxM Medialon Files Management This MxM provides a simple way to copy move or erase files on the hard disk It also provides commands for reading and writing files on the local disk or on any accessible disk over the network You can also monitor changes in a folder e MxM Medialon Strings Management This MxM provides conversion and analysis of character strings e MxM Medialon Variables Management This MxM provides commands that act on
153. RJ USERDATASOMS Hemon dms VEA Offset D Cancel SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 333 This value is translated by the Showmaster to the default project location Ay You can use the value SCURRENTPR _USERDATA in expressions to define a file as a command parameter Devices Lights Command Restore acquisition Comment Label Time Position 00 00 01 09 T File name CURR 2 USERDATA Final DDF m mo e e 4 Timecode referen 00 00 00 00 Se Timecode offset 334 SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources Resources Independently from the MxMs Medialon Showmaster uses resources physically connect to devices Medialon Resource Connector MRC manages and configures the necessary resources for your projects Resource Management MRC All resources installed in Showmaster are automatically scanned when Showmaster Editor V2 connects and are available in your projects Medialon Showmaster can also manage external resources like networked resources as ArtNet Advantech Global Cach etc These resources can be of the following type e Serial Ports e MIDI Ports e DMX ports e TimeCode Ports e nput Output Ports e Infrared Ports BY Project EE U B Devices 1 Tasks 0 SEE GS Panels 0 7 EF User Variables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups css MIDI Ports P DMX Ports Seral_3 Serial 4 Seral_5 Serial B5 Serial 7 alla lll Serial 8 e TimeCode Parts HT F
154. S address of your network if DHCP is not active Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS address of your network if DHCP is not active MAC Address This field displays the MAC Address of the Showmaster Serial Number Showmaster s serial number Build Number Showmaster s build number SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 327 Click on Update to validate all changes Showmaster will then reboot Do you really want to update the Shewmaster smz with this configuration Changing the configuration may cause Shewmaster to reboot _ i Configuration gt Log Traces When Log Traces are enabled Medialon Showmaster s activity is traced into the log database Showmaster Configuration Network a Enable Log Tr pue ue Trace Buffer Size BIEN Messages Passwords History Size Dave M Enable Showblaster Cue Traces Wf Enable Runtime Informations Traces Every B o Seconds fd Enable MXM Traces B me mbDatatonS martpasx memb ll mmni ataton w atehautl P mx mb5 B rosmDigitalPrajectionPrajectars mens membDorenmbabs7 mem B membSBlade mam E memEktacom5treamcoder msmb E ru s EE B memEstronb400 mem B membrazssalleyEncore mem B mmbras alek memo E memkbrassallepT urbo memb e Enable Command Traces Update gt Close Medialon Showmaster iPro USB Key need to plugged before Medialon Showmaster iPro starts in order to start the Log engine Trace Buffer Size Defines the size of the Trace buffer
155. S terminal board can be connected to the card using a SCSI 100 Pin cable MRC Adlink PCI 7432 gives access to I O Ports 446 ANNEXES Annexes MRC Adrienne Adrienne Electronics provides the Adrienne RG1 a timecode LTC reader and generator board that fits into a PCI slot in a regular PC e mum A a I a a BalEE E 2 iff i i i T LOB n l g mm mm EE ee It can either sync to video or freerun with very high precision The AD RG1 can read and generate LTC simultaneously The Adrienne USB TC is a timecode readers for the Universal Serial Bus These tiny but rugged and nicely styled metal boxes are perfect for laptop and other slot limited applications and are both USB 1 1 and 2 0 compliant MRC Adrienne gives access to Timecode Ports MRC Advantech ADAM mM Advantech ADAM 6000 Ethernet based data acquisition and control modules provide I O data acquisition and networking in one module to build distributed monitoring and control solutions for a wide variety of applications Through FTO standard Ethernet networking ADAM 6000 receives I O values from sensors COIN and publishes these real time I O values i m P i PES ADAM 000 Analog E MRC Advantech ADAM gives access to I O Ports ANNEXES 447 MRC ArtNet Art Net is a communication system that allows DMX512 to be sent over an Ethernet network It was invented by Artistic Licence and is now published in the iPro Pro pub
156. SE Sent A aS doe 148 Variable Properties za m4 dew AAA AAA A 149 Variable Names i re oy a oe o E aa do 149 System Variable Properties eee ee ee ees 149 Screen Variable Properties 0 0000 cee eee ene eae 150 User Variable Properties a ee rn nnn 150 Using Variables as Cue Parameters ee eee eee nae 151 EXDFESSIONS scs d d ada wee te wat eee aaa LOS Logical EXDIeSSIORS cationes 155 ODerdEtOEFS y qd dauid Su A AAA ee de d 155 Evaluation expressiOLlS s qd acd Aor Ve e qo Ro Ue c ue REOR RS 156 Assignment CXPreSSIONS s spain Rod We 156 The Expression MIPOOW eii an patada asa 157 Operations 2 iria ati doe a 160 GORnVerstoN RUlBS sissy rra a Lad 0 UR CEPI RD 160 Operations on SINGS 3 3 dee amp 4d NUR So e porcine bee eos 160 CONVING TMA mE RISEILEI E 2 21 11 1 7 161 Comparing TIME 323 25 S E Wa dede X dE XE Re bx ed 161 Formatting Time Display lt lt lt o 161 Calculating and Converting Dates 161 Creating a Toggle Value ee n n rn 161 Creating a value selector with buttons sss 162 Creating a Showmaster V2 File Path 162 Function ObDerabtOES s seb E hore ree aee oe dere ded dd 163 20 TABLE OF CONTENT Table of Content Start COMCIUONS 43 35 Ge Re CORRER ese Rod Ree des 169 Setting the Start Condition of a task 169 StepBased T sKS 3x EGRE EU XU E E E xx 171 Creati
157. Sinfonia This MxM provides an easy way to interface the Sinfonia system from Real time Music Solutions Its patented technology allows for easy programming of very subtle and nuanced performances Treated like a musical instrument Sinfonia becomes transparent in the pit The traditional ensemble never plays to a click track Sinfonia as played by a musician follows the conductor It becomes a natural part of the ensemble with an integrated sound quality that matches the acoustic instruments Audio Server MxM Medialon AudioServer Medialon Audio Servers are audio servers that can control up to 96 independent audio channels Each channel can be loaded with a media file wave MP3 or any DirectShow compatible format and then played paused stopped or located independently This MxM controls Medialon Audio Servers via TCP IP on an Ethernet network MxM Sony MDSB5 This MXM controls the audio MiniDisc player model MDS B5 MxM Digigram Audio Server The Digigram Audio Server MxM allows control of multichannel Audio Servers mM from Digigram This MxM is compatible with a wide range of Digigram products These include e NCX Ethernet products The Digigram NCX200 takes audio processing power out of the computer and is connected to a server via Ethernet The NCX200 decodes and plays mono or stereo audio streams The Digigram Audio Server MxM allows full control of a network of Digigram NCX units Each device represents either a stereo
158. Software You shall inform all authorized users of the Software of the terms and conditions of this Agreement License granting The Software is protected by Intellectual Property Right copyright law and by international agreements Any partial or total reproduction or distribution of the Software by any means whatsoever is strictly prohibited Any person not respecting these provisions shall be guilty of the crime of forgery and shall be liable to the penal penalties provided for by law The Software is not sold but transferred under license You are authorized to install use run ONE copy of the Software on ONE computer If you use a network server you can install one copy of the Software on it but you must acquire a user s license for each distinct customer computer using the Software You are not authorized to use the Software for shared work time or on behalf of a third party All other rights not expressly granted in the present contract are reserved by MEDIALON SA in particular the present contract grants you no right in relation to the service or trade mark belonging to MEDIALON SA MEDIALON SA is the sole holder of the right to make any and all required corrections to the Software in order to comply with the Software documentation Save as otherwise provided by law you are not authorised to reconstitute reverse engineer to de compile or disassemble the Software product If the software product is an update you must in orde
159. State EMA BLED Boot Command DISABLE Paraml 1 Param2 5 Volume ID FB Fi 4E DF HH 7E A HH HH AA HA HB AH HB HB BH Device Name Device HarddiskU olumeil C Max Levels 1 Clump Size 512 Current Level 1 Memory used for data 19561472 bytes Memory used for mapping 16384 hytes G 5 Documents and Settings Administrator _ 400 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description 3 Restart the mEC to execute the deactivation of EWF Use the Restart EC button on the Windows Desktop F a E El Festart EC Install Showmaster V2 Pro Firmware on mEC XPe Respect the following steps to insurance the correct Showmaster V2 iPro Firmware installation 1 Insert the Showmaster V2 iPro USB key Ay You may need to restart Windows System Settings Change Windows has Finished installing new devices The software that supports your device requires that you restart your computer You must restart your computer before Ehe new settings will take effect Y Mi Pa Do you want Eo restart your computer now 2 The Windows Open file dialog should automatically open If not browse the system and select the USB key 4 am USB Key Disk Hj a 9 Installer po co ShowmasteriProFW X X X Setup exe n ProTools a di Showmaster 3 Launch Installer ShowmasteriProFW x x x_Setup exe to start Showmaster V2 iPro software installation Where x x x is the firmware number Ay Disk writing protection must deactivat
160. T ITETTTSTTSTTTt eee eS eee 467 Regional and Language Options 473 INDEX Configure Windows to type in multiple languages 473 Specify the language that is used for Medialon Control System 475 How to install additional languages 476 INGEN amp 2 5 2 53 4 4Xx 24x 35H594x4 42 4 92352 7 30 TABLE OF CONTENT INTRODUCTI ON I n this section you will discover Medialon Control System what its main elements are and how they interact with each other This section also helps those who are new to Medialon Control System to understand its core engine and ease their understanding of the following chapters 32 INTRODUCTI ON Presentation Presentation The introduction of our first Audiovisual Control Software in 1999 was driven by our vision to develop innovative technologies to help creative people to achieve compelling entertainment and edutainment experiences From the original Medialon Manager Control software Medialon Control System has evolved into a range of products e Embedded controllers Medialon Showmaster ST Medialon Showmaster Pro Medialon Showmaster LE and Medialon Showmaster iPro e Open platform control software only Medialon Manager V6 Pro Medialon Manager V6 Lite and Medialon Manager V6 Kiosk All products share the Medialon Control Programming environment based on our legendary graphical yet powerful user interface In our embedded controller
161. Task Task 1 S For instance select Task 1 in the Lister and drag it into Task 2 in the Task Editor a new cue Start Task Task 1 is inserted MENUS amp WIZARDS 273 Dragging a Variable onto a Task Select a variable in the Lister and drag it onto a Task a new expression cue is inserted ibis cinia a EE Type Mame B d Browser Project PrajectM ame E Devices 3 m Tasks 2 L3 User Variables 1 Ex Cue Library 0 fr User Groups Click and TE smpfh a Properties Object Type Mame Description Devices Showmaster Command Expression r Comment Label Expression F L 5 129 1 9 23 0 o zo zo D e he be fe Fre be Fv Fe i b NewVariable gt Dragging a UserScreen into a Task Select a UserScreen in the Lister and drag it into a Task an Open UserScreen command is inserted in the task with the selected I ENEE as Bernie E p na vrag SL Panek mol Device Ma Project Manual 0001 Hame sl WE Devices 8 BjUseSceen 2 oo 2 PT T LN A a ib Task_4 Ctl NM Label r az Ir sug 2 T nnn El LocalPanel mis My Variables NIE m3 BB UserScreer_1 ES webPanel 1 a k arablez BR Userscreen_ F User Yarnables 0 Dey Ike Acton Manager Open UserScreen UserScreen_2 Default 0 1 Dragging a Page into a Task You can insert a Goto Page when you drag a UserScreen Page from the lister onto a task Project Manual 0001 F Devices le 1
162. TimeCode Parts FA 0 Ports You may add InfraRed ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource menu and choosing which port you wish to add PI C RES Mame LI AMA NetLinx Infrare Right Click Globallach lA1 New Resource AMX MetLinx Infrared Global Cach Infrared Delete Resource Setup Resource Scan Scan All IR Resources Scan AMA NetLinx Resources 5can Global Cach Resources Resource Help Infrared Ports are used by MxM Medialon InfraRed As Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for Infrared Resources description SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 343 344 MRC Help Showmaster Editor V2 gives access to a Help file for each MRC Select the resource in the Lister tab use the right click menu to open the MRC Help Each MRC is provided with a complete Help file MEDIALGN al MRC List Medialon MRCs Help Name Advantech ADAM Version 1 5 0 Available for Manager V5 all versions Showmaster Pro iPro Limitation In Device Brand Advantech Resources types I O Overview Installation Setup Resource Support Overview Advantech ADAM 6000 Ethernet based data acquisition and control module provides I O data acquisition and networking in one module to build distributed monitoring and control solutions for a wide var
163. To Bit sulci Cancel ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 251 252 With some protocols different requests send back data with the same incoming frame syntax It is possible to link a request and a variable in order to tie the received data to the request for that data Check the Linked box to tie a specific request to a specific variable Low Level Communicator Setu d Command driver file Ma driver loaded Type ames Commands Monitoring Pd ME Fixed Length character V anable Length character m Periadic request frames sending 3etStatusl 0D MF 1 0 Wait for answer i Timeout ro 000 Add F dit Disable request frames Variables in frames recevei OriverS tatu Add Edit Delete Ok Cancel Save and Share Drivers After creating and testing of your driver you can save it and share it with other Medialon Control System projects or programmers Save Save as Click the Save or Save as button to save the current settings of the Low Level Communicator device as a driver file The file is saved in the Low Level Communicator Drivers directory inside the MXM directory t Driver Save As 100 AdtecSignE de v1 0 2 millc AlcomDVM2 mllc uL Medalon O Alcom Binloop v1 0 mllc alpeg_MPETE mil manufacturer Median Analogw ay Dctev ue v1 D 1 mlle Andlogwey_DetoVuev1 0 2 ml TERRE control System 0o Barca Duet mlle Barca Galas 2 v1 0 4 milo Description Barca lmageFra mllc Barco QuadSw
164. Transparent BackGround 000 000 255 aom EH ea Ca FP 1 ode stillDown Background Buttons e Status Button status 0 Off 1 On e Shape option changes the button from a rectangle to round e Text Position The vertical and horizontal positions of the text in the button can be set 132 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens R3 El Vertical text position is locked to top when Word Wrap is enabled in WebPanel Text Follow Bitmap option makes caption do not overlay bitmap e Effect Instead of having one color per status you can mix two colors and having a gradation effect Mode Normal StillDown Active Enabled Goto Page 0 Effect Gradation Left Effect Color 1 237 139 021 Effect Color 2 235 235 235 E eir apar erie ALU f CI ll Single Line Active Enabled Ay El Inside WebPanel Effect properties cannot be displayed if Bitmaps are used in the button e Transparent option makes the button invisible but active on the page You can use this option to create hidden buttons or active zones on a bitmap Button Behavior Buttons in Medialon Control System have three modes e Normal Push button behavior the button is On 1 while you press it When you release it its status goes to Off 0 e Toggle In this mode the button keeps its last status You press it a first time button status turns On 1 If you press it a second time the statu
165. UBMITTED TO THE STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH THE MANDATORY SAFETY RULES AS DESCRIBED INTO THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION Save as otherwise provided by law in no event and more particularly in case of breach of the safety rules as described into the Software documentation shall MEDIALON SA be held liable for any special indirect or accessory damage of any nature whatsoever including without limitation body or material injury loss of profit interruption of activity loss of information or other pecuniary losses which may result from the use or the impossibility to use the Software and this even if the company MEDIALON SA has been notified of the possibility of such prejudice Termination This Agreement is effective until terminated This Agreement will terminate if you fail to comply with any provision of the Agreement Upon termination you shall destroy all copies of the Software including security keys and modified copies if any Maintenance and support Maintenance including the provision of upgrades and updates to the Software and telephone support is available from MEDIALON SA only through a maintenance plan Updates and upgrades are not available separately General provisions If any term condition or provision in this Agreement is found to be invalid unlawful or unenforceable to any extent such invalid term condition or provision will be severed from the remaining terms conditions and provisions which will continue to be valid
166. UserScreen command Parameters UserScreen Name Type String Name of UserScreen to be opened Position Type Enum Position mode Available values e Default Uses default UserScreen position does not force Left and Top parameters e Absolute UserScreen position is forced by Left and Top parameters Left Type Integer Left position of UserScreen Top Type Integer Top position of UserScreen There is no limit to the number of screens that can be opened simultaneously except for the screen surface and thus the legibility of all of the displayed elements required by the user Close UserScreen The opposite of the previous action the closing of a UserScreen is carried out by the Close UserScreen command Parameters UserScreen Name Type String Name of UserScreen to be closed Goto Page You can display several UserScreens simultaneously but only one out of the AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 179 Pa 180 999 pages that a given UserScreen can contain The Goto Page command is used to select the desired page This choice may be selected by the user or be provided by the programming Parameters UserScreen Name Type String Name of the UserScreen to go to page on Page Type Integer Page number to go to List Control This command provides all the actions necessary for managing lists for example display update select deselect delete This command is only available in Step
167. UserScreen 42 117 Close 128 Close All 268 Command 179 Close 179 Goto Page 179 List Control 180 Object Text Control 180 Open 179 Delete 128 Double click 287 Editor 123 INDEX V Index Graphical Object 129 Button 132 Container 139 Digital Slider 134 Dynamic 129 Gauge 139 LED 137 List 136 New 130 Slider 134 Static 130 Text Display 137 Text Edit 135 Magnetic Grid 144 263 Menu 265 Move Objects 265 Graphical Object Move 129 New 119 125 265 Open 128 Page 127 Background Page 127 Color 127 Goto First 265 Goto Last 265 Goto Next 265 Goto Previous 265 Image 127 Properties 127 Panels Tab 125 Preferences 230 Properties 126 Style Border Window 126 Full Screen 126 Movable Window 126 Single Window 126 Toolbar 129 User Mode Rights 126 Virtual Screen 117 Variable Date 148 Double click 287 Integer 147 Name 149 New 148 Persistent 148 Properties 149 Real 147 String 148 Time 148 Variables 43 147 Browser 268 Cue Parameter 151 490 Filtered Selection 153 Selection 152 Delete Unused 266 Device 266 Drag and Drop 272 274 Graphical Object Button 133 Digital Slider 135 Gauge 139 LED 138 List 136 Slider 134 Text Display 137 Text Edit 135 Menu 266 Network 217 New 266 Persistent Variable File 189 311 346 Properties 148 Screen 44 147 Properties 150 User Mode Rights 150 System 44 147 Properties 149 User Mode Rights 150 Task 110 111 178 User 44 147 148 Properties 150
168. UserScreens Gauges irm The gauge object can be used to display a level or a ratio like a progress bar Select the Gauge tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your gauge e Status Current status of the Gauge e Min Max Status defines the Min and Max values of the Gauge status e Direction defines in which direction the gauge will move Right Left Up or Down e Color Off Defines the color of the background of the gauge use the magic wand to select the color e Color On Defines the color of the filled portion of the gauge use the magic wand to select the color e Text Color Defines the color of the text visible at the center of the gauge use the magic wand to select the color Hide Text option allows to get a gauge without value indicator Variable 8 Gauge 11 Click Gauge 11 5tatuz e Name Gauge_name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by default e Name Gauge name Status Type Integer Values Current Status between Min and Max Status Containers mM Containers are a very specific active device They are active since they are used to dynamically display Device Control Panels as well as MxM specific Ol information such as Database Video or Web Browser E Select the Container tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your container Ay Containers can be created only in LocalPanel Other than the standard graphical configuration properties
169. XLR 3 pin Format SMPTE Video Reference Interface Number 1 Blackburst Connector Isolated BNC female 75ohms Input level 65Vpp to 2 0Vpp 1 0Vpp nominal ntsc pal MI DI Interface Number 1 MIDI Output 1 MIDI Input Connector MIDI DIN 5 pin type Female Physical Size Rack Mount 18 75 x 10 25 x 1 75 476 x 260 x 44 5mm Stand alone 17 38 x 10 25 x 1 75 441 x 260 x 44 5mm Weight 11 Ibs 5 kg Temperature 32 F 122 F 0 C 50 C Humidity 10 80 RH Non condensing Power Connector 3 pin 2 pole socket Voltage 100 240V AC 50 60 Hz Current 2 5A max at 120VAC Mains 100 240V AC adapter supplied overvoltage and short circuit protected MTBF 50 000 hours 25 C Approvals FCC EN60950 CE EN55022 390 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster Pro Description Accessories Included Mains cable Rack Mount Brackets Options SWM BO Breakout Kit DB 37 Cable DIN Mountable IO Wiring Terminal SWM BO Breakout Kit The SWM BO Breakout Kit is a terminal block that can be used to break out Showmaster s digital I O DB37 connectors to screw terminals for easy field termination The Breakout Kit is designed with both DB37 male and female connectors so it can be used with either the Digital Input or Relay port The SWM BO Breakout Kit ships with a RoHS compliant terminal block a DB 37 Male to Female cable and two DIN rail mounting clips When using Breakout boxes SWM BO the maximum electrical specifi
170. able machine the front panel consists of function buttons and status LEDs The rear panel hosts a 10 100 Base T Ethernet interface digital outputs connections serial ports and InfraRed ports POWER d D E gt a P m Serial 1 Serial 2 AP E NES DC OF Ee CERDAN Serial3 Serial4 TEN A B USB LAN Medialon Showmaster XS operates on an embedded operating system OS Showmaster LE Showmaster LE is a all in one Embedded Show Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls and synchronizes dimmers lighting desks video projectors video servers sound processors etc Showmaster LE also provides digital I O Its free editing software Showmaster Editor V2 embeds most of the features of our award winning technology such as devices synchronization amp logical programming as well as real time testing It allows programming of one show at a time up to 3 Webpanels but does not support 3rd party extension interfaces Medialon Showmaster LE is a 1 U full 19 rack mountable machine the front panel consists of function buttons and status LEDs The rear panel hosts a 10 100 Base T Ethernet interface digital I O connections serial ports a DMX port and MIDI ports Medialon Showmaster LE operates on an embedded operating system OS Showmaster ST Showmaster ST is an all in one embedded Show Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls and synchronizes dimmers
171. above to 33 1 465554 83 for Europe amp Asia or 1 305 631 4153 for USA Y aur registration number will be sent back to you using pour contact informations Callus at x31 46 55 60 70 for Europe amp Asia or 1 305 631 4155 far USA to request pour registration number Enter your Registration Number Request Registration Mumber Once you have received your registration number simply fill out the registration number field and click the Register button Should you need to use your license on several computers you may use this number to register your software on all of them You will however need the dongle key to run Medialon Manager Ay We strongly recommend you register your license if you start your project using the autorun option The registration dialog box will continue to be displayed each time you launch your project until the software is registered 58 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Showmaster Editor Installation Showmaster Editor I nstallation This chapter describes the procedure for installing Showmaster Tools on your computer The Medialon Showmaster Tools DVD includes e Showmaster Editor V2 e Showmaster V2 Firmware e Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool e Medialon Control System V6 Reference Manual e Medialon Product Browser Installation of Showmaster Editor V2 Medialon Software Products are compatible with Windows XP Windows Vista 32Bits and Windows 7 32Bits and can be used on t
172. accuracy Nomad mi Don t warn if Device Activity is disabled Don t warn if Device Positrack is disabled General Don t ask to switch to Run Debug Mode if needed Enables or Disables the user prompt to confirm the switch to Run or Debug mode when needed Don t unlock locked tasks when switch to Debug Run mode If this option is checked locked tasks stay locked when Showmaster Editor switches to Run User or Debug mode Otherwise locked tasks are automatically unlocked Create task s variables when task created Enables or Disables the automatic creation of Task variables when the task is created This sets the default state of variable creation check box in the Create Task dialog box Open content of View Tasks in User Mode Enables or Disables the ability to open tasks in a read only Editor when a task s User Mode Rights are set to View when Showmaster Editor is in User Mode 226 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Preferences TimeBased Timeline Prompt before sending Flash Control command Enables or disables the confirmation prompt when a Flash command is about to be sent when a user clicks on a Flash command button See more about Flash Controls on page 108 Legacy positrack stop behavior Switches Positrack Stop to legacy behavior See more about Positrack on page 101 StepBased Use Pause Points in Run Mode Enables or Disables the ability to use Pause Points in Run Mode This option is unchecked by defa
173. after a Try a new firmware update from Showmaster firmware update Editor V2 Reset firmware to Factory Default No text on front panel Contact your dealer this Showmaster may display need to return to the factory Not responding to Contact your dealer this Showmaster need to Front panel keypad return to factory For further information contact your Medialon dealer Showmaster Editor V2 Common Problems amp Solutions Showmaster is not Check network connection and configuration scanned Check recovery mode Cannot upload project Check project presence with Recovery Tools Cannot download Check network connection and configuration project Check recovery mode Forget Connection Contact Medialon Support Password Firmware upgrader Check USB stick generation failed Disk full or locked For further information contact your Medialon dealer SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector Independently from MxMs Medialon Control System uses resources to physically connect to devices Medialon Resource Connector MRC manages and configures the necessary resources for your projects 442 ANNEXES Annexes Embedded Resources E jz E Pro LINS MEW LING MEW LING Medialon Resource Connector MRC manages and configures the necessary resources for your projects All resources installed in your PC or Showmaster are automatically scanned when Medialon Control System
174. al ascii value bed value low high bytes Ok high low butes literal string Result 145107 Five types of parameters can be specified eInteger eString eTime eDate eEnum Select the mode of conversion needed to fit with the output frame format Six modes can be used e hexa ascii value the resulting bytes in the frame will be the ASCII representation of the hexadecimal value of the parameter The value of the parameter is first converted in an hexadecimal integer then this integer is converted in ASCII Example Integer value 325 converted as 145 will generate the bytes 31 34 135 ASCII code 145 e decimal ascii value the resulting bytes in the frame will be the ASCII representation of the decimal value of the parameter The value of the parameter is first converted in a decimal integer then this integer is converted in ASCII Example Integer value 325 will generate the bytes 33 32 35 ASCII code alo Ji e bcd value the resulting bytes in the frame will be the binary coded decimal value of the parameter The value of the parameter is first converted in a decimal integer then each power of 10 of this value is converted in byte Example Integer value 325 will generate the bytes 03 and 25 e low high bytes the resulting bytes in the frame will be the binary value of the parameter with the low byte first The value of the parameter is first converted in an hexadecimal integer then the resulting bytes are
175. alPanel Key Status LocalPanel MouseClickLett LocalPanel Mousellick Aight LocalPanel MousexPos LocalPanel Mouse Fas LocalPanel Shifthey Status New Cancel AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 157 158 The Variable selection list can be filtered by User Group Elect a Group Selection Groupi Find Litteral value no variable Media Player CurentMedia Media Player Status Media Player TimeCode Media Player volume It can also be filtered by Variable Name Variable name filter Ej Select All Unselect All Doremi Labs w1 Muaget_1 Timetode Doremi Labs v1 Mugaet 1 Currentatatus M Doremi Labz v1 Nugget 1 currentError B Doremi Labs v1 Nugget_1 StarntTimeCode M Doremi Labz v1 Nugget_1 RemaininaTime M Doremi Labs v1 Nugget_1 ActiveDisk M Doremi Labz v1 Nugget_1 InTime B Doremi Labz v1 Nugget_1 GutTime Doremi Labs 1 Muaget_1 Currentilip Doremi_Labs 1 Muaget_1 Previou Clip Doremi Labs v1 Mugaget 1 Mextclip Doremi Labs 1 Mugget 1 CurrentiligMame Doremi Labs w41 Nugget 1 ClipList B Doremi Labz v1 Mugget 1 ClipConunt BM Doremi Labs v1 Nugget_1 PendingClipList Iv Ok Cancel AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING Use Filter Groupl Expressions You can use Category and Type buttons to show or hide variables Select a variable TE System Integer Enum ER Screen MP String 31 o User 2 Time I By Name Group Selection Use Filter Manager LurrentD ate Manager Current ime Media Player
176. all variables in a show StepBased tasks can be used to create powerful programming that performs complex actions or makes decisions Panel and User Interface Although the software comes with a number of screens to control devices or Timelines which are sufficient in most shows an additional UserScreen builder allows users to define their own screens with buttons sliders video windows LEDs bar graphs pictures and more This feature allows the creation of a protected user interface for critical shows or to customize applications These user interfaces can be opened inside local screens or remote web panels Master Slave Capabilities Medialon Control System is network oriented by design Medialon Control System applications can share their objects like Variables Tasks and UserScreens on the TCP IP network Slave or see variables and send commands to others Medialon Control Systems Master It is easy to build networked applications to control a Medialon Control System when control needs to be distributed to several other Medialon Control Systems such as touch panels Another common topology includes a central Medialon Control System controlling and supervising other Medialon Control System or touch panels Add on Functionalities Some advanced functionalities are not needed in most applications but are available through the use of special MxMs The Files Management MxM has all the necessary tools to copy move rename an
177. also to take in one shot multiple sources to one or more destination on specific levels The connection to the Encore is done via Ethernet TCP IP ANNEXES 465 Video Projector MxM Medialon PJ Link PJLink is a standard protocol for controlling projectors on network defining the following Procedures for connection to projector via network Security Control command form Medialon PJLink MXM supports the Class 1 wich performs the fundamental control of projectors of different manufacturers or models MxM Barco CRT The BARCO CRT MxM provides an easy way to control one or several BARCO CRT video projectors from Medialon Control System s RS 232 Serial ports Several Barco projectors can be controlled independently from one Serial port using different addresses on each video projector MxM Barco DLP The BARCO DLP MxM provides an easy way to control one or several BARCO DLP video projectors from Medialon Control System s RS 232 Serial ports Several Barco projectors can be controlled independently from one Serial port using different addresses on each video projector MxM Barco FLM CLM Projectors The BARCO FLM CLM MxM provides an easy way to control BARCO FLM or CLM video projectors via Ethernet TCP IP or RS 232 RS 422 Serial ports MxM Barco LCD The BARCO LCD MxM provides an easy way to control one or several BARCO LCD video projectors from Medialon Control System s RS 232 Serial ports Several Barco projectors ca
178. ame your UserScreen meaningful names can help you remember what objects you are programming Description Enter extra information User Mode Rights Defines if this UserScreen Object is visible in User Mode Position of upper left corner Left Top Use the mouse to move the UserScreen or you can enter new values in the properties fields The size of the UserScreen is defined by its Width and Height The mouse can be used to resize the UserScreen or you can enter values in the fields You can customize the Text displayed in the title bar of the UserScreen When the Always on Top option is active the UserScreen will always be in front of all other UserScreens if they overlap As When UserScreens are opened in Virtual Screen Debug or User Mode Always on Top option is not active 126 UserScreen Style A UserScreen can be displayed with 4 UserScreen styles the choice will affect the way the UserScreen appears in Run Mode Single window we E Always On Top E Border Window Movable Window Full Screen Single Window The UserScreen is painted in a fixed position window without a border The user cannot move it Border Window This style adds a thin border to the Single Window and still cannot be moved Movable Window The UserScreen has a title bar and borders The user can move the window on the screen It s the default style when you create a new UserScreen Full Screen With this style the UserScreen will
179. amed using a logical procedure The names are divided into two parts ObjectName Description For instance Manager CurrentTime or Button Status You may choose to follow this nomenclature when creating User Variables or to use another one However it is very important to give a precise name to each Variable you create this will ease navigation when searching for the variable during programming System Variable Properties As we have seen System variables are created with the devices Manager being seen as a device automatically generated in the project will create Manager System Variables Each device created has its own variables and so do tasks if you chose to create Task Variables when creating the task To access the list of an object s variables select the Variables folder of the desired device or task and the Lister automatically updates nu Project Manual 0001 Type Mame Value BP Devices 5 D Manager CurrentTime 14 19 47457 100 fps A Manager a i Ed Variables Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 a Medialon_DMmx512_2 on Medialon Low Level Communicator 4 i 5 Medialon on Network 3 X Manager CurentProjectT itle Manager CurrentD ay Monday 1 Manager CurrentD ate 30705 2011 Manda Manager CurrentS tatus Stop 0 Manager CurentProjectFile LI serssarna viandi 7 Tasks 2 rs Panels 1 To display a Variable s properties select it to update the Properties tab 5 Object Type Variabl
180. and enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law This Agreement shall be interpreted and construed in accordance with the laws of France Any dispute arising out of this Agreement shall be submitted to Paris Commercial Court Tribunal de Commerce de Paris MEDIALON SA 101 rue Pierre S mard 92324 Ch tillon Cedex France www medialon com NN NU A UY N EF 00 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 12 Use only
181. and test the project while still being able to adjust some Variables and tasks for debugging purposes User Ctrl F2 Runs a project with the workspace windows still open This enables you to visualize and test selected objects in your project MENUS amp WI ZARDS 261 Run F3 Runs the project in its final user format no workspace interventions possible Printer Setup Opens the standard Windows Printer Configuration dialog Print Ctrl P If the active tab is a Variable Lister tab it prints the list of all of the variables in the Lister If the active tab is the Task Lister tab it prints the list of all of the tasks of the project Otherwise the content of the active Area will print Preferences Opens the Preferences window for configuring Medialon Control System V6 See Preferences page 223 mM Install a License File Opens the License browser to install license to increase the number of panel connections Contact your Medialon dealer for futher informations Quit Ctri Q Quits Medialon Control System V6 A save request displays if the current project has been modified since it was last saved Yos Firmware Management LN Install a Firmware Opens the Firmware browser to install a new firmware version See Firmware Installation on page 412 pw Add Update a MxM MRC CES Opens the Create Custom Firmware window to update a custom firmware See Create Custom Firmware on page 414 Ed
182. ardware Update Wizard Welcome to the Hardware Update Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking an your computer an the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update ta search hor sofware O Yes this time only CO Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Medialon Manager Installation 3 Select No not this time and click Next Hardware Update Wizard This wizard helps you install software For Smartl eu 3 If your hardware came with an installation CD QE or floppy disk insert it now What da pon want the wizard to do 5 Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 4 Select Install the software automatically and click Next Hardware Update Wizard Please wait while the wizard installs the software ES sy SmartKey USB Setting a system re case your system n Hardware Update Wizard Completing the Hardware Update Wizard 2 SmartKey USB Click Finish to close the wizard 5 Click Finish to complete the USB driver installation 6 Select Medialon Control System V6 in the Windows Start Menu rm Medialon The wizard has finished installing the software for Cancel
183. areXXXX mrtx2 Firmware version gives the current version of loaded firmware 4 Enter info about the custom firmware you are going to generate Custom Version Prefix enter 3 characters as your identifier in the new firmware generated Custom Revision gives the index of the new revision you re going to create If you load a custom firmware revision index is automatically increase 44 SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE Showmaster Firmware Creator Info enter a comment about this firmware 5 Select component to add update or remove MXMs MRCs to update File Name Version Type Status mrcShowMasterLE mrcShowmasterLE mrc6 MRC mrcShowMasterMIDI nrcShowMasterMIDI mrc6 MRC mrcShowMaster Serial nrcShowMasterSerial mrc6 MRC mxmAdtecMPEGPlayer nxmAdtecMPEGPlayer mxm 5 0 MXM nuine mxmAlcornMcBrideD VMYmxmAlcornMcBrideDVM mxm6 5 0 MXM Genuine mxmAnalogWayGraphicSwitcher mxmAnalogWayGraphicSwitcher mxm amp 6 0 MXM jenuine mxmAnalogWayIXSeriesmxmAnalogWayIXSeries mxm6 5 0 MXM enuine mxmAnalogWayOctoPlus mxmAnalogWayOctoPlus mxm6 5 0 MXM Genuine mxmBarcoCRT mxmBarcoCRT mxm amp 0 Genuine mxmBarcoDLP ynxmBarcoDLP mxm 5 0 MXM Genuine mxmBarcoFLMCLMProjectorsymxmBarcoFL MCLMProjectors mxm6 5 0 MXM Genuine mxmbBarcoFolsomEncore mxmBarcoFolsomEncore mxm6 5 0 MXM Genuine Component status is e Genuine part of firmware released by Medialon e Added new component e Replaced existing component update with a ne
184. arent Object Object List Type String The result of the command UserScreens and Graphical objects are only available with Medialon Manager Parent objects and allowed object types Parent Object Task Variable erapnica CATE bl AA Graphical OR PERRA AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Device Manager Showmaster Examples Get list of tasks in your project Pr Resources Object Type Name Description Devices Manager Command Get Object List B Comment Label Y Parent Object Name Object Type Task JP Object List amp List 1 Text r ES coe ceo Ino oo o o oo We iv lel v efe fee fe Jj 14 EE Get list of variables in a User group Object Type Mame Description Manager CurrentStatus Devices Manager Command Get Object List Comment Label oP Parent Object Name Groupi Object Type Variable 17 Object List de List 1 Text ask 1 Message ask 2 CountDownMessage ask 2 CountDownValue L 0 lola ojo 50000100 af ask 2 Message Li 0 ask_2 Status ask _2 Timecode Get list of LEDs in a UserScreen Properties Object Type Mame E Description he Dae Mau v bel ESESTESTSTSTES TIS Devices Manager Command Get Object List Comment y Label x T Parent Object Name LlserScreen 1 Object Type Led SP Object List de List 1 Text r TITR Manager Variables As any device in your project Showmaster V2 or Manager V6 return info
185. ariable Input DATEVAR date variable Output String corresponding to the day s name Example Day 01 18 2006 Wednesday e DayOfTheWeekAsNumber DATEVAR Description Extracts the Day Number value from a date variable Input DATEVAR date variable Output Integer corresponding to day s number in the week Sunday 1 Example Day 10 12 2010 3 Ay Warning CurrentDay variable System Enum first value is Sunday 0 if you want to compare this variable with the result of the function don t forget to apply the offset AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 163 164 e Month DATEVAR Description Extracts the Month value from a date variable Input DATEVAR date variable Output Number corresponding to month number Example Day 01 18 2006 1 e Year DATEVAR Description Extracts the Year value from a Date variable Input DATEVAR date variable Output Integer corresponding to year number Example Day 01 18 2006 2006 e LowerCase STRINGVAR Description Converts the desired String to lower case characters Input STRINGVAR string variable enum field variable Output STRINGVAR in lower case Example LowerCase TesT stRINg test string e UpperCase STRINGVAR Description Converts the desired String to upper case characters Input STRINGVAR string variable enum field variable Output STRINGVAR in upper case Example UpperCase TesT stRINg TEST STRING e Length STRINGVAR Description Returns
186. ary Shift 4 gt Medialon DMX512 2 Logical Cue Insert a Message Shift M Medialon on Network 3 System Load New Data File Insert a Countdown Alt C Medialon Low Level Communicator 4 Objects Sound Beep Insert a Comment Shift Alt C Medialon MIP 5 Expression Ctrl E Mouse Control Modify Cue Enter Medialon Timecode 6 Quit Manager Insert Cue kis Showmaster d Task Re insert Last Cue Alt F Medialon_DMX512_1 d Add to Cue Library shift A Wz3Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 2 F System Insert a Message Shift M gz3Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 3 Objects Insert a Countdown amp lt c Go Nugget4 Expression Ctrl E mM Sound Beep This command allows you to send a sound beep directly from the Motherboard speaker with the desired parameters frequency and duration in increments of 1 100 second Logical Cue Quit Showrmaster AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 187 Parameters Frequency Type Integer Sound frequency from 20Hz to 20KHz Duration Type Integer Duration of sound in 1 100s Wait Type Enum This parameter has no effect in TimeBased task Available values e Yes Current task is paused during sound duration e No Current task is not paused during sound duration mM Quit Manager This command allows you not only to quit Medialon Manager and also quit Windows but also Power Off or Reboot the host computer This command is only available in StepBased tasks in Medialon Manager Parameters M
187. ask Editor page 88 PROGRAMMING ENVIRONMENT 67 Customize Your Workspace You may choose to customize your workspace to adapt the programming environment to your needs 06 Medialon Manager Pro 5 File Edit Object Windows Help ow Ia gt e Project Project mpf5 E Er Devices 5 GE Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 E El Manager E 2 Manager_on_Network_3 E z Medialon DMX512 2 Project mpf5 Workspace Design EL 5 Control Screens quem Map LNXESM BORNL Y h ask Resources Busy a Shuttle Object Type Object Name Left Top Width Height Status Min Status Max Status Frame Width Relief Embossed Width Smooth Relief Shape Frame Color Bitmap Ruler Precision 68 2 Cue Library 4 User Groups Transparent Bitmap Active Hedialon Local Media Player 4 Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 00 00 00700 Edit Insert Video Audio 1 Q TC Audio 2 Slider Slider 4 150 100 1 None D y Active Rectangle 000 000 000 4 NINO 10 PESE Lister lame Stop Play Record Step Forward Step Reverse B Fast Forward Locat Variable Speed Set Edit Mode Edit Set TC Generator Set Start TimeCode Create Clip Delete Clip Load Clip Link Clip Get Ses Browser Project E Devices 1 i Tasks 0 ra these Screens 0 Mp User Variables 0 Ex Cue Library 0 i ser Groups Br
188. ask to go to label use the wizard to select an available Task Label Type String Label to go to in the Task Goto Time This command is exclusive to the TimeBased tasks and enables you to reach a given time in a TimeBased task and then to launch its execution starting at this time Parameters Task Name Type String Name of the task to go to time use the wizard to select an available Timebased Task Time Type Time Time to go to in the Task Goto Line This enables you to access a cue index in a Stepbased task and to launch the execution from this cue 216 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Networking Parameters Task Name Type String Name of the task to go to line number use the wizard to select an available Stepbased Task Line Type Integer Line to goto in the Task Show Task Opens or closes a Task in a Task Editor window in the Slave station Parameters Task Name Type String Name of the task to show or hide use the wizard to select an available Task Status Type Enum Show or hide Available values e Show The Task Editor is opened e Hide The Task Editor is closed Left Type Integer Left position of the Task Editor window Top Type Integer Top position of the Task Editor window Width Type Integer Width of the Task Editor window Height Type Integer Height of the Task Editor window Device Variables A Shared Variable is available to the other Medialon Control Syste
189. ated with the devices These may be the current timecode of the device whether the device is online or the list of clips available on a video server Tasks may also have variables such as Status or TimecodeStatus for TimeBased Tasks These System Variables are not automatically created you must define their creation upon task creation as part of your Medialon Control System V6 preferences or by editing your task s preferences Screen Variables m Variables that are automatically created with Panels and UserScreens like position of the mouse pointer or last key pressed All dynamic objects present in a UserScreen generate one or several variables Pushing a button changes its Click variable s value Changing variables can trigger a task to start A text display can be updated by a changing timecode variable for instance Screen variables are Read Write and can be updated manually or through programming User Defined Variables a You may also create your own variables to store information These can be of any type and all the parameters are editable User variables are Read Write meaning they can be updated manually or by programming They may also be made persistent values are stored automatically INTRODUCTI ON Overview of Medialon Control System Medialon Control System Objects and nteractions The following diagram outlines the interactions between the objects inside Medialon Control System Notice that a key elemen
190. ation Empty Default Trace into Console Trace Buffer Size 000 Message Enable Manager Lue Traces Enable MM Traces When the Log Traces Option is enabled Medialon Manager s activity is traced This option is only to be used if you are encountering problems or wish to closely follow how your project is running The log files that are generated can become very large and potentially fill up your hard drive so this option should not be activated unless there are specific reasons and should be deactivated when it is Enable Runtime Informations Traces Every Seconds Target Trace into File Saves the Trace information into a file either in one single file or in a new file every Month Week Day or Session The maximum size of the generated trace files can be limited by entering the desired value in the Max File Size field Trace into Console Traces information into Medialon Manager s modsEConsole to monitor the activity without creating a log file This function is used for occasional activity debugging of your project The modsEConsole opens automatically when Medialon Manager starts if this option is set in the Preferences modsEConsole V1 0 0 modsEtonsole ManagerDehugOutput log Started 3 7 Waiting for traces Tracer Connection ID 1 Name Manager gt Manager Session Opened Tracer Tracer Tracer Tracer Tracer Tracer Tracer Tracer Tracer on Projectors Tracer e
191. automatically change the state of the LED from 1 to 3 then to 10 then to 1 and so on Select the LED tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your LED Properties e Status Current status of the LED from O to 255 e Shape Shape of the LED round or rectangle e Color Indicates the color per status of the LED 0 255 e Bitmap Allows you to insert one bitmap for each status of the LED 0 255 e Frequency Set the speed for flashing LED e Sequence defines the pattern of statuses the LED will run through when the Frequency is other than 0 Use a non numerical symbol to separate the different status values within the pattern Example 0 1 2 3 2 1 Variables Led 10 Click Led 1 FlashFrequencu Led 1 Sequence Led 10 Status e Name LED_name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by default e Name LED_name Status Type Integer Values Current status of the LED from O to 255 As LED status is not refreshed when FlashFrequency Sequence are used and the LED is not shown e Name LED name FlashFrequency Type Integer Values Oz No Flash 1 very fast greater value slower flash speed e Name LED name Sequence Type String Value Pattern of statuses the LED will run through when the Flash Frequency is other than 0 Use a non numerical symbol to separate the different status values within the pattern Example 0 1 2 3 2 1 138 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Panels amp
192. ave a copy of it Test Mode Commands Test Mode allows the user to check Showmaster s resources As Test Mode is not available with Showmaster iPro test on off Enters Test Mode on XS ST Co MM set Test Mode to Off to leave Test Mode LE Pro Example CON LIEN msmrt test on msmrt Test set to On Ay The front panel display indicates Test Mode status ST LINN Pro EI LINE epg Test The following commands are only available when Medialon Showmaster is in Test Mode Serial Resources XS open serial lt portnumber gt LE rum Opens serial port lt portnumber gt ST Example Cu msmrt open serial 2 Pro msmrt Serial Port 2 is opened close serial lt portnumber gt Closes serial port portnumber Example msmrt close serial 2 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Recovery Tools msmrt Serial Port 2 is closed As The front panel display indicates the status of the serial ports al d in iu set serial lt portnumber gt lt baud gt lt databits gt lt parity gt lt stopbits gt Sets up communication for serial port lt portnumber gt eportnumber serial port number ebaud baud rate edatabits data bits typically 8 eparity N none O odd or E even estopbits stop bits typically 1 Example msmrt set serial 2 19200 8 N 1 set rts lt portnumber gt on off hchk Sets RTS of serial port lt portnumber gt e hchk turns on ha
193. ave the same value Variables Mame ww List A Chick List Count Lis SelectedText Itemz List 7 Status List P Test ItemiltemzItem3 e Name List name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by default e Name List name Status Type Integer Values Selected index between O and List count 1 means no selection Name List_name Text Type String Value list of all items Name List_name SelectedText Type String Value Text of the selected index Name List name Count Type Integer 136 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Panels amp UserScreens Value Count of list items Text Displays EJ Text information can be displayed in a UserScreen with a Text Display object Select the Text Display tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your display e Text Position The position of the text in the display can be set As Ed Vertical text position is locked to top when Word Wrap is enabled in os WebPanel EJ CA e Inset Defines bitmap border size inserted in the display Only available in LocalPanel e Motif Type Defines the way the bitmap is inserted in the Text Display e None e Stretch force by default when Inset parameters are different than 0 e Pattern Variables Ty pe Mame TextDisplay 3 Click O AP JextDisplay B Test My Display e Name Textdisplay name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by de
194. be read by Showmaster iPro via the Showmaster iPro Library if those Data Blocks are declared as Showmaster iPro Objects Data Blocks are seen by Showmaster iPro as Variables Some Showmaster V2 commands can be used to update these data blocks HJ the Medialon Showmaster iPro USB key provides the library and an example of application SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 395 Connecting S7 mEC EC31 The figure below shows the front of EC31 RTX LED Displays MMC slot Mode selector switch MAC address of the Ethernet controller USB 2 0 ports Power supply connection PROFINET IO connections used by PLC communications Ethernet connection used for Showmaster V2 communications COON OO UN Bb QY N LR Mode Selector Switch S7 mEC Mode selector has 3 positions e RUN The controller processes the STEP 7 program Medialon Showmaster Pro is started and Win XPE is running e STOP The controller does not process the STEP 7 program Medialon Showmaster Pro is started and Win XPE is running HJ Power On the controller in Stop mode to launch Showmaster V2 Pro in recovery Mode See more about Recovery Mode on page 421 e MRES execute a CPU memory reset Consult S7 mEc documentation 396 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description LED Status Display The following LED indicates the status of EC31 RTX SIMATIC S7 nEC SIEMENS zip BEZ WY BRS JE Uz BF ETT s THF e BF1 Bus error e BF2 U1 BF3 U2
195. be the last character of a frame You can use a hexadecimal byte here for example 103 242 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Driver Edition Depending on the protocol and your needs you can select the way the incoming frame is formatted when displayed in the LastFrame variable of the device e Convert only the non literal bytes to the hexadecimal format If a non literal byte ASCII value 31 or 127 is received it is converted to hexadecimal format using the hexadecimal character entered to the left e Convert all the bytes received to the hexadecimal format All bytes received are converted to hexadecimal format using the hexadecimal character entered in the box to the left e Keep the original values When checked nothing is converted and all non printable characters appear as strange characters spaces or little boxes Characters Replacement This section lists the characters that are replaced in frames before sending and replaced back the other way upon reception The left list contains the excluded characters the right list contains their replacement On output excluded characters are replaced by their corresponding replacement string and on input the replacement string is transformed back to the excluded characters Checksum The next step is to configure the checksum if needed Low Level Communicator Setup Command driver file Load Cave Cave as Ma driver loaded Type Commands Monitoring f Automation Checksum
196. by the terms of the present contract IF you do not accept the terms of this contract please do not install or m sasTFinsuuusususanssnsusuuuuussuallnuuanuuuususumsuuuuus 51 do not accept the agreement Medialan Installer 2011 6 Click Next to continue 402 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description 7 The installer is password protected enter medialon and click next Setup Medialon Showmaster iPro Firmware Password This installation is password protected Please provide the password then click Mext to continue Passwords are case sensitive Password 8 The setup is now ready to install Click Install to start copying files 9 At the end of the installation you need to enter an Administrator User name and password The same ones used for the mEC system Default User Name is Administrator Type the administrator password twice 10 Click Set to validate Showmaster iPro needs to know Ehe name amp password of Ehe current Windows administator account By default Showmaster iPro uses the default setting of the mEC Factory settings IF the current Windows administrator account name amp password is different From the one registered For Showmaster iPro please enter here the current Windows administrator account name amp password to register For E A Showmaster iPra Admin Account Administrator User Mame Administrator b n el New Admin account set successfully
197. bytes the bytes will be the binary value of the parameter with the low byte first 9 returns 09 500 returns 1F4101 e high low bytes the bytes will be the binary value of the parameter with the high byte first 9 returns 09 500 returns 01 F4 e literal string the bytes will be the string value of the parameter This is the most common Mode 9 returns 9 500 returns 500 The enum type is different than the others because for each item of the enum you must specify the name and the value to be received ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Driver Edition Monitor variable Enum Definitions alt DriverStatus OOOO Value Type i lnteger String Add ee Ed Frame Status a 0DI04 Delete Position mm Length mM Update Made Immediate T Incoming values can be Strings or Integers Enum Definition A Enum name Enum Definition Enum name a Enum value Enum value C decimal i hexadecimal Frame Status ae 400104 Position Length E Update Mode Delete Advanced gt gt Cancel When the monitoring value embeds information in particular bits A Bit Mask can be applied to integer or integer enum values Monitor variable OMEN 79 Enum Definitions pipa Value Type Integer Siting Add Type Edi Frame 13300100100 Position Length E Deere Bit Mask Delete Advanced lt lt Mo Bit Mask re Use Bit a Use Bit range From Bit
198. cable between Showmaster and Showmaster Editor V2 it may take Showmaster several seconds 30 or more to appear in the Showmaster Browser This generally occurs if both Showmaster amp Showmaster Editor V2 are using DHCP addressing 3 Select a Showmaster and click Connect 324 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Menu Showmaster 4 If the Medialon Showmaster connection is protected enter the password ord for connecting to this I Password Ok Cancel Ay See more about Connection Password on page 330 5 If the Showmaster model selected in Showmaster Editor V2 is different than the model of the pending connection Showmaster Editor V2 will switch to the appropriate model before completing the connection Switch from Shawmaster ST model to Showmazster Pro model 6 Showmaster then switches to programming mode the SHW LED on the Showmaster s front panel blinks orange and green Entering Programming Made Ay An Abort button allows you to interrupt the connection attempt if it takes too long or hangs 7 When the connection is established the name of the currently connected Showmaster is displayed in the Showmaster Editor V2 status bar 4 Status Connected ta Showmaster 060883 192 168 144 166 Editor Firmware Version 2 1 1 NWN _ Showmaster Browser The Showmaster Browser displays Showmaster status Showmaster Browser M NN Name Model Status Address Showmaster 0D
199. can be redirected through a Patch modified to your needs Patch Editor 001 002 003 0014 005 006 007 008 001 002 006 007 gpg 009 010 O11 We 7 m4 m 016 009 010 O11 e E m4 m O16 Ha O20 O15 020 53 a La 030 032 E j O40 3b a 040 O43 044 045 T O43 044 O50 051 J52 E 050 051 157 ES 053 O60 mC nem awn ora Orange channels are patched Red channel indicates a conflict with another index Two or more indexes are patched to the same channel e nitial Output Level You may choose to Reset all the Outputs to O when the project starts or keep the last values that were sent DMX Ports are used by MxM Medialon DMX512 Refer to for DMX Resources description 340 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources TimeCode Ports Pro Medialon Showmaster Pro can use Timecode Resources in your project LIES Using MxM Medialon TimeCode allows Showmaster Pro to read Timecode Click on the TimeCode Ports node to display the resources present in your project when Showmaster Editor V2 connected to Showmaster Pro ES E Project Name m Devices 16 13 Timecode In Taske 151 User Variables 18 Cue Library 0 User Groups yl serial Ports css MIDI Ports F Dima Parts O TimeCode Pots FA 0 Ports Infrared Parks Ay Refer to ANNEXES page 441 for TimeCode Resources description Input Output Ports EUM laci Medialon Showmaster can manage Input Output resources like relays and contact closures LE CH
200. cations are 150ma 12VDC per relay with a maximum of 2A for the whole 16 relays SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 391 392 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description Showmaster iPro Description Medialon Showmaster Pro Overview Medialon Showmaster iPro is the result of a join development by Medialon and Siemens It is both a Show Controller and a PLC Programmable Logic Controller The Siemens PLC hosts Medialon Showmaster run time Software programmable using Showmaster Editor V2 while at the same time it also executes the Siemens RTX software programmable with Siemens S7 software SIMATIC Manager CAE Showmaster WOO Ethernet mm Relays Inputs Analog etc DMX MIDI Serial Time Code TCP IP Hardware presentation Medialon Showmaster iPro is hosted by the Siemens embedded controller EC31 RTX The Embedded Controller EC31 RTX is a PC that features an S7 300 design the operating system Windows XP Embedded WinAC RTX 2008 and SIMATIC NET 2007 EC31 RTX can be installed into a modular S7 mEC system SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 393 394 System Architecture The Medialon ShowMaster iPro consist of the Siemens Modular Embedded Controller mEC with the WinAC RTX option installed Disk configuration mEC system is installed with 2 partitions ba My Computer File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help Back e m 50 Search Folders Im x if z Address of My Computer 50 Files Stored on T
201. ce Control 190 Load New Data File 189 Mouse Control 188 Quit Manager 188 189 Sound Beep 187 Task 181 Call 183 Goto Label 182 Goto Line 183 Goto Time 183 Lock 182 Pause 181 Show 184 Start 181 Stop 181 Sync 182 UserScreen 179 Close 179 Goto Page 179 List Control 180 Object Text Control 180 Open 179 Control Panel 41 106 Cue Countdown 93 Message 92 New 90 172 Delete 111 177 Description 110 176 Double click 287 Duplicate 111 177 Edit 111 177 Editor 88 Read Only 226 Execution 238 Export 239 Flash Control 108 109 174 Disable 108 174 Execute 108 174 Import 239 Lister 109 176 Lock Task 109 175 Menu 266 Name 110 176 New 88 111 171 177 266 271 275 New Editor 266 INDEX 488 Pause Point 109 175 237 Positrack 101 Preferences 226 Properties 109 176 Recording Cues 103 Start Condition 110 111 169 176 275 Status 109 176 StepBased 41 171 179 Setup 177 178 TimeBased 41 87 Duration 111 Setup 111 TimeCode 112 Time X 99 Track 89 View List 107 Timeline 107 TimeCode 103 User Mode 256 User Mode Rights 176 Variables 110 111 178 Wizards 271 275 Tasks Drag and Drop 273 Test Cue Library 202 Test Mode Digital 430 DMX 430 MIDI 431 Serial 428 Text Display 137 Variables 137 Text Edit 135 Password Character 135 Status 135 Text Type 135 Variables 135 Theme 224 Time Zone Configuration Showmaster 329 TimeBased 87 Blind Mode 108 Command Objects 190 Enum Control 1
202. ce Help Nugget 4 E User Groups Activity TRES 236 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Advanced Tools Device Auto Selection When this option is active each time you select a cue in a task the device Cue Selection Cue Management Pause Point Device Replace Device Task Execution Device Auto Selection Shaw Task Variables assigned to the cue is selected The next Insert Cue command will use the last Device selected Pause Points This function is not available in Run Mode and is handy for stepping though while debugging complicated tasks When a task is running and it reaches a Pause Point the task pauses just before executing the cue and waits to be started again Any existing cue in a task can be set as a Pause Point m OOS Hl M Label Device Action 0000 Cited F os oon Doremi_Labs 1 Mugaet 1 Locate 00 00 30 70 Dn PIT I Medialo n Dhx512 2 send Cue IO OD O50 0003 E start of Clip 0004 Doremi Labs v1 Mudgget_1 Select a cue and type AIt P or choose Pause Points Toggle to toggle a Pause Point Choose Pause Points Delete All to remove all Pause Points from the task Task Execution Instead of using task transport buttons or Flash controls you can use the right click menu to control the execution of a task Pause Point Fo Device Task Execution Play Pause Stop Show Task Variables Execute cue ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 237 Play Pause Stop Open a task in a task e
203. ckground Pull To Front Ctrl F Pulls the selected Graphic Objects one level towards foreground Push To Back Ctrl B Pushes the selected Graphic Objects one level towards background Align Ctrl L Opens the Align dialog box for aligning selected Graphic Objects Magnetic grid Turns the UserScreen Magnetic Grid On Off In the UserScreens the Magnetic Grid enables you to position objects in relation to each other at distances defined by the virtual grid This grid is shown by points on the UserScreens When the Magnetic Grid is turned off objects MENUS amp WI ZARDS 263 can be moved freely without snapping to grid points Showmaster Menu bo This menu is dedicated to the Showmaster and is only available in Showmaster Cam Editor V2 Connect Ctri Alt K Opens the Showmaster s scan window Disconnect Shift Ctrl K Closes current Showmaster connection Configuration Opens the Showmaster configuration window See Showmaster Configuration on page 327 Send Show Transfers the currently open project from Showmaster Editor V2 to the connected Showmaster See more about Project Loading on page 331 Retrieve Show Transfers the Default project from Showmaster to the Showmaster Editor V2 host Manage Logs Opens the Showmaster s Log window See Showmaster Logs on page 433 Firmware amp Info Update Opens the Update Showmaster Firmware window See Update Showmaste
204. closes a Task Editor with the given task inside Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to show hide Status Type Enum Show or hide Available values e Show The Task Editor is opened e Hide The Task Editor is closed Left Type Integer Left position of Task Editor Top Type Integer Top position of Task Editor Width Type Integer Top position of Task Editor Height Type Integer Top position of Task Editor Ay Note When the Task Name parameter is empty the command is applied to the active task that executed the Show Task command Expression This provides the normal functions of computer programming with Boolean operators Writing expressions is accelerated by the provision of dialog boxes and drop down menus reducing the direct writing of code to a minimum Parameters Expression Type Private Click on the Magic wand button to open an Expression Edit window more details in Expressions page 155 Logical Cues This set of commands introduces conditional execution into your project Re insert Last Cue Alt R Medialon DIMX512 1 j Logical Cue Wait Ctrl W Bz3Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 System While EndWhile Ctrl H Insert a Message Shift M amp 3Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 3 Objects If Else Endif Ctrl I _ountdo LC Nugget 4 Expression Ctrl E Wait For Ctrl K Insert a Comment Shift Alt C Video 5 d OnExpression Case Ctrl These commands are only available in StepBas
205. ct all available resources present on the network Ly Manager Resource Scan Parameters Advantech ADAM Name rth to a Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO GlobalCache 192 1 Sealevel SeaLIMK ArtNet DMX512 GlobalCache 192 1 GlobalCache 192 1 Global Cache GlobalCache 192 1 Resources scanning Type Device Serial Serial IO IO Address Module 197 158 144 85 192 168 144 85 192 168 144 85 192 168 144 85 Stop Scan Close Select a resources and click on Add button to add this resources to your proj ect 296 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources Serial Ports Click on the Serial Ports node to display the resources that were present in your project when Manager V6 started E 2 Aur E ame E Devices 1 d Y Glo ibalLache 192 158 144 _ Tasks 0 an che 192 168 A T Panels 11 zd 2 GlobalCache_1 ae 144 mas a T nd Y GlobalCache 192 165 144_ aoe E Y GlobalCache_192 168144 eerie Len EE E it LEES e a LAT pe Mois sisi rm E hes a Indowe LOM 3 wu MIDI Ports MED DMX Ports Windows COM 11 TimeCode Ports Ed Windows LOM 12 W m Y gt Y m D al A m e EM a NEM n an am en m qu p p co FA 1 0 Ports windows COM 13 Infrared Parts Windows COM 14 1 VIP do Ol E O M 1 F Different types of Serial resources can be mounted in your project You may add Serial ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource menu and EHGOSIPg
206. cues En end CEri AlE T Cues selection selected track Select all cues Ckri A Cues selection all tracks Deselect all cues pS Esc Select cues from start ShiFE F Select cues to end ShiFE T CUES management Cues library ww F F F E SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 95 Managing Cues Cut Paste and Delete Cut and paste commands are supported with familiar keyboard shortcuts e Type the Delete key to delete the selected cues e Type Ctrl C to copy the selected cues e Type Ctrl X to cut the selected cues e Type Ctrl V to paste cues to the current position of the timeline Pasted Cues maintain their relative offset from one another just as they were Copied or Cut Moving Cues There are several handy keyboard shortcuts to precisely move selected cues e Hold the Alt key down and use arrow keys to move the selected cues by 1 10th second increments Use Ctrl Alt and arrow keys to move them by 1 100th second increments e Type the key and enter a time to move the selected cues forward e Type the key and enter a time to move the selected cues backward The Cue Management menu The Task Editor also provides various commands in the Cue Management submenu to automatically change relationships between cues LUGS SEIELLILH ol LT CLEA Cues management d Disable cues Shift 5 Cues library Pause points d Group cues s Shift amp Devices d Ungroup cues Shift U Task Execution d Shaw Task Variables Cues ti
207. d Input 10B Isolated Input 11A Isolated Input 11B Isolated Input 12A Isolated Input 12B Isolated Input 13A Isolated Input 13B Isolated Input 14A Isolated Input 14B Isolated Input 15A Isolated Input 15B Isolated Input 16A Isolated Input 16B No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Input X A SHOWMASTER E Input X B O Push Button g esesoosoosoocoooooo i a E E E E E E E E E E E E E e SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster ST Description Relay Output Connector Showmaster V2 s has sixteen Single Pole Single Throw SPST electromechanical relays All relays are de energized at power on Relay outputs are connected to Showmaster V2 via a SubD 37 pin Female connector The wiring may be directly from signal sources or through our optional Breakout Box wiring terminal SWM BO Pin assignments follow Relay X NO SHOWMASTER Indicator Relay X Common COMMON R16R15 R2 R1 I9 10 17 16 15 e ea 2 1 o osseococcoocococoos i 000000000000000000 Ez 37 36 35 34 21 20 R16R15 R2 R1 VOLT No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Ay When using Breakout boxes SWM BO the maximum electrical specifications are 150ma 12VDC per relay with a maximum of 2A for the whole 16 relays SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 375 MI DI Connection Medialon Showmaster V2 ST is provided with a USB MID
208. d as a separate window in Debug Ay These settings do not affect the Run mode of Medialon Manager where all UserScreens are displayed on the Real Screen Panel Layout Defines the Local Panel screen s resolution A Autoselect computer screen s Y User defined Screen Count A Onentationr TTETETTEHPEEEERER GS ee go Horna 42 6801050 Y Mie Ok Cancel e Autoselect When autoselect is chosen Local Panel takes the current screen resolution of the system e User defined If you need to create a project that Local Panel will eventually need a different screen resolution you can define the screen s 118 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Panels amp UserScreens resolution s by editing the User Defined Screen resolutions Local Panel Set x ei Autoselect computer screen s i User defined Screen Count 2 Unentation 1 1600870 oH s 42 1680551050 B Vertical Orientation defines the direction of screens alignment Select screen resolution Add a new screen Replace selected screen by new resolution Delete selected screen Creating a WebPanel El NEY Select the Object Panels New WebPanel menu item File Edit Object Help ODE Edit A Duplicate Ctrl D Delete ables Setup Ar creens Control Panel Panels A New WebPanel UserScreens Devices Ye able k Or Select the Panels item in the Browser tab and right click to open the contextual menu
209. d commands across the network to shared Tasks or UserScreens Medialon Showmaster can share Tasks and Variables Another Medialon Control System is able to detect a Showmaster s shared objects Medialon Show master Slave Medialon Control System User Groups Master Shared External applications can now have access to Medialon Control System V6 objects Medialon Scheduler is one example of an external application that can interact with Shared User Groups This application is able to discover Medialon Control System Tasks Variables and Cues from the Library It schedules Medialon Control System actions a task can be started a variable can be changed or a cue can be executed Medialon Control System Medialon User Groups Publish Scheduler OpenCap is also available as an API The API offers a DLL Dynamic Link Library that connect to Medialon Control System using the OpenCap protocol allowing developers to read data and trigger tasks or change the value of variables in their Medialon Control System project The API offers also several programming examples in different languages C VisualBasic C Consult the Medialon web site for further information ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Networking Medialon On Network Device Medialon Control System V6 can be used to control another Medialon Target station A Medialon On Network MON device must be created The Medialon Control System V6 station that has the MON device acts as Maste
210. d delete files in a Windows environment Strings Management provides conversion and analysis of text strings Event Log allows the user to define what events should be logged in the system and generates text files that can then be e mailed or stored to network attached storage Most of these functionalities are useful in permanent installations more than for live events Internet Functionalities Medialon Control System V6 includes a number of add on functionalities in the form of specific MxM plug ins to perform actions which are related to internet communication Most of these functionalities are useful in permanent installations more than for live events The E mail MxM allows e mail to be sent or received The FTP client lets Manager handle all kind of FTP transfers The Database MxM provides an interface with SQL type databases Sophisticated Programming Cues can perform actions in the software itself like Pause or Synchronize I NTRODUCTI ON 37 Task to make real time changes during the show Significant internal or device conditions can be identified as variables Variables can be used locally or published on the network for other Medialon Control Systems or for external display or control Variables can be continuously monitored and combined to fire tasks You can start tasks based on device exceptions day date time or outside authorization Architecture Medialon Control System V6 uses 4 main objects for building and creat
211. d is the time in tenths of a second between which the selected request is sent Each request can have a different polling period If Wait for answer is checked the device will wait for an answer before another request is sent If the answer is not received within the time specified in the Timeout parameter the next request is sent While you are testing your driver you may need to disable the periodic sending of the request frames to prevent polling requests from interfering with tests you may be conducting The Disable request frames option allows you to turn off all automatic polling Variables From incoming frames Medialon Control System is able to extract data and set the value of a device variable Low Level Communicator Setup A ES Command driver file Load Save Save as Ma driver loaded Type ames Commands Answers Monitoring Automation Test Fixed Length character Varable Length character i Perlodic request frames sending GetStatus OD ai Period 1 10 1 0 Add Edit Delete Linked Disable request trames Variables in frames receve Click the Add button in the Variables in frames received section to create a new device variable ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 249 250 Incoming frames contain patterns some bytes are static and other bytes can change This changing pattern is defined with wildcard characters e Fixed Length Character a wildcard character that represents one unkno
212. d to Showmaster and a project is being edited or tested 370 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster ST Description eRun Fault the project has caused a runtime error typically a zero division error eRecovery The Showmaster has been started in Recovery mode eUpd Firmware Showmaster V2 s firmware is being updated eDownloading A Showmaster V2 project is being downloaded from an Edi tor eUploading The current Showmaster V2 project is being uploaded to an Editor eFactory Showmaster is being reset to its factory default state eShutdown Showmaster is shutting down eReboot Showmaster is rebooting Vers Showmaster s current firmware version 4 Proj Title of the running project This line is not available when Showmaster is in Recovery Mode Test When Showmaster is in Recovery Mode this line indicates the status On Off of the test session Addr Current IP address Mask Subnet mask Gway IP Gateway address MacA MAC address 9 SerN Serial Number HJ Next lines below are displayed when Showmaster is in Recovery mode 10 Ser1 Serial port 1 status Opened Closed Failure 11 Ser2 Serial port 2 status Opened Closed Failure 12 Ser3 Serial port 3 status Opened Closed Failure 13 Ser4 Serial port 4 status Opened Closed Failure 14 DMX DMX port status Opened Closed Failure 15 MIDI MIDI port status Opened Closed Failure 16 Digt Digital I O port status Opened Closed Failure UJ D CO
213. d with a previous version of Medialon Manager wie tl a Ff La L 1 ATT talon Manager V6 Project File mngProj5 talon Manager V6 Backup Project File mngBckProj6 Medialon Manager V5 Project File mpt5 talon Manager V5 Backup Project File mbf5 Medialon Manager V4 Project File mpf4 edialon Manager V4 Backup Project File mbf4 All Medialon Project Files mngProj5 mngBckProj5 mpf5 mbf5 mpf4 mbf4 Ay Projects made with Medialon Manager V2 or 3 cannot be opened with version 6 312 you need to open them with version 4 or 5 first Upgrading Manager V6 MRCs MxMs Manager V6 MRCs and MxMs are regularly updated to correct minor problems or to add functionality and commands It is therefore very important especially when starting a project to have the latest version of the MRCs and MxMs Medialon Manager V6 MRCs and MxMs are never updated automatically even if an internet connection is available This operation must be performed by the system administrator To download the new versions of Manager V6 MRCs and MxMs you can access the download pages through the Help menu Medialon Internet Resources Manager V6 amp MxMs Upgrades option This will direct your default browser to MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Project Files the download pages of Medialon s website www medialon com Manager Help 177 MAMs Help Shift Fl ed MRCs Help Shift
214. de Runmning i e a wet Fro i Should SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 369 Keypad Functions Ok key D e Hold this key for more than 1 second to power on Showmaster V2 e Hold this key for more than 4 seconds while the Showmaster is powered on to reset the Showmaster V2 Cancel key e Hold this key for more than 4 seconds to power off soft power Medialon Showmaster Up arrow Scrolls display up e Holding this key for more than 1 second scrolls the display to the home position when the button is released e Holding this key during Startup will start the Showmaster in Recovery Mode See Recovery Mode on page 421 Down arrow e Scrolls display down e Hold this key for more than 5 seconds to close all Showmaster V2 client connections to Editor or Manager Showmaster V2 returns to Running mode As The Down arrow does not close client connections when Showmaster is in Recovery mode Left arrow e Not in use Right arrow e Not in use LCD Display Messages Each time an arrow button is pressed the next line of information is displayed 1 Name Showmaster s user defined Name 2 Mode Showmaster s current mode eStarting Up Showmaster V2 is starting up from power on until Showmas ter V2 is ready eRunning Showmaster is running and no Showmaster Editor V2s are con nected Showmaster V2 also goes to this state when no show file is loaded eProgramming A Showmaster Editor V2 is connecte
215. dent of the StepBased tasks Don t warn if Device Activity is disabled Enables or Disables the user prompt to warn when a device activity is disabled Don t warn if Device Positrack is disabled Enables or Disables the user prompt to warn when a device positrack is disabled ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 227 Runtime mM Organizes the automation of the opening of Medialon Manager of its automatic start up of the end of its operation and automatic shutdown The halting of the execution of a project may also be inhibited or protected by a password Preferences General e Auto Run Manager when opened end Project Autorun mode Task MI User Aun Network fa Prohibit Stop z UserScreen Password for stopping HHH HHH Pe Watchdog 5 EI mere Always ask for password Log Traces m ns de Bl Prohibit Quit Manager If Delayed Startup EL E Quit Manager Time Quit window Enable Muli Processor Support Auto Run Manager when Opened Determines if Medialon Manager V6 should launch in Run User Debug mode when a project is opened This option only applies when Medialon Manager is opened by via a project by double clicking on a Project File icon or by placing a Shortcut to the project in the Start gt All Programs gt Startup folder for example As We strongly recommend registering your license if you plan to start your project with the autorun option The registration dialog box will continue to be displayed
216. displayed using a web browser The display area is defined as a panel Monitors Medialon Control System Engine Web Browser Network gt Web Browser N A E As Local Panel is not available with Medialon Showmaster V2 Local Panel ri NEW The Local Panel use the monitors connected to the Medialon Manager machine to display the UserScreens ESI i Project Marne TU BF Devices 1 ie Tasks 0 Tg Panels 1 Ml LacalPanel My Varables E UserScreens pF User Variables 0 7 Cue Library 0 User Groupes Local Panel is automatically created when a new project is started Virtual Screen The Virtual Screen is a powerful feature of Medialon Manager Designed specifically for programming and debugging Virtual Screen allows you to AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 117 simulate your screen resolution while keeping all the other Areas and windows visible Furthermore Virtual Screen allows you to create graphical user interfaces at a higher resolution than your current screen settings can handle allowing you to program on a different system than the final runtime system There are two Debug location for the LocalPanel Object Type LocalPanel Mame LocalPanel Description aaa User Mode Rights None Debug Location Virtual Screen E Fhusical Monitor Exe E e Virtual Screen UserScreens are displayed inside the virtual screen in Debug Mode e Physical Monitor UserScreens are displaye
217. dit button to modify an existing command Low Level Communicator Seur NN Command driver file Load Save Save az Mo driver loaded Type User commands Positrack groups New E dii Delete Inside this group Mat inside this group ENLEN When you create a new command specify the name and the output frame of the command Command Output frame FrameToSend Command Creation Editable parameter Edit Delete Cancel It is important to include any header or ending characters required by the protocol even though they have been specified in the Frames tab The settings in the Frames tab only tell the Low Level Communicator MxM how to define the edges of the Frames Every command must include all bytes to be sent to the device In the output frame it is possible to define parameters that will appear as a Property of the Device s command For instance a Power command can use a parameter to set the power On or Off To add an editable parameter to your command click the Add button to open the Parameter dialog box The parameter s result is inserted into the outgoing frame ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 245 246 Command Parameters In the output frame the syntax of the parameters are between brackets It contains the name the type and the size of the parameter integer Marne 1 integer Xi STR E low high bytes Size auto hera asc value Test 325 Heta azcil value decim
218. ditor in the right click menu select Task Execution Play to start the current task HJ The space bar can also be used to start or pause a task Execute Cue From the right click menu select Execute Cue in the Task Execution section to perform the selected Cue This command acts like a flash control As This method can be used when Flash commands are not available with Panel edition for example 238 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Import amp Export Project I mport amp Export Project I mporting a Project file Medialon Control System V6 was designed to allow projects to be imported into one another This allows you to integrate previous projects into your current projects to minimize programing time and avoid repeat programming In the case of multiple imports or if you import a project including names already used in the current project Devices Variables Tasks UserScreens Medialon Control System V6 will rename the elements concerned by adding an incremental number to them As Manager V6 projects and Tasks can only be imported into other Manager V6 projects Showmaster V2 projects and Tasks can only be imported into other Showmaster V2 projects Showmaster V2 files cannot be imported into Manager V6 projects or vice versa Exporting Importing a Task Exporting a task Tasks may be exported to a specific file in order to be imported into another project Each task you wish to export will be stored in a separate
219. ditor V2 Fatal Messages mShow masterCore Messages LICENSE MISSING Waiting for license Showmaster is not licensed a license file must be provided contact your dealer Failed to start ManagerRT xxx ManagerRT cannot be started due to xxx error ManagerRT Stopped due to zero division error A zero division error occurred in the project runtime has stopped ManagerRT Messages ManagerRT Task Kernels Timed Out ManagerRT Task Condition Kernel Timed Out SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Showmaster Logs SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 437 438 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Showmaster Troubleshootings Showmaster Troubleshootings This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while using Medialon Showmaster V2 Showmaster Common Problems amp Solutions Does not turn on Check that the power cable is plugged in Check that the rear power switch is On Showmaster V2 Status Reboot the Showmaster in Recovery Mode indicator LED OS Contact your dealer this Showmaster may does not turn on need to return to the factory Showmaster V2 Status Contact your dealer this Showmaster may indicator LED OS need to return to the factory lights red Project Status Check project presence with Showmaster indicator LED SHW Editor V2 does not turn on Check project presence with Recovery Tools Project Status Check the project with Showmaster Editor V2 indicator LED SHW Delete the current project wi
220. drop technique of adding cues to tasks Drag and Drop wizards are useful and save a lot of time when programming your project Dragging onto Graphical Objects With the Drag and Drop wizard in Medialon Control System V6 it is easy to create tasks linked to UserScreens objects Dragging Device Commands onto Graphical Objects To create a task that sends a device command started by a graphical object simply select the desired command in the device s Command Lister and drag it onto the desired graphical object The task is created with the correct start condition and the device command cue is inserted into the task Open UserScreen ii E M abl Close UserScreen Goto Page B List Control Click and zin sE A y Pause Task m m Stop Task Am Sync Task D Lock Task B Goto Label Objec t Test E oni This function only creates StepBased tasks should you need to create a TimeBased task you will have to create and link it manually Dragging Devices on Container Objects To open a Device Control Panel inside a Container select a Device in the object browser or lister and drag and drop it onto a Container This function is identical to creating a task that uses a Manager Device Control Cue For instance you wish insert a Doremi Control Panel in your UserScreen l Project Manual D Name j JE i BE mE EI Na Devices 7 MM Manager ida Drag D SIRO L ae sks 2l E Doremi Labs Vl Nugget TA O OO UserScr
221. duction environment TCP IP Winsock2 Layer 1024x768 32Bits Graphic Card Sound Adapter Suggested System Requirements 3Ghz PC Pentium IV Processor 1 GB Memory 60 GB Hard disk Windows XP Pro SP3 Windows Vista Ultimate or Windows 7 Ultimate 1280x1024 32Bits Graphic Card Sound Adapter 54 SOFTWARE INSTALLATI ON Medialon Manager Installation Medialon Manager nstallation This chapter describes the procedure to follow to install Medialon Manager V6 on your computer Please follow it closely as correct installation of Medialon Manager is very important for the success of your project The Medialon Manager Install DVD includes e Medialon Manager V6 e Medialon Manager V6 Panel e Medialon Control System Reference Manual e Runtimes for MxMs I nstallation of Main Software Medialon Software Products are compatible with Windows XP Windows Vista 32Bits and Windows 7 32Bits and can be used on these platform for all kind of use They can run on Windows 64 bits platforms Vista 64bits and Windows 7 64 Bits in 32 bits compatibility mode Tests done so far didn t show any compatibilty issues but they remain not certified on these platforms Therefore we recommend not to use these platforms in production environment To install Medialon Manager V6 software 1 First make sure you have administration rights on your computer As With Windows Vista or Windows 7 you need to turn off the User Account Control 2 Set the l
222. e x Medialon Low Level Communic z A Setup Device Fl Medialon on Network 3 hi Hn m Tasks 1 Delete Device Ir Panels 1 Device Control Panel F User Variables 0 Ef Cue Library 0 User Groups Device Help Replace By Each MxM is provided with a complete Help file MEDIALGN MXM List Alphabetica MXM List Catego Medialon MxMs Help Name Doremi Labs V1 Nugget Version 1 0 2 Available for Manager V5 all versions 5howmaster Limitation In Device Brand Doremi Labs Positrack Compatible Yes Resources type UDP IP Network or Serial Compatible hardware interfaces available resource modules MRC Serial AMX Netlinx Serial Windows COM gt Overview gt Installation MXM gt Creation Device gt Commands List Of gt Variables List Of gt Support Overview Doremi Labs offers a range of MJPEG MPEG and uncompressed high quality video players and recorders This MxM allows the control of Doremi Labs V1 or Doremi Labs Nugget machines This tyne nf viden recnrder nlaver offers an interesting alternative to the standard analon viden recorders The Help document contains e Overview of the real Device e Information about MxM installation like if a third party driver or software is needed e Device Creation and Setup e ist of Commands with comments and parameters e List of Variables with the description of available feedback information e Re
223. e Nam Showmaster CurrentTime El Description n Persistent Active User Mode Rights Mew O re a Current Time 12 20 49 58 elo Time Type 100 Units 2 AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 149 System variables are linked to status and information of the devices that are active within the session therefore not all parameters are editable System variables cannot be Persistent since their parameters are linked to the actual status of the devices not the last state they were in when the project was shut down The editable properties of system variables are marked with orange corners User Mode Rights defines if this variable is visible in the User Mode Screen Variable Properties All screen Objects created in your project whether Panels UserScreens or Graphical Objects also have variables linked to them To access the variable Properties of the Screen Objects you must browse to the correct UserScreen or Page and open the variables folders in the Lister tab Please note that the graphical Object Properties and the Graphical Object s Variable Properties are two different and separate properties User Mode Rights defines if this variable is visible in the User Mode Screen Variables can be set to Persistent allowing you to retrieve the last position they were in when the Project was last closed Es e Project Manual O001 E FF Devices 5 B OB Button 1 5tatus um Taske le Button 1 Click ps Panels 1 j 7 El LocalPanel Mp Variable
224. e Task ect Cti Alt K Configuration send Project Retrieve Project Manage Logs Firmware Info amp Update Reboot Shutdown Firmware EL Up date Editor Firmware Version 2 0 1 4 Beta Showmaster Firmware Version 2 0 1 4 Beta CLIs 582174D8 1 Group all MW XMincmMedialonFilesManagement mms MX MrmMedialonlO mom MXMWrixmhMedialonlR mm MX MrixmMedialonLow LevwelCommunicator mam MX MWrxmMedialonMIDI mxme MXMWrixmMedialonMIDIAudioController rrxrme MX M rrmMedialonMIDIMachineControl rxrme MXMWrixmMedialonMIDIShow Control mems MAR inom edialon HIP mams Aa E mme WANT MEH IDEM TV ORL TITIES METE MXM mixmhMedialonSynchMaster rxme MX Mmi edialon Timecode mame MXMWrxm OdeticsR S422 moms l 1 MXM mxmhMedialonV ariablesManagement mxme l MXM mxmPeaveyMediaMatrix rmxme MXM mxmPeaveylMediaMatrixPasha mm MXMWrixmPelcoCM39 50Matrix Switcher mem MXMremPhilipsLTCS300 mxm6 A S000 mums Ee Copy Showmaster Version 6 0 3 0 6 0 3 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 2 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 2 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 Editor Version 6 0 3 0 6 0 3 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 2 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 Update gt Cancel 4 You can compare the Showmaster s and Showmaster Editor V2 s firmware version
225. e about Showmaster Logs on page 433 4 um USB Key Disk Hj de Installer de ProToo s a de 5howmaster gt Logs de Persistent de Showmaster Licenses 406 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description Ay Medialon Showmaster iPro USB Key needs to plugged before Medialon Showmaster iPro runs in order to start the Log Traces engine Showmaster V2 iPro Shutdown and Restart procedure 2 shortcuts are available on the desktop to shutdown or restart The shutdown procedure execute the following steps 1 Stop Showmaster V2 iPro Restart iPro 2 Send a STOP command to the PLC 3 Execute a Windows Shutdown 4 Power Off the mEC a Shutdown iPro The Restart procedure is 1 Stop Showmaster V2 iPro 2 Send a STOP command to the PLC 3 Execute a Windows reboot 4 Switch the PLC to RUN mode Ay These commands are also available in Showmaster Editor V2 see Menu Showmaster section SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 407 Technical Specifications Network Connections Number 3 2 for Show Control 1 for Siemens ProfiNet Connector RJ45 female Interface 10 100Mbps 100BaseT Protocol TCP IP UDP IP ProfiNet Addressing Static IP or DHCP USB Connections Number 2 Connector USB slave socket Interface USB2 Physical Size Siemens S7 300 Rail Mount 476 x 260 x 44 5mm Stand alone 17 38 x 10 25 x 1 75 441 x 260 x 44 5mm Weight 11 Ibs 5 kg Temperature 32 F 122 F 0 C 50 C Humidity 10
226. e less Esso n lees i arialla 18 Item s dh docs als Right clicking on the desired object opens a contextual menu allowing you to force the Browser and Lister to display the selected object You may also choose to create a User Group from the selected result s Multiple selection is available using the Ctrl and or Shift keys PROGRAMMI NG ENVIRONMENT 75 76 PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT SHOW PROGRAMMI NG I n this section you will learn show programming from the basic single show structure to complex multiple show structures using timelines 78 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Devices Devices Devices are the machines programs or services that Medialon Control System will control with the MxMs and the hardware interfaces connected to it An MxM can host several devices For example you may create as many Doremi devices as you wish using the MxM Doremi Labs V1 Nugget Creating a Device 1 Select in the menu bar Object Devices New Device type Ctrl Insert or right click in the Device Map to open the contextual menu and choose New Device The Create Device window opens File Edit Object Windows Help ESI bo Project n Delete Hane Duplicate Ctrl D NH anager Doremi Labs V1 Nudgg Control Panel Medialon DMxXh12 2 Setup IER Lx ps l Medialon_on_Network_ UserScreens Devices New Device Ctrl Ins Variables F Tasks Be User Activity
227. e present SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 107 108 Flash Controls The Flash Controls give the capability of controlling the cues in a task regardless of the current position or status Execute Cue Lil Time Label Button 00 00 0070 Medialon Local Media Player d Cue executed 00 00 0070 NE video Load With Flash Control y 00 00 072 52 Aiedialon_ Local Media Player_1 Play 00 0 0 o252 video Play Enabl e Disable OSD Medialon Local Media Prayer Cue Button ononodes 45 vileo Stop Disabled Cue The Flash Button on the left of each Command Cue lets you execute that cue The Round button allows you to disable Red or enable Green the cue Message and CountDown Cues do not have Flash Controls Blind Mode Blind mode allows you to run your task without executing any of the cues 1 il b PEA a 3 Internal Timecode F Ctrl TimeLabel Device Acton Comment Blind Mode On Show _Varial Set Integer Show Episode Running Audio Tasca Locate 02 59 58 00 Aran P AUDIO i 0 00 00 00 SEN Audio Tasca Set Start Ti ode 02 594 00 00 00 01 CUES3 i x i 00 00 0700 Fill OD lt p Internal Timecode F Lt Time Label DES 1c Action Comment gica A r D0 00 00 00 Show _Warial Set binis Show Episode Running A 7 7 00 00 00 00 Audio Tasca Locate 02 59 58 00 ca 10 00 00 00 Audio Timecode starts at 3 00 00 00 01 52 00 Seng aroha e E E ep 00 00 00 00 m IDEE C Te Set Start TimeCo 2 59 50 00 ma
228. e that is put in pause mode only the last command before the pause point is executed Positrack groups Group Inside this group Mot inside this group Command Command Commands Command4 Monitoring Request and Variables Medialon Control System can send periodic requests and automatically update device variables from the monitored responses Automatic Answers Some protocols require specific answers before sending the next frame this section defines these automatic answers Low Level Communicator Setu Command driver File Load Save Save as Ma driver loaded Type ames Checksum i Commands Monitoring Automation Automatic answe iMi For each valid frame received answer 9 when receiving this valid frame AA Anzwer Get larmbMeszage Add Edit Delete Periodic Request The Periodic Request feature repeatedly sends frames directly from the device without the need of creating a task to do it This is handy for devices that must be polled or asked for information 248 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Driver Edition Click on Add to create a new polling request Command driver file Load Cave Cave az Mo driver loaded Type ames Commands Answers M anitoring Automation Test Fixed Length character Varnable Length character fa Perlodic request frames sending Period 1 10 f NE Timeout ms 3000 Add Edit Delete Disable request frames The perio
229. ead 66 Properties Ase 2445460 xoX eee aoe 908 AI 66 COMO Tas shag eo new here ets 646 eR Rae aoe a ee 67 Panels TaD sae 54 0401 44 ooo ode ee Oe eS Go Oa ee eo ee ae E 67 Device Map Tab sx wu ox une d EE i vet bw teehee o OY RE SO XO d 67 TASK CdD carrasco arrasa ee 67 Customize Your Workspace oa a 68 Workspace Theme 0o oooo oo ooo mare 71 The FINO 5595345 FeO eee eee eee eee eee eae AS The Finder Window eR hi ee es 73 SONG co sos ns nara cee beaten ee ea ee ee eee 73 WICKS surcos odres old 73 ODEHIODS nie S SIR ora C aaa ee 74 The Results Section aaao a 75 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG DOVICOS lt or anonimos 79 Creating a DEVICE sa a unos essa a ae ib dr die ee ee qo e d 79 Device PropertieS uuu ace dun 44 ba 5S doe AR ode ana oe ed 80 Wi ue 2 Lc 81 Testing DGVices 44468 a6 pad eh a eae be Gee ek ea a 82 Testing Device Control PanelS 0 000 eee eee ee es 83 Testing Commands cee ccoo 83 Device Help 4G wae Haak eek ode b ee RR ee ek ee a 84 Timebased Tasks L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L 87 SNOW SE HCEU e cos acuario exce E onde Ew m aa e 87 18 TABLE OF CONTENT Table of Content Single Timeline ee n n R B eB ng 87 Multiple Timelines ccr Rhe 87 Creating a TimeBased Task ee ee es 87 Creating a TimeBased task ooo o 88 The Task EGItOE
230. earch engine that allows you to quickly find the object you are looking for in your project You will discover that this tool is very time saving especially as your project evolves and your project becomes bigger and more complex The Finder Window The Finder can be launched from the Edit menu by clicking on the Finder icon of Medialon Control System s main toolbar or with the keyboard shortcut Shift Ctrl F The Find window appears sting Type Search String Here Search Advanced Where Options j Devices j Cue Library Use Regular Expression fd Search in contents M MEE fa User Groups hole word only E Search in containers j UserScreens fa Resources Case sensitive l User Variables TEO Localien Tye No Element String The String field is where you enter search text partial or whole Ay Click on Advanced to get more options for your search Where You may limit your search to specific areas of your project to avoid unnecessary results Devices When this option is selected the search engine will scan Device Names Tasks The Search engine will Scan the Tasks to find matching Strings If both the Contents and the Containers options are selected the engine will search both the Task list for names matching the requested String and the cues inside the tasks for the requested String Cue Comments are not searched PROGRAMMING ENVI RONMENT 73 UserScreens The search engine will scan the UserScreens and the
231. ec PT um m rs Panels SE ser varieties Uy i User Variables Eg Cue Library 0 E i al M Ef Cue Library Br User Groups r B User Grou pz E Resourcez B Resources Properties Status Connected to SwhW Pro MIPZT Editor Firmware Version 1 PROGRAMMI NG ENVIRONMENT 63 64 1 The Toolbar 2 The Object Browser tab gives access to all your project s objects 3 The Object Lister tab displays the content of the object selected in the Browser 4 The Object Properties tab the properties of the most recently selected object or cue can be monitored and edited 5 The Working Area could contain e Control tab e Device Map tab e Panels tab e Tasks tab 6 The Status bar displays current firmware version and the name of the connected Showmaster Main Toolbar Medialon Control System V6 s Main Toolbar gives access to menus and groups of functions ab s Finder Workspace File Edit Showmaster Object Windows Help E IE b gt n E A y gt k Workspace Design e Current Model Showmaster Pro Browser E Lister wice Map Tasks 2 E Showmaster Model e Open and Save Project e Medialon Control System Mode e Finder e Objects New Control Panel Setup e Task control Stop All Lock Start Stop e Workspace Select Save e Showmaster Select Showmaster model PROGRAMMING ENVI RONMENT Workspace Browser Tab The Browser presents all elements of your project Ji Project Device
232. ecording Medialon Showmaster Pro is a 2 U full 19 rack mountable machine the front panel consists of an LCD display function buttons and status LEDs Show Controller The rear panel hosts a 10 100 Base T Ethernet interface digital I O serial ports SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 351 DMX ports MIDI ports and a Timecode input port DMX 2 MIDI In MIDI Out Timecode Digital Inputs Medialon Showmaster Pro operates on an embedded operating system OS Showmaster Pro Showmaster iPro is a unique combination of Medialon Control System and Programmable Logic Controller PLC Medialon Showmaster V2 s runtime engine runs in a Siemens SIMATIC S7 mEC PLC in parallel with the regular Siemens real time environment The combination of PLC and Show Controller in the same box benefits from advanced two way communication and real time synchronization between the two environments It supports multiple timelines third party resource extensions unlimited simultaneous touch panel connections and signal recording 352 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Overview of Showmaster Medialon Showmaster Modes Medialon Showmaster switches between different modes to run program and maintain it Running or Normal Mode This is the default mode of Medialon Showmaster At startup Showmaster uses its locally connected resources and runs the show Device Device Device ME a e Device Commands are executed when the Timeline runs e T
233. ector box e Bitmap To select a background bitmap use the magic wand to open the I mage Selector e Motif Type Depending of the background bitmap you select you can define the type of motif used Stretch Pattern e Background Page Same Objects can be used in several pages Instead of AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 127 duplicating these objects you can use a page as background All objects present in this page are displayed and active in the current page UserScreen Management To manage UserScreens once they have been created you can access the Management menu by right clicking on the UserScreen inside the Browser tab or inside the Lister tab E i Project RENE Devices 1 F Varables La Tasks 0 BP Pages Ir Panels 2 l Bl LocalPanel El WebPanel 1 y Varables i Right Click ZEE NIME Mill EE UserScreen_ W Variables A New UserScreen i Pages Delete UserScreen Er Page i T Show Screen EF Pace Show UserScreen Er Page 3 Close UserScreen Wo T m cu Wy Im P LlzerWarnables 0 E Cue Library 0 Collapse All From the Browser or lister tabs e New UserScreen Creates a new UserScreen e Delete UserScreen Deletes the selected UserScreen from the Project e Show UserScreen Opens the selected UserScreen in the Screens tab e Close UserScreen Closes the selected UserScreen From the menu bar File Edit Windows Help UD cu Duplicate Ctrl D E Project Delete
234. ed before starting the installation Setup The Write protect drive C have to be disabled in order to continue installation tf More details are available into the iPro manual Are vou sure Ehe Write protect drive C is disabled Yes Ma SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 401 4 Click on Next to start the installation ca Setup Medialon Showmaster iPro Firmware a Welcome to the Medialon Showmaster iPro Firmware Setup Wizard This will install Medialon Showmaster iPro Firmware 1 6 3 on vour computer IE is recommended that you close all other applications beFore continuing Click Mext to continue or Cancel to exit Setup 5 Read the License agreement and Select the ca Setup Medialon Showmaster iPro Firmware License Agreement Please read the Following important information before continuing Please read the following License Agreement You must accept the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation FINAL USER S LICENSE FOR MEDIALON SHOWMASTER SOFTWARE E IMPORTANT READ ATTENTIVELY The license contract is concluded between ou the Final user a legal entity or natural person and Medialon 54 and concerns the aforementioned software product any attached add in software the documentation in electronic format and any example or educational software By installing copying downloading accessing or using the software product vau laccept and acknowledge that you are bound
235. ed from one computer to another by a standard file copy operation Note that the mngVarStor6 and the Project UserData folder must be copied along with the project file to copy the entire project environment Recovering the Previous Version of a Project Each time you save a new version of a project A copy of the previous version is created in the same directory as a Showmaster V2 Backup File swmXSBckProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 LE Backup File swmLEBckProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 LE Backup swmStBckProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 ST Backup is File swmProBckProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 Pro Backup E File smiProbf5 which stands for Showmaster iPro Backup File 346 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES SHOWMASTER HARDWARE This section introduces you to Medialon Showmaster and helps you get started with basic installation 348 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Overview of Showmaster Overview of Showmaster Embedded Show Controllers Medialon Control System brings the power of Medialon Manager award wining Show Control software in a rugged and compact hardware design SHOWMASTER X95 oGHO VVMIASTEH LE Let ee SHOWMASTER ST SHOWMASTER Pro SHOWMASTER Pro Its free editing software embeds most of the features of the award wining Medialon Manager software such as synchronization and logical programming as well as real time testing Showmaster uses a run ti
236. ed tasks Wait Enables you to introduce a delay time between two command lines from 1 100 second to 99 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds and 99 hundredths of a second Parameters Time Type Time Amount of time the task should wait 184 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster While EndWhile This function enables you to create a loop as long as the specified condition is true then the cues between the While cue and the EndWhile cue will be executed The loop stops when the While condition is no longer true False Parameters Condition Type Private A Comparison Expression to be evaluated for the While condition Click on the Magic wand button to open an Expression Edit window more details in the Expressions chapter I f Else Endif This Cue triggers a command only if the required condition is true Otherwise another command may be activated The Else function is automatically created but can be deleted or ignored if it is not used Parameters AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 185 186 Condition Type Private A Comparison Expression to be evaluated for the If condition Click on the Magic wand button to open an Expression Edit window more details in the Expressions chapter Wait For This function enables the task to wait for an expression e g waiting for a device status to be true with a timeout and a label to go to in case of timeout TimeOut gt Label
237. edialon Manager Lite by using key combination CONTROL ALT at start up Medialon Manager V6 Kiosk Medialon Manager V6 KIOSK is a lite application based on the same legendary Medialon programming environment for designing Kiosk applications It offers control of local media playback as well as internet browsing but cannot control external devices It is possible to connect multiple Medialon Manager Kiosks to a central Medialon Control System to supervise them deliver media or link Kiosk apps to other mediums such as Lighting Effects Audio etc As A project saved with a Medialon Manager Kiosk Edition can be opened with a Medialon Manager Pro Edition Any modifications could invalidate the project for a Medialon Manager Pro Edition use Project Fl Load Information NR m You are loading a project made with Medialon Manager Kiosk Sawing this project under your current Medialon Manager Pro version might make it unable to load again on Medialon Manager Kiosk version 135 To prevent this you can launch a Medialon Manager Pro Edition as Medialon Manager Kiosk by using key combination CONTROL Arrow Down at start up Medialon Manager Kiosk Specifications e UserScreens creation e StepBased Tasks and Logical Programming e Limited list of MxMs and MRC see below e No TimeBased Task Timeline e No Positrack or Flash Control capability e No connection allowed with Medialon Manager Panel project List of available MxMs and M
238. ee m e e rns 103 External Timecode naaa aaa m eR rrr 103 Recording CUCS lt 424446462 GR Soy OR X PERSE RAR 103 Device Recorder Tool Bar een 104 DMX Device Recording ooo 105 Controlling VASKSs 3 3 3 4 Jur Ee de 30 8039 e Ee n a e Eg 106 VICWSS 2 62645 urraca aa A 107 Timeline VIEW x i33 3x ow dox X kx coke CE Goo da s 107 LISE VIEW desiste enen seats diia ee eee 107 Flash COMMONS serranos A cde ne See eee eee eee SA 108 PUNGIMOGC rose rs abet ooo ae AAA 108 LOCK Tasa erase dare scada ed as 109 Pause POINTS iw imen 809b rare SOR WD I3 3e dede 3 109 Tasks in a Project scies Se Sew ease Hee ee ee ee ooo 109 Task Properties ce ee ee 109 Task Vablabl amp S cursar Hw X woe ee dob ox a Di a 110 Task Management llenos 110 Task SCD persas E Behe ee AAA 111 General Setup i i kk o o OE ROO 3C o3 X ERE y XO HS 111 Timecode Setup i xao 0850 xoxo Yee UR AA dec ca 112 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Panels UserScreens nnns 117 The Panels 117 Local Panel amp ae ans a a aaa asas 117 TABLE OF CONTENT 19 Creating a WebPanel c ee ee nnn 119 Connecting a WebPanel 0 0 o ooooo mocos 120 Panels VallaDleS su oa ue de oe QR ob c e CO CORR EO inns 123 The Panels Tab aida en ve AE SD AD e E dC dro dog os 123 Creating a USerScreen i uk cgo dex iode dox e SS ACA odo A 125 Userscreen Properties soc ay xax ok AC o x HS 126 UserScre
239. eement ii replace or modify the Software to make it non infringing or if i and ii are not reasonably feasible iii terminate this Agreement and refund to you the depreciated value of the Software based on straight line depreciation over a period of 5 years The foregoing obligations state MEDIALON SA s entire liability and your exclusive remedy of and MEDIALON SA shall have no other liability or obligation with respect to any actual or alleged infringement of any intellectual property rights under this Agreement Limitation of liability MEDIALON SA s entire liability to you or another party for any loss or damage resulting from any claims demands or actions arising out of this Agreement shall not exceed the license fee paid to MEDIALON SA for the Software License Fee net of dealer or distributor margins notwithstanding any failure of essential purpose of any limited remedy No other warranties Except for the express warranty provided under heading Limited Warranty above the Software and its related documentation are provided As Is and without a warranty of any kind whether express implied statutory and MEDIALON SA specifically disclaims the implied warranties terms or conditions of merchantability non infringement and fitness for a particular purpose No liability for consequential damages ACCORDING TO DANGEROUSNESS OF CERTAIN KIND OF EQUIPMENTS WHICH CAN BE CONTROLED BY THE SOFTWARE THE LIABILITY OF MEDIALON SA IS S
240. een 1 X 0090 Y 0002 Page 1 OM E NY m peda n DimxB12_2 E zer Mein Lon Lev Communes 7i Medialo in MIP 5 User Groupe E EN Resources Medialon_on_Nehwork_ Medialon_Timecode_ T MENUS amp WIZARDS 2 1 The Device Control function is also used for the Device Display command in this example you will open a Local Media Player Display inside a container ES E Project Manual 0001 Name Devices 8 Tm Im Tasks el Doremi Labs M1 Nugget E EC Ra le T Medialon_DMX512_ 2 5 Sese E bed Hedislon Local Media Player 1 We iar m a oe de Ex sustine o Level Cicas cael 8 Medialon MIP_5 esouIicez c ie arta ie Medialon_on_Network_3 Medialon_Timecode_6 Click and Drag Container are on available in Local Panel Manager V6 Dragging Variables onto Graphical Objects Similarly to creating device commands you may drag a variable onto an object to monitor the variable with it This function is identical to the create a task to monitor a variable with this object wizard but is much easier to use For instance you may want to create a display that shows the current time of the system Create your display and edit its properties then just drag the Showmaster Editor CurrentTime variable onto the display and you are good to go As soon as you enter Debug or Run mode the display shows you the current time Lister Doremi Labs 41 Nugget 1 Activity Enabled 1 Click and Dra uP SR Dor
241. els that are opened as separate windows the Control Panels that are open in the Control tab stay open Help This menu provides access to help files tutorials and information about your computer amp Manager Help Fl space w MXMs Help Shift Fl amp MRCsHelp Shift Ctrl Fl Tip Of The Day Medialon Internet Resources amp Medialon Home Page Register Your Licence amp Medialon Customer Support J About Medialon Manager Manager amp MXMs Upgrades Premium Service About your Computer About your Computer amp Showmaster Help MLS MXMs Help Shift Fl Pareles Device Map amp MRCs Help Shift Ctrl Fl Tip Of The Day Medialon Internet Resources amp Medialon Home Page E About Medialon Showmaster Medialon Customer Support W Showmaster Editor Upgrades Showmaster Firmware Upgrades Medialon Manager Showmaster Help F1 This is the reference guide of Medialon Control System V6 this document s content MxMs Help Shift F1 This window contains the list of installed MxMs and associated help documentation 268 MENUS amp WIZARDS Menus MRCs Help Shift Ctrl F1 This window contains the list of installed MRCs and associated help documentation Tip Of The Day Opens Tip of the day windows Medialon Internet Resources Gives you direct access to the Medialon web site www medialon com About Medialon Manager Showmaster This i
242. empty the search will be performed on the whole project Use the wizard to select an available parent object Object Type Type Enum Type of Object to be listed Available values e All Objects No filter is applied e Device Get the list of devices contained in the Parent Object e Task Get the list of tasks contained in the Parent Object e Variable Get the list of variables contained in the Parent Object e User Variable Get the list of User Variables contained in the Parent Object e Timeline Task Get the list of TimeBased tasks contained in the Parent Object e Stepbased Task Get the list of StepBased tasks contained in the Parent Object e UserScreen Get the list of UserScreens contained in the Parent Object e Button Get the list of buttons contained in the Parent Object e Slider Get the list of sliders contained in the Parent Object e Digital Slider Get the list of digital sliders contained in the Parent Object e Display Get the list of displays contained in the Parent Object e LED Get the list of LEDs contained in the Parent Object e Gauge Get the list of gauges contained in the Parent Object e Container Get the list of containers contained in the Parent Object e List Get the list of lists contained in the Parent Object e Edit Get the list of text edit objects contained in the Parent Object e Any Graphic Object Get the list of all graphic objects contained in the P
243. emt_Labs_V1_Nugget_1 Positrack Enabled 1 Userscreen_1 X 0012 Y 0012 Page 1 Dorem Labs 1 Mugget 1 TimeCode 00 00 00 00 100 fps Dorerm_ Labs V1 Nugget 1 CurrentStatu No Disk 0 L aoremi Labs V1 Mugaet T CurrentEror Not Online 2 00 00 00 00 D oremi Labs M1 Mugget 1 StartTimeCoc 00 00 001 00 100 fps 272 MENUS amp WIZARDS Drag and Drop Wizards Dragging Tasks onto Graphical Objects To start a task with a graphical object you can drag the task onto the object This function is similar to the Add Start Condition to selected Task wizard 3 Lister Paria 5 creenz i D m E m z Click and Dra Status Mame Start col 9 EE El om Task 2 N screens 1 140071020 pr Uh Doremi Labs 1 Muguget Doremi Labs a Button _Play Click Button Play Ste Doremi_Labs_ 1_Nugget_ Doremi_Labs_ For instance you wish to start your TimeBased task with a button called Start Select Task_1 in the Lister and drag it onto Start button The start condition of Task_1 becomes START Status amp START Status Drag and Drop on Tasks Dragging a Task onto another Task To start a task from another task you simply drag one task into the other task This action generates a StartTask Cue and fills in the parameters Sites Click and Drag b BP OOOO O O O as Taur Oe Task_1 ju aL e 07 0898 Task 2 Task o A Label Device Achor Le V 0000 k E howmaster Start
244. en a jump is made in a timeline Device Control Panels can be opened or set to a container in a LocalPanel UserScreen Parameters Device Name Type String Name of device to control Control Type Type Enum Type of control to apply to the device Available values e Set Activity enables or disables device activity e Set Positrack enables or disables the device positrack mechanism e Control Panel shows or hides the device Control Panel 190 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster e Display shows or hides the device display for example the video win dow of the Local Media Player MxM e Get Activity gives device activity status e Get Positrack gives device positrack status Control Status Type Enum Status of select control Available values e Enable The control type is enabled e Disable The control type is disable mM Container Name Type String Name of container in the UserScreen into which the Control Panel will be opened Left Type Integer Left position of Control Panel if no Container is specified Top Type Integer Top position of Control Panel if no Container is specified Width Type Integer Width of Control Panel if no Container is specified and the Control Panel is re sizable Height Type Integer Height of Control Panel if no Container is specified and the Control Panel is re sizable Enum Control This command provides all of the actions necessar
245. entered from Stop mode You cannot switch between Debug and Run mode directly Medialon Control System Product Comparison Medialon Control System V6 has evolved into a range of products from embedded controllers to open platform control software only The chart on the following page describes the main features available for each Medialon Control System product 46 INTRODUCTION hA Embedded Controllers Control Software Panel MEDIALGN programming software included Show Control Machine PC required Software Showmaster Showmaster Showmaster Showmaster Manager V6 Manager V6 Manager V6 Manager V6 Product Comparison Chart xs LE ST ProMK2 Pro HARDWARE FEATURES e Serial e MIDI Tout In Out In Out w ext the Card Frame Controller e DMX A 1 Out 2 In Out w ext or PC used e 3rd Party Hardware Extension SOFTWARE FEATURES e Programming Environment Core M6 Core M6 Core M5 e Device Positracking A NN e Device Recording DMX MIDI m ETE SL NS ES e Logical Programming e Real Time Program Testing e Driver Editor e Local Media Playback e On board GUI Local Panel y e Networked GUI Web Panel Protocol Connections Medialon On Net k as ui E RAO Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited 2 Connections a T S SIS SIS mu al S ES S Ne ON SAS Wl IM w ext with extension Medialon extension or third pa
246. ep B type You can create variables that will reflect various properties of the task by checking the Create task variables box Showmaster Editor automatically opens the new task in a Task Editor tab Comment The StepBased tasks editor view is similar to the list view of TimeBased tasks but it has no time reference The cues are played one after another in the order they are placed in the task AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 171 Creating Cues Creating cues in StepBased Tasks is identical to creating them in TimeBased tasks Method A 1 Select a command in the Lister tab 2 Drag and Drop the command where you want to insert the cue in the Task ES Open UserScreen Task 1 Task zl Close UserScreen i n ii OIE Task_1 Goto Page 172 List Control Click and D itl WE Device Action Comment aided ck and Drag E Object Text Con q OO00 br Manager start Task Start T ask mm De Pause T ask n VA Stop Tazk n Method B 1 Right click inside the Task Editor Tab and select Insert Cue 2 Browse to the desired device command and select it Task p Task 3 m li DEES Task_3 N Label Device Action Comment s jshowmaster start Task Task 2 00 Right Click B Medial n_DMX512_1 send Cue 00 00 10 00 Insert Cue Em Showmaster T Re insert Last Cue Alt R ca Medialon DMX512 1 Add to Cue Library Shitt A REMESAS Transport Insert a Message Shift M El Cues Library shift i Edit Play Insert a Countdown Alt C L
247. er Example msmrt gt disconnect msmrt Disconnecting msmrt Disconnected reboot Sends a reboot command to Showmaster shutdown Sends a shutdown command to Showmaster get conf Gets Showmaster s system configuration Example msmrt gt get conf msmrt Name Showmaster BO38AE msmrt System Version 1 0 0 msmrt System Status Recovery Mode msmrt IP Address 192 168 144 80 msmrt IP Mask 255 255 255 0 msmrt IP Gateway 192 168 144 253 msmrt Primary DNS 192 168 144 107 SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE 425 msmrt Secondary DNS msmrt DHCP Off msmrt MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX msmrt Serial Number 1001xxxx msmrt Log Status On msmrt Log Buf Size 1000 msmrt Log SM Cue Trc Off msmrt Log MXM Trc Off msmrt Log MXM Cmd Trc On msmrt Log RT Status On msmrt Log RT Period 600 msmrt Log Hist Size 7 set conf lt paramname gt lt paramvalue gt Set system configuration lt paramname gt to lt paramvalue gt Before using this command a getconf command is required As To apply all changes use the commit command System Parameters e name Showmaster s user defined Name Example set conf name smaster1 e address Showmaster s IP address Example msmrt set conf address 192 168 1 79 msmrt IP Address set to 192 168 1 79 call commit to apply e mask subnet mask Example set conf mask 255 255 255 0 e gateway gateway address Example
248. er PAGES 4464 42 eae OX bre dee COEUR C a 127 UserScreen Management o onm ohm oan 128 Graphical ODIGCES 4 aca ob AR OLOR A Be dC p e a ed 129 UserScreen Toolbar ee ee rh nnn 129 Creating Graphical Objects ee ee et 130 Graphical Object Properties a 131 COMMON Properties a c ok do E RR OR OG ooo BES HORS 131 siio C P ed Sw a Se 132 SCIES a dia o eS ar fe v e da oa 134 Digital Shd Serr A A REESE 134 TCX EGS 5 2 0 59 aaa a a a a de 1 at ts 135 Bl fk PDC DD TUTUP PL ete io ih dame eet ee a 136 Text DISDIaVS amp wd 644 5 x o dead OA c d 137 LEDS aa a Span dS oe diae ut ax E arde rds abut ea eS Ge tl decus 137 Gauges MCI 139 COREaITIGE S x i htt euet desee te RO as 3 a ee dnce RUE e C On kG 139 Static Graphical Objects cer n nnn 140 Graphical ODJ ct TOO S u a3 3 ut tol ae 3 Ro eu e E aO a ES 141 FONE Seleccion stos b 2 088 do d Reed PORC B RR Rodeo yes dde da 141 Color Selector iw dex eaae eur So haod lu eed e a aoo o qct dicas deca 141 Image Selector e boues kee Rhea es GEE xe SC or eG 142 Layer and Position Tools lle 144 Value Selection Window een 145 Variables s vacas dra wow aa ea whence LAT DENNING variables t i o dr M a t e trm decns 147 Categories us s acest RS ao o deo d Wd bn o De o 147 Types or Watrlable5 oorr e Fc a a ae 147 Persistent Variable leer re nn 148 Creating User VallabDIGS bee oer sp o ani cbe pM
249. er task However a task can be started automatically by specifying a Start Condition for the task To create a Start Condition click on the magic wand in the Task Properties for the Condition property This opens the Edit Expression window for you to write out the evaluation expression Object Type Marne Description User Mode Rights None Comment Sarai ZEN A classic expression used to start a Task is Button StartShow 1 Status 1 amp Button StartShow 1 Statusz This expression is divided into two parts that must evaluate true to make the entire expression true The first part compares the variable Button StartShow 1 Status to 1 whereas the second part tests if Button StartShow 1 Status has changed since the last time the variable was evaluated AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 169 170 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG StepBased Tasks StepBased Tasks StepBased tasks are composed of a succession of command lines that execute consecutively StepBased tasks can be used as sub programs capable of performing simple to complex logical operations Creating a StepBased task To create a StepBased task the procedure is the same as the creation of TimeBased Tasks Select the Object Task New Task menu item or Select the Tasks item in the Object Browser and right click to open the contextual menu The Create Task dialog box opens C reate Task StepB e Timeline Cancel Select the St
250. erson gt par am gt param name bcc bcc valuei anntherperson amp example3 com value2 2 Another Person gt lt par am lt param name subject valuel Medialon watchgog EMail gt param name body valuel Medialon watchgog EMail gt Default gt z email Click the Check E mail button to send a test e mail to validate your settings 310 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Project Files Project Files Project Files amp Folders A Medialon Manager V6 Project is composed of a project file and an associated folder A variable storage file is also generated if the project uses Persistent Variables Medialon Manager Project File p A Medialon Manager V6 project is saved in a file with the extension mngProj6 meaning Medialon Manager Project File version 6 A Medialon Manager Panel project is saved in a file with the extension mngPanelProj6 meaning Medialon Manager Panel Project File I mage Folder If a project uses User Bitmap Images in UserScreens or in the Device Map the bitmap files are saved in the ProjectName l mageFolder located in the same directory as the project file Persistent Variables Files The values of all of the persistent variables defined in a project are saved in a file with the same name but with the extension mngVarStor6 Manager Variable Storage This variable storage file is updated each time a persistent variable changes Another file with the extension m
251. erted into a task it can be reassigned to a different device as long as the New device is identical This allows you to keep your existing cues as they are but send the commands to a different device To access the Cue Replace Device function you must first select the new Device the Cue will be assigned to in the Browser tab the Lister tab or the Device Map Once the target Device is selected right click on the desired Cue and go to the Devices sub menu Select Replace Device to perform the reassignment E E ESA Project Hamme ZEE Task 1 Task Devices 6 A ar 7 i E E T c a 3 D a Lunes T UO Uae 00 00 00 74 F i 5 Internal Timecode eae Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 3 i e Task 1 5 Medialon_D hi5 21 TimerLabel Jevice Right Click t a deus Nugget 4 00 00 00 24 E3Doremi_Labs V1 Nugget 77 gem nn ona Eak E 00 00 00 24 FB Medialon DMX512 1 Pa Cue d i User ariables E mee 00 00 02 17 Showmaster e insert Last Cue Alt R a quu H 00 00 02 30 Wf Start Show Add to Cue Library Shift A WISE IO 3 Um Lai T wea 4 SW E Elson 00 00 02 35 FE Medialon_DMX512_1 Insert a Message Shift M ise sis 00 00 02 36 Doremi Labs W1_Nugget_2 00 00 05 08 e sShovwmaster Insert a Countdown Alt C 00 00 06 24 Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 Inserta Comment Shift Alt C 00 01 56 88 Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 2 Dc Modify Cue Enter 00 05 00 00 LS End of Show Delete Cue Del 00 05 00 20 e sShowmaster SS UP
252. es It is now possible to insert transparent images and also transparent objects UserScreens editor becomes Panels editor with new tools Devices With Medialon Manager V6 no need to activate MxMs Dedicated MxM is now loaded when a device is created A new development kit for MxM is now available on demand Activity and Positrack variables have been added to Devices Tasks and Cues New Drag n drop task or cue creation wizards have been added Variable creation feature has been added into the variable dialog selector This will ease the process when a command needs a return variable New function in expressions has been added Project Properties A new description zone has been added in the Project information Showmaster Firmware A new Firmware management is available in Showmaster Editor V2 It is now possible to create your own Showmaster Firmware Showmaster LE amp XS Medialon Showmaster family has 2 new members with Showmaster LE and Showmaster XS INTRODUCTION 15 16 INTRODUCTI ON Table of Content Table of Content FINAL USER S LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MEDIALON SOFTWARE amp PLUG IN 4 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 24226426 006 a aa Re hx 8 WARRANTY TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR MEDIALON HARDWARE 11 About This Manual LS New in Medialon Control System V6 15 Table of Content c L7 INTRODUCTI ON Presentation r nnnc
253. es the current page of the active UserScreen to the last one Move Objects Enables you to move one or several selected objects from one page to another This command works not only in the current UserScreen but also between various UserScreens already created Moving objects as opposed to cutting and pasting them leaves all associated programming intact Devices The items of this menu provide for the manipulation of Devices New Device Ctri I ns Creates a new device Replace by Replaces the selected device by a compatible device currently in the project This option is only available if a compatible device is present MENUS WIZARDS 265 Activity Activates or deactivates the selected device The commands associated with the deactivated Devices are not executed Variables of a deactivated device may or may not reflect the actual state of the Device When a Device is deactivated an icon a red cross is drawn on it to remind you of its state Positrack Activates or deactivates Positrack Positrack is a mode that slaves the selected device to the current time of a TimeBased task provided the device supports that functionality When a Device s positrack mode is disabled an icon a red chain link is drawn on it in the Device Map to remind you of its state As Note that the Manager Showmaster V2 device itself can t be deactivated or have its Positrack mode set Show Device Variables Displays va
254. es will be executed with Showmaster Editor V2 See Update Showmaster V2 Firmware on page 417 Win XPe desktop Use Remote Desktop to open a connection to XPe side of the mEC The User SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description Name is administrator and the Password is admin Log On to Windows du User name administrator Password Ca es ents Ay The default IP address for the XPe side from the Siemens driver is 192 168 1 55 mEC Windows desktop will look like the above picture m hr My Network Places Recycle Bin MA Automation License RestarE Ec O EJ Shut Gown EC Configurator mEC Shutdown and Restart procedure 2 shortcuts are available on the desktop to shutdown or restart The shutdown procedure execute the following steps 1 Send a STOP command to the PLC Restart EC 2 Execute a Windows Shutdown 3 Power Off the mEC D EJ The Restart procedure is Shut Down EC 1 Send a STOP command to the PLC 2 Execute a Windows reboot 3 Switch the PLC to RUN mode As Do not use these shortcuts after Showmaster V2 Pro installation prefer the Shutdown and Restart iPro commands also available in 7 Showmaster Editor V2 see Menu Showmaster section Lal Restart iPro SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 399 Prepare mEC to Showmaster V2 Pro Installation Protection of the Embedded Controller Systems which rely on flash media as data carrier require spec
255. eturns square root of selected number or variable Input NUMBERVAR Integer variable real variable must be greater than zero Output Real value Example Sqrt 123 456 11 11108 e Round NUMBERVAR Description Rounds the selected number to the nearest integer Round uses the away from zero method for tie breaking 1 5 rounds to 2 Input NUMBERVAR Real variable AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 165 Output Integer value Example e Round 1 6 2 e Round 1 5 2 2 e Round 1 4 1 e Ceil NUMBERVAR Description Rounds the selected number to the superior integer Input NUMBERVAR Real variable Output Integer value Example e Ceil 1 6 2 e Ceil 1 4 2 e Ceil 1 0 1 e Floor NUMBERVAR Description Rounds the selected number to the inferior integer Input NUMBER Real variable Output Integer value Example e Floor 1 6 1 e Floor 1 4 1 e Floor 1 0 1 e Abs NUMBERVAR Description Returns the Absolute Value of selected number Input NUMBERVAR Integer variable Real variable Output Integer or Real value depending on input type Examples e Abs 12 3 12 3 e Abs 134 134 e Max NUMBER1VAR NUMBER2VAR Description Returns the greater value between 2 selected numbers Input e NUMBERIVAR Integer variable Real variable e NUMBER2VAR Integer variable Real variable Output Integer or Real value depending on input type Example e Max 12 3 4 12 3 e Max 3 134 34 3 e Mi
256. evices that are clients to a Low Level Communicator set up as a TCP IP Server and those that use UDP IP for communication need to be re directed to the IP address of the Showmaster Editor V2 in order for them to work in Debug Mode Remember to redirect your TCP IP client and UDP IP devices back to the IP address of the Showmaster after sending your project and running from the Showmaster hardware Showmaster Pro s Two LAN Ports Since Medialon Showmaster Pro has two LAN ports when Showmaster Editor V2 is connected and in Debug Mode only those devices that reside on the same LAN as Showmaster Editor V2 can be controlled since there is no connection between Showmaster Editor V2 and the other LAN Effectively Showmaster Pro behaves as if only one LAN port is active while in Debug Mode Medialon On Network communication is on the LAN so it is subject to the same limitations when Showmaster Editor V2 is connected and in Debug Mode Example 1 In this example Showmaster Editor V2 and Medialon Manager Panel are connected to Showmaster Pro on LAN1 An Audio Processor and several Video Projectors are connected to Showmaster Pro on LAN2 Plasma Screen Serial Showmaster Editor Audio c Video Projectors Lighting DMX Manager Panel LAN1 When Showmaster Editor V2 is connected and in Debug mode it cannot communicate with the Audio Processor and Video Projectors It can however use Showmaster s other resources Serial
257. expression Float 0 0 Integer 100 The right side of the operator is converted to the type of the leftmost item before evaluation of the expression Examples String Integer Edit Text 10 the Integer 10 is first converted into the String 10 then stored to the Variable Edit Text Date gt String Manager CurrentDate gt 01 04 2010 the String 01 04 2010 is converted into a Date before being compared to Manager CurrentDate Operations on Strings Arithmetical operators can be used to perform some kinds of string management Truncates the string from the right String String 4 removes the last 4 characters from String If String had the value ABCDEFGH then the new value is ABCD 160 AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING Expressions Concatenate two strings String String enation adds the sub string enation to the contents of String If String had the value Concat then the new value is Concatenation Concatenate a string multiple times String String 3 Concatenates the contents of String 3 times If String had the value W the new value is WWW 9o Truncates the string from the left String String 9o 3 Keeps the last 3 characters of String If String had the value ABCDEFGH then the new value is FGH Converting Time Time can be converted into an integer by using an expression like MyInteger Manager CurrentTime MyInteger co
258. expression as follows Selected Variable The task is not linked to any graphical object nor will it have any cues automatically inserted You must edit the task manually to suit your needs n gt a ES Dorem Labs V1 Mugget 1 CurrentStatus Handler N Label Action Comment MENUS amp WIZARDS 277 278 MENUS amp WIZARDS Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard Shortcuts New Project Ctrl N Create a new empty project project file Debug F2 Switch to Debug mode Ctri Z Undo the last action Shift Ctrl Z Redo action Redo action previously undone undone Ctrl X Cut AA selected item or text into the clipboard Copy Ctrl C Copy the selected item or text into the clipboard Paste Ctrl V Paste the content of the clipboard Ctrl Y Lock selected graphical object Unlock Shift Ctrl Y Unlock selected graphical objects Push to Back Ctrl B Push selected graphical object to the background Pull to Front Ctrl F Pull selected graphical object to the foreground MENUS WIZARDS 279 280 Connect Ctrl Alt K Launch Showmaster V2 Browser Disconnect Shift Ctrl K Close current Showmaster V2 connection Browser F5 Show and focus on the Browser tab Lister F6 Show and focus on the Lister tab Properties F7 Show and focus on the Properties tab Device Map F8 Show and focus on the Device Map tab Panels F9 Show and give the focus to the Panels tab Panels List Ctri F5 Show the Panels node in the Browser and give the
259. fault e Name Textdisplay name Text Type String Value text to display LEDs X Using default parameters the color of the LED depends upon the value of its associated Status property A Status value of O would set a black color a Status value of 1 would set a red color and so on You can change the color associated with each Status value by editing the Color State property in the Object Inspector You can also use bitmaps instead of colors to reflect the LED s state by editing its bitmap State property Note that if a bitmap is associated to a state this setting takes precedence over the color setting though both are active The bitmap is displayed on top of the background color At runtime an LED Object can be programmed to blink automatically by setting the value of its associated Flash Frequency and Sequence variables which appear in the Variable Lister Frequency values are expressed in hundredths of a second For example setting the Flash Frequency variable to 50 will change the Status of the LED every AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 137 half of a second when Manager is in Run Mode or Debug Mode To disable LED blinking just set its Flash Frequency variable to O The Sequence specifies the sequence of states that would be traversed by the LED if blinking mode is on Each state s number must be separated by a non numerical symbol For example setting the value of the Sequence variable to 1 3 10 will
260. focus to the list of Panels in the Lister Devices List Ctri F6 Show the Devices node in the Browser and focus on the list of Devices in the Lister Variable List Ctri F7 Show the Variables node in the Browser and focus on the list of Variables in the Lister Task List Ctri F8 Show the Tasks node in the Browser and focus on the list of Tasks in the Lister Timecode Calculator Ctrl F11 Show the Timecode Calculator tool MENUS amp WIZARDS Keyboard Shortcuts Showmaster Editor F1 Launch Medialon Control Showmaster V2 System V6 Reference Manual Help MxM Help Shift F1 Launch MxMs Help index Area switch forward F4 Switch between opened Areas in forward direction Area switch Shift F4 Switch between opened Areas backward in backward direction Tab switch forward Ctrl F4 Switch between opened Tabs inside an Area in forward direction Tab switch Shitft Ctrl F4 Switch between opened Tabs backward inside an Area in backward direction Select Next Next Down Arrow Arrow Select the next item in the list the next item in the list E AM Previous Eoi LN the previous item in the list Expand Select Right Arrow Expand selected node or Select Next next node in the expanded node Collapse Select Left Arrow Collapse selected node or Previous Select previous node in the collapsed node Enable Device Ctrl Shift Enables Positrack for the Positrack N selected Device Disable Device Ctrl Shift Disabled Po
261. for more information Recovery Mode This mode is used for low level operations like testing resources or doing a factory reset Medialon Showmaster ST or Pro say Medialon Showmaster ST or Pro switches to recovery mode when the UP button LIES is pressed and held during startup A validation prompt appears on the LCD asking for validation before entering Recovery Mode 3 Showimester Bersseel Recorra Lal cis Uers 1 4 6 Confirm by pressing the UP button a second time to activate the Recovery Mode The LCD panel displays a Recovery Mode message 3 hosumazter BgmEI PEC AY z 1 80 8 O aae E zu Dip rici MIDI Dpened Dick Damen A computer connected to Showmaster s Serial Port 1 or via a network connection can access Showmaster using the Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool console SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 421 Medialon Showmaster LE or XS LE Medialon Showmaster LE or XS switches to recovery mode when the A button is pressed and held during startup LED will light on and off several times XS LIS When both LEDS start flashing alternatevely press the A button a second time to confirm the Recovery Mode When SHW LED displays a pulse Recovery Mode is active A computer connected to Showmaster s Serial Port 1 or via a network connection can access Showmaster using the Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool console Medialon Showmaster iPro Medialon Showmaster iPro switches to recovery mode
262. frared Modbus OPC TCP IP etc The Programming environment also includes a powerful tool to write your own drivers for Serial TCP IP UDP and MIDI devices These custom drivers can be shared on Medialon s web site with other Medialon users Not just a device controller Medialon Control System includes MxMs plug ins to add functionalities and to I NTRODUCTI ON 33 control a new type of devices found in modern AV IT installations SQL Database for data management FTP Client for media management and transfer Email engine Telephony engine to build up a DTMF server etc Medialon Control System really can take advantage of the power of modern integrated AV IT depending on the hardware used Device Synchronization Timelines with drag and drop programming allow synchronization of virtually any devices to external or internal time code with an accuracy of a 100th sec Timelines use a feature unique to Medialon Positrack which locates any device at the position it should be at any given time when moving back and forth in the show This makes rehearsal much easier and efficient Timelines offer the ability to record external signals such as DMX MIDI and Serial for later synchronized playback Logical Programming Control programming always requires more than a Timeline Medialon Control System offers both the time driven programming and event or external condition based programming capabilities Programming can be triggered by inpu
263. ft Arrow Select next Cue Select previous cue Select next Track Select previous Up Arrow Track Navigate from Tab Ctrl Tab to Tab Move Cue forward Alt Right by 1 10 second Arrow Move Cue backward Alt Left Arrow by 1 10 second Move Cue forward Ctri Alt Right by 1 100 second Arrow Move Cue backward Ctrl Alt Left by 1 100 second Arrow Move Cue to next Alt Down Track Arrow Move Cue to Alt Up Arrow previous Track Move Time Cursor Shift Right forward 1 10 s Arrow Move Time Cursor Shift Right backward 1 10 s Arrow Select previous Cue in the Timeline view Select next Cue in the List view Select previous Cue in the List view Select the next track in the Timeline view Select the previous Track in the Timeline view Navigation from Tab to Tab inside the Task Editor Move selected Cue forward in the Timeline by 1 10 second Move selected Cue backward in the Timeline by 1 10 second Move selected Cue forward in the Timeline by 1 100 second Move selected Cue backward in the Timeline by 1 100 second Move Cue to the next Track in the Timeline Move Cue to the previous Track in the Timeline Move the Time Cursor forward 1 10 second in the Timeline Move the Time Cursor backward 1 10 second in the Timeline Select All Cues Ctri A Select All Cues in Ctri A the current Track Select All Cues in Ctri Shift A Timeline Select Cues from Shift F Start Select Cues to End Shift T ME
264. g cues e To group cues select the cues to be grouped and either choose the Edit Group menu item or type Ctrl G e To ungroup a group of cues click on one cue of the group to select the whole group and either choose the Edit Ungroup menu item or type Ctrl U Flash Controls The Flash Controls give the capability of controlling cues in a task regardless of the current position or status Execute Cue ERTNZETE Button 0000 Cip Cue executed 0001 Doremi Labs w1 Nugget 1 Loca With Flash Control Fan x J003 Ej Start of Clip Enable Disable Oot Doremi Labs ld Nugget 1 Play Cue Button Disabled Cue The Flash Button on the left of each Command Cue allows to execute the cue The Round button allows you to disable Red or enable Green the cue Message Cues do not have Flash Controls AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING StepBased Tasks Blind Mode Blind mode allows you to run your task without firing any cues When blind mode is On Cues cannot be executed even with Flash commands the blind mode affects the selected task all other tasks in your project continue to be executed as normal devices perform all commands received by the other tasks Lock Task amp Lock Task prohibits the task from launching automatically when the start condition becomes true or when a Start Task command is sent The task may still be fired by using the play buttons in the Task Control Panel and Task Editor Tab or with
265. g session Cue contents depend on the device type Device Recorder Tool Bar The Device Recorder has its own toolbar Pause Recording Setup Record BEN Task_ i d PI Pob Recorder Medialan_DM 512_2 Timeline Time B O Bis E Recording Clock Cue Count Abort Recording Recording Devices Start Recording Recording Time Stop Recording Recording Devices List of Devices used by the recorder If multiple devices are selected settings for each device s recording can be set by choosing the device from this drop down selector Recording Clock e Medialon Control System V6 can use the current Timeline s Timecode as the clock reference during the recording The recording is made only when the TimeBased task is running e Medialon Control System can use the Recorder s Internal Time In this case recording is made even if the Timeline is stopped Setup Recording This menu allows selecting the type of recorded cues you want Choices are different depending on the selected device s type 104 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Timebased Tasks DMX Device Recording To start a DMX recording follow steps below 1 Select DMX device to be recorded Multi selection is allowed LINE 5 Task LIEN M ame LI F Doremi Labs 1_Mugget_z Manager Medialon_DMx512_2 gt Medialon_DMx512_3 WE Time x ze Device Record 9 Flash Control Tools 2 Open Recorder Toolbar using Tools Device Record button
266. g the browser application in kiosk mode Kiosk mode enables a user to view web browsers in full screen Kiosk mode is an extension or a tool or plug in available to users to enlarge the browser Some examples are give below ePanelAddress http address port panel2webpanelname amp password password e e Google enter command chrome exe kiosk PanelAddress chrome Expl Internet e e Expl orer9 enter command iexplore k PanelAddres we Firefox install R Kiosk add on and make it point to PanelAddress il Safari ER install Saft plug in and configure it e iPad install wKiosk or iCab Mobile and configure it If you want that the remote machine automatically connects to a specific WebPanel at startup you can setup an automatic launch of the browser targeting WebPanel address AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Panels Variables Panels amp UserScreens Panel variables provide information about the Panel such as Browser Project E Devices 1 m Tasks 0 BE Panels 2 El LocalPanel El w ebPanel 1 BA Variables fg UserScreens 1 EF User Variables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources a 8 8 8 B B EN B B B B M N f Lister WebPanel 1 KevPressz WebPanel 1 FeyStatus WebPanel 1 Chikey Status WebPanel 1 Shitthey Status WebPanel 1 AlthevStatus WebPanel 1 MousexPos WebPanel 1 Mousey Pos WebPanel 1 MouseClickLett WebPanel 1 MouseClick Aight WebPanel 1 C
267. ges MxM Playlist Playlist MxM provides a media management play list engine and its user interface It provides the editing of the cues Insert read delete and the ln management of a list of cues Play stop pause The playlists are saved in a separate files independently from the Manager V6 project file A playlist can be shared by different devices The playlist can be edited while it is playing This MxM is in charge to manage the characteristics of the media sources The media source status idle cueing playing is taken into account considering its other programmable properties back to back option and delay and cueing pre roll The parameters managed by the playlist can be set at the creation of the device Eight default parameters are provided but other parameters can be added and each parameters can be hidden or displayed in the playlist grid MxM Variables Management This MxM provides commands that act on variables and these commands are positracked when they are used in a Timeline Telecom MxM E mail ack This MxM offers the possibility to manage the sending and the reception of E mails in a Medialon Control System project It has all the functionality of an E mail software including management of modem connections MxM Telephony This MxM provides controls for telephony resources present in the system These telephony resources are usually modems or virtual modems created by Im commu
268. ges in a folder A series of commands is provided for manipulating strings for the purpose of saving and sorting arrangement of strings in blocks and refining of strings from blocks For example these commands are practical for managing and saving tables of ASCII text strings Special commands are provided for managing INI files INI files are very practical for creating simple database files They contains sections and items For example a simple INI file called Addresses INI where names of people are referred to as sections and their addresses are associated items MxM FTP Client MxM FTP Client is designed to provide File Transfer Protocol Client facilities It provide functions to connect to download from upload to and manage FTP Sites sack from regular FTP servers MxM FTP Client is compatible with at least Microsoft IIS FTP Server Bison FTP Server and CatSoft Serv U server Multiple and filtered file transfers can be done with a single command like download txt or Upload DIR where DIR is a directory name ANNEXES 455 The FTP Client Device can use a container object to display an FTP Site browser If this browser is used user actions can be automatically handled by the device like double clicking an item to download or dragging and dropping files into the browser to upload This automatic user management can be disabled to enable the programmer to treat user actions MxM Strings Management
269. get to validate your changes with the Enter key ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 213 Device Commands Medialon Control System can send commands to Medialon On Network Devices 5 Project Manual 0007 Mame Be Devices b Open UserScreen Mil Manager B Close UserScreen Dorent_Labs_Y1_ Mugget 1 Goto Page 7 Wedialon DHEBT2 2 ae e XUI ado SUELE z D Start Task on Medialon Low Level Communicator 4 Pause Task BE Medialon_MIP_5 ra E Medialon_on_ TA 3 EE og Tacs 2 Goto Label DS Panels 1 Bi E User Variables 0 Goto Line KJ Goto Time Ex Cue Library 0 Show T ask Be User Groupes Load Project BE Resources Properties Object Type Command Device Medialon on Metwork 3 al 20 Command Start Task UB Y 1L User Mode Rights None fiz tk 1 Time Based T ask Tazk_ Step Based Task These commands can only be performed for shared Tasks and UserScreens Use the wizard to select available objects in the cue properties Load Project LU The Load Project command loads another Medialon Control System V6 project in the slave You can choose what mode to run the slave s project Autorun Stop Run Debug or User 214 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Networking Parameters Project Name Type String path and name of the project to be opened Run mode Type Enum Select the mode in which the project starts Available values e Project Autorun Uses the project s autorun preferences set
270. gin the project transfer Retrieving from Showmaster B038AE Title Project Name Status Progressiory 3 After the transfer is finished click OK to load the retrieved project so it can be edited SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 331 Send Project To transfer Showmaster Editor V2 s current project to the connected Showmaster follow the steps below 1 Save your project 2 Select Send Project from the Showmaster menu File Edit Object Windows CN Ctii Alt K Disconnect Shift Ctrl K Configuration send Project Retrieve Project Manage Logs Firmware Info amp Update Reboot Shutdown 3 Click on Start to begin the transfer Sending to Showmaster B038AE Title Project Title Status Progressiory Cancel Ay To start the project in run mode you need to disconnect from Showmaster Associated Files Some MxMs need to store data in or read data from specific files When you transfer a project you also need to transfer these associated files Ay Showmaster iPro s storage capacity is limited try to minimize the size and amount of associated files For every project you create a Project UserData folder is added in the same location The folder contains all associated files needed by your project This folder is included in the project transfer process Showmaster Editor V2 provides a command to select and copy files into the 332 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC
271. give access to devices that support Modbus TCP protocol it acts as a Modbus TCP IP Client Values in registers or inputs or coils and register organization is device dependent The user should know how the device is organized and what the available registers or inputs or coils are in the device More information about Modbus TCP can be found at http www modbus org MxM Medialon OPC Client OPC OLE for Process Control was created as a vendor independent standard mM aimed at the definition of data exchange between Microsoft Windows applications as well as applications and vendor specific hardware in the realm of automation and industry Many industrial hardware vendors provide OPC servers for their products like data acquisition boards PLCs fieldbus controllers etc OPC defines a series of standard specifications This MxM acts as a client for both OPC Data Access servers and or OPC Alarms amp Events servers MxM CIP Ethernet IP This MxM allows Manager to interface with a Rockwell Automation Control Logix Pro family PLC using the CIP Ethernet IP protocol to read and write symbolic references created in the PLC This MxM supports the basic PLC integer types with size 8 16 or 32 bits MxM Dataton Smartpax Dataton Smartpax is a control interface supplied with a large number of drivers to control conventional analog video devices as well as slide projectors Each Smartpax can control up to 4 different devices
272. gramming the Start Task command you define the parameter of the task name to be launched If the Task is already running this command has no effect Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to be started Pause Task A task may be suspended momentarily and then continued again from where it was paused To restart a task use the Start Task command from another task Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to pause Stop Task This command not only stops a task but it takes it back to the start its line O or Time 00 00 00 00 so that the next Start Task command makes it restart from the beginning Parameter AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 181 182 Mode Type Enum Available values eSpecified Task stops the task specified in the Task Name property eAll Tasks Inclusive Stops all tasks including the active task handling the Stop Task command eAll Tasks Exclusive Stops all tasks excluding the active task handling the Stop Task command Task Name Type String Name of task to stop Sync Task Launches a TimeBased task by attributing a time reference Variable to it reference Timecode This time can be taken from any point on the Timeline This command may be used when the clock of the Timeline concerned is already in execution Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to synchronize Sync Mode Type Enum Synchronization mode Available values e nternal The g
273. h time Showmaster Editor V2 wants to open a connection with your Showmaster To change the Connection Password 1 Enter the current Connection password An empty password is set by default 2 Type the new password 3 Confirm this new password 4 Click Update to save your changes Firmware Update Password This password is required each time you want to update your Showmaster s firmware See more about Update Showmaster V2 Firmware on page 417 To change the Firmware Update Password 330 SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Menu Showmaster 1 Enter the current Firmware Update password The default firmware password is medialon 2 Type the new password 3 Confirm this new password 4 Click Update to save your changes Project Loading Showmaster only supports one project at a time When a new project is transferred into Showmaster it overwrites the existing default project and becomes the new default project Retrieve Project When Showmaster Editor V2 is connected to a Showmaster you can save a copy of the current running project from Showmaster onto the host computer s hard drive 1 Select Retrieve Project from the Showmaster menu File Edit Object Windows p iz il Connect Cih Alt K Disconnect Shift Ctrl K Configuration Send Project Retrieve Project Manage Logs Firmware Info amp Update Reboot Shutdown 2 Click the Start to be
274. hat Medialon Control System V6 can accept BMP JPG PNG and GIF format Remove Bitmap If an imported image is unused you can remove it from the project Image folder Ay Built in images cannot be removed No Image No Image command remove the image from the object properties Menu Image Image Selector Es No Remove unused bitmap s Remove unused bitmap s During the evolution of your project you may have several images not used you can clean your project and and the image folder with this menu Remove Unused User Bitmap Do vau really want to remove all unused user bilmap s li Do vau also want to delete associated bitmap File s Remove Unused User Bitmap b unused bitmaps has have been removed fram your project Qe a AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 143 144 Layer and Position Tools Eyy Layer and Position tools are available in the Panel editor toolbar or in the menu LINZ Edition vu Send to Send to Back E oe M Curent Panel WebPanel 1 Frant Pull to Front Ctrl F Push to Back Ctrl B Align Ctrl L Find Shift Ctrl F Magnetic Grid Send To Front Te J Brings the selected Graphic Objects to the foreground Send To Back 4 Pushes the selected Graphic Objects to the background Pull To Front Ctrl F Pulls the selected Graphic Objects one level towards foreground Push To Back Ctrl B Pushes the selected Graphic
275. he Devices send command orders using a Medialon plug in MxM through the appropriate resources MRC to connected machines Programming Mode When Showmaster is connected to a Showmaster Editor V2 the show runs in Showmaster Editor V2 for easy editing and programming Showmaster Editor m X L O z i oO Z Device Showmaster Editor V2 uses Showmaster s local resources to communicate with the devices Recovery Mode This mode is used for low level operations Medialon Showmaster switches to SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 353 recovery mode when the up arrow button is held during startup A computer connected to Showmaster s Serial Port 1 or via a network connection can access Showmaster using Medialon Control System Recovery Tool Recovery Tool Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool can be used when Showmaster is started in Recovery Mode Your computer can be connected to Showmaster using a serial communication cable plugged into the Showmaster s serial port 1 It is also possible to use a network connection to establish the communication Medialon Recovery Tool 2 nsmrtl Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tools 2 1 H memrt msmrt Initializing msmrt Ready msmrt gt mode tcp memrt Connection mode set to tcp memrt gt scan msmrt Scanning nsmrtl Found amp 5houmaster ZIi1 747 172 168 144 223 Showmaster memrt Found Showmaster BB3864A 192 168 144 240 nsmrt l Found Showmas
276. he reference date 01 01 1900 MyDate 38312 causes the variable MyDate to take the value 11 23 2004 because 38312 is the number of days elapsed since the reference date 01 01 1900 This mechanism can be used to calculate a new date based on a known date and a number of days For instance we may want to calculate what date is 12 days from today MyDate Manager CurrentDate 12 causes MyDate to take the value of today s date plus 12 days Creating a Toggle Value It is often useful to have a value which alternatively swaps between two values for instance O and 1 This could be done using If Then Else commands but it AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 161 is faster and simpler to use an expression to do it ToggleValue 1 ToggleValue This expression sets the value of the variable ToggleValue to 1 when its value is O and O when its value is 1 each time the expression is executed Creating a value selector with buttons When a choice has to be done between options using buttons for instance choosing between 5 options an expression be used instead of a complex task that evaluates each button status to determine the selection After creating 5 buttons named Button 1 to Button 5 those buttons are programmed to start the same task with the following expression Button_1 Status 1 Button 1 Status 7 Button_2 Status 1 Button 2 Status 7 Button_3 Status 1 Button 3 Status 7 Button_4 Status 1 But
277. hese platform for all kind of use They can run on Windows 64 bits platforms Vista 64bits and Windows 7 64 Bits in 32 bits compatibility mode Tests done so far didn t show any compatibilty issues but they remain not certified on these platforms Therefore we recommend not to use these platforms in production environment To install Showmaster Editor V2 software 1 First make sure you have Administrator rights on your computer As With Windows Vista or Windows 7 you need to turn off the User Account Control 2 Insert the installation DVD in the DVD ROM drive of your computer the installer launches automatically MEDIALBN tall Medialon showmas er Editor tel Medialon Manager Paner dn I ins ista Il Medialon Product Browser Launch Reference Manual Edition E Brow e CD CD Product 3 Click Install Medialon Showmaster Editor 4 Read the Software license Agreement then click the Yes button SOFTWARE INSTALLATI ON 59 60 5 Click Next on the Welcome page 6 Fill in the user information and click Next 7 Click Next on the Choose Destination Location page This installs Showmaster Editor V2 in the default Medialon Showmaster directory 8 The installation process copies the Showmaster Editor V2 files 9 Remove the installation CD from the CD ROM drive and click Finish to complete the Showmaster Editor V2 installation 10 Select Showmaster Editor V2 in the Wi
278. his Computer Shared Documents Administrator s Documents Hard Disk Drives Devices with Removable Storage Other Simatic Shell e C where Win RTX is installed this partition is exclusively used by the PLC this partition is locked e D where Windows XP Embedded is installed This partition will host Medialon Showmaster iPro a Windows Remote Desktop session is used to access to this partition e E is the drive reserved by the MMC reader not use by Medialon Showmaster iPro SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description Medialon Showmaster and PLC communication These two processes will communicate through the shared memory SMX PLE WinRTX Showmaster HUB STEP 7 Program Medialon Showmaster MxM mEC Input Area The communication between the 2 systems is done with the MxM Siemens mEC on Showmaster V2 side and a specific library on the Siemens side In the PLC programming some Subroutines can be defined as Showmaster iPro Actions When an Action is triggered from Showmaster iPro the message is sent to the Showmaster iPro Library which then tells the Showmaster iPro Action Object essentially a memory pointer to trigger the appropriate Subroutine in the PLC programming Actions send back variables about their status Playing Paused Stopped Progress Error to Show Controller via the Showmaster iPro Library Inputs can cause Subroutines to update Data Blocks which can
279. hrough the list until you reach the desired one If the command has parameters that need to be entered you will need to do so in the Properties tab in order to send a valid command when the task is triggered i Cr Xea task started by this object Add Start Condition to selected task Create a task to monitor a variable in this object Create a task to perform a device command from this object IM Manager Show Object Variable s E Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 gt 2 Medialon DMX512 2 a Medialon_on_Network_3 d 5 Medialon Low Level Communicator amp fl Medialon MIP 5 Play Play Media Medialon Timecode 6 3 Command Play Schedule Display Default Media Resume b Ticker gt Play Sequence b gt Video Player MENUS amp WIZARDS Task Creation Wizards Variable Wizards When a variable is selected in the Lister tab right clicking on the variable opens a contextual menu allowing you to create a task started by a change in that variable Mame Doremi Labs v1 Muadget_1 Timetlode Dn ar Daoremi Labs 1 Muaget_1 Currentatatus Doremi Labs 1 Mugget 1 CurrentError Mew Variable Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 StartTimeCade Duplicate Variable AT Doremi Labs 1 Mugget 1 RemainingTime Delete Variable Doremi Labs VT Wugget T ActiveDisk Create a task started by variable change Daoremi Labs 1 Muaget_1 InTime CAI UNL za A task is created with the start condition s evaluation
280. hysical Size Rack Mount 18 75 x 10 25 x 1 75 476 x 260 x 44 5mm Stand alone 17 38 x 10 25 x 1 75 441 x 260 x 44 5mm Weight 11 Ibs 5 kg Temperature 32 F 140 F 0 C 60 C 366 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster LE Description Humidity 30 90 RH Non condensing Power Connector socket Voltage 12 DC Mains 100 240VAC 80W adapter supplied overvoltage and short circuit protected MTBF 50 000 hours 25 C Approvals FCC EN60950 CE EN55022 Accessories Included Power Adaptor Rack Mount Brackets SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 367 368 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster ST Description Showmaster ST Description Contents of the Package The Medialon Showmaster ST Package includes e Medialon Showmaster ST e Power Supply cord e USB MIDI Adapter e Medialon Showmaster Tools installation CD Getting Started Medialon Showmaster ST is designed as a stand alone Show Controller 3 Shoc roster Bese Mode Running 1 6 6 Vers Proj Show 1 Show Controller Showmaster V2 ST doesn t need a keyboard mouse or screen to work The rear power switch must be set to On at all times Connect the power supply and press and hold the front D key to start Showmaster The front panel LCD displays the start up message 3 Shoumaster BASSAEI Hodie Starting up Were 1 5 8 Peo Front Panel Controls Use the keypad to scroll through Showmaster s status information 3 hcouumazter BeronmET Mo
281. i m Windows COM 8 setup Resource MIDI Ports Click on the MIDI Ports node to display the resources that were present in your project when Manager V6 started E n Project M ame Z ad 1 css AM NetLins MIDI 0 1 1 Out Tasks E ww Windows MIDI Input 1 t E Panels 11 ve ww Windows MIDI O utput 1 Microsoft GS wa P UserYanables 0 Cue Library 0 E User Groups ww Windows MIDI Output 2 Y Resources Serial Potts PRMD Ports o F OM Ports e TimeCode Ports FA V O Ports Infrared Ports Different types of MIDI resources can be mounted in your project You can add a new MIDI Port by right clicking the New Resource menu E Resources _ Serial Ports Right Click o aui Ports S AA P Dh Ports New Resource AMX NetLinx MIDI 43 TimeCode Ports T oe A FIN Ports Collapse All Windows MIDI ari E Infrared Ports Scan Scan All MIDI Resources Scan AMX NetLinx Resources MIDI Ports are used by non exhaustive list e MxM Medialon Basic Midi IN OUT e MxM Medialon MIDI Machine Control e MxM Medialon MIDI Show Control 298 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources e MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator e Etc Hj Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for non Windows Resources Windows MIDI Resource MIDI Input and Output Ports installed in your PC are scanned on startup are automatically shown as available MIDI Inputs and Outputs can
282. ial Interfaces 43 a ede ada ras daa 377 Digital Interfaces ta o a a 377 DMX Interfaces siae Pera da SS 378 MIDILINterrace ers ri a e a ee Sk N 378 PIV SICA ip AAA EE ER Ue ded A 378 OWE arar adn a reas a 378 APDIOVAIS IEEE AREA E 378 ACGCOeSSOFLIGS us ac a e ee Ee Ss eth 378 Showmaster Pro Description 381 Contents of the Package uat qva rgo ue de a se nO OP ca ee o ccs ee 381 FIrSU Starts a awe Voie deum UP de BSS b Rv ados duas af a 381 Front Panel CONTROLS iia et de Ner Ac utto sere o Oe o woe ud 381 Keypad FUNCIONS ora o dde d Ree CREE GC e e C RR S 382 ED Display Messages c 3 3 1 9 9 3 910 ay AER Oma der dac o o 382 LED Status Messages siria 383 Readr Pono nad a Si oh ide ds we a Sos ee ee eee ah 385 Digital Input Output Port Wiring leen 386 MIDI COlBGCLEIDD usi av dew oh wea ck CR CR RP ecko ea e d ee di e 388 DMX Connection uae Eo ov x EE eee sk we UE 388 Timecode Connection tawan a e cte o e dr d e Pedo aa 388 Serial Correction uc eie eod asa SEC a 388 Technical SpeciicatioN Sucia rra Seni P SRL AP Nc o og 389 Network Connection odiada Rx UOS ERR eS a 389 USB CODHectlOfSs a de uds dedos een rar qii we RE P ng 389 Serial Interfaces ciedad So RU ERE OR dudo da 389 Digital Iritef a6 BS sra an ria cp Ap Or og 389 DIVX Interfaces xd ae p SR EE e PEE ERREUR SRS OS 390 Timecode Intermaniacos 390 Video Reference Interface i va vuv erre yo eae ee Ses 390 TABLE OF CONTENT 27 MIDI I
283. ial protection due to the limited number of rewrite cycles Use the protective mechanisms such as the write filter to extend the operating life of the flash memory and to avoid a possible failure of the Embedded Controller You need to disable this protection to execute the Medialon Showmaster V2 iPro installation Deactivating the Enhanced Write Filter The Enhanced Write Filter EWF allows you to write protect individual partitions The EWF is activated by default in mEC The EWFMGR EXE program is used to deactive the EWF This utility is called at the Command Prompt 1 Enter the command ewfmgr c in the command prompt to display the current status of EWF It should be ENABLED 2 Enter the command ewfmgr c commitanddisable in the command prompt to desactivate EWF cA COWINDOWS system cmd exe Microsoft Windows EXP Version 5 1 2688 GC Copyright 1965 2061 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings fdministrator ewfmgr c Protected Volume Configuration Type RAM lt REG gt State ENABLED Boot Command HO CAD Param 5 Param2 5 Volume ID FB Fi 4E DF HH 7E HB HB 66 66 66 66 HB HB H BH Device Hame Device Harddisklolumei G Max Levels 1 Clump Size 512 Current Level 1 Memory used for data 19512320 bytes Memory used for mapping 16384 bytes C 5 Documents and Settings Administrators gt ewfmgr c commitanddisable 2 Committing data and disabling overlay Protected Uolume Configuration Type R
284. ialon Manager project and a web browser The MxM communicates with the web browser via the HTTP protocol ln and the exchange of data is done in XML syntax 456 The MxM provides functions for creating controls in a HTML page These controls buttons lists check boxes edit controls are designed for communicating with the Showmaster Editor project They can be added to any existing HTML page or created in a new page from the setup window of the device The display properties of the controls are basic but the page can be easily remodeled with an HTML editor Medialon Manager variables can be read and written from the HTML page On Showmaster Editor s side the MxM can be easily imported into a project But on the browser side a knowledge of HTML and javascript is necessary if special mechanisms have to be implemented for simple controls the pages exported by the MxM are sufficient ANNEXES Annexes MxM Network Utilities The Network Utilities MxM provides several commands for network management a and retrieval of system information MxM Picture mM Pictures MxM provides a way to dynamically display still pictures and editable text in Medialon Control System UserScreens Pictures supported format are JPEG BMP ICO and WMF Images can be stretched and scrolled at a adjustable speeds text can be written and scroll in the same way The user can easily create a task in Showmaster Editor for displaying sequences of ima
285. ible This allows you to see what is happening internally while your project runs allowing you to make adjustments without stopping the project As If a Showmaster is not connected only service MxM devices will be active Debug Run Alert Showmaster is nat connected only service MAT s device will be working Debug Mode is only accessible from Stop Mode by typing the F2 key or clicking on the Debug Project button User Mode be Medialon Contro System V6 s User Mode gives the opportunity to the programmer to decide which objects will be accessible to the user tasks devices command for devices variables The User Mode works like the Debug Mode but only with selected objects As If a Showmaster is not connected only service MxM devices will be active Debug Run Alert LE Showmaster Iis nat connected only service MAT s device will be working User Mode is only accessible from Stop Mode by typing the Ctrl F2 key or clicking on the User Mode Project button mM Run Mode p Run Mode is the final runtime mode of a project Medialon Manager fully interacts with external devices and hides all of the programming windows Only UserScreens created in the LocalPanel and Device or Task Control Panels are displayed programming workspace is not visible Run Mode is only accessible from Stop Mode by typing the F3 key or clicking on the Run Project button Ay The three running modes Debug User and Run can only be
286. ication Email Error Cannot Send Email 21042008 09 15 48 Clesing Medialon w atehdagw atcehdag 21 04 2008 3 25 27 Opening Medialonatchdogyy atchdog 21 04 2006 09 20 Pr Register PID 3400 Name Medialant anager 5 21 704r 2008 09 28 59 Pracess Timeout reached PID 3400 Name MedialonM anager 5 2104 2006 03 28 53 Begin Wait For Restart PID S400 Name Medialonbd anager 5 21 04 2008 03 23 02 End Wait For Restart PID S400 Name MedialonM anager 5 1204 2008 03 28 02 Restart Process Mame MedialonM anager 5 A 1 04 2008 03 23 47 Pro Register PID 1 Mame Medialontd anager 5 1042008 08 30 28 Pr LInregister PID 172 Mame MedialonM anager 5 Activity Count down sec EN Client Count Failure Actor Restart Computer Purge Log Check Email oui m MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 307 A Quit button allows you to stop Medialon Watchdog The Hide button only closes Medialon Watchdog window Failure Action Defines the behavior of Medialon Watchdog when one of the monitored applications freezes Restart Application Medialon Watchdog will restart the application when its activity is no longer detected Restart Computer Medialon Watchdog will start the computer s reboot procedure when one of the applications is frozen This option will stop all running applications Activity LED blinks when an application is monitored Frequency depends on Medialon Manager s timeout settings Countdown The Countdown sta
287. icense dongle aside do not connect it to the computer yet 3 Insert the DVD in the DVD ROM drive of your computer the installer launches automatically MEDLAL EN Es Show p 2 Launch Guided Tou E de Install Medialon Manager Panel Launch Reference Manual Edition CD r A Pr owse CD Product MEDIALON MANAGER SOFTWARE INSTALLATI ON 55 Click Install Medialon Manager Read the Software License Agreement then click the Yes button Click Next on the Welcome page Fill in the user information and click Next Click Next on the Choose Destination Location page This will install Medialon Manager V6 in the default Medialon Manager directory 9 The installation process copies the Medialon Manager V6 files 10 When the following information window is displayed click OK COON QM Uf Using Medialon Manager Medialon Manager Install is now Finished Jj To terminate Manager setup please open MEM Setup window to select needed MsMs File MXxMSetup 11 Remove the DVD from the DVD ROM drive and click Finish to complete Medialon Manager installation If your computer asks you to restart you must restart to finish installation of the license dongle driver First Start 1 Insert the Dongle Key in a free USB port on your computer 2 If Windows prompts you to install new hardware USB Key Follow these instructions to install the driver on the USB port H
288. iety of applications Through standard Ethernet networking ADAM 6000 retrieves I O values from sensors and publishes these real time I O values Advantech provides free download Manual and Utility software for ADAM 6000 modules operation and configuration on their web Site www advantech com Advantech ADAM modules Real or Virtual Resources in your project will be accessed by the mxM Medialon IO gt Home The Help document contains e Overview of the MRC e Resource Creation and Setup Release Notes of the MRC SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Project Files Project Files Project Files amp Folders A Medialon Showmaster V2 Project is composed of a project file and an associated folder A variable storage file is also generated if the project uses Persistent Variables Showmaster Project File E A Medialon Showmaster V2 project is saved in a file with the following extension swmXSProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 XS Project File SwmLEProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 LE Project File swmStProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 ST Project File swmProProj6 which stands for Showmaster V2 Pro Project File smiPropf5 which stands for Showmaster iPro Project File Hg dea UserData Folder All additional files needed in your project must be saved in the Project UserData folder The Project UserData folder is transferred with the project during the Download process See more about Associated Files
289. in status of Medialon Showmaster PWR Power LED This LED lights green when Showmaster is powered on SSD SSD LED This LED blinks when Showmaster is using his internal disk OS Showmaster LED This LED indicates the current status of Medialon Showmaster SHW Project LED This LED indicates the current status of the Medialon Showmaster Project Sees O 0s s Showmaster Starting Up Shutting Down a Fe HM N Blink slow Y nen wE Blink rast ON Blink Fast Y Waiting Recovery Confirmation 2 Alternate Blink Fast GY 362 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster LE Description Showmaster Fault Still Drop I Blink Fast GY Flashing Y Rear Panel The figure below shows the rear panel of Medialon Showmaster LE e LAN RJ45 Ethernet LAN connectors 10 100Base T e USB Not used e Serial 1 Serial Port 1 Serial RS232 port e Serial 2 Serial Port 2 Serial RS232 port e MIDI MIDI Port MIDI Input and Output e DMX512 DMX Port DMX512 Output e Relay Outputs Digital Output Port 4 relays 24V 1A Max e Digital Inputs Digital Input Port 4 contact closure input detection max 10kOhm e POWER Power Connector 12VDC SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 363 Digital I nput Output Port Wiring Digital Input Connector Showmaster has four inputs Digital D ae See to SUISUN LE via terminal block connectors Digital inputs Input X A SHOWMASTER Input X B Push Button Relay Ou
290. ine from Showmaster Editor V2 physical devices are connected to the Showmaster and adjust the programming Save the show on the local disk 10 Send the show to the Showmaster 11 Disconnect the Showmaster Editor V2 This causes the Showmaster to switch to running mode SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 321 322 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Menu Showmaster Menu Showmaster Showmaster Editor V2 is also used to manage Showmaster The dedicated Showmaster menu in Showmaster Editor V2 allows the user to open a connection transfer projects update the Showmaster s firmware etc Showmaster Model Switching When you start a new Showmaster V2 project you need to select the Showmaster model On the right end of the Showmaster Editor V2 toolbar you can switch from one model to another File Edit Showmaster Object Windows Help 5m go n 1 r Workspace Design Current Model Showmaster Pro Gwich from Showmaster 5T model to Showmaster Pro model O Dk No Showmaster Editor V2 updates its configuration according to the selected model Status Loading Shared Components Fragressian This operation changes the default resource configuration Current Model Showmaster LE ES di Project BP Devices 1 mm asks 0 i rs Panels 0 Es F User Variables 0 2 Cue Library 0 BY Devices 1 User Groups m Tasks 0 Resources TE Panels 0 ES E Serial Ports T User Vanables 0 di Project ww M
291. ing your program e Panels IE Variables LA MxMs Medialon Control System sends commands to external devices via software modules called Medialon XObject Modules MxMs Medialon develops these software plug ins to allow Medialon Control Systems to control external devices or increase its functionalities In return the MxMs receive data from the external devices and make it available for Medialon Control System Medialon Control System Task Engine External Devices As All MxMs are available on the Medialon web site www medialon com There are two major types of MxMs e Device MxMs e Service MxMs Device MxMs MxMs that communicate with external devices are referred to as Device MxMs Device MxMs allow Medialon Control System to communicate with hardware machines such as video projectors and lighting consoles but they can also 38 INTRODUCTI ON Overview of Medialon Control System control third party software such as Dataton Watchout A wide range of Device MxMs are available for your show control application Video Servers Serial TCP IP Doremi Turbo Mediasonics Dataton Watchout Windows Media Player etc Video Processors Serial TCP IP Barco Encore Analog Way iX Series etc Audio Consoles and Audio Processors MIDI TCP IP DM 2000 etc Lighting Consoles MIDI TCP IP Martin MaxXYZ Wholehog etc Dimmers Lighting Fixtures DMX Dimmers DL3s MAC 2Ks Foggers etc Media Servers DMX
292. is started and mounted in your projects MRC Showmaster DMX All Showmaster DMX ports are scanned when Showmaster Editor V2 is caa connected MRC Showmaster DMX gives access to DMX Ports MRC Showmaster MI DI All Showmaster MIDI ports are scanned when Showmaster Editor V2 is caa connected MRC Showmaster MIDI gives access to MIDI Ports MRC Showmaster I O ST All Showmaster I O ports are scanned when Showmaster Editor V2 is connected LIES MRC Showmaster I O gives access to I O ports MRC Showmaster Serial All Showmaster Serial ports are scanned when Showmaster Editor V2 is EIN connected AS MRC Showmaster Serial gives access to Serial Ports MRC Showmaster TimeCode All Showmaster TimeCode ports are scanned when Showmaster Editor V2 is connected MRC Showmaster TimeCode gives access to TimeCode Ports MRC Showmaster LE LE All Showmaster LE ports are scanned when Showmaster Editor V2 is connected Las MRC Showmaster LE gives access to eSerial Ports eMIDI Port eDMX Port e O Ports MRC Showmaster XS ys All Showmaster XS Relays and Infrared ports are scanned when Showmaster CES Editor V2 is connected MRC Showmaster XS gives access to Infrared and I O Ports ANNEXES 443 MRC Windows COM All Windows COM ports installed in your PC are scanned when Medialon Manager V6 starts In MRC Windows COM gives access to Serial Ports MRC Windows MIDI All Windows MIDI ports installed in your PC are scanned when
293. it or place it in a position where anyone could walk on trip over or roll anything over it e Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time or during electrical storms e When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet always hold the plug itself and not the cord Pulling by the cord can damage it Do not open e Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way The device contains no user serviceable parts If it appears to be malfunctioning discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Medialon service personnel Water warning e Do not expose the device to rain use it near water or in damp or wet conditions or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings e Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands Location e Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations or extreme cold or heat such as direct sunlight near a heater or in a car during the day to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components e Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over e Do not block the vents This device has ventilation holes on the rear and sides to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high In particular do not place the device on its side or upside down or place it i
294. it Menu The actions triggered by the items in the Edit menu depend upon the currently active element in the active window If an action is not allowed the corresponding menu item is disabled As Note that most of the menu items at the bottom of this menu are only applicable to graphic objects in a UserScreen Undo Ctrl Z Undoes the last modifications Changes to Graphical Objects cannot be undone Redo Shift Ctrl Z Re applies the modifications that were undone by the Undo command Cut Ctrl X Cuts the selected element to the clipboard 262 MENUS WIZARDS Menus Copy Ctrl C Copies the selected element to the clipboard Paste Ctrl V Pastes the content of the clipboard Select All Ctri A Selects all of the elements in the active window This command is available for e Cues in a Task Editor e Objects in the Lister e Graphic elements in a UserScreen Group Ctrl G Groups the selected objects UnGroup Ctrl U Ungroups the selected group Find Shift Ctrl F Opens the Find dialog box to search for elements in the Project See The Finder on page 73 The following commands are dedicated to UserScreens Lock Ctrl Y Locks the selected Graphic Objects Locked graphical objects cannot be moved Unlock Shift Ctrl Y Unlocks the selected Graphic Objects Send To Front Brings the selected Graphic Objects to the foreground Send To Back Pushes the selected Graphic Objects to the ba
295. itcher mlle Type here a short description of the driver BIAMP A amp udia vz 1 1 mllc lose ESPOS mille Add also specifics ettings L hristieProjectors mlle Christie DW amp DS sernes mllc Christie Lx series mllc L ammT ec Protune mille Deltalite Server v1 0 2 mllc Denon CD DM CB35 47 mile Denon_DVO ON YVS00_ 7 1 mille Denon DVD 39810 Vwv1 mllc DJwilnch FlashPlayer v1 0 mllc Edie 4111 HO IP mile KramerSierra 3232 mile ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Driver Edition Fill in the info on the right side of the dialog box and don t forget to name the MLLC file Load After the setup of the device is done the driver file is not used since the Device s parameters are saved in the Project file If a driver has been previously loaded from a file and the parameters of this driver are modified a dialog box asks how you want to save the modifications Save options r will not be updated evices for updating e Save Changes only for this device the device s modifications will be saved in the project file only and will not affect the mllc file e Update the device and the driver file with the changes both the project and the mllc file will be updated with the modifications to the device driver However the changes are not automatically applied to other devices of the Project that use the same driver In order to apply the modifications the driver file must be manually loaded in each of the devices e Save as a
296. itmap Enables the programmer to choose a custom bitmap to be displayed on the loading splash window instead of the default one A bitmap is selected either by double clicking in the image preview field or in the bitmap file name field This function is only available once the New Project has been created and saved once Notes This text area can be used to add extra information about your project or history of main change ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 225 Task Task preferences defines task behavior Showmaster Editor Preferences General General iss j Don t ask to switch to Run Debug Mode if needed ERST E Create task s variables when a task is created MEG Display content of view tasks in User mode TimeB ased Timeline na Prompt before sending Flash Control command i Legacy positrack stop behaviour Steph azed rock oiony vea Task accuracy Nomad y General General Project fd Don t ask to switch to Run Debug Made if needed aa E Bl Don t unlock locked tasks when switch to Debug Aun mode iun Time ed fd Create task s variables when a task is created UserScreen Display content of view tasks in User mode W atchdo g TimeB ased Timeline Log Traces 3 Prompt before sending Flash Control command ll Legacy positrack stop behaviour StepB ased E Use Pause Points in Run Mode Bl Don t ask to switch to Run Mode when there is pause points in tasks T ask priority Noma Task
297. iven task is internally synchronized e External The given task is synchronized to the variable Time Variable Time Variable Type Time Time Variable used for synchronization reference Lock Task A task may be prohibited from starting using this command Locked Locked tasks cannot be started from Start Conditions or the Start Task command This protection can be removed by using this command Unlocked Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to lock unlock Lock Mode Type Enum Available values e Unlocked The given task is unlocked e Locked The given task is locked Goto Label A cue is identified by a number StepBased task or a time TimeBased task A Label may be added to it The advantage of a Label associated with the cue is that it cannot be changed accidentally as a cue index can in the event of an insertion or if the cue is moved to a different time The purpose of the Goto Label command is to reach the cue associated with the Label and to launch the execution of the task from this Label The same Label may be used in several different tasks Parameters Task Name Type String Name of task to go to label Label Type String Label to go to in the task AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster Goto Time This command is exclusive to the TimeBased tasks and enables you to reach a given time in a TimeBased task and launch its execution starting at this time
298. ix This MxM provides IP remote control of the Peavey MediaMatrix software and NiON units using the RATC 1 protocol MediaMatrix is a versatile digital audio resource that allows you to design and build audio control systems on a function built computer equipped with specialized audio hardware and the MediaMatrix control software MxM Peavey MediaMatrix Pasha This MxM provides serial remote control to the Peavey MediaMatrix software ANNEXES Annexes The PASHA interface must be enabled in the MediaMatrix software MediaMatrix is a versatile digital audio resource that allows you to design and build audio control systems on a function built computer equipped with specialized audio hardware and the MediaMatrix control software MxM QSC Audio Q Sys Q Sys is an Integrated System Platform that provides all the audio routing processing control and monitoring for a facility Q Sys is a centralized DSP integrated system audio solution This MxM can control Q Sys cores core control values monitoring through variables control values sending through commands and redundancy management between two cores MxM Richmond SoundMan This MxM provides IP control of the Richmond SoundMan Server SoundMan Server is a virtual sound system It is an audio routing playback and processing solution that runs under Windows and uses ASIO drivers The software runs as a server and thus can be controlled externally by TCP IP on the network MxM RMS
299. ject The task will not be modified or renamed only the start condition will be updated MENUS amp WIZARDS 275 When a start condition already exists for the selected task Medialon Control System asks you if you would rather replace this start condition or to add the new condition to the existing start condition In the second case the new start condition would be Old Condition New Condition Create a task to monitor a variable with this object Dynamic graphical objects can monitor variables and update their status automatically When you create a task to monitor a variable the object reflects the variable s status The created task is StepBased with a start condition of Selected Variable Furthermore an assignment expression cue is inserted into the task that performs the following operation Objectname status selected Variable The object has to be able to take the value of the variable For this reason the Variable Selection Window only allows you to select a compatible variable to monitor For instance a button cannot monitor a String variable since the button s status variable is an integer Create a task to perform a device command from this object This option is very simple but very useful and very time saving It allows you to create a StepBased task with the correct start condition that inserts a device command cue of your choice All the devices available in the project are listed simply browse t
300. l Cach Global Cach is leading the way in automation with hardware solutions aimed at connecting a network to the devices that we interact with everyday Lic The GC 100 Network Adapter connects a network utilizing TCP IP to infrared IR serial relay and sensor inputs that can interrupt or be polled by network In devices An embedded web server allows easy configuration from any browser o OLEA mm EF X Rm GB gw dem im nnn A T a F F BN um dm ee BB MRC Global Cach gives access to eSerial Ports eI O Ports eInfrared Ports ANNEXES 445 MRC Adlink NuDAM ADLINK s Intelligent Remote Data Acquisition amp Control Modules NuDAM are designed for data acquisition systems based on PCs and other processor based equipment with standard serial I O ports RS 232 or RS 485 with auto direction Ds control The modules convert input output signals to engineering units and transmit receive in ASCII format to from any host computer with RS 232 or RS 485 port P a gt 4 A EINEN eE q Ap 9 MRC Adlink NuDAM gives access to I O Ports MRC Adlink PCI 7432 The Adlink PCI 7432 board is a 32 isolated digital input and 32 isolated digital output open collector channels board Each output can sink 5Vdc to 32VDC ack loads with a maximum of 500mA in total Each input can handle from 0 24VDC With a resistance of 2 4KOhm 0 5W The isolation voltage is up to 5000 Vrms DIN 100
301. l Cach Resources Serial Ports are used by non exhaustive list e MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator e MxM Doremi Labs V1 amp Nugget e MxM Sony RS422 e MxM Barco DLP VP e MxM Analog Way iX Series e Etc As Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for Serial Resources description SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 337 MIDI Ports Pro Click on the MIDI Ports node to display the resources that were present in your rmm rmm Project when Showmaster Editor V2 connected to the Showmaster L BT Project Name Devices m Tasks 3 F User Varablez 1 Cue Library 2 User Groups MIDI Input MIDI Output Resources m senal Ports FO Dhs Forts A L Ports Different types of MIDI resources can be mounted in your project You can add new MIDI Port by right clicking the New Resource menu Mame LI wu MIDI Input ww MIDI Output Right Click New Resource Delete Resource Scar Scan All MIDI Resources Setup Resource Scan AMA NetLinx Resources Resource Help MIDI Ports are used by non exhaustive list e MxM Medialon Basic Midi IN OUT e MxM Medialon MIDI Machine Control e MxM Medialon MIDI Show Control e MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator e Etc As Refer to ANNEXES Medialon Resource Connector page 441 for MIDI Resources description 338 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources DMX Ports Click on DMX Ports node t
302. le Name Type String Path name of Persistent variable file AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 189 Object Commands Medialon Control System can take control of devices and objects Insert Cue Fi Showmaster d Task Re insert Last Cue Alt R Medialon DIMX512 1 d Logical Cue Add to Cue Library Shitt A WE3Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 F System Insert a Message Shift M gz3Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 3 Device Control Insert a Countdown Alt C WziMugget 4 d Expression Ctrl E Enum Control Get Object List Insert a Comment 5hift Alt C Ez3 Video 5 d m m Device Control This command is used to change the behavior of or to control a device This command changes a Device s behavior and can open Control Panels Object Type Mame Description sete Devices Showmaster Object Type Name Command Device Control Comment Label Time Posion EEN 0 51 4r Device Name Description Devices Command ontral Comment Control Status Activity at Device Name Fal Positrack c ContralPanel Control Type ml Set Activity v oe Control Status H Control Type Set Arctrvity mesilate Sel Positrack Top Width Height If Device Activity is disabled no commands generated by Medialon Control System V6 are sent to the real world device Positrack can be disabled for a specific device so that no repositioning commands are sent wh
303. lease Notes of the MxM As All MxMs are available on the Medialon web site www medialon com SHOW PROGRAMMING 85 86 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Timebased Tasks Timebased Tasks Show Structure When you create a time based show with Medialon Control System many structures can be used with single or multiple timelines This must be considered in advance and will depend on your operational needs Among the many show structures that Medialon Control System V6 allows you to build here are two basic examples typically used when programming Single Timeline The main show is built on one single timeline Segments of the show can be played consecutively one after the other Pause Pause NBN Pause Multiple Timelines The main show is subdivided into several timelines Hil gt B ii gt B il gt They can be played individually or simultaneously by synchronizing them with the same timecode internal or external Creating a TimeBased Task A TimeBased task is the simplest type of task that Medialon Control System provides A TimeBased task is made of tracks that contain cues The TimeBased task s Timeline current position is the reference time which may be either internal or external Cues are triggered when the reference time reaches their positions SHOW PROGRAMMING 87 Creating a TimeBased task 1 Select the Object Task New Task menu item File Edit Object Windows Help m il Edit zi
304. lic domain CHS CHA pal MRC ArtNet gives access to DMX Ports MRC Comtrol Device Master The Comtrol DeviceMaster series are Serial port servers communicating over Ethernet This MRC uses the TCP IP Telnet Control Port protocol also referenced as RFC 2217 to communicate with DeviceMaster servers MRC Comtrol Device Master gives access to Serial Ports MRC ICP DAS PISO P32x32 The PISO P32C32 and PISO P32A32 have 32 channels of optically isolated digital inputs and 32 channels of optically isolated digital outputs arranged into ln four isolated banks Each input channel uses a photo coupler input which allows either internal isolated power supply or external power selected by jumper Each digital output offers a darlington P32C32 or PNP P32A32 transistor and integral suppression diode for inductive loads Isolated input channels 0 15 are designed into group A and channels 16 31 are designed into group B Isolated output channels are designed into group C and group D ny ina Toa cy Lus re mem nan t d eof cde i bod Ben LN IM NO Ow MN OU X Fes m2 my Pa ua ere FIT i EE LE i m Ja J i E ra d Lu i is EL i La CE fe E Lg LI E Wiring can be done using two DN 37 terminal board one for each 16 channels group MRC ICP DAS PISO P32x32 gives access to I O Ports 448 ANNEXES MRC Opto22 SNAP Ethernet 1O networks and even the Internet ioDisplay
305. lick Opens the Pnael in the Panels tab UserScreen double click Opens the UserScreen in the Screen tab User Group double click Opens the content of the group MENUS WIZARDS 287 288 MENUS amp WIZARDS MEDIALEN MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES This section describes functions specific to Medialon Manager V6 software 290 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Overview of Medialon Manager Overview of Medialon Manager Medialon Manager V6 is a Windows based control software Medialon Manager can control any audiovisual equipment using any protocol and network Being software based it integrates perfectly with IT opening a wide range of applications Control of audio amp video streaming links to database media management and facility wide control are not dreams any more Medialon Manager V6 Medialon Manager V6 represents the ultimate version of Medialon Control System It gives access to all programming features like graphical user interfaces UserScreens external networked resource connections and more eo n um es es Fe uE nnm mm mmmn eem e e e e umm m mmumum mm m e mum m m mm m m e Medialon Manager Task Engine MxMs Resource device BUS Resource Lee TimeBased Tasks Commands External StepBased Tasks Variables UserScreens Task Device Control Panels Control Panels a m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m
306. lip Mame TD b OmTme a 4 Out Time 3 00 01 30 foo Auto Play Off Cancel SHOW PROGRAMMING Timebased Tasks Selecting Cues The There is often the need to select cues before using cue related commands That s why the Task Editor provides a variety of ways to select cues Selected cues are highlighted in orange or white if using the Legacy theme To select cues e Click on the cue to select one cue e Press the Ctrl key and click on another cue to add it to the selection e Press the Shift key and click on a cue to add of the cues which are between the last selected cue and this cue e Type Ctrl A to select all of the cues in the task if no track is selected or all of the cues in the current track if a track is selected e Drag the mouse to draw a selection box over the cues you want to select To deselect cues e Click on an empty part of the task editor to deselect all of the cues e Press the Ctrl key and click on a selected cue to remove it from the selection e Type Esc to deselect all of the cues Cue Selection menus The Cue Selection can be done inside the active track or in all tracks of the Timeline In both cases the list of commands is the same These menus allow more sophisticated types of cue selection Cues selection selected track Cues selection all tracks d Select all cues ShiFE4 CErIH A Cues management d R Cues library d Select cues From stark Ctrl Alt F d Select
307. lso goes to this state when no show file is loaded eProgramming A Showmaster Editor V2 is connected to Showmaster and a project is being edited or tested 382 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster Pro Description eRun Fault the project has caused a runtime error typically a zero division error eRecovery The Showmaster has been started in Recovery mode eUpd Firmware Showmaster V2 s firmware is being updated eDownloading A Showmaster V2 project is being downloaded from an Edi tor eUploading The current Showmaster V2 project is being uploaded to an Editor eFactory Showmaster is being reset to its factory default state eShutdown Showmaster is shutting down eReboot Showmaster is rebooting Vers Showmaster s current firmware version 4 Proj Title of the running project This line is not available when Showmaster is in recovery mode Test When Showmaster is in Recovery Mode this line indicates the status On Off of the test session Addr Current IP address Mask Subnet mask Gway IP Gateway address MacA MAC address 9 SerN Serial Number HJ Next lines below are displayed when Showmaster is in Recovery mode 10 Ser1 Serial port 1 status Opened Closed Failure 11 Ser2 Serial port 2 status Opened Closed Failure 12 Ser3 Serial port 3 status Opened Closed Failure 13 Ser4 Serial port 4 status Opened Closed Failure 14 Ser5 Serial port 5 status Opened Closed Failure 15 Ser6 Serial
308. ltiple Devices a im mm rrr 235 Device Replacement c ccccc es 236 Device Cue Reassignment c crees 236 Device Replacement nnn 236 Device Auto Selection eee rns 237 Pause POING rreri ao ue wu ae eee owe ew eee ae ae oe we 237 Task EXGCUUON opos Geren eee Gah eee ae eee deas ee 237 Play Pause Stop s cca cea ta wee be Deen eae ewes oO ba OE a 238 PXECUTe CUG A cwae ce her tue ETGE XZxGa3mx33 BG S 8 5 7 238 Import Export Project eee 239 Importing a Project file o ooo 239 Exporting Importing a Task o o 239 EXPOMINO A TASK sad UR a EON oe ea BES eee Oo 239 Importing a Task file een 239 Converting PIOISOL reuso eee 3 9399349 2 49832559 9255 240 Driver Edition rrr 241 MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator eee eee 241 Driver Creation eee oho o ooh o ooo os on nn 241 PIDO 2x9 raras eos rasos 241 Plane areas ciar AAA 242 CHECKSHIN lt isos raro rr P EOS UE Nus E E 243 Automation eee ee 244 Wests ca Geer eee Pewee eee ee 9 3 522 9 n4 95 244 User Commands eee ee irn s 245 Command Creation saxa xx ko Ox Xe a XO wa be ee awn 245 Command Parameters ce eee ee onn 246 POSITFacK GrOUDS lt adu demxam XEESqe343X s53333 248 Monitoring Request and Variables leen 248 Aut
309. luded Mains cable USB MIDI cable Rack Mount Brackets Options SWM_BO Breakout Kit DB 37 Cable DIN Mountable IO Wiring Terminal SWM_BO Breakout Kit The SWM_BO Breakout Kit is a terminal block that can be used to break out Showmaster s digital I O DB37 connectors to screw terminals for easy field termination The Breakout Kit is designed with both DB37 male and female connectors so it can be used with either the Digital Input or Relay port The SWM_BO Breakout Kit ships with a ROHS compliant terminal block a DB 37 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster ST Description Male to Female cable and two DIN rail mounting clips When using Breakout boxes SWM BO the maximum electrical specifications are 150ma 12VDC per relay with a maximum of 2A for the whole 16 relays SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 379 380 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster Pro Description Showmaster Pro Description Contents of the Package The Medialon Showmaster Pro Package includes e Medialon Showmaster Pro e Power Supply cord e Medialon Showmaster Tools installation CD First Start Medialon Showmaster Pro is designed as a stand alone Show Controller Show Controller Showmaster V2 Pro doesn t need a keyboard mouse or screen to work Rear power switch must be set On all the time Connect the power supply and press and hold the front D key to start Showmaster The front panel LCD will display the start up message 3 Shoumaster BASSAEI M ade Starting
310. m e Size NESW Size arrow North East South West e Size NS Size arrow North South e Size NWSE Size arrow North West South East e Size WE Size arrow West East e Up Arrow e Hour Glass Wait cursor e Drag e No Drop db e H Split e Y Split Ey e Multi Drag amp e SQL Wait O m bd o l7 eo V o c x e No No cursor RE e App Start h e Help e Hand Point gt e Size All e User File The cursor is in a bitmap file the file path is indicated in field Cursor File X Position Type Integer Horizontal position for the cursor 1 means no change for this position Y Position Type Integer Vertical position for the cursor 1 means no change for this position Ay Note X and Y Positions are relative to the top left corner of the indicated UserScreen If no UserScreen is specified X and Y Positions are relative to the entire Local Panel area mM Load New Data File When persistent Variables are created a file that saves their values is created mngVarStor6 The Load New Data File command enables you to change the targeted storage file updating the Variables concerned adapting them to a user or reopening a query aborted some time before This command can be used to create user profiles for example according to certain criteria centres of interest access rights etc This command is only available in Medialon Manager StepBased tasks Parameters Fi
311. m 7 Bit Checksum This type of checksum is used by the Level Control System LCS Matrix3 protocol e Alcorn McBride AMINet This type of checksum is used by the Alcorn McBride AMINet UDP protocol for the DVMA4 Automation In the automation page you can define the device connection deconnection behavior Low Level Communicator Setu Command driver file Load Save Save as Mo driver loaded Type Checksum f Lemmands Answers Monitoring Automation est Connection Deconnection 9 On Manager stop ip On Open command ab On Close command On sending On receiving after me ao Test With the Test page you can check all your frame settings such as checksum or formatting In the top box type in a frame with ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Checksum and replacement characters and see the result of what will be sent in the bottom box Low Level Communicator 3etu Command driver File Load Save Save as Ma driver loaded Type Answers Monitoring Automation Frame to test which may include decimal hexadecimal and checksum characters test Aa OD Frame that would be sent using current parameters tesPIEAIOD ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Driver Edition User Commands Once you have defined the communication type and frame format according to the protocol you can add commands to the device Click on the New button to create a new user command or select a command in the list and click the E
312. m V6 stations that are connected with Medialon On Network devices Variables detection is done when both applications are in Debug User or Run Mode Shared Variables can be used by any remote station just like a local Variables Name Medialon_on Network 3 Activity Enabled 1 Medialon on Networks Status Connected 1 Manager on Network 3 Manager Curent ime 15 15 05 81 100 fps Manager on Network 3 Manager CurentD ate 04072008 Friday 5 Manager on Network 3 D eremi Labs V1 Nugget T TimeCode 00 00 00 00 25 fps Manager on Network 3 Dorem Labs V1 Nugget 1 CurrentClip 0 Manager on Network 3 Doremi Labs 1 Nugget 1 CurentClipN ame Manager on Network _3 0oremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 CurrentStatus No Disk E The list of variables depends on the variables group shared by the Slave Medialon Control System V6 station Medialon On Network Status variable reflects Device connection status eNot Connected No Medialon On Network station was found eConnected Medialon On Network connection is established eNetwork Error Medialon Control System couldn t find the Slave Host eIdentifying Connection is opened Medialon Control System is sending authentication eConnection Denied Connection is rejected bad User name or Password eSensing Medialon Control System trying to detect the Slave Host eConnecting Medialon Control System trying to open a connection eLimited Connection The Group name in the Medialon on Network device does
313. m m m m m m m m m m m m m m X Medialon Manager Modes Stop Mode M In this mode Manager V6 doesn t communicate with any external equipment nor does it perform any internal tasks Stop Mode is the default programming mode where your project is built Devices Tasks UserScreens and Variables can be created modified and deleted freely Pressing the Esc key or clicking on the Stop Project button returns you to this mode MANAGER V6 SPECIFI C FEATURES 291 Debug Mode In Debug Mode Medialon Manager fully interacts with external devices Programming windows such as the Object Browser Object Properties and Task Editors are still accessible This allows you to see what is happening internally while your project runs allowing you to make adjustments without stopping the project Debug Mode is only accessible from Stop Mode by typing the F2 key or clicking on the Debug Project button User Mode S Medialon Manager s User Mode gives the opportunity to the programmer to decide which objects will be accessible to the user tasks devices command for devices variables The User Mode works like the Debug Mode only with selected objects User Mode is only accessible from Stop Mode by typing Ctrl F2 or clicking on the User Mode Project button Run Mode ke Run Mode is the final runtime mode of a project Medialon Manager fully interacts with external devices and hides all of the programming windows Only the UserScree
314. manage processor loads itself Network Defines network settings and Medialon On Network login credentials Preferences m General Manager Server Part Project IP Port iQ Default Port 9255 Y Specify a port 255 Run Time E Network MON User UserScreen AUN Password da MOM Pa rd Contin Password n plions fd Enable Network Detection Manager Showmaster V2 Server Port Defines the IP port used by Medialon Control System to listen for the connections from Medialon Control System client stations IP Port e Default Port Selects the default port 9255 in this case the clients must also have the Default port option selected in the Medialon On Network Device setup e Specify a port Allows you to choose a different IP port number Medialon On Network Login These settings set the Slave s login credentials A MON device connecting to this Slave will need to use the same credentials in the MON device setup e MON User Defines the User login when the project needs to have restricted access e MON Password Defines the User password It needs to be confirmed Options Network Detection For added security Medialon Control System implements network detection of Medialon Control System hosts before initiating a connection with the Slave ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 229 UserScreen Defines default settings for UserScreens objects and Web Panels used by your project
315. mand Send Cue Comment User Mode Rights None Label qF Cue Name 43 Fade Duration b 00 00 15 00 Cue Levels Levels Value E E Test command 1 Select a cue from the Library 2 Edit parameters if needed 3 Click the Test command button in Object Properties tab Deleting Cues from Library To delete a cue from the Cue Library select it and use the right click menu Browser ister E Project Marne BF Devices 3 Saree Right Click AECA Y Doremi Labs 1 Mugget 1 B Doremi Labs DI a OW doa i Tooma ki DENT pe Cues PA liz z piden S Medialon_DMx512_2 Send _Cue_00_00_00_00 asks Mp User Variables 0 BE Cue Library 4 T User Groups Note that multi selection is available if you need to delete several cues 202 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG User Groups User Groups You may want to set up the structure of your project in separate parts like Show Timelines Device remote treatment processes etc With User Groups you can create groups and sub groups of objects of the same type Devices Variables Tasks or UserScreens Grouping allows you to organize information that is important for your project zE AMI PUE De ps T Es Vv a T ta b l El x Group of Device me Groupi wa Group of Task amp Group of UserScreen F Group_of Varnable Resources By default Medialon Control System V6 creates one User Group containing all variables in the project User G
316. master iPro Medialon Manager Pro Medialon Manager Lite Medialon Manager Kiosk SHOWMASTER LE IHOWIMASTER Pro SHOWMASTER Pro O Pro Medialon Control System s Programming Environment Medialon Control System V6 programming software can control and synchronize digital audio video lighting dimmers and desks matrix switchers image processors video walls lasers fireworks special effects etc all over one network It offers frame accurate synchronization even on digital video DMX acquisition and editing multitasking and device position tracking These tools I NTRODUCTI ON 35 allow you to free your creativity Device Control Visually organized by the Device Map this is the capability to control any type of devices via serial communication TCP IP MIDI DMX IR Relays etc Medialon Control System uses plug ins called MxMs Manager XObject Modules to control devices There are a wide range of MxMs for most popular devices on the market communicating via serial MIDI Timecode Infrared Modbus OPC TCP IP etc Medialon Control System also includes a powerful tool to write your own drivers using Serial TCP IP UDP and MIDI These drivers can be shared with other Medialon users Each MxM provides a set of commands that can be sent to the devices and returns a set of variables that give device feedback information which can be used in programming to monitor the device s status or to make decisions Most MxMs c
317. me Size cues to default Size cues to text Cue size options d Cue Disable Enable e Disable Enable cues Disabled Cues are not executed during Task execution To disable a selected cue e Type Shift S e f the Flash Control feature is activated click on the Enable Disable Flash Control Button e Choose the Cues Management Disable Cues menu item SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Timebased Tasks To enable a selected cue e Type Shift N e Ifthe Flash Control feature is activated click on the Enable Disable Flash Control Button e Choose the Cues Management Enable Cues menu item Grouping Cues Cues may be grouped while in the TimeBased task s Track View Mode in order to ease cue handling Once a group of cues is created clicking on any cue of the group selects all of the members of the group This is particularly handy to make sure that the time relationship between cues of a group is not modified by mistake while dragging cues e To group cues select the cues to be grouped and either choose the Edit Group menu item or type Ctrl G e To ungroup a group of cues click on one cue of the group to select the whole group and either choose the Edit Ungroup menu item or type Ctrl U Sizing Cues amp Cue size options e You can change the width of a cue to its default size or to the size required for all the text it contains to be fully displayed Expanding and Compressing Cues e Expand the time between the
318. me version of Medialon Manager software A timeline show is created by connecting a computer laptop to Showmaster via Ethernet authoring the project then transferring the finalized file During authoring Medialon Showmaster passes through commands to attached AV devices allowing easy checking of show programming as it is being created N Programming uid Remote Control UB ity Video Lighting Display Medialon Showmaster benefits from the extensive Medialon device plug in library for connectivity with a wide range of audiovisual equipment Showmaster V2 projects are created and controlled at production time using a laptop or other computer connected to the Showmaster via the Ethernet interface this computer runs Medialon Showmaster Editor V2 software Once the project has been created it is transferred to Showmaster V2 for playback Showmaster XS Showmaster XS is a all in one Embedded Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls video projectors video servers sound processors etc Showmaster XS also provides digital outputs and infrared ports SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 349 Its free editing software Showmaster Editor V2 embeds most of the features of our award winning technology such as logical programming as well as real time testing It allows programming of up to 3 Webpanels but does not support 3rd party extension interfaces Medialon Showmaster XS is a 1 U full 19 rack mount
319. mes that can be used for calculations and the execution of tasks The value changes according to the state of an object the result of a calculation a user s action or the information sent back from a device Variables may characterize the states or actions of Devices and objects present in the UserScreens Independently of the Variables associated with Devices and UserScreens User Variables may be created to suit your programming necessities Categories System i These are Variables that pertain to Manager and to other Devices They cannot be deleted except for Medialon On Network variables The Manager Variables concern the date time states and actions of the keyboard and the mouse Screen m Every Panel return information about mouse and keyboard activity via variables Each UserScreen is associated with a Variable its page numbers Each active object also generates one or several Variables The Variables linked to the UserScreens cannot be deleted They disappear only when the object or UserScreen that created them is deleted User a These are Variables created by the programmer They can be easily modified or deleted Types of Variables nteger This Variable expresses a whole number characterizing the state of an object the X Y position of the mouse pointer the value of a slider or a visitor count for example The initial value must be indicated The default value is zero The Min value and
320. mmed actions Lighting MxM Medialon DMX512 This MxM provides commands to control groups of DMX512 channels through several DMX512 hardware devices Inputs and or Outputs can be controlled Input sensing can analyze incoming DMX values commands are available for live recording and restoring of the DMX 512 signal This MxM can also create and play back memories and save channel values in an external file This MxM includes a graphical cue editor interface This interface allows the programmer to create edit and retrieve cues on selected channels A graphical track ball allows programming of several channels for X and Y to ease control of automated lighting fixtures It is possible to record live DMX coming from a lighting desk and then edit those automatically created DMX cues with a user friendly graphical interface TimeCode MxM Medialon TimeCode This MxMs allows reading and generating of Timecode using Timecode resources Relay I O MxM Medialon IO This MxM controls and monitors various types of Inputs Outputs I Os with a unified programming and user interface MxM Leunig ePowerS witch The Leunig ePowerSwitch is an intelligent power strip with its own web server and an Ethernet connection With ePowerSwitch you can switch devices on and off through a local network or the Internet The MxM provides control of the ePowerSwitch ANNEXES Annexes Field Bus MxM Medialon Modbus TCP The Medialon Modbus TCP MxM
321. mware Progression TTR sm Firmware installed successfully e 5 Click on OK to complete the installation The new set of MRCs and MxMs is now used by Showmaster Editor V2 412 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Showmaster Firmware The current firmware version is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the Showmaster Editor V2 window Status Mat Connected Editor Firmware Version 2 0 0 Firmware management From the Firmware Installation window you can Firmware packages File Version Creator Info i m E TI TE ad a m 5howmaster Firmware 2 0 0 CUS 22215458 1 mrtx2 2 0 0 CUS_29215458 1 Arno cs Showmaster Firmware 2 0 0 mrtx2 TR 4 s Edu p 5howmaster Firmware 2 0 1 mrtx2 Cancel Add a new firmware Click on Add to browse and find the new firmware file firmwareXXXX mrtx2 you want to use in Showmaster Editor V2 4 Delete a firmware If you want te remove from the firmware list an obsolete firmware click on Delete SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 413 Create Custom Firmware With Showmaster Editor V2 it is now possible to update add or delete rm component of Showmaster V2 firmware 1 Select Add Update a MxM MRC in the File Firmware management menu Ge run Lr a a Preferences Firmware Management Install a Firmware Ctrl Q Add Update a MXM MRC 2 The Create Custom Firmware window opens Firmware to update MRTX file C ProgramData Medialon Showmaster 215howma
322. n NUMBER1VAR NUMBER2VAR Description Returns the inferior value between 2 selected numbers Input e NUMBERIVAR Integer variable Real variable e NUMBER2VAR Integer variable Real variable Output Integer or Real value depending on input type Example e Min 12 3 4 4 166 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Expressions e Min 3 134 34 134 34 e Sin ANGLEVAR Description Returns the sine of selected angle angle units in radians Input ANGLEVAR Real variable Output Real value Value min 1 max 1 Example e Sin 0 0 0 e Sin 1 25 0 94898 HJ Trigonometric functions Sin Asin Cos Acos Tan Atan calculate angle units in radians To convert degrees to radians multiply by PI 180 To convert radians to degrees multiply by 180 PI e ASin REALVAR Description Returns the arc sine of selected Real result in radians Input REALVAR Real variable min 1 max 1 Output Real value Example e Asin 1 1 57080 e Asin 0 94898 1 24999 e Cos ANGLEVAR Description Returns the cosine of the selected angle angle units in radians Input ANGLEVAR Real variable Output Real value min 1 max 1 Example e Cos 1 0 54030 e Cos 0 12 0 99281 e Acos REALVAR Description Returns the arc cosine of the selected Real result in radians Input REALVAR Real variable min 1 max 1 Output Real value Example e Acos 1 0 00000 e Acos 0 5 2 0944 e Tan ANGLEVAR Description Returns the tangent of
323. n Showmaster iPro installation Medialon Showmaster iPro USB Key can de unplugged The key will be needed if you want to use Medialon Showmaster Persistent Variables or to generate Logs files of Medialon Showmaster iPro iPro Tools Medialon Showmaster iPro USB Key also contains the Step7 library and a Medialon Showmaster iPro Demo Project 4 em USE Key Disk H Je Installer a Je ProTools a de MedialonShowMasteriPro_Demo2 Je ShowmasteriPro Demo2 Examplel MedialonShowmasteriPro Demo 2 zip MedialonShowmasteriProLibrary V4 5 zip de Showmaster Folder MedialonShowMasteriPro Demo contents an example of PLC code and Showmaster V2 iPro project We also add a Medialon Manager Panel project as a remote panel Showmaster iPro Variable Storage mEC Systems which rely on flash media as data carrier require special protection due to the limited number of rewrite cycles Medialon Showmaster iPro to extend operating life of the flash memory saves all persistent variables on the Medialon Showmaster iPro USB Key in a specific folder See more about Persistent Variable on page 148 d aum USB Key Disk H de Installer iProTools P di 5howmaster de Logs p de Persistent Showmaster Licenses Showmaster iPro Log Traces Medialon Showmaster iPro USB Key also hosts the log database components If you need to enable Showmaster V2 Log Trace Medialon Showmaster iPro USB Key needs to be plugged unless traces will not be recorded See mor
324. n any poorly ventilated location such as a bookcase or closet Connections e Before connecting the device to other devices turn off the power for all devices e Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source If you notice any abnormality e f the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged or if there is a sudden loss of function during use of the device or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the device inspected by qualified Medialon service personnel e f this device is dropped or damaged immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the electric plug from the outlet and have the device inspected by qualified Medialon service personnel MANDATORY SAFETY RULES Although Medialon Control System V6 Software is designed to control different kinds of hardware equipment such as relays to control fire works Medialon Control System V6 can NOT be used to insure safety of users Users must make sure that all dangerous equipment controlled directly or indirectly by Medialon Control System V6 includes their own safety procedures and process Medialon Control System V6 is not designed to insure safety process ACCORDING TO THE DANGEROUSNESS OF CERTAIN KINDS OF EQUIPMENT WHICH CAN BE CONTROLLED BY THIS SOFTWARE THE LIABILITY OF MEDIALON SA IS SUBMITTED TO THE STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH THE MANDATORY SAFETY
325. n be controlled independently from one Serial port using different addresses for each video projector MxM Christie Projectors The Christie Projectors MxM provides an easy way to control one or several video projectors manufactured by Christie through a Serial line or via a TCP IP network The types of projectors driven by the MxM include the Vista Roadster Mirage and Roadie series MxM Digital Projection Projectors The Digital Projection Projectors MxM provides an easy way to control one or several video projectors from Digital Projection LTD through a Serial line The types of projectors driven by the MxM include the MT series LT series SX series and GT series MxM Sony VPL Network Projectors The Sony Network Projectors MxM provides an easy way to control Sony video projectors that implement PJ Talk via TCP IP 466 ANNEXES Annexes Video Server MxM Medialon Local Media Player This MxM provides a simple and fast way to reach and play various type of media mM from your PC hard disk or from a distant PC or server hard disk on the network The media can be video or audio in various formats Video files can be played in Full screen or windows mode and many media files can be played at the same time depending on your PC configuration This MxM contains all useful VTR functions as Play Pause Stop and Locate This MxM makes it easy to create an Mpeg video player To play an Mpeg2 video an Mpeg2 decoding circuit
326. ndows COM port a Showmaster V2 relay output a LAN connection a Serial over IP converter or any other hardware such as AMX Netlinx interfaces Artistic Licence Artnet Windows PC resources Global Cach etc Medialon Resource Connector MRC will help you to manage and configure the necessary resources for your projects Task Engine The core of Medialon Control System is its task engine which allows the execution of programmed cues How and when cues are executed depends on whether the cues are in a TimeBased task or a StepBased task Medialon Control System V6 is able to run these tasks in parallel and concurrently thanks to its built in multitasking architecture 40 INTRODUCTI ON Overview of Medialon Control System TimeBased Tasks In TimeBased tasks cues are executed based on the current time position of the task This uses a familiar Show Control concept known as the Timeline where cues are laid down on tracks and are triggered as soon as the time of the task reaches the cue StepBased Tasks Er In StepBased tasks there is no notion of or reference to time Cues are executed one after the other in a Step by Step manner The task flow can be modified by conditional statements much like a traditional scripting or programming language making them useful to implement logical behaviors Graphical User Interfaces Medialon Control System V6 provides 2 different types of user interface windows which can give y
327. ndows Start Menu de Medialon Je Medialon Showmaster Editor 4 Medialon Recovery Tool 2 m Medialon Showrmaster Editor 2 Release Info E User Manual di Medialon Manager Panel 6 Je Medialon Product Browser Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tool 2 software is installed with Showmaster Editor V2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT In this section you will discover your main working environment 62 PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT Workspace Workspace The Workspace Medialon Control System V6 s workspace is composed of areas that are used to display system and device information graphical user interfaces or tasks in your project The workspace is defined by all the areas that segment and organize the graphical environment of Medialon Control System V6 and each area can contain one or several tabs that display the project s information Together the layout of the areas and the distribution of the tabs within create the Workspace There are predefined workspace configurations which you can choose from e Design e Debug Workspace Desc E 5 e Stage E OU eme e Full Screen a e Control Center L antral center When Medialon Control System V6 starts the Workspace opens up in Design mode as below DA Medialon Manager Pro 6 File Edit Object Windows Help iC MP EP 1 ee yn er Workspace Design Browser ES E Danals ES EB Project Hame E ccr s _ e Uia B Devices Tae IL Tasks EF l
328. nese T awan Croatian Croatian Bosnia and Herzegovina Czech Dutch Belgium j Dutch Netherlands English Australia r English Belize English Canada English L aribbean English Ireland ANNEXES Regional and Language Options 6 In the Input Language list select the language that you want to type in The Keyboard layout IME field is automatically populated for you As Note if the language that you want to type in is not listed see How to install additional languages section 7 Click OK 8 Under Installed Services you see the selected language with a keyboard installed 9 Click OK to close the Text Services and Input Languages dialog box and then click OK to close the Regional and Language Options dialog box Specify the language that is used for Medialon Control System To specify the language that is used by Medialon Control System follow these steps 1 Click Start and then click Control Panel 2 In Control Panel click Language and Regional Options 3 Click the Advanced tab Regional and Language Options El E Regional Options Languages Advanced Language for nan LInicade programs This system setting enables non Unicode programs to display menus and dialogs in their native language It does not affect Unicode programs but it does apply to all users of this computer Select a language to match the language version of the non Unicode programs you want to use Chinese PAC
329. ng a StepBased taSk 0 oo a snm 171 Creatina CUCS vada e ra a QUAL dre eo Spr Ae orar uc de QURE at 172 Selecting CUES rivas Ache di Mak do deed 172 The Cue Selection menus anaana nr nnn 173 Managing CUESTA dd eed PESE ER 173 Cut Paste and Delete r mrs 173 MOWING GUC c p Tr E 173 The Cue Management MenUl 0 c cooo oo momo mo mo 173 Cue Disable Enable cer n n ee 174 GI OUDIDO CUCS ctp are o de ICE X op Vc died e Se Go ehe 174 Plas CohntFolSs dicbus cip ore RR E de e RS db A RUE do dde OSES 174 DINO oS mato ico Sc at diodo 175 LOCK TASK iaa DA is AAA 175 The Cue EIDE SE Ve uva a ake oo Gea eae 175 Pase ROMS EAS Ai abe 175 TASKS Wise PFO CC sipi miea os as ve der ibn iria we A 176 Task Properties s qe Le EG A ae EEE SRS oe d e d 176 Task MVartableSs 4 5 x a uio vos oe d hoe Veg Oe vC eek dC veto ens 177 Task Management sarc arribar ftot dr EAR en Coe 177 Ecrire 178 General SeLtpis 2 S oe stag eA bg RR AC CR eS gae 178 Device Manager Showmaster 179 UserScreen Commands oei s aee dE dete eR RES RE e ere Ele AR 179 Open USerScreen sir dv do toy a a2 a Se oor dec huc de ewe o ad 179 Close UserScreeli 1m dug a aq gv drip aiu o E RR a 179 EA dO B usu 3 acp RA TA ee Be ee 179 1St CODI O cad beo de ana A eee oa ode dere do dde t d v 180 Object Text Colt olo seo oic cap lise a AK Ql o Qc dis ota 180 kask Commands 02000000 da qued CRUS RE EE SER RC A AA a
330. ng a protective barrier between the computer and the dangerous high voltages or other hazards of the real world MRC Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO gives access to I O Ports ANNEXES 449 450 MRC RedRat The RedRat irNetBox is a networked device with multiple outputs for IR emitters It uses a simple and open TCP IP based communication protocol ral Features include 16 independently addressable IR outputs an IR learning j detector for recording of IR signals and front panel indicator LEDs wem eal iid s TH 4 PR ion Pro errr rhea 108 ee mu m e The RedRat3 is a USB based infrared remote control input and output device for your computer MRC RedRat gives access to Infrared Ports MRC Sea Level Sea LI NK The Sealevel SeaLINK series are Serial ports servers communicating over Ethernet This MRC uses the TCP IP Telnet Control Port protocol also referenced as RFC 2217 to communicate with SeaLINK servers iPro Pro LINE LINE MRC Sea Level Sea LINK gives access to Serial Ports ANNEXES Annexes MRC SoundLight The SoundLight DMX 1514PCI is a versatile DMX 512 interface card that fits into any PC running Medialon Control System V6 with a PCI Slot E M ual Link OMX M hs i J a iL 1024 Channel i i The SoundLight DMX PCI offers up to 1024 DMX input channels or 1024 DMX output channels or combination 512 inputs and 512 outputs This card handles two complete DMX
331. ngTmpVarStor6 Manager Variable Temporary Storage is created as a copy of the mngVarStor6 file If power to the computer is lost during a write operation to the mngVarStor6 file the data could become corrupted and values of all persistent variables would be lost The mngTmpVarStor6 file prevents this from happening as it automatically backs up the mngVarStor6 file as soon as the file is finished being written If Manager detects a corruption of the mngVarStor6 file it uses the data from the mngTmpVarStor6 file As A project can be easily moved from one computer to another by a standard file copy operation Note that the mngVarStor6 and the Project lmage folder must be copied along with the project s mngProj6 file in order to copy the entire project Recovering the Previous Version of a Project Each time you save creates a new version of a project A copy of the previous version is created in the same directory When a project file is saved two files are created or updated e Manager V6 Project File mngProj6 e Manager V6 Backup File mngBckProj6 The Medialon Manager Backup File d appears following the second save under the same name The current file s extension is mngProj6 while the backup file is under the extension mngBckProj6 The Backup File is a copy of the previously saved version of the project Opening Project from previous version of Medialon Manager You can open a Medialon Manager Project create
332. nication software The drivers of these telephony resources must be compliant with the Microsoft Win32 Telephony application programming interface marked as TAPI compliant In order to use DTMF monitoring the resource must be at least compliant with the version 2 0 of TAPI ANNEXES 457 458 ANNEXES Annexes Device MxMs MxMs that allow communication with external devices are referred to as Device MxMs Device MxMs allow Medialon Control System to communicate with hardware machines such as video projectors and lighting consoles but they can also control third party software such as Dataton Watchout A wide range of Device MxMs are available for your show control application Driver Editor MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator The Low Level Communicator MxM is a low level and powerful MxM It is a low level MxM because it is not dedicated to a particular device and is able to use many raw communication protocols You can write your own set of commands create monitoring variables linked to the reception of specified frames and much more to create drivers dedicated to your specific devices and projects Five type of communication are available e Serial e TCP IP Client e TCP IP Server e UDP IP e MIDI Ay Low Level Communicator drivers may be published and shared on the Medialon web site www medialon com MIDI MxM Medialon MIDI In Out This MxM offers basic control of the MIDI interface It can be used to
333. nicator driver for it MxM Alcorn McBride DVM The Digital Video Machine is a studio quality MPEG 2 player with all the interfaces AV contractors need for professional installations The Digital Video Machine stores its videos on Compact Flash cards so playback is virtually instantaneous You can copy clips to the media or transfer them using the Ethernet option It can be controlled either using the serial port or using Ethernet Ethernet requires the DVM 7400 E model MxM Dataton Watchout IP Watchout is a scalable system for presentations based on digital media This software allows you to create big shows while maintaining unprecedented image fidelity Images can span across several video projectors or monitors if desired Watchout automatically applies smooth edge blending to overlapping projection areas resulting in a seamless image You can apply transitions to images or ANNEXES 467 image elements as well as animate them across screen areas Video can be integrated and used in the same way You can import a wide variety of video and image formats making it compatible with virtually any production software you may already have It can be used whenever you need to display or project high quality digital media While it can be used for single screen applications it is primarily designed for multi screen use MxM Doremi Labs V1 amp Nuggets Doremi Labs offers a range of MJPEG MPEG and uncompressed high quality video players
334. nina i 00 00 00 01 CUES3 Audio Tasca Play IS 5 00 00 02 00 Show Varial Set Integer Show Cue Running 53 Winter Game Show Varial Set String Show Message Messag Boul down 24 Film Sport Dow md Set Integer em w Cue Running 54 O 00232 iQ D E AL Pala 00 02 37 00 O 00 OF ri ig O 3 CUES5 00 03 07 00 E DE EI PE ed Pork L En Ll i y Ly r F Car E T FO PG Lx riii 0 MORN E Sho LA NOI Set Strini c how Warial Set Integer 2 274 cn nne j FO 0 A PP LU n 00 02 37 00 P Show MA E DE Set String Show Message Messaq Flag OSA When blind mode is On Cues cannot be executed even with Flash commands the blind mode affects the selected task all other tasks in your project continue to be executed as normal devices perform all commands received by the other tasks SHOW PROGRAMMING Timebased Tasks Lock Task The Lock Task prohibits the task from being launched automatically when the start condition becomes true or when a Start Task command is sent The task may still be fired by using the play buttons in the Task Control Panel and Task Editor Tab or with the Flash Controls Pause Points Pause Points allow you to step through your tasks for debugging complicated tasks This function is not available in Run Mode See details in dvanced Tools Pause Points chapter page 237 Tasks in a Project All tasks created in a project are listed in the Browser Tab Status LED ESI
335. nning the Medialon Manager software or an IP based solution such as Serial over IP converters or other control hardware such as Artistic Licence Artnet Global Cach etc Networked extensions can be used for both the software version and embedded controllers Medialon An Integrated System Every Medialon controller can share tasks and variables on the network allowing other controllers access and control to them It s possible to have the entire program spread over several controllers Different topologies depend on the complexity or functionalities of the system to be installed INTRODUCTI ON Overview of Medialon Control System Overview of Medialon Control System Medialon Control System has evolved from the original Medialon Manager control software into a range of products from embedded controllers to the open platform control software only However all products share the same Medialon Control System Programming environment MEDIALON MANAGER Local controller with local shows SHOWMASTER Pro Local controller with local shows SHOWMASTER Local controller with local shows MEDIALON MANAGER Central supervision Medialon Control System is included in the following Medialon products OIHOWIMASTER X5 SHOWMASTER ST e Embedded Controllers e Open Platform Control Software Only Medialon Showmaster XS Medialon Showmaster LE Medialon Showmaster ST Medialon Showmaster Pro Medialon Show
336. not match an available Shared User Group on the Slave Host ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 217 218 Network Architectures These configurations serve as examples other configurations may be set up depending on your needs Single Slave In a single slave network architecture one Medialon Control System shares its variables and accepts network Start Task Commands from several Masters on the Network This topology is used if a show needs a device server and separate logic servers or multiple touch panels for interaction with the devices amp UserGroup A gy UserGroup B A UserGroup C Master MON Device UserGroup B Master Wa MON Device MON Device UserGroup C UserGroup A MON Device UserGroup A Multiple Slaves In a Multiple slave network configuration the Master Medialon Control System acts as the Supervisor It monitors the slave s shared variables read status of shows amp devices and can start local tasks on the Slaves This topology is common in supervisory systems where one Master can monitor the status of ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Networking many systems attractions exhibits etc Slavel SHARED UserGroup A Master MON Devicel UserGroup A MON Device2 UserGroup M MON Device3 UserGroup F Medialon Manager Panel Medialon Manager Panel is a remote control software for Medialon Control System Manager Panel is based on Medialon Manager V6 software and is therefo
337. note has been inserted you can change the color or delete it by right clicking on the selected note Notes may be resized by clicking and dragging the right edge of the note and moved by clicking and dragging the left edge Creating Cues Method A 1 Select the desired device in the Browser tab to display the commands in the Lister tab 2 Select a command in the Lister tab 3 Drag and Drop this command where you want to insert the cue in the Task s timeline SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Timebased Tasks E m Mame Stop Click and Drag lm T gt GE ar CAI TEA 00 00 00 80 Record A i a E Step Forward Step Reverse Fast Forward Fast Reverse Locate Variable Speed Set Edit Mode Method B 1 Move the mouse pointer to the desired cue position on the timeline 2 Right click and select Insert Cue 3 Then browse to the desired device command and select it Locate 00 00 00 00 Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 Insert Cue Re insert Last Cue Alt R Transport Add to Cue Library Shift A Edit Send Cue 00 00 00 00 Blasco Romer Td FE Medialon_DMX512_1 Insert a Countdown Alt C Clip Management Step Forward Ld Inserta Comment Shift Alt C Step Reverse Start Task Task_2 Modify Cue Enter Fast Forward MER Delete Cue Del Fast Reverse AAN Locate Variable Speed Cue Selection Selected Track Cue Selection All Tracks 4 Select Madian for instance Locate 00 00 00 00 Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2
338. ns Es E Project Nzi me ondition Comment PY Devices 3 e gm Right Click z e T as El l T az m 3 A New Task ati irn Duplicate Task f Task 2 Edit Task z Task_3 Setup Task User Yarnables 1 Cue Library 3 User Groupe Resources Delete Task New Task Editor Show Task Variable s e New Task Creates a new task e Duplicate Task Duplicates the selected task and names the duplicate with a numerical incremental value e Edit Task Opens the task editor in the Task tab or switches to the selected task s editor if it is already open e Setup Task Opens the selected task s setup window e Delete Task Deletes the selected task from the project after prompting for confirmation e New Task Editor Opens a new Task tab With the new tab open selecting Edit Task opens the Task Editor of the selected task in the new tab e Show Task Variable s Displays variables of the selected Task in the Lister AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 177 Task Setup Clicking on the Task Setup button or right clicking on the task in the browser and selecting Setup Task opens a Task Setup dialog box for the currently selected task Use task wariablefs Bl Restart if start condition changes ta true during execution Cancel General Setup Use Task Variables If this option is checked task variables are created Restart if start condition changes to true during execution If this o
339. ns or the Device and Task Control Panels are displayed Run Mode is only accessible from Stop Mode by typing the F3 key or clicking on the Run Project button Medialon Manager V6 License Options Medialon Manager V6 is a program protected by a hardware license and will only run with the appropriate dongle Key connected to the parallel port or the USB port of your PC Medialon Manager V6 Pro Medialon Manager V6 Pro is designed for any show amp media control application from simple stand alone to large networked systems Medialon Manager V6 Pro offers multiple TimeBased tasks or Timelines StepBased tasks and custom control panel UserScreen Medialon Manager V6 Lite Medialon Manager V6 Lite is designed for small to medium size permanent installations Though limited in capacity it offers all of Medialon Manager s control and programming power at an affordable price MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Overview of Medialon Manager Ay A project saved with a Medialon Manager Lite Edition can be opened with a Medialon Manager Pro Edition Any modifications could invalidate the project for a Medialon Manager Lite Edition use Project File Load Information You are loading a project made with Medialon Manager Lite Saving this project under your current Medialon Manager Pro version might make it unable to load again on Medialon Manager Lite version 123 To prevent this you can launch a Medialon Manager Pro Edition as M
340. nt Level 1 Memory used for data 19561472 bytes Memory used for mapping 16384 bytes C 5 Documents and Settings Administrator gt _ 2 Restart Showmaster V2 Pro to execute the activation of EWF Use the Restart iPro button on the Windows Desktop EN m Pg Restart iPro Showmaster Pro Administrator Account Utility Showmaster V2 iPro needs to known login and password of the mEC Windows administrator account If mEC Windows Administrator account change use Showmaster iPro Administrator Account Utility to update login and password 404 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster iPro Description registered for Showmaster iPro Define an administrator user account for Showmast ES Showmaster iPro needs to know Ehe name amp password of Ehe current Windows administator account B default Showmaster iPro uses the default setting of the mEC Factory settings IF Ehe current Windows administrator account name amp password is different From the one registered Far Shawmaster iPro please enter here the current Windows administrator account name amp password to register For Shownaster iPro Ld El Showmaster Administrator User Mame Administrator Pro Admi Password Retvpe password o Showmaster Pro Find on mEC Windows desktop the Showmaster V2 Pro Administrator Account icon to launch the utility tool SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 405 Showmaster V2 iPro Projects and Maintenance After Medialo
341. ntains a value which represents the number of frames based on the frame rate of the time variable Time can be converted into a string by using an expression like MyString Manager CurrentTime MyString contains HH MM SS FF value of the time Comparing Time To compare two time values it seems logical to use the operator But because expressions are evaluated one after another it is plausible that expression Manager CurrentTime 01 00 05 00 may not evaluate as true when current time is 01 00 05 00 because the expression was evaluated just before or just after the computer s clock reached the target time It is better to create a time window to compare time values The expression Manager CurrentTime gt 01 00 04 90 Manager CurrentTime lt 01 00 05 10 is better and guarantees that the condition will evaluate as true The width of the time window must be adjusted according to the required precision Formatting Time Display To remove frames or hours when you want to display a time you need first to convert the expression as a string operation and use truncate features TextDisplay TimeVariable 3 gives HH MM SS as result TextDisplay TimeVariable 8 gives MM SS FF as result Calculating and Converting Dates Dates can be converted into integers by using an expression like MyInteger Manager CurrentDate MyInteger contains a value which represents the number of days elapsed since t
342. ntdown Time period Changing Cue Properties Select a cue to display the Cue Properties to modify Comment Label and Time Position of the cue A Cue s properties are automatically displayed in the Object Properties for editing when you create them or select them Only properties with orange corners can be changed SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 93 94 Properties Object Type Mame Description Devices Doremi Labs vi Mugget 1 Command Locate Comment Label 00 00 00 6 gt L Timecode r werlelele le bebe bli Don t forget to validate your changes with the Enter key The number and type of parameters in the Properties tab depends on the cue type device command message countdown etc Some parameters have a wizard to help you choose a value To open the wizard click on the Magic wand on the right side of the parameter Clip List Object Type Cue deste lle cline Name Description p Devices Doremi Labs Wi Nugget 1 Command Load Clip F Comment Label Time Position 00 00 00 ie Z T Clip Mame ID L 2 In Time out Time 3 00 01 30 foo Auto Play of Cancel If no wizard is available the question mark button allows you to select one of the last values you already manually entered Select a value wwwi l L LL LIE LE I I Properties Object Type Mame Description Devices Doremi_Labs v1 Mugget 1 Command Load Clip Comment E Label Time Position AP C
343. nterface 4 4 9 bx SORORE GERE SoHE wd X ERED RAGE 390 unu E 390 POWO ansia rias asada da e e 390 ADPDTOVA Sicario 390 AccessorieS 2 errada or A 391 Showmaster iPro Description 393 Medialon Showmaster iPro Overview o 393 Hardware presentation 0 0000 oo 393 System Architecture se eeee ae teen ox eee eee 30x Xo ox x3 EOws ee 394 CONMeCUNG 9 Zsmissc BoST ss Em POG Ge REESE PES OGRE 35 396 Contents of the Showmaster V2 iPro USB key 398 FISCO eux Rx SE PNE S E AREA See BB E 398 Installation of Showmaster V2 iPro Firmware 398 Win XPe desktop o n n 4 4 398 mEC Shutdown and Restart procedure sen 399 Prepare mEC to Showmaster V2 iPro Installation 400 Install Showmaster V2 Pro Firmware on mEC XPe 401 Showmaster Pro Administrator Account Utility 404 Showmaster V2 iPro Projects and Maintenance 406 IPFO TOO 2293 3 9 G4 33 E RS EOEE SOEUR GN SOS SR oe eee 406 Showmaster Pro Variable Storage o o 406 Showmaster iPro Log Traces ooooooo o 406 Showmaster V2 Pro Shutdown and Restart procedure 407 Technical Specifications o ooo o 408 Network CONNECtIONS 0 oo oo ee es 408 USB CONNECUONS is sane EXE eee E ae ees Gee Pos I S 408 PHVSICBI s ure eu dECR E
344. ny hardware to control devices Independently from the MxM Medialon Manager V6 uses resources to physically connect to devices Medialon Resource Connector MRC manages and configures the necessary resources for your projects All resources installed in your PC are automatically scanned when Medialon Manager starts and they are included when your project loads Medialon Manager V6 can also manage external resources such as serial I O devices or networked resources ArtNet Advantech ADAM I Os AMX NetLinx Serial and I O Global Cach etc Resources can be of the following type e Serial Ports e MIDI Ports e DMX ports e TimeCode Ports e Input Output Ports e Infrared Ports cs Lister E Project Marnie BF Devices 1 P Anet OM In Line 1 m Tasks 0 F er DMX Out Line 1 OG Panels 1 SoundLight DMX In Line 1 p User Variables 0 2 SoundLight DM Out Line 1 E Cue Library 0 PY User Groups E E Serial Parts au MIDI Parts 2 TimeCode Parts A 0 Ports Infrared Ports Object Type Resource Name SoundLight DMX Out Line 1 Description MRC Name MRC SoundLight DMX MRC Version 6 0 MRC File Name mrcSoundLightOMx mrc6 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 295 The MRC can also define virtu eventually be in the final install Add New Resource a ation resources that are not yet available but will The resources folder in the Browser tab displays the different types of resources available for your p
345. o display the resources that were present in your EN rmm Project when Showmaster Editor V2 connected to the Showmaster i EI LE Pro i Project M ame CHI E Devices E Ds Tasks 3 Leer Wariablez 1 Cue Library 2 User Groups Resources E Seral Forts lt WIDI Ports 2 DMs Ports 1 0 Ports You can add new DMX ports by right clicking the New Resource menu M ame f DMS F DMs New Resource i ArtMet DMX512 Delete Resource Scan Scan All DME512 Resources Setup Resource Scan ArtNet DMX512 Resources Resource Help If you wish to configure the DMX Resources select the resource in the Lister and use right click menu E Control MH ame POM 2 DM E Delete Resource Setup Resource Resource Help SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 339 DMX Resources have common configurations Mame amm Director 3 Output Modify ArtNet DMX Line EJ Direction Output e Input Universe NN Teter 132 168 144 14 i Input Patch None lu dify P atc F es EN Ir Use Limited Broadcast Initial Output Level ML E Y Restore Last Values Fatch Mone Modify Patch Initial Output Level GO Reset to U Y Restore Last Values Ok Cancel e Name Name given to the resource e Direction Determines whether the resource is used for Input or Output e Patch DMX channels
346. o edit the style and size of the graphical objects text properties Text Font HB Preview Selected Text Font Tahoma Size 5 Arial Anal Black Arial Marrow _ Anal Rounded MT Bald Anal Unicode M5 Baskerville Old Face Batang Batanglhe Color Selector Allows you to edit and store the various color properties of the selected object Color Selector Standard Color Color Editor Chroma Custom Color 53 Red Update Selected Color In Color Out Color Cancel Define a new color in the Color Editor and save it as a Custom Color by clicking on Update button AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 141 You can add custom colors at any time when you add graphical objects Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Alt and click on the desired color The color picker adds the sampled color to the custom color list Selector dard Color Clear All Selected Color In Color Dk Cancel I mage Selector The Image selector lists the Bitmaps that can be used as object properties You may select from the predefined images available or import your own Image Selector PS q El Load Bitmap Menu Image Remove Bitmap No Image 142 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens Load Bitmap Use this command to import images in your project A file browser allows you selecting any image on your PC A copy of this image is done in the ProjectName ImageFolder Ay Note t
347. ode Type Enum Quit mode Shutdown PC Type Enum Shutdown mode Available values e No Only Manager quits e Shutdown Windows is asked to shutdown e Reboot Windows is asked to reboot e Power Off Windows is asked to shutdown and power off the PC e Log Off Windows is asked to log out of the Windows session Ay Note This command is only executed in RUN mode Quit Show master This command allows you to Shutdown or Reboot Showmaster This command is only available in StepBased tasks in Showmaster BS BE Parameters Mode Type Enum Quit mode Available values e Shutdown Showmaster is asked to shutdown e Reboot Showmaster is asked to reboot As Note This command is only executed when Showmaster is disconnected from Showmaster Editor mM Mouse Control n This command changes the mouse cursor and mouse position on the Local Panel ES This command is only available in Medialon Manager StepBased tasks Parameters UserScreen Name Type String UserScreen Name that serves as an X Y reference by the command If this value is empty the entire Local Panel area is referenced 188 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster Ay Only Local Panel s UserScreen can be selected this command does not work in Web Panels Cursor Type Enum Type of cursor to set Available values e Default Default Windows cursor e None Cursor is invisible e Arrow e Cross I Bea
348. omatic Answers ee oon n ons 248 Periodic Request lleno nn 248 MAMaDIES xw ka RULES Ch GE EE EC RUE Bk PR dae 249 Save and Share Drivers ens 252 Gave DAVOS ax wa xe xum dor dw X E o3 x8 ux E xe x a 252 Fo A 253 Share YOUr Drivers uu xo x ow ea x isa OE EO 9 cx RP OR S 254 User Mode coco nn lt lt ss 255 User Mode Rights eee eee ee ee ee hrs aos 255 Task Editor in User Mode leen nn 256 MENUS amp WI ZARDS MOHUS i543 06489 3 3 39 S R3 Dee 3 CAU ee ac wc m COL FIS MSNU a a se oe i Se ae a eG Gr ee ae ae 261 Firmware Management e 262 Ed MCMU sa tices oe a a ee ee Ee we ee OO 262 TABLE OF CONTENT 23 Showmaster Menu 264 ODJECE Menciona 78 9 9 x dede cee we ew ee Eas RR RECEN 264 PAM aa errada dana aa EN RENS RUE M E Ue 265 USerSCreeliS criada REC X XE a aa 265 DEVICES 5 u dur iri Roue XU RS Re XR BR AO Rx Sab e pomo HEE 265 ICINISISIIICST REST TT t 2127791 727 eee He ee 266 Dee ose raras Ae Na AA 266 Windows Menu 266 WOFKSDACE s au d ds dob R OR Rd SERA eit ibn dene dicm e E ur we SoHE 266 joe E 267 MIG cos moe mew x teu cee 5E owe WEE E E mm cee RE ME 267 Glo C CPC 268 HOD errana nera r 268 Drag and Drop Wizards 271 Dragging onto Graphical ObjectS a 271 Dragging Device Commands onto Graphical Objects 271 Dragging Devices on Container Objects
349. ome with a powerful built in graphical user interfaces GUI called Device Control Panels to control and monitor devices Medialon Control System has been designed to natively synchronize the devices and controls with an accuracy of a hundredth of a second Medialon has always been hardware independent it can use virtually any hardware to control devices Independently from the plug in MxM Medialon Control System uses a resource to be physically connected to each device This resource can be a serial port a PCI DMX card in a computer a relay on a Showmaster V2 or an IP serial converter or any other hardware such as AMX interfaces Artistic Licence Artnet Global Cach etc for both Medialon Showmaster and Medialon Manager The Medialon Resource Connector MRC manages and configures the necessary resources for Medialon Control System projects Timeline Tasks This is the core show engine in Medialon Control System The timeline is a time metaphor in which users program cues to control various devices The Timeline offers a number of tools to ease the programming job and the playback of the show Positrack functionality is a powerful tool to program shows on a timeline This is the capability for the software to reposition every device at the position or state they should be at when jumping back and forth in the timeline Positrack allows fine tuning of a complex show without needing to run the show from the beginning each time you wan
350. on Ay Exported tasks should only be imported into an identical project where the 240 Device s names and types are identical Converting a Project Medialon Control System projects can be converted into documents for analysis e XML document xml e HTML document html e Text document txt All the information of the project is converted into the selected format but cannot be re opened or converted back into a valid Project File To convert a project select Convert Project from the File menu The Save Export dialog box appears Name the converted file ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG Driver Edition Driver Edition Even though there is a long list of available MxMs you may need to control a device that doesn t have a dedicated MxM Medialon Control System gives you a tool to create custom devices with commands and monitored variables Your drivers can then be saved and reused in other projects MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator The MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator is a powerful low level MxM not dedicated to any specific device and is able to use many raw communication protocols Medialon Control System programmers can write their own custom drivers for specific devices and projects The following chapter explains how create edit and save Low Level Communicator Drivers A full description of the MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator is available in the MxM help file Driver Creation At the creation of
351. only available by editing the configuration file of each MxM and should be carefully used mxmName cfg for instance mxmMedialonDMX512 cfg This file is a text file structured like an ini file and can be edited with a text file editor like Notepad OM k Ordinateur Disquelocal C amp Program Files x86 Medialon Medialon Manager MAM i mxmDoremiLabsV1 mxmb t memMedialonAppLauncher mxm6 ta mxmMedialonLocalMediaPlayer mxmb E mxmDVSBlade cfg y menMedialonAppLauncher Readmetbd E mxmMedialonLowLevelCommunicator cfg E mxmDVSBlade mus amp es mxmMedialonAudioServer musb es mxmMedialonLowLevelCommunicator musb t mmDWVsBlade mxmb tz memMedialonAudioServer mxm6 iz mxmMaedialonLowLevelComrmunicator mxm E mxmEktacomStreamcoder cfqg E mxmMedialonDatabase cfg s mamMedialonMIDLmus6 E mxmkEktacomStreamcoder musb El mxmMedialonDatabase mus6 iz mxmbMedialonMIDI rxrm tal mxmEktacom5treamcoder mxm tz mxwmMedialonDatabase mxm b s mxmhbhMedialonMIDIAudioController mus amp E mxmExtroni 0 mus amp ami 2 mxmMedialonDMX512 cfg 2 mmMedialonMIDIAudioController mirn i E mxmExtroni00 mxmb E mxmMledialonDMX512 mus amp El mxmMedialonMIDIMachineControl mus6 E mxmExtron6b400 musb t mxmbMe B cito s E meme manMedialonDMX512 cfg Tow E mxmGrassValleyEncore mus6 i mxmMel Fichier Edition Format Affichage ta mxm rassValleyEncore mxm E mxnMe MODSE E mamGrassValleyK2 cfg ig mxmMe Outp
352. ooo o 355 Getting SEdFEeC s s 4 fas eth ewes SES CX XC CURE AC RON RO 355 Front Panel ControlS uw doe eas ee ee ded eee ew Oe ewe es 355 Key FUNCHONS 22 6 6 44626 02454 GR md odd eae ead m awe 355 LED Status Messages x wk ax arde ew ESHER ew ee ee 356 Rear Panel reservorio 97 2 ee ew ee IT T 357 DigitalOutput Port Wiring o o es 358 Serial Connection o ee 358 Technical Specifications 0 0 o 359 Network Connection ee rns 359 USB GONNCCUONS x a dra dw ao rara voca 359 Serial Interfaces 359 Digital Interfaces ccce nn 359 Infrared Interfaces errors 359 mile LC eae hee ae eee eS eee ee ey ee 359 POWE 4s tee aabt 359 nwnge sie caer Ry hve hae eR EER Ge oe ee eee eS 359 AccessorieS a2 dai a A 808 E Ae Se ee AAA Ee 360 Showmaster LE Description 361 Contents of the Package lt lt oooo o o 361 Getting Startede 3c acr dr caras 361 Front Panel Controls a uscp pak Seow SERS OR EEG EERE AA 361 Kev FUNCUONS lt lt cn 8i ee0e w Sch ewae Rh eds X ON E oe ae env dk E S 361 LED Status Messages ele 362 Real PANG anverso rra eran 363 Digital Input Output Port Wiring lt lt 364 26 TABLE OF CONTENT Table of Content MIDI COnRECUON 6 0 2x21 e rd P Eoo EC ae EAS 364 DMX COMMCCHION sd so
353. operties ribia ck Tic m PRI I s O oe MA Object Mame ButFon 1 bef Top 30 Ay Giving a detailed name to all your dynamic objects will help you during programming and debugging of your project 130 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens Graphical Object Properties al marked properties only available in LocalPanel E marked properties only available in WebPanel cs Common Properties Position amp Size e Left Defines the left position of the top left hand corner of the Object relative to the UserScreen s top left corner e Top Defines the top position of the top left hand corner of the Object relative to the UserScreen s top left corner e Width Defines the width of the graphical object e Height Defines the height of the graphical object Design Properties e Colors Use the magic wand on the right side to open the Color Selector BOX e Frame Width and Embossed Width Defines a number of pixels for the object s border Ey Smooth Relief option makes embossed transitions smoother on Dynamic roy Objects Text Properties e Text Font Click on the magic wand to open the Text Font box All fonts installed in the computer can be used in Medialon Manager e Text can be a single or multi line If Single Line option is inactive automatic carriage return can be activated with the Word Wrap option Single Line and Word Wrap are mutually exclusive Single Line Active Enabled Word Wrap Active
354. or a mono audio stream e PCX Cards The Digigram Audio Server MxM can also control Digigram PCX ANNEXES 463 cards These are PC cards that have the same features as the NCX units e miXart8 Cards An 8 output 8 input card that can be controlled the same way as PCX Cards MPEG playback and recording are provided by Digigram as options on the miXart8 cards Camera MxM Sony Camera VISCA VISCA is the protocol used by Sony for remote control of the BRC 300 color video camera series This MxM provides control of the video camera as a simple remote control unit but also includes a powerful sequence editor Matrix MxM Extron 100 The Extron 100 MxM provides an easy way to control one or several Extron 100 matrix switchers from an RS 232 Serial port MxM Extron 3200 6400 12800 The Extron 3200 6400 12800 MxM provides an easy way to control one or several Extron 3200 6400 12800 matrix switchers from an RS 232 Serial port This MxM also supports CP450 and MAW Matrix models MxM Pelco CM9760 Matrix Switcher This MxM controls the Pelco 9750 and Pelco 9760 Video Matrix series MxM Philips LTC 8300 This MxM controls the Philips LTC 8300 series video matrix Because only the basic functions of this matrix are treated this MxM is also compliant with the LTC 8500 LTC 8600 LTC 8700 LTC 8800 and LTC 8900 series MxM ProBel Matrix Switcher The ProBel MxM provides an easy way to control one or several ProBel matrix switchers from
355. orts Infrared Forts Object Type Resource Name Serial 1 Description MRC Name MRC Showmaster Serial MRC Version 6 1 1 0 Final MRC File Name mrcShowMasterSerial mrc The MRC can also define resources that are not yet available but will eventually be on the final installation SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 335 Add New Resource The Resources folder in the Browser tab displays the different types of resources available for your project To add a new resource right click on the Resources node and select the New Resource wanted or start resource scanning 5 Project M ame BF Devi 2 Serial Ports me Tasks 0 wu MIDI Ports P User Vanables 0 F DM Ports Cue Library E 82 10 Ports User Groups Resources A Serial Ports Mew Resource au MIDI Ports JA DMS Ports Collapse All 1 TimeCode Ports FA hO Ports Infrared Ports E i Project Mame BF Dev a E Serial Ports we J asks I _ MIDI Parts EF User Variables 0 F DMS Ports Cue Library E EXT User Groups 3 Resources A Sernal Ports Mew Resource cy MIDI Ports F OM Ports Collapse All A L Ports Infrared Ports m Showmaster Advantech ADAM I O AMX NetLinx Serial AMX NetLinx MIDI AMA NetLinx VO AMA NetLinx Infrared ArtNet DMX512 Comtrol DeviceMaster Serial Global Cach Serial Global Cach VO Global Cach Infrared Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO 1 0
356. osition control Current Panel selector 124 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Panels amp UserScreens Creating a UserScreen Select the Object UserScreens New UserScreen menu item File Edit Tal Duplicate Ctrl D Project Delete Setup Control Panel Panels j UserScreens Devices Mew UserScreen Goto Previous Page lii Goto Next Page k Tasks Goto Page Number Or Select the UserScreens item in the Browser tab and right click to open the contextual menu E E zum Mame FS Devices 1 mm asks O rs Panels 2 8 LocalPanel EF Variables Usericreens MEN Ll WebPanel_1 New UserScreen EF User Variables 0 ES Es Cue Library 0 Collapse All Or right click inside the Panels tab Medialon Manager automatically opens the new UserScreen in the Panels tab SEM Eta omy mS I E BL A ex Y Y Curent Pane WebPanel 1 screens 1 600480 Right Click New UserScreen Virtual Screen s Run Mode UserScreen Preferences Panel Properties AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 125 UserScreen Properties The Properties tab displays the UserScreen s settings Properties Type UserScreen m Mame Userscreen 1 Description User Mode Rights None Left 64 Top 64 Width Height 289 Text My User Interface ll ad las Eee at e e E E E e Style Movable Window Always On Top Active Enabled al e Object Name N
357. ou immediate control and feedback of what s going on while your show is running e Built in User Interfaces provided by Medialon Control System V6 or by the MxMs e Custom User Interfaces which you can create and configure depending on your needs Built in User Interfaces Zi Task Control Panels Exclusively designed to control TimeBased tasks the Task Control Panel displays information about a task including the current timecode position of the task as well as countdowns and messages attached to the next cue to be executed MES Control Panel Task Task_ Timecode Status Positrack MEDIA LO WN Enabled Countdown Device Control Panels Device Control Panels look similar to equipment front panels and feature the necessary buttons and displays needed to control your devices Device Control Panels may be opened either in the Control Center window or in independent floating windows I NTRODUCTI ON 41 Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 Ww imn u Busy E dit Insert e Q Video Q Audio 1 Shuttle O TE Audio 2 Custom User Interfaces Medialon Manager V6 provides 2 kinds of panels to host your user interface A Medialon Control System Monitors Local Panel Web Panels Medialon Control System Engine Web Browsers Network o p Web Browsers N id A e Local Panel Your user interface is displayed locally on monitors connected to Manager V6 host PC e Web Panel
358. ow e Click on the task Stop button to stop the show As Note that the timeline stops automatically after the last cue and will not run if there are no cues are inserted unless the task duration has been increased Views The task editor offers two views for TimeBased tasks Clicking on View button will toggle between the two Timeline View In this view cues are organized in tracks and time position A time ruler allows you to move cues around in the timeline Locate 00 00 00 00 Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 1 Doremi Labs V1 NMugget 1 Goto Page UserScreen_1 4 Set Picture Mute Off NM Man ager xA Medialon Low Level Communicator 4 nd Cue 00 00 01 00 100 00000 send Cue 00 00 05 00 100 00000 Medialon DMX512 2 Y Medialon_DMX512 2 Start sending Tirnecode 00 00 00 00 Free run Medialon Timecode 8 When the timeline runs tracks scroll from right to left the current time position stays in the center of the window List View This view shows the TimeBased task as a cue list DITS a il nm mr Qu EA Timecode Ctrl Time L abel Device Action Comment DO OO DOZZD Medialon Local Media Player 1 Open Media 07 00 00 000 a Video Load O0 00 0252 PeMedialon_Local_Media Player 1 ie OO 00 0252 fe video Play m Pat T arg 00 00 04 35 Median Loca Medis _Pleyer_1 Stop 00 00 04 35 ee video Stop The cue list scrolls down when the task is executed In this view Flash Control Buttons ar
359. owser 2 i UserScreens 0 my User Variables 0 Es Cue Library 0 User Groups Be Resources Manager Open UserScreen Close UserScreen Goto Page List Control Object Text Control Start T Pause Task Stop Task Sync Task Lock Task Goto Label Goto Time Es Goto Line L 7 00 00 00 00 a Show Task Call Task 00 c 00 00 Tracks Tracki x Locate 00 00 00100 Doremi Labs wV1 Nugdet 1 SES8G8S8S8ES8E8S3S8SEE8EE88E888 f Lister Mame qe n on the area management icon Split Horizontal Split vertical E3 Close Area Detach Area PROGRAMMI NG ENVI RONMENT Workspace You can drag and drop tabs from other areas to create and organize your own workspace Edit Showmaster Object Windows Help aj Click and Drag BETTE E a Browser ys 5 he E BF Devices Ia Y Devices mm Tasks 0 E F User Variables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources Jr os 1s o E Es FE Devices 1 Tasks 0 P User Variables 0 E Cue Library LU me User Groups we asks T User Varnables Cue Libra ry MP Resources Tabs can also be duplicated File Edit Showrmaster Object Windows Help p m 20 MEE NW Right Click Workspace ES uu Project Mame BF Devices 1 Start Task E t Pause Tazk we Tasks 0 P User Variables 0 ES Cue Library 0
360. part of Showmaster s logs rType Ctrl to change them alls r 5ources Ctrl to change them all Ed Normal mShowMasterCore Ed Info E ManagerRT Notify E ShowMaster DMX I Comment ShowMaster 1 0 Alarm ShowMaster Serial From Date To Date Select the type of messages you want to read Normal This type of message is for all events that executed normally in the running processes of Showmaster V2 Info This type of message is a highlighted normal event Notify This type of message indicates an unusual event that occurred spontaneously it has a little bit more importance than the Normal type Comment a comment Alarm Something which is not critical has occurred but should not normally occur It shouldn t have a big impact but should be checked Error An error occurred which has significant impact Something is no longer working Fatal The same as Error but it makes the system stop working Debug Low Level traces should be activated after a request by Medialon support Select the sources of messages mShowmasterCore Showmaster s main engine ManagerRT the show control project engine Showmaster DMX DMX resources Show master I O Relay and Digital Input resources Show master MI DI MIDI resources Show master Serial Serial resources Etc SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE Showmaster Logs Ay This list depends on active Medialon MxMs inside the Medialon Showmaster The following lists of message desc
361. port 6 status Opened Closed Failure 16 Ser7 Serial port 7 status Opened Closed Failure 17 Ser8 Serial port 8 status Opened Closed Failure 18 DMX1 DMX port 1 status Opened Closed Failure 19 DMX2 DMX port 2 status Opened Closed Failure 20 MIDI MIDI port status Opened Closed Failure 21 Digt Digital I O port status Opened Closed Failure 22 TC Timecode port status Opened Closed Failure UJ D CON O UI LED Status Messages Four LEDs give a quick overview of the main status of Medialon Showmaster 3 home ter PATIA Mode Running Merz 1 8 8 Froj isho SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 383 PWR Power LED This LED lights green when power is present regardless of whether Showmaster is powered on OS MCS LED This LED indicates the current status of Medialon Showmaster SHW Project LED This LED indicates the current status of the Medialon Showmaster Project EXT This indicator turns orange when Medialon Showmaster is in Recovery mode J www es NNNM A MM A E ME ldNddN 384 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster Pro Description Rear Panel PE EE E y E d gt ae fi EYF A Em y M SA K i f AT Sa H 3l im y SS SEL y AS iM h b on d X as e D MIDI In MIDI Qut Timecode In nput RE 100 240V USB 1 jia Showmaster Pro 5 3A 50 60Hz E Mark II USB 2 Raza 10008190 e AC Input Power Connector 100 240V 50 60 Hz
362. ption is checked a task is restarted when it reaches the end if its Start Condition changes to true while the task is running This is useful to guarantee that a variable change which causes the condition to become true is correctly taken into account inside the task 178 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster Device Manager Show master Medialon Control System V6 itself is viewed as a device and can receive commands as regular devices do These commands control tasks change device settings and control user interfaces UserScreen Commands This set of commands allows you to control the custom user interface only available with Medialon Manager Re insert Last Cue EzJDoremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 Task Close UserScreen Add to Cue Library 25 Medialon_DMX512_2 Logical Cue d Goto Page Insert a Message Shift M m Medialon on Metwork 3 System List Control Insert a Countdown 5i Medialon Low Level Communicator 4 gt Objects Object Text Control Insert a Comment Shift Alt C EE Medialon_MIP_5 i Expression Ctrl E Modify Cue Medialon Timecode 6 Open UserScreen From a user s point of view the constituent parts of a program may be several UserScreens The appearance of these screens linked to the user s requests choice various options the requirements of the creator organization of a game of a dispatching etc or practical necessities information warnings etc is controlled by the Open
363. r project The Device Map can be used to get a graphic representation of your system using an image as a background map to group devices regarding to their papeles position or working area Device Map 3 Secunty_ Alarm E Config LogFite RB Ettect Command LL Smoke Nes t ven A ur SHOW PROGRAMMING 81 The right click menu gives access to the same set of command like from the lister Device Map can be used in Edit Mode where you can move device in the MEDIALGN Manager Doremi La Mew Device Setup Device Delete Device Device Control Panel Replace By Device Help Activity Positrack Show Device Variable s Edit Mode Work Mode map or in Work Mode where Device position are locked Device Map Properties a Use the wizard button to change properties value Type DeviceMap Text Font Arial 8 Text Color 000 000 255 Color 224 224 274 Bitmap Max Length 10 Text Position Bottom ao e Text Font Change font size and decoration of device name in the Map See Font Selector on page 141 e Text Color Use the Color selector to change the text color e Color Use the Color selector to change the background color of the Map See Color Selector on page 141 e Image Use the Image selector to add an image as background of the map See Image Selector on page 142 e Text Position Change the position of the device name around the device Icon Testing Devices
364. r CurentMedia Groupl Media Player Status Media Player TimeCode 152 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Variables The Variable selection list can also be filtered by Variable Name Variable name filter EW Select All Unselect All Doremi_Labs w1 Muaget_1 Timetode Doremi_Labs 1 Muaget_1 Currentatatus M Doremi Labs v1 HNuadget_1 CurrentError M Doremi Labs v1 Mugaet 1 StartTimecade B Doremi Labs v1 Nugget_1 RemainingTime BM Doremi Labz v1 Nugget 1 amp ctiveDisk B Doremi Labz v1 Mugaet 1 InTime BM Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 outTime Doremi Labs w1 _Mugget_1 Currentclip Doremi Labs 1 Mudgget 1 Previousclip Doremi Labs v1 Mugaget 1 Mextclip Doremi Labs v1 Mugaet 1 CurrentolipMarme Doremi Labs w1 Nugget 1 ClipList B Doremi Labs 1 _Mugget_1 ClipCount BM Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 PendinaClipLizt Ok Cancel You can also use Category and Type buttons to show or hide variables System Integer EH Screen jp S5Hhnn User Time T By Name Group Selection Use Filter Manager CurrentD ate Manager CurrentT ime Media Player Quration A new User Variable can be added directly from the Variable selector use the button New LocalPanel Mousey Pos LocalPanel Shift eps tatus Mew If you need to not used a variable as a parameter select Litteral value no variable in the list to return to a literal value Ao M U E Hy Name Group Selection Use Filter Litteral value no variable 4
365. r V2 Firmware on page 417 Reboot Sends a reboot command to Showmaster Shutdown Sends a shutdown command to Showmaster Object Menu Edit Opens the Editor of the selected Task Object Duplicate Ctrl D Duplicates the selected object Delete Deletes the selected object cannot be undone Setup Opens the setup window of the selected object 264 MENUS amp WIZARDS Menus Control Panel If the selected object has a Control Panel TimeBased Tasks or Devices the Control Panel opens in the Control Tab Panels New WebPanel Create a new WebPanel UserScreens The menu items of this menu apply only to the UserScreens The UserScreens are graphic interfaces that enable the end user to interact with the application UserScreens are the visible parts of the programming They handle user requests and send them to the task monitors There is a large graphic capacity available to modify the ergonomics and aesthetics of these human machine interfaces As Note many commands of this menu are also avallable in the Panels Editor toolbar or by right clicking in the Panels Editor New UserScreen Creates a new UserScreen Goto Previous Page Changes the current page of the active UserScreen to the previous one Goto Next Page Changes the current page of the active UserScreen to the next one Goto First Page Changes the current page of the active UserScreen to the first one Goto Last Page Chang
366. r of the Slave station It has access to shared objects it sends commands to the Slave and it monitors the Slave s variables Medialon Control System Available Target Medialon Manager Medialon Manager Panel Medialon type MON Creating a device 1 Select the Devices item in the Object Browser and use the right mouse click to open the contextual menu y aiino E Project Right Click m EE Devices 1 A PAE im Tasks 0 New Device UserScreens 0 Collapse all F User Variables O jy Es Cue Library 0 2 Select Medialon on Network type 3 Name the Device Create Device MA Medialon an Network Cancel ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 211 4 The Device Setup dialog box opens PETIT m f E 1192 168 144 131 i 255 255 255 0 Optional Medialon on network Setup IP Mask IP Part O Default 9255 Group MON Panel Lo gg In Password Confirm Pid Connection options fd Auto re connection Specify a port BERE rj Deconnection on Timeaut 5000 ma E Use Network Detection Name IP Addr Specifies the computer name or the IP address of the target to be slaved A wizard can scan the network and find all Medialon targets Name Model Address Mask M PCdeAV4 Showmaster B0386A IM medialon 46471c Si master B1CFSE Showmaster B19596 2 5 Showmaster 918E95 5 Showmaster 0DC3DF 5 Showmaster 91A118 3 Showmaster 912760 Medialon On Network 192 168 144 1
367. r to use it be the holder of a user s license for the original product An update replaces the product that gave you the right to the update The original holder of the license for the software product is only authorized to transfer this contract once and permanently to another end user provided that he provides written notice to MEDIALON SA and the recipient agrees to be bound by and subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement This transfer must include all the software elements including without limitation the most recent update and all prior versions electronic and paper documents and the certificate of authenticity Copyright All ownership rights and copyrights relating to the Software any attached add in software the documentation in electronic or paper format and any other example or educational applications are proprietary of MEDIALON SA MEDIALON SA retains all title and ownership of the Software and Software Documentation All intellectual property rights relating to the APIs and contents to which the product can give access are proprietary of the respective owners of these APIs and contents and can be protected by regulations and international agreements relating to copyrights and intellectual property rights Limited warranty MEDIALON SA warrants that the magnetic media on which the Software is recorded and any Software Documentation will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of
368. rchitectures a hans 218 Single Slav s dw qe doe X ax anc Ac Xo Heap Re A dr RC HA 218 Multiple Slaves cech nnn 218 Medialon Manager Panel ooo es 219 Panel OpenCap Connection Chart 000 cee eee ee mo 220 PreETeCreNnCGS 43233 433 arrasa 223 C uU r 46 6 0 oi eo e e E ee a a ee 223 PROlGCl duerma a OAS Ge a oo oe a ee ee ee 225 D JH 226 EE NEST tt21912771 727 22 T 0717712111117 7 17 T TT 226 TimeBased Timeline cerne 227 StepBased amp acu aor dcos s uoo e 8 AUR ar qos duos ec ER dE XI eur ein aed 227 RUANO ud id es Gece ae e a as 228 Auto Run Manager when Opened llle rn 228 Delayed Startup eee rrr n 228 sU P PTPTTTT 229 Enable Multi Processor Support ooo 229 NCWWORK sotano daras RTT ae ohne sees es 229 Manager Showmaster V2 Server Port eee eens 229 Sunc mares estandard Son ae a a 229 U eroe eGen a we ee a ee a a ee 230 Default UserScreen SettingS aa ee 230 WED Panels susana a RG RH Se rdi E e nde o pe 231 22 TABLE OF CONTENT Table of Content a dcueds TTTTTTITVMYT 231 SED rocas raras BAe Hee ee he ee T 231 bod TACOS sar aros coa eras aaa aaa 4594 2 232 5 o wae Gu eee eee Ge Bee ee ea eee ae eee 232 Trace ODEOFIS 54540258 FREE OPEA ER RET HSE RG dede RES 233 Configuring MXM Traces eee ee ee 233 Advanced Tools nnns 235 Cue Mu
369. rdware handshaking for RTS CTS Example msmrt set rts 3 hchk set dtr lt portnumber gt on off hchk Sets DTR of serial port e hchk turns on hardware handshaking for DTR DSR Example msmrt set dtr 3 hchk Ay Events report input activity in the Showmaster Recovery Tools console window event serial lt portnumber gt on off Turns on or off event reporting for serial port lt portnumber gt Example msmrt gt event serial 2 on msmrt Event Serial 2 set to On Example of event received msmrt Serial Evt Port 2 Size 6 Hello OD write serial lt portnumber gt data Sends data out serial port portnumber e lt data gt is a test string using XX notation for hexadecimal bytes Example msmrt gt write serial 2 Hello 0D SHOWMASTER MAINTENANCE 429 Digital 1 O Resource open digital Opens the Digital I O resource Example msmrt open digital msmrt Digital Resource is opened d E br d Bm MO close digital Closes the Digital I O resource Example msmrt close digital msmrt Digital Resource is closed event digital on off Turns on or off event reporting for digital inputs Example event digital on write digital lt outputnumber gt lt on off gt Sets relay output lt outputnumber gt to on or off Example write digital 3 on get digital lt outputnumber gt Reports the status of relay output lt outputnumber gt
370. re completely compatible with Medialon Control System There are however the following limitations e MxMs Manager Panel does not support MxMs and therefore does not allow you to communicate with any external devices other than Medialon On Network devices e Tasks Manager Panel can only manage StepBased Tasks no Timelines are available Panel Connections e Showmaster V2 LE or XS can be connected to three Manager Panels e Showmaster V2 ST can be connected to five Manager Panels e Showmaster V2 Pro can be connected to ten Manager Panels e Showmaster V1 iPro can be connected to unlimited Manager Panels e Manager V6 Lite can be connected to two Manager Panels e Manager V6 Pro can be connected to ten Manager Panels As In Showmaster V2 programming mode Panels need to be connected to Showmaster Connect Panel to Showmaster Editor V2 only when no Showmaster is connected to Showmaster Editor V2 off line programming ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 219 Panel OpenCap Connection Chart connections V2 XS V2 LE V2 ST V2 Pro iPro V6 Lite V6 Pro V6 Kiosk V6 Panel anager V6 Kiosk Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited WebPanel EN E Manager V6 Panel 3 Ss 2 10 10 OpenCAP API Unlimited si a N na Y EM Medialon Scheduler Solo PO IO OO O O O IO E Medialon Scheduler 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Multi 4 Medialon Scheduler Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited
371. reate a task to monitor a variable in this object Create a task to perform a device command From this object Show Object variables Create a task started by this object Creates either a StepBased or TimeBased Task related to the status change of the object The task that is created is automatically named with the name of the object and the action that it performs to trigger the task objectnamez action For instance a task created from a button called PLAY will take the name PLAYCIick The start condition of the created task is set to an evaluation expression that monitors the state of the object s trigger variable Start conditions are case sensitive and are different depending on the type of object that is to trigger the task For instance a button called PLAY will create a task with the following start condition PLAY Status PLAY Status But a slider will create a different start condition SLI DER Status If a task is already linked to this object the contextual menu will not offer the possibility to create a task started by the object but will allow you to edit the task that is started This function allows you to have very quick access to the tasks associated with objects and edit them without having to browse for them Add start condition to selected task If a task is selected in the Lister the right click contextual menu allows you to update the start condition of the selected task by the selected ob
372. reen Action Type Enum Action to perform Available values AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Device Manager Showmaster e Get Returns the value of the text property of the given object into the given variable e Set Changes the text property of the given object Property Type Enum Type of text property Available values e Text Sets both On and Off text properties e Text Off Sets the Off text property e Text On Sets the On text property Value Type String A bidirectional parameter according to the action It is either the text value you give to the object or the result from the Get action Task Commands This set of commands allows you to control the current task where the cues are inserted but also gives you control of all the other tasks in your project Re insert Last Cue Alt R Medialon_DMX512 1 k Logical Cue j Pause Task Add to Cue Librar Shift ES Doremi_Labs_V1_Nugget_2 System Stop Task Insert a Message Shift M g3Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 3 Objects Sync Task t a Countdown _ ESNugget 4 Expression Ctrl E Lock Task Insert a Comment Shift Alt C E Video 5 j Goto Label ndun Ent B Cues Library shift i Goto Fe Goto Line Cue Selection Call Task Start Task A task may be automatically started by the state of an object by using the Start Condition which appears in the Task Lister Tab But a task may itself launch another task using the Start Task command When pro
373. rface USB2 Serial Interfaces Number 8 Connector 9 pin D type Male Format RS 232 Digital Interfaces e Isolated Inputs Number 16 Type Non polarized optically isolated inputs CMOS compatible Voltage Range 3 to 31 DC or AC RMS 40 10 000 Hz Isolation 500V channel to ground or channel to channel Input Resistance 1 8 k ohms in series with opto coupler Filter Response Times Rise Time 4 7 mS Fall Time 4 7 mS Non Filter Response Times Rise Time 10 uS Fall Time 30 uS Connector Sub D 37 type Male e Relay Outputs Number 16 SPDT form C Relays Contact Type Single crossbar Ag with Au clad Rated Load AC 0 5 A at 125 VAC 62 5 VA max Rated Load DC 1A at 24 VDC 30 W max Max Switching Voltage 125 VAC 60 VDC Max Switching Current 1 A Contact Resistance 100 m ohms max Contact Life 5 million operations min Operating Time 5 milliseconds max Release Time 5 milliseconds max Connector Sub D 37 type Female Ay When using Breakout boxes SWM BO the maximum electrical specifications are 150ma 12VDC per relay with a maximum of 2A for the whole 16 relays SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 389 e Power Required 5V 30mA typical all relays off add 30mA per relay 5V 510mA typical all relays ON DMX I nterface Number 2 DMX512 Input or Output Connector XLR 5 pin type Female TimeCode Interface Number 1 Balanced TimeCode Input Female 1 Balanced Timecode Output Male Connector
374. riables Right Click Group_of Groupe Eo cy Group ot Tasks N Mew User Group F Group_of Varables Delete User Group BP Resources Collapse All Cue Library 4 User Groups Tr All Varnables Br Group_of Groups Group ee Group ot Tasks T Group_ot_Vanables Resources 3 Rename the new sub group 204 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING User Groups Adding Objects to User Groups A User Group can contain only one type of object The first object added to a User Group defines the type of the User Group Adding Objects From the Lister The easy way to add objects to a User Group is to select the objects in the Lister then drag and drop them into the User Group For example to create a User Group for variables Select some variables and drag and drop them into the User Group Project amp Devices 3 DoremiLabs V1 Nugget Ed Variables Ea io Pull Oh 51 2_1 m3 Showmaster m Tasks 3 lzer Variables 1 Cue Library 2 A ser G oups E A ETE Sl MS or Sule d G SO oups m Group of Tasks F Group of Variables fe Resources Value Type Mame Dit Doremi Labs V1 Nugget 2 TimeCode za Doremi Labs V1 MNugget 2 CurentStatus No Disk 0 00 00 00 00 Doremt_Labs_ Doremi_Labz_ Doremi_Labs_ Doremi _Labs_ De EC Labs De ECC Labs_ go Doremi TE LN Nuoga ae Currenttli 7 Doremt_Labs_ Dorer_Labz_ D oremi Labs Doremi_Labz_ D oremi Labs 491 N
375. riables from the selected device in the Lister Variables New Variable Shift Ins Creates a new user variable The type of the variable to create must be chosen Delete Unused Variables This command shows all unused user variables and allows the user to delete them When the variable list dialog box appears unused variables can be selected either individually or by group for deletion Tasks New Task Ctrl T Creates a new task New Task Editor Shift Ctrl T Opens an empty Task Editor window Windows Menu Workspace Save as Template Saves the current Workspace configuration as a template which can be recalled at any time Rename Rename the currently selected custom workspace Delete Deletes the currently selected custom workspace 266 MENUS WIZARDS Menus Tools Timecode Calculator Ctrl F11 Opens the Timecode Calculator The timecode calculator provides basic operators like add subtract multiply and divide It also provides a timecode units selector 24 SMPTE fps 25 EBU fps 30 amp 30DP NTSC fps 100 fps 1000 fps and a timecode format selector timecode or frames Changing these settings automatically converts the content of the Input and Result fields according to the frame rate selected This tool works as a stack much like Reverse Polish Notation input a value and click on the desired operator to get the result mage selector Open
376. ridas Framecycler is a software product with several editions Framecycler Professional DDS DI and Venue System All of these products can be controlled using the Iridas Framecycler MxM Basic operations are directly available such as Open Sequence Play Pause etc Advanced control can be performed using the generic Dispatch Command which can send virtually any kind of command to Framecycler 468 ANNEXES Annexes MxM Louth VDCP The Louth VDCP protocol is a popular RS 422 control protocol for Video Disc Recorders or Video Servers This MxM implements the main functionality of VDCP With this MxM the user can build a PlayList of clips by using Load Clip Load Next Clip commands and then let the MxM play the playlist seamlessly MxM Medialon MI P This MxM controls and monitors the Medialon Multimedia Interactive Player MIP The MIP is a robust player specially designed for multimedia playback applications in museums rides interactive kiosks and dynamic signage The connection to the MIP is done via Ethernet TCP IP MxM Medialon SyncMaster This MxM can be used to synchronize Video playback on several PCs running the Medialon Local Media Player MxM MxM Odetics RS 422 The Odetics RS 422 protocol is a generic control protocol for Video Disc Recorders It is a superset of the popular Sony RS 422 VTR control protocol Most of the added functionalities are about Clip management by which the user can que
377. riptions is non exhaustive Notify Messages mShow masterCore Messages Session ID xxx asked to reboot Showmaster The session xxx connection from Showmaster Editor V2 or Showmaster V2 Recovery Tools has asked to reboot Showmaster lt Session I D xxx asked to shutdown Showmaster gt The session xxx connection from Showmaster Editor V2 or Showmaster V2 Recovery Tools has asked to shutdown Showmaster Session ID xxx asked to reset Showmaster to factory The session xxx connection from Showmaster V2 Recovery Tools has asked to reset Showmaster to its factory state Alarm Messages mShow masterCore Messages ManagerRT doesn t answer process killed ManagerRT has been killed by mShowmasterCore because it stopped responding Client connection s have been forced closed The client connections Showmaster Editor V2 Medialon Manager have been forced closed by holding the down arrow on the front panel ManagerRT not responding PID xxx ManagerRT is no longer responding to the watch process Error Messages mShow masterCore Messages Session Start Error Too many session opened Showmaster is already connected to another Showmaster Editor V2 lt Unable to initialize Front Panel gt The communication initialization with the Front panel failed Unable to collect system info System information cannot be collected Unable to start TCP Server The TCP server for Showmaster
378. rmations via some variables Manager CurentT ime 11 07 49775 100 fps hanager CurrentD ay Tuesday 2 Manager CurrentD ate 3 08 2011 Tuesday 2 Manager LurrentSEatux Debug 1 Manager CurrentProjectFile CU sers Public Documents edialons lM Manager CurrentProjectT ithe My First Project E LI Manager ConnectedPanels i Screen mouse and keyboard Manager variables in previous version of Medialon Manager are now LocalPanel variables AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 193 Status This variable indicates in which mode your project is This variable is used to define the start condition of an initial task in a project e Name Manager CurrentStatus Type Enum Available Values e Stop 0 e Debug 1 e Run 2 e User Mode 3 Date and Time These variables return date and time of Medialon Manager host or Showmaster V2 Current Date e Name Manager CurrentDate Type Date Current Time e Name Manager CurrentTime Type Time Current Day e Name Manager CurrentDay Type Enum Available Values e Sunday 0 e Monday 1 e Tuesday 2 e Wednesday 3 e Thursday 4 e Friday 5 e Saturday 6 Current Project Project Title Title of the loaded project this title can changed in the Project Preferences see Preferences Project chapter page 225 e Name Manager CurrentProjectTitle Type String Project File Path and file name of the loaded project e Name Manager CurrentProjectFile Type String 194 AUTO
379. roject These new objects are created in their proper object node and also added to the User Group from which you created it 5 E Project Status Name x Start condition Comment amp Devices 7 as ES a Tasks 3 T jg Task 3 SE UserScreens 1 Remove from Group F User Variables 1 Ea Cue Library 0 ume mm ge User Groupe a Duplicate Task T B a i a b E mg Group of Tasks Edit Task F Group of Yarables Setup Task MESI m Delete Task Show Task Control Panel New Task Editor Show Task Variable s Object creation depends of the type of the User Group Tasks Variables UserScreen Devices Sharing Objects If you wish to exchange information and commands with other Medialon Control System V6 Projects activate the Shared option Properties Object Type User Group Mame roupl el gt Description 206 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING User Groups Networking of variables is no longer a property of Variable objects as it used to be in previous versions of Medialon Manager Shared groups are now used by Medialon Control System to publish Variables Tasks and UserScreens In the case of a Manager target for a Medialon On Network Device in a Medialon Control System Project only those Tasks and UserScreens contained in a Shared User Group will be available for commands A Liter k Froject Mame MA Br MON Task Tasks 3 F
380. roject To add a new resource right click on the Resources node and select the New Resource you want to add or scan for resources lt i Project Name amp De m Tasks 0 rs Panels 1 Mp User Variables 0 E 5 Cue Library 0 fe User Groups gj Resources E Serial Ports uy MIDI Ports OM Ports TimeCode F FA 1 0 Ports Infrared Ports Properties y Serial Ports ww MIDI Ports DMX Ports e TimeCode Ports 140 Ports nfrared Parts Right Click New Resource Save as Default Resource Configuration Collapse All DA Manager Adlink Mudam I O Adlink PCI 7432 1 0 Adrienne TimeCode Advantech ADAM VO AMYX NetLinx Serial AMX NetLinx MIDI AMX NetLinx I O AMA NetLinx Infrared ArtNet DMX512 Comtrol DeviceMaster Serial Global Cache Serial Global Cache VO Global Cache Infrared ICP DAS PISO P32x32 1 0 Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO I O Red Rat IR Infrared Sealevel SeaL INK Serial SoundLight DMX512 Windows COM Serial Windows MIDI All resources scan 5can ll Resources 5can ll Serial Resources Scan All MIDI Resources Scan All DMX512 Resources scan All VO Resources Scan All IR Resources scan Advantech ADAM Resources Scan AMX NetLinx Resources Scan ArtNet DIMX512 Resources Scan Global Cache Resources Scan Opto22 SNAP Ethernet IO Resources Scan Sealevel 5SeaL INK Resources The All resources scan will dete
381. roups are also used to share objects with other Medialon Control System V6s like Medialon Showmaster Medialon Manager Pro Medialon Manager Panel and Medialon Scheduler User Group Creation Select the User Groups node and right click to create a new User Group E Y Project B M ame E Er Devices 5 F All Variables m Tasks 3 ME LlserS creen 1 r 3 y User Variables WIESE Right Click Lal User Groups A T Es l l M a i a b E E Br Resources Collapse Al Mew User Group ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 203 The name of this new group can be modified in the Properties tab E ESI BY Project Name ul FF Devices 5 EF All anables m Tasks 3 i UserScreens l F User Variables 1 FJ Cue Library 4 La User Groups F Al Vanables B Groupi me Resources 5 Object Type User Group n RA Description User Mode Rights Mone LES Shared Active User Mode Rights defines if this User group is visible in User Mode Note that the contents of the User group must also have their User Mode Rights set to View or they will not be visible even though the User group is Sub Group Creation User Groups can only contain one type of object If you need to group several types of objects you can create sub groups each containing one type of object 1 Select or create an empty User Group in the Browser 2 Right click to create a new group ry User Yarnables u Cue Library 4 User Groups F All Va
382. rt and print event lists by date and time Network Utilities Network Utilities MxM provides several commands for network management and system information retrieval Variables Management This MxM provides commands that act on variables and these commands are positracked when they are used in a INTRODUCTION 39 Medialon Control System timeline Low Level Communicator The Low Level Communicator MxM is a low level and powerful MxM It is a low level MxM because it is not dedicated to a specific device and is able to use many raw communication protocols You can write your own set of commands create monitored variables linked to the reception of specified frames and much more to create drivers dedicated to your specific devices and projects 5 types of communication are available e Serial e TCP IP Client e TCP IP Server e UDP IP e MIDI HJ Low Level Communicator drivers may be published and shared on the Medialon web site www medialon com Protocols and Hardware Resources MxMs have been developed for all standard communication protocols e Serial RS232 RS422 protocols e TCP IP and UDP IP communication e DMX512 via a PCI Card or ArtNet e MIDI using PC Audio Cards or USB Interfaces e TimeCode via a PCI Card or on a Showmaster Pro e Modbus e OPC e Infrared via external interfaces Independently from the MxM Medialon Control System uses a resource to physically connect to the device This resource can be a Wi
383. rtNet DMX512 Resources If you wish to configure the DMX Resources select the resource in the Lister and use the right click menu mame Right Click P ArtNet DM Line 1 3 2 Soundlight DIM Line 1 N New Resource Delete Resource Setup Resource DMX Resources have common configuration Create SoundLight DMX L Modify ArtNet DMX Line ES Direction Output Direction ig Output ag Input Input n Universe Board p lt E IF Address 132 158 144 14 Connector e Use Limited Broadcast B 5 T ArtM et standard Patch None Patch None Modity Patch Modify Patch Initial Output Level OF Reset to 9 Reset to U t Restore Last Values Initial Output Level Y Restore Last Values Ok Cancel Ok Cancel e Name Name given to the resource e Direction Determines whether the resource is used for Input or Output MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources e Patch DMX channels can be redirected through a Patch modified to your needs Patch Editar 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 002 006 007 008 010 011 014 015 016 010 011 014 015 016 n Lic 032 040 040 053 053 Ok 5 Cancel Orange channels are patched Red channels indicates a conflict with another index Two or more indexes are patched to the same channel e nitial Output Level You may choose to Reset all the Outputs to O when the project starts or to keep the last
384. rtcuts e Type the Del key to delete the selected cues e Type Ctrl C to copy the selected cues e Type Ctrl X to cut the selected cues e Type Ctrl V to paste cues to the current position of the timeline or task Moving Cues There are several handy keyboard shortcuts to precisely move selected cues e Hold the Alt key down and use arrow keys to move the selected cues up or down The Cue Management Menu The Task Editor provides various commands in the Cue Management submenu to automatically change relationships between cues Cue Selection Cue Management Device Task Execution Show Task Variables AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 173 174 Cue Disable Enable e Disable Enable cues Disabled cues are not executed during Task execution To disable a selected cue e Type Shift S e If Flash Control feature is activated click on the Enable Disable Flash Control Button e Choose the Cues Management Disable Cues menu item To enable a selected cue e Type Shift N e If Flash Control feature is activated click on the Enable Disable Flash Control Button e Choose the Cues Management Enable Cues menu item Grouping Cues Cues may also be grouped Once a group of cues is created clicking on any cue of the group selects all of the members of the group This is particularly handy to make sure that the relationship between cues of a group is not modified by mistake while draggin
385. rts 303 343 RedRat IRNetBox 450 Input Output Ports 302 341 Adlink NuDAM 446 Adlink PCI 7432 446 Advantech ADAM 447 Connector Pinout 364 374 386 ICP DAS PISO P32x32 448 Opto22 SNAP 449 Showmaster 443 Management Manager 295 Showmaster 335 MIDI Ports 298 338 Showmaster 443 Windows MIDI 299 MRC 295 335 443 445 New 296 336 Save 304 Serial Ports 297 337 Showmaster 443 Windows COM 297 486 TimeCode Ports 301 341 Adrienne RG1 PCI 447 Adrienne USB TC 447 Showmaster 443 Virtual Resources 304 Retrieve Project 331 Run 353 Run Mode 46 Manager 262 292 Showmaster 318 S Save Project 261 Resources 304 Workspace 70 266 Screen Panels 125 UserScreen 125 Virtual Screen 117 Security Manager On Network Login Password 213 Select All 263 Cue 95 172 Variable 152 Send Project 332 Serial Showmaster Setup 443 Serial Ports Setup 297 337 Showmaster 443 Test Mode 428 Windows COM 297 Setup Object 264 Resources ArtNet 448 DMX 300 Showmaster 443 SoundLight 451 StepBased 177 TimeBased 111 Track 89 Showmaster About 269 Browser 325 Configuration 264 Date amp Time 329 INDEX Logs 328 Network 327 Time Zone 329 Connect 264 324 Disconnect 264 326 Firmware Factory 419 Update 264 Help 268 iPro Installation 398 Shutdown Reboot 407 Keypad 355 361 370 382 Logs 264 328 Mode Programming 318 353 Recovery 353 Run 318 353 Name 327 Project Retrieve 331 Send 33
386. rts when a Manager V6 failure is detected Restart delay is set in Medialon Manager s Preferences Watchdog chapter page 231 Client Count Displays how many applications are monitored by Medialon Watchdog Applications The Applications tab displays the list of applications monitored by Medialon Watchdog E Medialon Watchdog Y5 Log Event Applications FID ame Timenaut zx RA Delay 3 5994 hdedialonbanagerPansl 5 5 AY 25 MedialonM anager 5 5 3 Aclvig am Countdown sec EY Client Count Failure Action Restart Application m For each application PID Process Identification number timeout and restart delay are displayed 308 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Medialon Watchdog Log Event The Log Event tab displays all actions of Medialon watchdog Log Event Applications 21 2042006 02 41 40 Opening Medialon atchdagy atcehdog 21 4 2008 08 07 27 Notification Email Error Cannot Send Email 2104 2006 03 15 48 Claesing Medialonatchdogy atchdag 21 04 2008 09 25 24 Opening Medialonsatchdog 21 042008 03 27 20 Pro Register PID 3400 Name MedialonM anager 5 104 2006 09 28 59 Pracess Timeout reached PID 3400 Name MedialonM anager 5 21 04 2008 3 28 53 Begin Wait For Restart PID 3400 Mame Medialontdanager 5 21704 2008 03 23 02 End 21 04 2008 09 29 02 Restart Process Mame Medialonl anager 5 21 04 2006 09 29 47 Pr Register PID 172 Mame Medialonl anager 5 21 042006 09 3
387. rty hardware Can be increased by batch of 10 additional connections Contact Medialon dealer Medialon Showmaster XS Showmaster XS is a all in one Embedded Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls video projectors video servers sound processors etc Showmaster XS also provides digital outputs and infrared ports Its free editing software Showmaster Editor V2 embeds most of the features of our award winning technology such as logical programming as well as real time testing It allows programming of up to 3 Webpanels but does not support 3rd party extension interfaces Medialon Showmaster LE Showmaster LE is a all in one Embedded Show Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls and synchronizes dimmers lighting desks video projectors video servers sound processors etc Showmaster LE also provides digital I O Its free editing software Showmaster Editor V2 embeds most of the features of our award winning technology such as devices synchronization amp logical programming as well as real time testing It allows programming of one show at a time up to 3 Webpanels but does not support 3rd party extension interfaces Medialon Show master ST Showmaster V2 ST is an all in one embedded Show Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls and synchronizes dimmers lighting desks video projectors video servers sound processors and many other t
388. s SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 357 DigitalOutput Port Wiring Relay Output Connector Showmaster s has three relays Relay outputs are connected to Showmaster XS via 3 terminal block connectors Relay X NO DX SHOWMASTER Indicator i dd Relay X Common Serial Connection Medialon Showmaster XS is provided with 4 serial ports Serial 1 and 2 wiring 1 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD DCD 4 DIR li 5 GND I 6 DSR 7 RTS e CTS Serial 3 and 4 wiring Serial 3 and 4 handshake flow control is not available 1 2 RxD 3 TxD 1 4 2 GND GAD 6 e Ay Showmaster XS is configured with DTE serial ports Use a crossover null modem cable when you want to connect to a computer 358 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster XS Description Technical Specifications Network Connection Number 1 Connector RJ45 female Interface 10 100Mbps 100Base T Protocol TCP IP Addressing Static IP or DHCP USB Connections Number 2 Connector USB slave socket Interface USB2 Serial Interfaces Number 4 Connector 9 pin D type Male Format RS 232 Digital Interfaces e Relay Outputs Number 3 Relays Connector terminal block Power Required 24V AC DCO 5A Infrared I nterfaces Number 6 outputs Connector mini jack Physical Size Rack Mount 18 75 x 10 25 x 1 75 476 x 260 x 44 5mm Stand alone 17 38 x 10 25 x 1 75 441 x 260 x 44 5mm Weight 7 5 lbs 3 4 kg Temperature 32 F 140 F 0 C 60 C Humidity 30
389. s Firmware Info amp Update Reboot 5hutdown If the current project has not been updated in the connected Showmaster a warning message asks if you want to download the Showmaster V2 project The current project last modifications haven t been downloaded in the 5hewrmaster Do you want to download before disconnecting E No SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Menu Showmaster Showmaster Configuration Select Configuration from the Showmaster menu to open Showmaster s configuration window Configuration Network Medialon Showmaster s network settings can be changed using Showmaster Cam Editor V2 Showmaster Configuration M iion m Mame Showmaster B 15 335 Log Traces IP Address 192 168 1 80 LINE Date amp Time A Passwords IF Mask 255 255 255 0 IPF Gateway DHCP Auto Primary OMS Secondary OMS MAC Address Serial Number NOOO Build Humber 20100510 Update Close Medialon Showmaster iPro network cannot be change with Showmaster Editor V2 Name Showmaster s user defined Name DHCP Enable DHCP to obtain an automatic IP address If there is no DHCP server present on your network DHCP must be disabled and the information below must be filled in I P Address Enter an IP Address if DHCP is not active I P Mask Enter a subnet mask if DHCP is not active IP Gateway Enter the gateway address of your network if DHCP is not active Primary DNS Enter the primary DN
390. s ShowSelection Slider SelectShow Status 5 If Slider_SelectShow Status is equal to 5 the expression in the parenthesis is true and therefore the variable ShowSelection is set to 1 true is considered as 1 otherwise if Slider_SelectShow Status is equal to 0 the expression in the parenthesis is false therefore the ShowSelection variable is set to O false is considered as 0 AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING Expressions The Expression Window When you create an Expression Cue within a task you need to write the expression out so the calculation is performed To access the Edit Expression window select the cue and click on the Magic Wand of the Expression Property to open the Edit Expression Window Label Na m ME Expression ek Alternatively you can double click on the expression field in the Properties Tab Edit Expression x To create Expressions you will need to choose variables to use Simply click on the Variable Selection Icon to open the Variable Selection Window All the filters are active when you first open this window If you do not wish to display the variables of one category or type click on the Icon and they are filtered out System Integer Enum Screen fF Sting Eye Date ZEE Time Rel By Name Group Selection Use Filter Litteral value na variable LocalPaneLaltherS tatus LocalPanel CirikeyS tatus LocalPanel CurrentlserS creen ame LocalPanel KeyPress Loc
391. s 22 UserScreens 1 B Userscreer_ p Variables ZH Pages EF Page 1 Button 1 EA Variables MW Sider WE ext Display 3 Mp User Variables 0 Ex Cue Library 0 fe User Groups E Resources Properties Object Type Variable Ar Mame Button 1 5tatus ETIN MEN Y Persistent Active Enabled User Mode Rights None 1 p Current Value 0 2220001001 ail 313 Lo a Min Value 0 Max Value 1 User Variable Properties When you create a User Variable there is no direct link to any object in your AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING Variables project therefore all the properties are editable including the name and values qa Object Type Variable INE e Description Persistent Active User Mode Rights Mone Current value 0 Min Value 2147403647 Max Value 2147483647 User Mode Rights defines if this variable is visible in the User Mode User Variables can be set to Persistent allowing you to automatically retrieve the last state they were in when the Project was last closed Using Variables as Cue Parameters Variables may be used as parameters for Command Cues to dynamically control one or all the parameters This very powerful function allows you to dynamically update the parameters of a command before it is sent All editable parameters of Command Cues are able to use variables as their value Medialon Control System does not process any of these values so the variable that is used
392. s Differences are highlighted with Orange text 5 Click the Update button to start the Firmware update SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 417 As The Update button is only active when Showmaster Editor V2 s and Showmaster s firmware are different LA 6 Enter your password to confirm the update Default password is medialon Update Firmware Password HHHHHHHH Ok Cancel Ay This password can be changed by the user Menu Showmaster Configuration gt Passwords chapter page 330 explains the procedure 7 Click OK to start the update process Do you really want to update the Shownmaster smz with this Firmware Y Changing the firmware causes Showmaster to restart Ok No Firmware Status Transfering indy 100 bpl Progression Cancel 8 The files transfer could take a few minutes 9 Click Close to complete the update Upload sm2 Title Firmware Status Terminated Progression Close 10 Medialon Showmaster needs to restart to complete the firmware update 5 howmaster em will be restarted to complete the firmware update Q a 418 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Showmaster Firmware Firmware Info If needed or requested by Medialon Support you can save the list of firmware component MXMWmxmPeaveylMedialMatrixPasha mxrmo 6 0 1 0 App MXMWrxmPelcoCcMS 7850MatrixS witcher mms 6 0 1 0 App MX Mim mFhilipsLTCE300 mam 6 0 1 0 App MXMWrxmPioneerDVDV 7 300D mms 6 0 1 0 Save Fe Copy
393. s shows are programmed with Showmaster Editor V2 free software and executed in the controller hosting Showmaster V2 Runtime For the open platform solution programming and execution is done in a PC running Medialon Manager Software The embedded controller has the advantage of an all in one controller that includes all relevant hardware interfaces such as DMX MIDI Serial Timecode Digital IOs and of course TCP IP The software only version provides easy integration in an IT environment when a link to databases or other IT resources is needed Both can be sized to your exact needs by adding Medialon or third party hardware interfaces Thanks to the easy graphical programming environment applications are programmed in much less time than with any other conventional control system neither coding nor compilation are required The native synchronization capabilities and legendary Timeline with drag and drop programming makes Medialon Control System the ideal choice for Show Control Applications However complex logical task programming is also available allowing your shows to be interactive and respond to input from operators as well as guests Programming Environment s Features A driver for virtually anything Medialon Control System uses Plug in drivers called MxMs Manager X Object Modules to control devices A wide range of MxMs are included for most popular devices on the market connected through Serial Midi Timecode In
394. s turns Off 0 e One Time In this mode the user can press the button only once You need to implement a command in a task to release this button e Still Down option keeps the button in down position graphically when its status is On e Goto Page this properties executes a switch to the specified page Ay You may prefeer to use Manager command Goto Page inside tasks to switch pages New E URL Opens another URL in the web browser hosting WebPanel This web page will replace the WebPanel page where this button is pressed Variable JE B ulta n 3 Click W Button 3 Status e Name Button name Click Type Integer Values 1 while you click on it O by default e Name Button name Status Type Integer Values O Off or Up 1 On or Down AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING 133 Sliders E Sliders are used to define levels You need to set the minimum value Min Status and the maximum value Max Status The current position of the slider gives the current Status Max Status 100 Min Status 100 Status 25 Select the slider tool in the UserScreen toolbar and with the mouse draw your slider e Ruler Defines the graduation marks and their color e Slot Defines the width and the color of the slot e Background Color Defines the color of the object use the magic wand to select the color Li e Shape With this option you can create a rotary knob e Effect section allows replacing the background
395. s KI MW Manager Doremi Labs 1 Mugget 1 3 Medialon DMxb512 2 m Tasks 1 E GS Panels 1 LocalPanel P Varnables ZEN UserScreens 1 BJ lserscreen_1 P User Varnables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources Serial Ports _ MIDI Ports F DM8 Ports e TimeCode Ports FA IO Ports Infrared Parts Like an explorer you can expand or collapse every node When you select a node its content is displayed in the Lister and in the Object Properties Objects e Devices Tasks E I Panels E User Variables LA Cue Library Ej User Groups With the User Groups you can create groups and sub groups of objects from the same class Devices Variables Tasks or UserScreens this allows you to organize information that is important for your program See more about User Groups on page 203 Resources Resources contains a list of ports available for your project but also allows you to create virtual resources for specific configurations PROGRAMMING ENVIRONMENT 65 Lister Tab The content of the Lister depends on the Browser selection Browser E Froject 56 Lister Name Open UserScreen EE OOO Doremi_Labs V1 Mugget 1 Close LleerScreen Goto Page Medialon_DMx512_2 wa Tasks 1 E Fanels 1 User Variables 0 Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources gt Serial Parts au MIDI Ports P DMS Ports TimeCode Ports A 0 Ports Infrared Ports
396. s option in which case the task will wait for the reference Timecode to reach the value of its position before going to Run SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Timebased Tasks Timecode Jump Conditions Defines the time tolerance 1 10 second before considering that the reference Timecode has skipped forward Timecode Offset Defines an offset to add to the external Timecode reference incoming value It can be a positive or negative constant value or any time variable Timecode format Allows you to setup the frame rate of the task If Comply with TC is checked the frame rate of the task will automatically clock to the Timecode source Timecode format EI Com ply with TC MA m 1000 fps SHOW PROGRAMMING 113 114 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG In this section you will learn how to turn a show program into an automated application and how to create Graphical User Interfaces 116 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Panels amp UserScreens Panels amp UserScreens MEV The UserScreen is the only visible part of the Medialon Control System application in Run mode where the user will choose make decisions get information play and act on everything that is programmed in your project UserScreens are a very important part of the programming process and should in no case be neglected The Panels With Medialon Control System V6 UserScreens can be displayed on the current monitor of Manager V6 or remotely
397. s or with hardware which is incompatible with the operating system for which the Software is being procured Infringement MEDIALON SA at its own expense will indemnify and defend you against any action brought against you to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Software or any upgrade or update of the Software used within the scope of this Agreement infringes any French patent or copyright provided that MEDIALON SA is promptly notified in writing of such claim MEDIALON SA shall have the right to control the defense of all such claims lawsuits and other proceedings In no event may you settle any such claim lawsuit or proceeding without MEDIALON SA s prior written approval MEDIALON SA shall have no liability for any claim under this section if a claim for a French patent or copyright infringement is based on the use of a superseded or altered version of the Software if such infringement would have been avoided by use of the latest unaltered version of the Software made available to you or in the event such claim is based upon any modification or enhancement to the Software made by you or on your behalf In the event a third party infringement claim is sustained in a final judgment from which no further appeal is taken or possible or if your use of the Software is enjoined by a court then MEDIALON SA shall in its sole election and at its expense either i procure for you the right to continue to use the Software pursuant to this Agr
398. s the Image Selector See Image Selector page 142 View i MEW Browser F5 Sets the focus on the Browser Tab or switches to it if the Tab is hidden by another Tab in the Area Lister F6 Sets the focus on the Lister Tab or switches to it if the Tab is hidden by another Tab in the Area Properties F7 Sets the focus on the Properties Tab or switches to it if the Tab is hidden by another Tab in the Area Device Map F8 Sets the focus on the Device Map Tab or switches to it if the Tab is hidden by another Tab in the Area Panels F9 Sets the focus on the Panels Tab or switches to it if the Tab is hidden by another Tab in the Area Control Center F10 Sets the focus on the Control Tab or switches to it if the Tab is hidden by another Tab in the Area Panels List Ctrl F5 Opens the Panels item in the Browser Tab and displays the list of available Panels in the Lister Tab Device List Ctrl F6 Opens the Devices item in the Browser Tab and displays the list of the project s Devices in the Lister Tab MENUS WIZARDS 267 Variables List Ctrl F7 Opens the User Variables item in the Browser Tab and displays the list of these variables in the Lister Tab Task List Ctrl F8 Opens the Tasks item in the Browser Tab and displays the Tasks of the project in the Lister Tab Close All UserScreens Closes all UserScreens that are currently open All Control Panels Closes all Control Pan
399. s the splash screen of Medialon Control System V6 Software Here you will find the number of the current version as well as the license number About Your Computer This window contains the main available information concerning your computer system memory display graphic capabilities etc and informs you of your work in Medialon Control System as well as the number of Medialon Control System applications opened and the number of Showmaster Editor applications connected to the network AL A TEN Ir computer LR C z GRAPHIC DISPLAY gt Monitor count Monitor 1 Screen Work Area Monitor 2 Screen Work Area Manager gt Manager Running Manager Session Time Manager Debug Run Session Time Manager CPU Windows Kernel Time Manager CPU System Time Connected Panells Connected wW ebPanel s Connected OpenCAP s Granted Panels DOpenC Plz Manager Server Port Watchdog Activity Theme Mame z MACs gt MAC 1 Mame Update Infos Now Auto Left 0 Tops Right 1600 Bottom 5 0 Left 1580 Top 0 Right 0 Battom 1 050 00 09 54 00 09 75 00 00 35 00 03 12 1 E 10 3257 Mat Activated Legacy MAC Adlink Nupat It also contains information about the MxMs and MRCs installed on your system MENUS amp WIZARDS 269 270 MENUS amp WIZARDS Drag and Drop Wizards Drag and Drop Wizards This feature of Medialon Control System V6 is exactly the same as the drag and
400. selected cues by a percentage or by time Time Value l Time Value k a ME j E SE Uk Cancel Ok Cancel Add X percent of time to the selection or add X second s to the selection Compress the time between the selected cues by a percentage or by time Cue time keyboard shortcuts e Enables you to move relatively or absolutely the time position of several cues by increasing or decreasing the time Offset Time Value Add Sub Absolut Cancel SHOW PROGRAMMING 97 Distributing Cues e Distribute the selected cues evenly on the timeline p0 00 00 35 ll gt LEE o Internal Timecode TET Trpo The Cue Library The Cue Library is a convenient way to store cues which are often used Cues can be easily added to the library and retrieved from the library by typing keyboard shortcuts See details in 00 00 0570 7 d T e Da EN d m Timecode ES ES Tazk_1 Tracks Tracki ER DO Oo 00 0107 Send Cue t 00 000 Dora y Rs stcget_1 Right Click Enter message here t Manager BEJDoremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 E Medialon DMX512 2 EZIManager on Network 3 EfdMedialon Local Media Player 4 gg Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 1 Lacate O 01 Medialon_DMx512 2 Send_Cue_00_00_0 bg Manager Start Task E Countdown End of Scenel IN Insert Cue Re insert Last Cue Alt F Add to Cue Library ShiFt 4 Insert a Message 5hiFE Insert a
401. sert a carriage return CR 168 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG Expressions Start Conditions All tasks whether StepBased or TimeBased have a start condition that allows you to automatically execute the Task Start Conditions are written in the form of an Evaluation Expressions When the evaluation returns the answer true the task executes The expression acts as a trigger sr eke mear a ist C Laus y Project M ame wor BF Devices 1 Task_1 xpression_Evaluated False i pem b JA E Task 2 E Plc e s Task_3 xpression_Evaluated False User Vanables 3 de E Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources l ask b xpression Evaluated False pression Evaluated False Task_4 pression Evaluated False Task_5 xpression Ewaluated False gt Serial Ports u Task 7 x Hon_Ewaluated True uu MIDI Ports Task_8 pressi n Ewaluated False P DMX Ports Task_3 xpression_Evaluated False e Moe PESE Task 10 xpression_Evaluated False eB 1 0 Ports Task_11 E Expression_Ewaluated False Infrared Ports Start Conditions can only function with Evaluation Expressions If you use an Assignment Expression the expression continually evaluates and the Task is continually triggered Setting the Start Condition of a task By default there is no start condition for a task when it is created In that case the Task can only be started manually via the Flash Controls or a Start Task command in anoth
402. sitrack for the Positrack L selected Device Select Next Next Down Arrow Arrow Select the next item in the list the next item in the list LL EE Previous ae EN the previous item in the list MENUS amp WIZARDS 281 Create New Object Create a new Object of the same type as what is being listed in the Lister Enable Device Ctrl Shift Enables Positrack for the Positrack N selected Device Disable Device Ctrl Shift Disabled Positrack for the Positrack L selected Device Select Next Tab Select the next editable tem in the list Select Previous Shift Tab Select the previous editable item in the list Select Next Mouse Wheel Select the next editable item in Down the list Select Previous Mouse Wheel Select the previous editable Up item in the list Edit Selected Right Arrow Begin editing the selected parameter Validate edition When a parameter is edited pressing Enter validates the new value Cancel edition ESC When a parameter is edited Esc cancels the edit Test Command Enter When selected object is a command execute the command inni UNE Next Ctrl Mouse Select the next item in the list HIE Down Select Previous Ctrl Mouse Select the previous item in the Wheel Up list Insert Cue INS Open the contextual menu to create a cue Create Expression Ctrl E Create an Expression Cue Cue Create Wait Cue Ctrl W Create a Wait cue StepBased task only Create While Ctrl H Create While EndWhile Cue
403. sk 1 Status Paused 2 Tasks 3 Task_1 Activity Enabled 1 Task_1 id Variables im Tracks z Task 2 E Task 3 rs Panels 1 P User Varables 0 4 Task 1 TimeCodeStatus Internal 0 E Cue Library U Task 1 Timecode 20 00 0 2 85 100 fps Task 1 Duration 00 00 0603 100 fps Task 1 LountDiownalue 00 00 0324 100 fps ge First Step z E ins es fey ip a 4 1 1 7 b ei ins we i 1 1 1 1 Task 1 Message Show Started Task Management Once you have created your task you may access the task management menu by right clicking on the desired task in the Browser tab or in the Lister tab The contextual menu appears giving you access to the management options El E Project User anual Mame Fw Devices dj F Variables z e E sks E MN A racks MES mm Tracks Duplicate Task Task 2 end letum Edit Task T ds k zi GS Panels 1 Setup Task P User Varnables 0 Delete Task E Cue Library 0 User Groups Resources Show Task Control Panel New Task Editor Show Task Variable s 110 SHOW PROGRAMMING Timebased Tasks e New Task Creates a new task e Duplicate Task Duplicates the selected task and names the duplicate with a numerical incremental value e Edit Task Opens the task editor in the Task tab or switches to the selected task s editor if it is already is open e Setup Task Opens the selected task s setup window e Delete Task Deletes the selected task
404. sk applications It offers control of local media playback as well as internet browsing but cannot control external devices It is possible to connect multiple Medialon Manager Kiosks to a central Medialon Control System to supervise them deliver media or link Kiosk apps to other mediums such as Lighting Effects Audio etc Medialon Manager V6 Panel Medialon Manager V6 Panel is specifically designed to implement remote control panels typically on a touch screen computer This free version of Medialon Manager V6 cannot control external devices but is able to connect and share data with other Medialon Control System V6 stations on the network INTRODUCTION 49 50 INTRODUCTI ON SOFTWARE INSTALLATI ON I n this section you will discover how to install Medialon Manager or Showmaster Editor V2 on your computer 52 SOFTWARE INSTALLATI ON Computer Requirements Minimum System Requirements 2 GHz PC Pentium IV Processor 512 MB Memory 40 GB Hard Disk Windows XP Pro Windows Vista Business or Windows 7 Pro HJ Medialon Software Products are compatible with Windows XP Windows Vista 32Bits and Windows 7 32Bits and can be used on these platform for all kind of use They can run on Windows 64 bits platforms Vista 64bits and Windows 7 64 Bits in 32 bits compatibility mode Tests done so far didn t show any compatibilty issues but they remain not certified on these platforms Therefore we recommend not to use these platforms in pro
405. splay time F Tre des Positrack Position Tracking or Positrack is a mechanism that enables a Timeline to recalculate the state that the objects monitored had at any moment in the Timeline Positrack Mechanism When Positrack mode is enabled just locate the timeline at the desired time for example by clicking on the Time Ruler and all devices compatible with Positrack will be set at the correct state This feature is especially useful for long shows where it wouldn t be practical to SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 101 102 restart the show from the beginning just to check something at the end of it 100 0 ON OFF 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 In the above illustration Positrack is engaged following a return to time T enabling the lighting to be reset to 30 and the video player to be repositioned at 0 5 second from the start of its sequence Medialon Control System recalculates the states at a given time but the speed at which the return to these states is made depends on the type of machine being controlled This Positrack mechanism enables you to reduce programming time of a sequence of events when it is necessary to run this sequence several times to adjust each event here the position of the object whilst enabling you to restart the sequence at any time position Positrack can be enabled or disabled for the whole timeline with the Positrack button located on the task
406. ster Firmware 2 0 1 4 Beta mrtx2 Firmware version 2 0 1 4 Beta Custom Version Prefix Custom Revision 1 ele Upd MxM TimeCode MXMs MRCs to update File Name Version Type Status mxmDoremiLabsV 1YmxmDoremil absV 1 mxm amp 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mamDVSBlade nxmDVSBlade mxam6 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmEktacomsStreamcoder ynxmEktacomStreamcoder mxm amp 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmExtron 100lmxmExtron 100 mxm6 amp 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmExtron 400 mxmExtron 400 mxm6 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmGrassValleyEncoremxmGrassValleyEncore mxm6 5 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmGrassValleyK2mxmGrassValleyK2 mxm6 6 0 2 MXM Genuine mxm arassValleyTurbomxmGrassValleyTurbo mxm amp 6 0 2 MXM Genuine mxmlridasFrameCycder mxmlIridasFrameC ycer mxm amp 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmLeunigEPower5SwitchimxmLeunigEPowerSwitch mxm 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmbLouthVDCPmxmLouthVDCP mxm amp 5 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmhMedialonAppLauncher ymxmMedialonAppLauncher mxm amp 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmMedialonAudioserver mxmMedialonAudioServer mxm6 6 0 3 MXM Genuine o 5 Fk im m MRTX Destination Folder C ProgramData Medialon showmaster 2 3 Select the firmware you want to update X5 Add Update a N Firmware to update MRTX file C C ProgramData Medialon Showmaster2 Showmaster Firmware 2 0 1 4 Beta mrtx2 Firmware version 2 0 1 4 Beta Custom Version Prefix AN Custom Revision 1 BeA Upd MxM Timecode Use the Browse button to select the firmware file firmw
407. ster Programming 353 Recovery 353 Run 353 Test Mode 428 Move Graphical Object 129 265 MRC 295 335 443 445 Help 269 See also Resources MXM 38 Help 85 268 Information 81 Low Level Communicator 40 459 Upgrade 312 Network 209 Configuration Showmaster 327 Device Commands 214 Network Detection 213 Variables 217 Manager On Network Login 213 229 Manager Panel 219 Project Setup 229 Network Detection 229 Server IP Port 229 User Group Selection 212 Shared 206 Network Detection Setup 229 New Cue 90 172 Device 79 211 265 Graphical Object 130 Project 261 Resources 296 336 StepBased Task 171 Task 111 177 266 Task Editor 266 TimeBased Task Track 89 User Group 203 UserScreen 119 125 265 Variable 148 266 WebPanel 119 Notes TimeBased 90 O Object Browser 65 Commands Get Object List 192 484 INDEX Control Panel 265 Delete 264 Device 265 Duplicate 264 Editor 264 Group 263 Lister 66 Menu 264 Properties 66 Setup 264 Tasks 266 UserScreen 265 Variables 266 Wizards 275 Objects Command 190 Enum Control 191 Get Object List 192 On Expression Case 186 Open Project 261 UserScreen 128 179 OpenCap See also Manager On Network Opto22 SNAP Resources I O Port 449 P Page Background Page 127 Goto First 265 Goto Last 265 Goto Next 265 Goto Page 179 Goto Previous 265 Properties 127 UserScreen 127 Panel Kiosk 122 Layout 118 Local Panel Virtual Screen 117 Panels tab 125
408. t Connection Connection Connection Connection Connect ion Connection Connection Connect Lon Connection Connection 232 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING IA ESO E ID 3 Mame Adlink PCI 7432 B ID 4 Mame Adtec MPEG Player 1ID 5 Mame Analog Way i Ser ID 6 Name Barco DLP UP MELLE MName BSS Soundweb Lond CID 8 Mame Dataton Smart pax ID 9 Mame Dataton Watchout ID 10 Mame Digital Projecti ID 11 MName Doremi Labs Wi H Preferences Trace options Enable Manager Cue traces This option allows you to enable or disable the tracing of all cues played by Manager If the program is large and has lots of cues the file will quickly become very large It is therefore preferable to use the Trace into Console option when tracing cue activity Enable MxM Traces Enables the tracing of the MxMs activity within the active session This function can be useful to trace Network or serial connection problems to external devices Enable Runtime Information Traces Every Should you wish to trace Manager s System information at regular intervals you can do so by activating this option and determining the interval in seconds when the information will be logged Configuring MxM Traces MxMs can trace logs into the same file or console as Medialon Manager But MxMs can also trace logs into their own files even if Log Traces are not enabled in Manager V6 s Preferences Settings for log traces of MXMs are
409. t from a touch screen Digital I Os or data coming from controlled devices Variables can be used throughout to perform complex logical programming An open network application Medialon Control System has been network oriented from its original version It not only controls many AV and IT devices over TCP IP but it also communicates with other Medialon systems on the same network The Medialon On Network MON protocol publishes tasks and commands to other Medialon Control products such as Medialon Scheduler for easy development of shared applications MON is also available as an API offering a powerful interoperability tool to communicate with third party software or develop add on modules in C or C Panels and Graphical User s Screen Interface User interface can be displayed on local or remote panels within web browsers Medialon Manager V6 includes the User Screens built into the control software These User Screens can include multiple graphical objects such as buttons sliders video windows LEDs bar graphs pictures and more for building a fully customized control system User Screens can also be served as web pages accessible from web browsers on all kinds of devices connected to the same network Hardware independent Independently from the plug in drivers Medialon Control System uses resources to physically connect to the controlled devices These resources can be local resources from PCI Cards installed in a computer ru
410. t languages To view or change the languages and methods you can use to enter text click Details Details Supplemental language support Most languages are installed by default To install additional languages select the appropriate check bos below Install files for complex script and right to left languages including Thai Install files for E ast Asian languages ANNEXES 473 474 4 Under Text services and input languages click Details The Text Services and Input Languages dialog box appears Text Services and Input Languages D efault input language Select one of the installed input languages to use when vau start your computer English United States US v Installed services Select the services that pon want hor each input language shown in the list Use the Add and Remove buttons to modify this list Chinese PRC Keyboard Chinese Simplified US Keyboard English United States Keyboard Ada US French France lil Properties Preferences Language Bar Key Settings 5 If the language that you want to type in is not listed under Installed Services or if the language that you want is listed but the keyboard is not listed under it click Add Text Services and Input Languages Settings Advanced Add Input language Input language Chinese Hong Kang 5 4 F Chinese Macau 5 5 HR Chinese PRC Chinese Singapore Chi
411. t of Medialon Control System is the Variables which allows all the different elements to share their information in the system m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m gt Medialon Control System Task Engine MxMs Resource device dedice Resource JA TimeBased Tasks Commands External otepBased Tasks Variables UserScreens Task Device Control Control Panels Panels Medialon Control System software components plus MxMs and MRC are parts of the Showmaster V2 Firmware When you work on a project it is strongly recommended to use the same firmware version on the Showmaster and in Showmaster Editor V2 Medialon Control System Modes Stop Mode M Debug Mode 2j The first time you launch Medialon Control System V6 you will be in Stop Mode In this mode Medialon Control System V6 doesn t communicate with any external equipment nor does it perform any internal tasks Stop Mode is the default programming mode where your project will be conceived Devices Tasks UserScreens and Variables can be created modified and deleted freely Pressing the Esc key or clicking on the Stop Project button will return you to this mode In Debug Mode Medialon Control System V6 fully interacts with external INTRODUCTION 45 devices Programming windows such as the Object Browser Properties and Task Editors are still access
412. t to test a new adjustment The Task Control Panel acts as a real control panel for each Timeline It can be enlarged and sent to another monitor for the lighting designer for example The task monitor window provides start pause and stop buttons the current Timecode of the timeline a display for comment and countdown cues comment cues are user defined cues in the timeline to add comments to programming countdown cues give a comment as a countdown to the next action in the show Timelines can be viewed as a list providing access to Flash Controls This functionality allows users to move up and down in the show While the show is running the user can fire cues in advance or disable upcoming cues This gives extreme flexibility in live event shows where things sometimes do not happen as expected INTRODUCTI ON Overview of Medialon Control System Several timelines can run simultaneously a timeline can control another one or be synchronized to another one or run independently and all of the timelines can be synced to external timecode StepBased Tasks and Variables StepBased tasks perform cues just like the timelines but in a step by step manner without any time reference StepBased tasks can also perform logical operator cues such as If Then Else While End While and Wait For Variables returned by devices as well as user defined variables can be used in StepBased Tasks Variables inspectors show the status of
413. ted M User Groupe nfrared Ports y Serial Po Right Click F css MIDI Pon F OMe Ports m Save as Default Resource Configuration 43 TimeCode Ports UT FA 0 Ports Collapse All Infrared Forts This Default Resource Configuration will be recalled each time you start Medialon Control System V6 HJ Note Virtual resources are not connected to any physical hardware but they act as real resources for your Medialon Manager V6 project 304 MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources MRC Help Medialon Manager gives access to a Help file for each MRC Select the resource in the Lister tab use the right click menu to open the MRC Help Each MRC is provided with a complete Help file MEDIALGN MRC List Alphabetical MRC List Reso Medialon MRCs Help Name Advantech ADAM Version 1 5 0 Available for Manager V5 all versions Showmaster Pro iPro Limitation In s Device Brand Advantech Resources types I O gt Overview gt Installation gt Setup Resource gt Support Overview Advantech ADAM 6000 Ethernet based data acquisition and control module provides I O data acquisition and networking in one module to build distributed monitoring and control solutions for a wide variety of applications Through standard Ethernet networking ADAM 6000 retrieves I O values from sensors and publishes these real time I O values Advantech provides free download Manual and Utility software for AD
414. tem based on the internal computer or Showmaster V2 clock If the timeline is running the reference time increases If the timeline is paused the reference time is frozen etc This is the default mode of the timeline External Timecode You can slave the timeline to any Time variable available in the current project The Timecode pull down menu displays all timecode sources available Several settings on the Task Setup dialog box define the behavior of the timeline regarding timecode drop out or jumps Recording Cues The device record function of Medialon Control System V6 allows you to record information from certain devices directly onto a timeline The following MxMs are compatible with Device Recording e MxM Medialon Basic MIDI In Out e MxM Medialon MIDI Show Control e MxM Medialon Low Level Communicator e MxM Medialon DMX512 e MxM Medialon Variable Management The Device Recording process is activated using the setup button in the task s toolbar if the selected device includes this feature 7 Setup Task Recorder Medialon_DMx5iz2_2 Timeline Time m Device Record E lis h ontrol Tools Ti SHOW PROGRAMMI NG 103 As Note that if the device does not support cue recording capability the Device Record button is not accessible Cues are recorded by the device and inserted in the task at the end of the recordin
415. ter 91A118 192 168 144 165 nsmrt l Found Showmaster Bi 696 192 168 144 181 Shoumaster memrt Found Showmaster 9127680 192 168 144 163 Showmaster memrt gt connect Showmaster 211747 medialon nzmrt Connecting Showmaster 5Shoumaster ZT1747 nml sunaster Showmaster 4I1747 connected ns met This toolset allows the user to Delete the Current Project and Log Files Make configuration changes Test connected resources Reset to the default factory configuration 354 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster XS Description Showmaster XS Description Contents of the Package The Medialon Showmaster XS Package includes e Medialon Showmaster XS e Power adaptor Getting Started Medialon Showmaster XS is designed as a stand alone Controller Showmaster XS doesn t need a keyboard mouse or screen to work The rear power switch must be set to On at all times Connect the power supply and press and hold the front key to start Showmaster Front Panel Controls Key Functions A key e Holding this key during Startup will start the Showmaster in Recovery Mode See Recovery Mode on page 421 B key e Hold this key for more than 5 seconds to close all Showmaster client connections to Editor or Manager Showmaster returns to Running mode As The B key does not close client connections when Showmaster is in Recovery mode Power key e Press this key to power on Showmaster
416. th Recovery lights red Tools No DMX signal Check that the DMX cable is plugged in Check DMX sending with Showmaster Editor V2 Check DMX sending with Recovery Tools No MIDI signal Check that the MIDI cable is plugged in for Showmaster V2 ST Check MIDI sending receiving with Showmaster Editor V2 Check MIDI sending receiving with Recovery Tools No Serial Check that the Serial cable is plugged in communication Check the Serial pinout of the connected device Check Serial sending receiving with Showmaster Editor V2 Check Serial sending receiving with Recovery Tools Digital Relay Output Check that the Relay cable is plugged in not switching Check Relay commands with Showmaster Editor V2 Check Relay commands with Recovery Tools SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 439 No Digital Input Check that the Input cable is plugged in contact detected Check Input receiving with Showmaster Editor V2 Check Input receiving with Recovery Tools No Network Check that the network cable is plugged in connection Check the activity LED on network socket Check the Showmaster s IP configuration Front panel displays Contact your dealer this Showmaster may License need to return to the factory Front panel displays The project has caused a runtime error Run Fault Check the project with Showmaster Editor V2 Delete the current project with Recovery Tools Showmaster is not Manually reboot the Showmaster responding
417. th frequencies of 40 Hz to 10 kHz Standard 12 24 volt AC control transformer outputs can be accepted as well External resistors connected in series may be used to extend the input voltage range however this will raise the input threshold range Isolated Inputs are connected to Showmaster V2 via a SubD 37 pin Male connector Input X A N SHOWMASTER Input X B O Push Button 1A 2A 3A 14A 15A 16A 1 2 3 14 15 16 17 18 19 Qo esseosoooooococcoca 050000000000000000 20 21 22 33 34 35 36 37 1B 2B 3B 14B 15B 16B Isolated Input 10A Isolated Input 10B Isolated Input 11A Isolated Input 11B Isolated Input 13A Isolated Input 13B Isolated Input 14A Isolated Input 14B Isolated Input 15A Isolated Input 15B Isolated Input 16A Isolated Input 16B No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster Pro Description Relay Output Connector Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro s relay outputs are comprised of sixteen SPST electromechanical relays All relays are de energized at power on Relay outputs are connected to Showmaster V2 via a SubD 37 pin Female connector The wiring may be directly from signal sources or through our optional Breakout Box wiring terminal SWM BO Pin assignments follow Relay X NO boa SHOWMASTER Indicator Relay X Common COMMON R16R15 R2 R1 1918 17 16 15 P 1 o oseesococcoocococooc i nonouononnunnununnuuzouzon
418. the Lister The status of each task is displayed by a LED Dark Blue Stopped Yellow Paused Light Blue Running Flash controls are available in the Lister tab to start or stop tasks Task Properties Expand the Tasks node in the Browser tab to see all tasks Select a task in the Browser or in the Lister its properties are displayed in the Object Properties tab Object Type Task Mame Task_1 User Made Rights Edit Comment Condition e Name You can rename the task Don t forget to validate your changes with the Enter key e Description Description of this task e User Mode Rights Defines if this task is visible or editable in User Mode e Comment You can add a comment about this task e Condition Condition to automatically start the task AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMING y description El StepBased Tasks Task Variables Select a task and expand it in the Browser tab to display the list of variables or the tracks in the case of a TimeBased task in the Lister tab ES E Project User anual Type FK Devices 4 x Tas Kod Status top ped u ew Tasks 3 E Task Z Acte Enabled 1 mr TN E Task_2 EA Variables Task_3 Task z Message Task Management Once you have created your task you may access the task management menu by right clicking on the desired task in the Browser tab or in the Lister tab The contextual menu appears giving you access to the management optio
419. the device a setup dialog box appears The first step of driver creation is to select the type of communication Type Five types of communication are available eSerial Port eTCP IP client eTCP IP server eUDP IP eMIDI Port Select and set up the required communication type and resource Only one Type needs to be configured The selected Type tab determines the communication Low Level Communicator Setu e Command driver file Load Cave Cave as Ma driver loaded Frames COM Part S elect Low Level Communicator Setup BaudHate Stop bis REE Parity E Command driver File Etts E None y Load Save Save as Mo diver loaded Answers Monitoring amp utamation Test TCP IP server IBI eal MIDI port DSA Flow Control CTS Flow Control Auto reconnection Optimize small packets gl ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 241 Frame The second step is to define the format for sent and received frames Low Level Communicator Setu mmm Command driver file Load Save Save az Mo driver loaded E hecksum Commands E Output frame Input frame O elay Between Frames mz 1 000 Count af bytes Timeout mis checksum included NM 250 Checksum character Q Convert only the non literal bytes to the hexadecimal format Y Convert all the bytes received to the hexadecimal format Keep original values Decimal character Hexadecimal character Characters replacement
420. the index of the field is returned If there are no matches GetFieldOfEnum returns 1 Input e ENUMVAR enum variable e STRING string string variable Output INDEX Integer corresponding to the index of the ENUMVAR containing STRING Enum index is zero based the first enum value is O As Special case If several fields of ENUMVAR contain STRING GetFieldOfEnum returns the last field Example MyEnum Medialon Manager v1 eGetFieldOfEnum MyEnum Manager 1 eGetFieldOfEnum MyEnum manager 1 eGetFieldOfEnum MyEnum test 1 e Random MAXNUMBER Description Returns a Random integer value between O and current Value of Selected Variable the process is only available on Integers Reals units only and Enums Input MAXNUMBER number integer variable real variable rounded Output Integer value Example Random 123456 5637 e Random MAXUNIT MAXDECIMAL Description Returns a Random real value between O and current Value of Selected Variables the process is only available on Integers Reals units only and Enums Input e MAXUNIT number integer variable real variable rounded The part before decimal digit is between O and MAXUNIT 1 e MAXDECIMAL number integer variable real variable rounded The part after decimal digit is between O and MAXDECIMAL 1 Output Real value Example e Random 123456 34 5637 8 e Random 1 1000 0 387 e Sqrt NUMBERVAR Description R
421. the left margin means the text describes a feature that is only available in Showmaster V2 ST Pro This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature that is only available in Showmaster V2 Pro Pro This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature that is only available in Showmaster V2 iPro LE This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature that is only available in Showmaster V2 LE XS This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature that is only available in Showmaster V2 XS b This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature that is only available in Showmaster Editor V2 MEW This icon on the left margin means the text describes a new feature available in Medialon Showmaster V2 As This icon indicates notes or special attention E This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature only available in Local Panel EJ This icon on the left margin means the text describes a feature only os available in WebPanel INTRODUCTI ON New in Medialon Control System V6 New in Medialon Control System V6 Panel and User Interface With Medialon Control System V6 it is now possible to create remote user interfaces directly in your project UserScreens can be displayed into WebPanels opened in a distant web browser WebPanels are now available for Medialon Showmaster V2 Medialon Control System V6 supports JPG amp PNG imag
422. the selected angle angle units in radians Input ANGLEVAR Real variable Values must be between PI 2 1 570796 and PI 2 1 570796 limits excluded Output Real value Example e Tan 1 1 55741 e Tan 0 12 0 12058 e Atan REALVAR Description Returns the arc tangent of selected Real result in radians Input REALVAR Real variable Values must be between PI 2 1 570796 and PI 2 1 570796 limits excluded AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 167 Output Real value Example e Atan 1 0 78540 e Atan 0 14112 0 14019 e Ln NUMBERVAR Description Returns the Napierian natural logarithm of the selected number Input NUMBERVAR number Integer variable Real variable Value must be greater than zero Output Real value Example e Ln 1 0 0 e Ln 123 456 4 81588 e Log NUMBERVAR Description Returns the logarithm base 10 of the selected number Input NUMBERVAR number Integer variable Real variable Value must be greater than zero Output Real value Example e Log 1 0 0 e Log 12 5 1 09691 e Exp NUMBERVAR Description Returns the Exponential function of the selected number Input NUMBERVAR number Integer variable Real variable Output Real value Example e Exp 0 1 0 e Exp 12 34 228661 95206 NEW mM e Char ASCIICODE Description Returns the character of the decimal ASCII code Input ASCIICODE number Integer variable Output String value Example e Char 34 eChar 13 in
423. tings e Stop e Debug e User e Run As Note that the newly loaded project must use the same Shared Group as the original slaved project If not Medialon Control System V6 will not be able to reconnect to the Shared Group and access the variables tasks etc Open UserScreen This command allows the Master to open a UserScreen in the Slave station Parameters UserScreen Name Type String Name of UserScreen to be opened use the wizard to select an available UserScreen Position Type Enum Position mode Available values e Default Uses the default UserScreen position does not use the Left and Top parameters e Absolute UserScreen position is given by Left and Top parameters Left Type Integer Left position of UserScreen Top Type Integer Top position of UserScreen Close UserScreen The opposite of the previous action closes a UserScreen in the Slave station Parameters UserScreen Name Type String Name of UserScreen to be closed use the wizard to select an available UserScreen Goto Page Switch to the desired page of the UserScreen Parameters UserScreen Name Type String Name of UserScreen to switch pages on use the wizard to select an available UserScreen Page Type Integer Page number to go to Start Task Launch a task in the Slave station Parameters Task Name Type String Name of Task to start use the wizard to select an available Task ADVANCED PROG
424. tion to search the contents of certain objects For instance if you wish to find a Cue inside a task you must enable this function as well in the selecting Tasks in the Where menu The engine will search the Content of the Tasks for the desired String Search in containers Searching in containers enables the search to take place in the objects listed in the where menu For instance if you are searching for a Task you must enable this option to scan the Task Names 74 PROGRAMMING ENVI RONMENT The Finder The Results Section All results of the search query are displayed in the Results list String uH POOE Where Options fd Devices j Cue Library Use Regular Expression fd Search in contents tl Tasks Iv User Groups mi Whale ward only Gl Search in containers fa UserScreens fa Resources Case sensitive M User Variables Tem Labs V1 Nugget Remair ii diia pales nts Ue Variable s Diaremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 InTime A o Dorerm_Labs 1_Mugget_1 0utT ime bk Show cdm set Start TimeLode Create shortcut s in a new group e Task_1 Timecode Project Ujeti asks 1 d3R_1 Yalla Y alabie Task_1 TimeCodeStatus Project Objects Tasks Task 1 Vara Variable a Manager Current Time Project User Groups All Variables Varable a Doremi_Labs v1 Mugget T TimeCade Project User Groupe All Variables Variable 83 Doremi Labs V1 Mugget 1 StartTimeC Project User Groups All Variables Variable Leen lebe Wb heme d cue Ee
425. to plugged before Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro starts in order to start the Log engine See Showmaster iPro Log Traces on page 406 Showmaster Editor V2 provides a way for you to read these logs 1 Connect Showmaster Editor to a Showmaster 2 Select Manage Logs from the Showmaster menu File Edit Object Win Disconnect I Project Configuration Devic Send Project es Retrieve Project User Cue L Manage Logs IT A Update Firmware Rezo Reboot Connect Shutdown Type Ctrl to change them all Sources Ctrl to change them all Normal mShowMasterCore Info El ManagerRT Fr To Date Notify ShowMaster DMX Comment Alarm ES Time Source Type 2009 01 21 11 42 39 375 mShowMasterCore Normal Starting Up From Date 2009 01 2 2009 01 2009 01 2 2009 01 2 2009 01 2 2009 01 2 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 2009 01 21 2009 01 21 2009 01 21 h3 h3 h3 PD h3 h2 Nm N N N NNN NNN ei pi pi pt j p ioj i ii oj oj oj j j j j j j j i N N 11 42 41 375 11 42 41 375 11 42 41 453 11 42 41 453 11 42 41 453 11 42 41 781 11 42 41 781 11 42 41 812 11 42 42 359 11 42 42 359 11 42 42 359 11 42 42 421 11 42 42 468 11 42 42 531 11 42 42 609 11 42 42 656 11 42 42 843 11 42 42 984 11 42 42 984 11 42 44 296 11 42 44
426. ton 4 Status 2 Button 5 Status 1 Button 5 StatusZ Once the task is started by one of those buttons the goal is to know which button has started the task The expression Selection Button 1 Status 1 1 Button 2 Status 1 2 Button 3 Status 1 3 Button 4 Status 1 4 Button 5 Status 1 5 Selection is set to a value from 1 to 5 depending on which button started the task Only one button can start the task at a time so when a button status has the value 1 all other button statuses have the value 0 This expression can be evaluated as follow Selection 1 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 1 when Button 1 is down Selection 0 1 1 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 2 when Button 2 is down Selection 0 1 0 2 1 3 0 4 0 5 3 when Button 3 is down Selection 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 0 5 4 when Button 4 is down Selection 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 1 5 5 when Button 5 is down E Creating a Showmaster V2 File Path With Medialon Showmaster all files associated to a project must be located in the Project UserData folder See more about Associated Files on page 332 Each time you need to build a file path use SCURRENTPR _USERDATA as the default root This root value is translated by Medialon Showmaster to build the complete path according to the current location of the project Example MyPathName CURRENTPRJ USERDATA DMX_memory e CURRENTPRI_USERDATA is equal to C My
427. toolbar Stop Task Behavior If a task is in pause and Positrack active when you stop the task devices could have different behavior Choice of this behavior can be made in the Medialon Control System Preferences See Preferences on page 223 Default Behavior When you stop a task in pause all devices used in this task stay in their current status defined by the Positrack A player will stay in pause DMX channels keep transition levels etc Legacy Behavior This behavior is the one used by Medialon Control System before Medialon Manager V5 1 0 or Showmaster Editor V2 V1 5 0 When you stop a task that is Paused all devices used in this task are released of their pause status All devices resume the last command sent before the task was paused Players restart playback DMX Cues finish their fade etc SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Timebased Tasks Timecode FEED TimeBased Tasks use timecode as clock reference to execute cues The clock reference may be either internal or external The choice is made via a popup menu at the top of the Task Editor D DMEXB12 1 HestareTimecade 2 Dorem Labs V1 Nugget 2 TimeCode Doremi Labs vw Nugget 2 StartT imeCode Doremi Labs v Nugget 2 HemaininaTime Doren Labs YI Mugaet 2 InTime Doremi Labs v1 Mugget 2 Outline Task 1 Timecode Task_1 Duration Internal Timecode When using internal timecode the reference time of the timeline is controlled by Medialon Control Sys
428. tput Connector Showmaster s has four relays Relay outputs are connected to Showmaster LE via 4 terminal block connectors Relay X A SHOWMASTER Indicator Relay X B MI DI Connection Medialon Showmaster LE is provided with MIDI Input and Output port 4 y ae ree 1 3 364 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster LE Description DMX Connection Medialon Showmaster LE is provided with a DMX 512 output DMX OUT Ground Pins N Serial Connection Medialon Showmaster LE is provided with 2 serial ports l 2 RxD 3 TxD 4 5 GND 6 5 Ay Showmaster LE is configured with DTE serial ports Use a crossover null modem cable when you want to connect to a computer SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 365 Technical Specifications Network Connection Number 2 Connector RJ45 female Interface 10 100Mbps 100Base T Protocol TCP IP Addressing Static IP or DHCP USB Connections Number 2 Connector USB slave socket Interface USB2 Serial Interfaces Number 2 Connector 9 pin D type Male Format RS 232 Digital Interfaces e Isolated Inputs Number 4 Type Contact closure Connector terminal block e Relay Outputs Number 4 Relays Contact Type Max Switching Voltage 24 VDC Max Switching Current 1 A Connector terminal block DMX I nterface Number 1 DMX512 Output Connector XLR 5 pin type Female MI DI Interface 1 MIDI Output 1 MIDI Input Connector MIDI DIN 5 pin type Male P
429. ts e Showmaster management tools like Showmaster browser and download upload capabilities e Medialon Showmaster can accept connections with Medialon Manager Pro or Panel and Medialon Scheduler as well as Showmaster V2 e WebPanels can be created with Showmaster Editor V2 SHOWMASTER EDITOR SPECIFIC FEATURES 317 Medialon Showmaster Modes Medialon Showmaster switches between different modes to run program and maintain it Running or Normal Mode This is the default mode of Medialon Showmaster At startup Showmaster uses its locally connected resources and runs the show Device Device Device ME a e Device Commands are executed when the Timeline or StepBased Tasks run e The Devices send command orders using a Medialon plug ins MxM through the appropriate resources MRC to connected machines Programming Mode When Showmaster is connected to a Showmaster Editor V2 the show runs in Showmaster Editor V2 for easy editing and programming Showmaster Editor Device al Showmaster Editor V2 uses Showmaster s local resources to communicate with the devices When Showmaster Editor V2 is in Debug Mode all TCP IP and UDP IP communication with devices is handled by Showmaster Editor V2 not the Showmaster V2 hardware 318 SHOWMASTER EDI TOR SPECIFIC FEATURES Overview of Showmaster Editor Manually Redirecting Ports for IP devices in Debug Mode Any d
430. u0nnu u3nun 37 36 35 34 21 20 R16R15 R2 R1 VOLT No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Ay When using Breakout boxes SWM BO the maximum electrical specifications are 150ma 12VDC per relay with a maximum of 2A for the whole 16 relays SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 387 MI DI Connection Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro is provided with a MIDI input port and a MIDI output It uses standard MIDI pinouts 2 4 J 1 3 DMX Connection Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro is provided with 2 DMX 512 ports that can be used for input or output software configurable in the Resource Setup Timecode Connection Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro is provided with 1 Timecode balanced input port and 1 Timecode balanced output port Cable Shield Serial Connection Medialon Showmaster V2 Pro is provided with 8 serial ports 1 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD DED DSR pa 4 DTR RTS 7 RxD lj CTS 8 piles BND 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 388 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE Showmaster Pro Description As Showmaster is configured with DTE serial ports Use a crossover null modem cable when you want to connect to a computer for instance to use Medialon Showmaster Recovery Tools Technical Specifications Network Connection Number 2 Connector RJ45 female Interface 10 100Mbps 100BaseT Protocol TCP IP Addressing Static IP or DHCP USB Connections Number 2 Connector USB slave socket Inte
431. ue Load Clip Load Next Clip commands and then let the MxM play the clip playlist seamlessly This MxM offers commands for all Odetics RS 422 compatible devices Connection is made via a standard Sony 9 pin RS 422 cable MxM Pioneer DVD V7X00 8000 series The Pioneer DVD V7X00 8000 Series MxM gives full control of Pioneer DVD player devices It provides the common DVD command set and additional commands to manage disc architecture Track Title Chapter the disc door audio video outputs and control of sub titles audio channels Language and aspect ratio of video geometric size MxM Sony RS 422 The Sony RS 422 protocol is one of the most popular VTR control protocols You can find the protocol on most Sony Betacam and DV video recorders and on some other manufacturers devices This MxM offers commands for all Sony RS 422 compatible devices Connection is made via a standard Sony 9 pin RS 422 cable MxM Visual Circuit Servers A POP or DVP Visual Circuits server consists on an NT based PC equipped with up to 5 Mpeg2 decoding cards and 1 2 or 3 hard drives Each card consists of 4 independent Mpeg2 streams thus up to 20 different streams can be played at the same time from one server PC Streams can be synchronized this is very important for video wall applications that need to play several files with different content at the same time For huge synchronized stream applications several Visual Circuits POP amp DVP servers can be
432. ugget 2 LurentErar Ha Error T v Mugget 2 StartTimelode D00 00 00 00 W Nugget 2 Remaining ine O0 00 00 00 M Mugget_ 2 c gite E T d Click and Drag V Nuc 2 2 Previous Tip U WY E 2 del 2 NestClip U T s Doremi Labs V1 f aget_2 Lurrent lip ami Dorer_Labz_ 2 ClipList MW _Nugget_z ClpCount WO Mugget VW Mugget 2 PendingClipl ist VW Nugget 2 PendinaClipEou 0 Clicking the User Group in the Browser tab displays a filtered Object Lister inm Project BF Devices 5 p m Tasks 3 E UserScreens 1 ES UserScreer_1 Mp User Variables 1 Es Cue Library 4 B User Groups Mr All Variables E ak or Jus T O lr Group_of_Tasks M Group nf UserScreens Resources BI Doremi_ Labs Doremi_Labz Doremi Labs Manager CurrentS tatus Manager CurrentT ime Task_1 Timec 491 Mugget 1 TimeCade 00 00 00 00 25 fps V1 Nugget 1 LurrentStatus Ho Disk 0 VL Nugget 1 CurrentCliph ame VI Nugget 1 CurrentClip O Stop II 17 05 27 83 100 fps ode 00 00 00 00 100 fps Task l Message Task 1 Status Sto p ped O Button 7 Status ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 205 Another example with tasks Browser EI Project BF Devices 5 2 Task 1 ZEE Task 2 ES Tas k 3 ME O yr User Variables 1 Cue Library 4 User Groups F Al Varables me Group_ot_Varables gy BP Resources Adding New Objects From a User Group you can create new objects in your p
433. ult and it is strongly recommended not to use this option except for specific purposes Don t ask to switch to Run Debug Mode when there is Pause Points Enables or disables the confirmation prompt when switching to Run mode when Pause Points are present in the project This option makes sense only if the Use Pause Points in Run Mode option is checked and it s strongly recommended to enable this option in this case Task priority Determines the priority of execution of all of the StepBased tasks in relation to the other Medialon Control System V6 modules and any other applications Execution priority stands for the extent to which the choice of precision for StepBased tasks is to be respected The higher the priority the more the selected precision will be respected For most purposes leave this set to Normal Task accuracy Determines the execution precision of the entire Medialon Control System V6 StepBased Tasks engine The precision has an effect on the rapidity of execution of the commands present in the tasks The higher the precision the more precisely and quickly the tasks will be executed But increasing the precision also increases the load on the machine s processor so it must be adjusted according to the overall use of the processor by other applications For most purposes leave this set to Normal As Note TimeBased tasks are not affected by these parameters since they are based on a very precise time reference that is indepen
434. un Tank ENT GREEN pora tes ce ES Tots mM er User Vanable Ol es Syne Tank a Cue Library 0 I EE TA 2 3 Use Groups em D D Rex Goto Label Goo me 9 Geolre O ICAA nd O wala Q Ord nein eve Q Device Corti 0 Qui Shermans O Experson UN Jos Js Js o Ls v v EEEE Staut Not Connected A a oo To Eoo od oca The new theme will be used after Showmaster Editor or Manager V6 has restarted 224 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Project Preferences Defines Medialon Control System V6 s current project information General Project Task Hun Time Network UserScreen Watchdog Log Traces Tle Mu First Project Author Medialon Subject Medialon Control System Task User defined loading splash bitmap boutonbmpl12x31 bmp Motes Enter here estra informations for support and programmers Title This is an information field for the title of the project The Title is displayed in the default Medialon Manager loading splash window and in the Import templates menu The Title is displayed by the Medialon Showmaster s front panel LCD and also during the project transfer sending and retrieving If not specifically set the Title field takes the project s name and is updated after a Save as Author This is an information field for the project Subject This is an information field for the project User defined loading splash b
435. up Jers Lee Frol Front Panel Controls Use the keypad to scroll through Showmaster s status information 3 Showmesster BessAel Mode FAunnina Wers 1 8 8 Pro i Show 1 SHOWMASTER HARDWARE 381 Keypad Functions Ok key D e Hold this key for more than 1 second to power on Showmaster V2 e Hold this key for more than 4 seconds while the Showmaster is powered on to reset MCS Cancel key e Hold this key for more than 4 seconds to power off soft power Medialon Showmaster Up arrow Scrolls display up e Holding this key for more than 1 second scrolls the display to the home position when the button is released e Holding this key during Startup will start the Showmaster in Recovery Mode See Recovery Mode on page 421 Down arrow e Scrolls display down e Hold this key for more than 5 seconds to close all Showmaster V2 client connections to Editor or Manager Showmaster V2 returns to Running mode As This has no effect when Showmaster is in Recovery mode Left arrow e Not in use Right arrow e Not in use LCD Display Messages Each time an arrow button is pressed the next line of information is displayed 1 Name Showmaster s user defined Name 2 Mode Showmaster s current mode eStarting Up Showmaster V2 is starting up from power on until Showmas ter V2 is ready eRunning Showmaster is running and no Showmaster Editors are con nected Medialon Showmaster a
436. urrentl ser creenM ame Userscreen_1 WebPanel 1 UserscreenMouses 464 WebPanel 1 LI serScreenM ouzer 04 WebPanel 1 ConnectedebPanels 1 e Key pressed on the keyboard As Alt key status is only available in LocalPanel e Mouse position and buttons pressed e current UserScreen selected and mouse position in this UserScreen As The above LocalPanel variables were Manager variables in previous version of Medialon Manager e How many WebPanels are connected As Number of simultaneous connection is limited See Panel OpenCap Connection Chart on page 220 The Panels Tab MEV The Panels tab shows the UserScreens inside the virtual screen so you may LINE create your interface while still having complete access to the Browser Listers wf AUTOMATION PROGRAMMING 123 Task Editors and Properties of your project Virtual Screen Toolbar Panel Selector f Current Panel LocalPanel UserScreen Virtual Screen Scrollers Panel selector allows switching between the different panels available in the project The UserScreen is represented by a window inside the Virtual Screen Panels Toolbar The upper part of the Panels Editor contains the UserScreens toolbar LT i BH s TE E i Un Mp 5 Curent Panek WebPanel 1 screens 1 640x480 Graphical Objects Page Selector Layer Control Panel Selector Graphical objects that can be inserted in a UserScreen e UserScreen page selector Graphical objects layer and p
437. utLogFIle 1 E mxmGrassValleyK2 musb la mxmMe LogFileLogtommands 0 al mambrassValleyK2 maxm es mxmMe E mxm arassValleyTurbo cfg i memMe El maimbrassValleyTurbo musb E mxmMe 2 mxm GrassValleyTurbo mxm El mxmhMe y MMInstall Multiple log tal mxmMe s mxmlridasFrameCycler musb Ej mxm le te mxmlridasFrameCycler mxm ta mxmbiMedialonHT I PRemote mxmo mxmiviedialon UPC CTIient mxmo Here are the description of MODSE options you can find in the MxM configuration file ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG 233 234 Section MODSE e Keyname OutputLogFile Description Enables log traces using modsEngine Values eO Disabled e use Manager settings default value e2 Forced as enabled If Manager has not activated traces the MXM will trace into an individual file with a name like mxmName log i e mxmMedialonDMX512 log e Keyname LogFileLogCommands Description Defines if the MXM will trace user commands in addition to alarm or error traces Values e el Disabled default value Enabled ADVANCED PROGRAMMING Advanced Tools Advanced Tools Cue Multiple Devices When you need to send the same command to several devices of same type you can insert one cue for each device all in the same position or you can insert one cue linked to all of the controlled devices Method to insert one Cue for multiple Devices 1 In the Browser click on Devices to display all Devices in the Lister 2 In the Lister select
438. values that were sent DMX Ports are used by MxM Medialon DMX512 Refer to for DMX Resources description TimeCode Ports Medialon Manager can use Timecode Resources in your project MxM Medialon Timecode allows Manager V6 to read or generate Timecode Click on the TimeCode Ports node to display the resources present in your project when Manager V6 started Project Name EF Devices 1 im Tasks 0 rs Panels 1 Mp User Variables 0 Ex Cue Library 0 B User Groups A E Serial Ports css MIDI Ports OM Ports e A l O Ports infrared Parts MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES 301 You may add Timecode ports to your project by right clicking the New Resource menu and choosing which port you wish to add i Resources A Serial Parts css MIDI Ports OMe Ports Right Click Te TimeCode Ports P FA 0 Ports Mew Resource Adrienne TimeCode Infrared Parts Collapse All Refer to for TimeCode Resources description Input Output Ports Medialon Manager V6 can manage Input Output resources such as relays and contact closures analog outputs etc Click on the I O Ports node to display the resources present in your project when Manager V6 started Project EENES PE Devices 1 FA ADAMEDES 1 m asks 0 FA Adlink PCI 7432 Board D OE Panels 1 FA GlobalCachelD1 T er vara bles O Pm FA Cue Library 0 EA HUDAMEDED windows COM 11 Addr2
439. variable statuses Static objects cannot be modified and cannot trigger any action in the system Dynamic Objects There are two different types of dynamic objects those primarily designed to perform actions and those designed to monitor information Advanced functionalities allow you to use these inversely that is monitoring with Action Objects and acting with Monitoring Objects Button Slider Digital Slider List Text Edit Text Display LED Gauge Container AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 129 Static Objects Static Objects are standard drawing objects that allow you to complement your Graphical Interface with information and design e Square Circle Line e Static Text e Bitmap Image As Before you can type in a different language than the one installed you must configure the keyboard to match the language 5ee Regional and Language Options page 473 Creating Graphical Objects Inserting an object 1 Use the UserScreen Toolbar to select the type of object 2 Use the mouse to define the top left hand corner of the object N C3 i E abl MET m E screens 1 1600x870 My UserScreen X 0260 Y 0151 Page 1 3 Hold the left button and drag the pointer to define the size of the object 4 Medialon Manager V6 generates an automatic name for the object This name is based on object type and ID index An object is identified in a project by its name You can change this name in the Object Properties Pr
440. variables and counters or timers e MxM Medialon Event log MxM EventLog is designed to produce messages and event reports It provides functions to store sort export and print event lists by date and time e MxM Medialon IO This MxM controls and monitors Inputs Outputs I Os it gives to Manager V6 Kiosk external triggers to start tasks e MRC Advantech ADAM Advantech ADAM 6000 Ethernet based data acquisition and control modules provide I O data acquisition and networking in one module Manager V6 Kiosk can use one ADAM 6000 module to receives I O values from sensors Medialon Manager V6 Panel Medialon Manager V6 Panel is specifically designed to implement remote control panels typically on touch screen computer This free version of Medialon Manager cannot control external devices but is able to connect and share data with other Medialon Control Systems on the network MANAGER V6 SPECIFIC FEATURES Resources Resources Once all of the required MxMs are set up in Manager V6 you are able to create the devices you want within your program Devices are the machines programs or services that Medialon Manager will control via the MxMs and the hardware interfaces connected to it An MxM can host several devices For example you may create as many Doremi devices as you wish once the MxM Doremi Labs V1 Nugget is activated Resource Management MRC Medialon Manager has always been hardware independent it can use virtually a
441. ve Fast Forward Fast Reverse Be Resources Q Locate Edit Properties Object Type Command Device Doremi Labs Wi _Nugget_2 Command Locate User Mode Rights None e TimeCode Test command 2 Select a Command in this list 3 Enter parameter values if needed in Object Properties 4 Click on the Test command button in Object Properties Arrows indicate the direction of parameters It could be Output Input or Both Input right arrow indicates that the parameter is given to the command used by the command during execution Output left arrow indicates that the parameter is updated by the command after the command is executed Object Type Cue B Name Description Devices Medialon_DMx5i2 2 Command Get output level MINO i 133023 Comment p F rapere Label E T H Object Type Channel number E Mame j al Description I Return value Devices Manager Command List Control a r Comment Label TP List Name list 1 Action Insert Index Count de E CEY F 33333333 Device Help Medialon Control System V6 gives access to a Help file for each Device Select the device in the Browser tab or in the Device Map tab use the right 84 SHOW PROGRAMMI NG Devices click menu to open Device Help ES Project Manual 0001 Mame E Devices 5 D 5 Sto p Play M Manager Right Click 5 E Doremi_Labs V1 Nunaet T E Medialon DMx512 2 A New Devic
442. w version e Deleted removed component Add Update Click on Add button to open a file browser Ok Ouvrir o 35 T T CUC IIII Iud m 3 MxM LDebug mxmMedialonTimeCode5 0 4 1 Beta gt Organiser Nouveau dossier UY Favoris U Help WE Bureau E mxmMedialonTimecode mis6 35 Emplacements r m T l chargement Biblioth ques ES Documents Images a Musique B Vid os E Ordinateur El Disque local C Ea HP TOOLS F 7 Nom du fichier mxmMedialonTimecode mis6 Select the Mxm or MRC you want to add or update Depending how you get this new MxM or MRC you will select e Medialon Module Installer mis6 eModule Package exe eModule Package Archive zip If the Mxm or MRC is already present in the loaded firmware a dialog box will SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE 415 ask you to confirm the update Firmware Update The module rnsmi edialonP Link already exist in this firmware da pon want to everwrite iE E Mo MxM or MRC will appear with a new status Replaced or Added qp imrcShowMasterMIDI mrc amp 6 0 0 MRC Genuine mrcShowMastersSerial mrcshowMasterSerial mrc 6 0 0 MRC Genuine mrcShowmaster Timecode 6 0 2 1 Beta MRC Replaced mxmAdtecMPEGPlayer mnxmAdtecMPEGPlayer mxm 6 0 1 MXM Genuine mxmAlcornMcBrideDVMYmxmAlcornMcBrideDVM mxm6 amp 6 0 1 MXM Genuine Delete Select an element in the loaded firmware and click on Delete button to remove it MXM Genuine MXM Remove MXM
443. window exit Quit the Recovery Tools application mode tcp serial portnumber gt Set the communication mode etcp use network communication eserial portnumber use a serial connection from COM portnumber Example msmrt gt mode serial 1 msmrt Connection mode set to serial As Serial communication connect a RS232 crossover null modem cable between Showmaster s Serial Port 1 and your computer s COM portnumber 424 SHOWMASTER MAI NTENANCE Recovery Tools Scan Scan for available Showmasters on the network Example msmrt scan msmrt Scanning msmrt Found Showmaster ZT1747 192 168 144 223 Showmaster ST msmrt Found Showmaster BO3F1D 192 168 144 242 Showmaster Pro msmrt Found iPro MSA 192 168 144 35 Showmaster iPro scan delay Scan for available Showmasters on the network with a delay expressed in milliseconds Delay is the total time scanning should take place connect Open communication with the Showmaster connected to the COM port connect lt Showmastername gt password Opens a connection to Showmaster named Showmastername on the network The default password is medialon Example msmrt gt connect Showmaster BO38AE medialon msmrt Connecting Showmaster Showmaster B038AE msmrt Showmaster Showmaster BO38AE connected As Note a scan command is needed before using the connect command disconnect Closes the connection with Showmast
444. with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as when the power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped PRECAUTI ONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDI NG Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference A WARNI NG Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock short circuiting damage fire or other hazards or physical injury to you or others or damage to the device or other property These precautions include but are not limited to the following Power supply Power cord e Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device e Use only the specified power cord e Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord place heavy objects on
445. wizard button to get the list of available groups 212 ADVANCED PROGRAMMI NG F Select Group S User Groupe MON Panel F F F MUN Task MON Varnable MON UserScreen Networking Ay Network sharing of objects is different than it was in previous versions of Medialon Manager User Groups Sharing Objects chapter page 206 describes how to select objects to share with Medialon On Network devices Login Password Medialon On Network connections can be protected by login credentials Enter if needed the login and password required by the selected Slave Auto re connection If checked the Medialon On Network Device will automatically attempt to reconnect to the Slaved Target if the connection is lost Deconnection on timeout Specifies the deconnection time if no response is received from the Slaved Target Use Network Detection Enables network detection of Medialon Target host It prevents the Microsoft anti hacker security policy before Medialon Control System V6 initiates its connection with the Slave 5 Once you have finished configuring the device click OK The new device is created and appears in the Browser tab and Device Map tab Device Properties Select Medialon On Network Device in the Browser tab or Device Map tab Its properties are displayed in the Properties tab E Object Type Device A D Manager on Network 1 lal t Description User Mode Rights Mone You can rename the Device Don t for
446. wn byte default is X e Variable Length Character a wildcard character that represents an unknown variable length character string default is After entering the name and the type of the variable enter the frame containing both static bytes and unknown bytes To determinate the position and the length of the bytes that will be monitored by the variable hilight these bytes in the frame before closing the dialog box Multiple unknown bytes are allowed in a frame The hilighted bytes are the ones that will update the variable Monitor variable Name OriverStatus Type Integer Frame Status 22001014 Position Length 3 are hera ascii value Format hea asci value le hiexa ascil value Update Mode Immediate decimal azcii value bcd value low high bytes high low bytes literal string Advanced gt gt Cancel Five types of variables can be specified eInteger eString eTime eDate eEnum Select the input frame format six formats can be used e hexa ascii value the bytes are the ASCII representation of the hexadecimal value of the parameter 9 returns 9 255 returns FF e decimal ascii value the bytes will be the ASCII representation of the decimal value of the parameter 9 returns 9 255 returns 255 e bcd value the bytes will be the ascii representation of the binary coded decimal value of the parameter 9 returns 09 255 returns 02U e low high
447. y TC Generator Record Inserta Comment Shift Alt C Clip Management Step Forward Modify Cue Enter Step Reverse Delete Cue Del Fast Forward Fast Reverse Locate Variable Speed Cue Selection Cue Management Pause Point Selecting Cues It is often necessary to select cues before using cue related commands that is why the Task Editor provides a variety of ways to select cues Selected cues are highlighted in orange or white depending on your selected Theme To select cues e Click on a cue to select it e Press the Ctrl key and click on another cue to add it to the selection e Press the Shift key and click on a cue to add all of the cues between the previously selected cue and this cue e Type Ctrl A to select all of the cues in the task AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG StepBased Tasks e Drag the mouse over the cues you want to select To deselect cues e Click on an empty part of the task editor to deselect all of the cues e Press the Ctrl key and click on a selected cue to remove it from the selection The Cue Selection menus This contextual menu allows more sophisticated types of cue selection Cue Selection d Select All ShiFE CErIH A Cue Management d Deselect All Esc Pause Point d Select From Stark Ctrl 4lt F Device BEL TOENG salda dl Task Execution d Managing Cues Cut Paste and Delete Cut and paste commands are supported with familiar keyboard sho
448. y for the management of an Enum variable for example display update select deselect delete Parameters Enum Name Type String Name of Enum Variable Action Type Enum Control to apply the Enum Available values e Insert Add a new value to the enum e Delete Delete a value from the enum e Get Enum Retrieve the text content of a given value e Set Enum Replace the text content of a given value e Get Count Retrieve the count of values in the enum e Clear Delete all values from the enum e Get Enum List Retrieve the text content of all values e Set Enum List Replace the text content of all values Action is not available with System variables Index Count Type Integer A bidirectional parameter according to the action It is either the Index value on which the action is made or the result from the Get Count action Text Type String A bidirectional parameter according to the action It is either the text you give to the value or the result from the Get Enum action As Note If you want to add a new item to the top of the enum the index parameter must be O If you want to add a new item to the bottom of the list the index parameter must be set to 1 AUTOMATI ON PROGRAMMI NG 191 192 Get Object List Retrieves the list of objects available in your project Parameters Parent Object Name Type String The starting point for establishing the Object List If
449. ypes of equipment Showmaster V2 ST also provides onboard digital I O Its free editing software Showmaster Editor V2 embeds most of the features of the award wining Medialon Manager software such as sync and logical programming as well as real time testing It allows programming of one show at a time and 5 simultaneous Webpanels connections but does not support 3rd party extension interfaces Medialon Show master Pro Showmaster V2 PRO is an all in one embedded Show Controller fitted with all necessary show protocol interfaces It controls and synchronizes dimmers lighting desks video projectors video servers sound processors and many other types of equipment Showmaster V2 PRO also provides onboard digital I O and balanced Timecode input Its free editing software Showmaster Editor V2 embeds most of the features of the award wining Medialon Manager software such as sync and logical programming as well as real time testing It supports multiple timelines 3rd party extension interfaces 10 simultaneous Webpanels connections and signal recording for Serial DMX MIDI and TCP IP Medialon Showmaster iPro Showmaster iPro is a Medialon Control software running in a Siemens mEC PLC in parallel with the regular Siemens real time environment This unique combination of PLC and Show Controller in the same box benefits from advanced two way communication and real time sync between the two environments Its free editing software embeds most of the
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Utilisation Portes Sectionnelles Plafond 9309 apx-winter83catalog - Museum of Computer Adventure Game History English - AutoPunch Software Manual Montage- und Bedienungsanleitung - M LG MJ3281BCG User's Manual BETRIEBSANLEITUNG DVD 1230 R psc amendolara - Provincia di Cosenza Elo Touch Solution 22CM2 Samsung SCH-S380 User Manual Hochdruck-Reinigungs-Syste- me Mobile Hochdruckreiniger Mobile Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file